Operating Manual S4100 6175472502 01 00 Man 3 en

R&S®M3SR Series 4100
Software Defined Radios

Operating Manual
6175.4760.02 - 01
Operating Manual
Radiocommunications Systems
The Operating Manual describes the following radio models and options:
R&S® MR4100E — 6118.9609.xx — SW Rel. 09.0x (x = 0 to 9)

R&S® MR4100X — 6119.7251.xx — SW Rel. 09.0x (x = 0 to 9)
R&S® MR4100G — 6118.9750.xx — SW Rel. 09.0x (x = 0 to 9)
R&S® MR4100G-B — 6119.6255.xx — SW Rel. 09.0x (x = 0 to 9)
xx = see explanation of models
©05/2013 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich, Germany
Phone: +49 89 4129 0
Fax: +49 89 4129 12164
E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com
Printed in Germany — Subject to change — Data without tolerances: order of magnitude only
The R&S logo, Rohde & Schwarz and R&S are registered trademarks of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG and their subsidiaries.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreveations are used througout this manual:
R&S® xxxxx is abbreviated as R&S xxxxx

M3SR Series 4100 Abbreviations
Abbreviations
(P)TRU (primary) time reference unit
A1A Morse telegraphy
A2G automatic link establishment 2nd generation
A3E amplitude modulation
AC alternating current
ACK acknowledge
ACQ acquisition
ACS automatic channel selection
ADDR address
ADV advanced
AGC automatic gain control
AHS advanced hopset
AL-x protection level, x = 0 to 2
ALC automatic level control
ALE automatic link establishment
ALE 2G automatic link establishment 2nd generation
ALE 2G LP automatic link establishment 2nd generation with linking protection
ALE 3G automatic link establishment 3rd generation
AM amplitude modulation
AMBE advanced multi-band excitation
AMD automatic message display
AME single sideband, full carrier
ANT antenna
ARQ automatic repeat request
ASYNC asynchronous
ATU antenna tuning unit
B7D two independent sidebands for external modems
B8E two independent sidebands for voice
BB broadband system
BER bit error rate
BFO beat frequency oscillator
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 i

BIT built-in test
BITE built-in test equipment
Bro broadcast
BW bandwidth
CAL calibration
CBIT continuous built-in test
CCT call channel type
CE EC Certificate of Conformity
CFG configuration
CHAP challenge handshake authentication protocol
chnPs channels per second
CCIR Comité Cosultatif International de Radiocommunication
CLARIF clarifier frequency
CLR clear
Comp. component
COMSEC communication security
ConMode connection mode
CONFIG configuration
CR connect request
CU control unit
CW Morse telegraphy
DC direct current
DDS direct digital synthesizer
DEL delete
dev. device
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung
DISP display
DLM data link mode
DSC digital selective calling
DSP digital signal processing/processor
DTE data terminal equipment
ECCM electronic counter counter measures
EN Europäische Norm
ii Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

ENT enter
ENVIR environment
EOM end of message
EPM electronic protection measures
ESC escape
ESSI enhanced serial synchronous interface
ETH Ethernet
EXL LQA exchange
EXT external
F1D frequency shift keying
F3E frequency modulation
FEC forward error correction
FED-STD Federal Standard
FF fixed frequency
FHS free hopset search
FLM fast link mode
FLSU fast link setup
FM frequency modulation
FREQ frequency
FSK frequency shift keying
FW firmware
Fwd forward
G guard
GB2PP GB2 platform protocol
GMDSS global maritime distress and safety system
GPS global positioning system
GRP group
GUI graphical user interface
H3E single sideband, full carrier
HANG holdtime/hangover
HDL high data rate link protocol
HF high frequency
HFM HF modem
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 iii

HiSp high-speed
Hold holdtime
HW hardware
HWM hardware mainboard
IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
IBIT initiated built-in test
ICMP internet control message protocol
ICNIRP international commission on non-ionizing radiation protection
ID identifier
Ident. identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF intermediate frequency
IGMP internet group management protocol
IHBT inhibit
INDV individual
INT internal
INTL interleaver length
INTLV interleaver length
INTV interval
Instr. instruction
IP internet protocol
IPD IP data
IPoA IP over air
IPv4 internet protocol version 4
IQ inphase/quadrature (modulation)
ISB independent sideband
J2D+ USB for external modems
J2D- LSB for external modems
J3E+ upper sideband
J3E- lower sideband
LAN local access network
LBT listen before transmit
LDL low data rate link protocol
iv Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

LED light-emitting diode
LM link mode
LNG long
LO local oscillator
LOC local
LQA link quality analysis
LSB lower sideband
LSU link setup
LTE late traffic entry
M3SR multiband multimode multirole surface radio
M3TR multiband multimode multirole tactical radio
MB message block
MBE-LPC multiband excitation - linear predictive coding
MC multicast
MD mode
MDL middle
MELP mixed excitation linear prediction
MGC manual gain control
MIL-STD military standard
MMBE modified multi-band excitation
MMI man-machine interface
MON monitoring
MPlan mission planner
Msg message
MSK minimum shift keying
MSS maximum segment size
MST maximum session time
MTC maintenance
MTU maximum transmission unit
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NB noise blanker
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association
no. number
NSYN not synchronized
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 v

OCXO oven controlled oscillator
OD occupancy detection
OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplex
Op operation
OP operational page
OpMode operation mode
OSI open systems interconnection
P to P point-to-point
PA power amplifier
PAP password authentication protocol
PAvg average power factor
PBIT power-on built-in test
PBT passband tuning frequency
PC personal computer
PDU protocol data unit
PEP peak envelope power
PH phase
PMU power management unit
POL polarity
ppm parts per million
PPP point-to-point protocol
Preamp preamplifier
PREV previous
PRF performance
Prod. production
PROT protection
PSK phase shift keying
PtM point-to-multipoint
PtP point-to-point
PTRU primary time reference unit
PTT push to talk
R radio
R:-- not connected to radio
vi Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

R:>< connecting to radio
R:?? check connection
R-Time release time
RAL Reichs-Ausschuß für Lieferbedingungen
RC radio controller
RCB radio control bus
RCD re-connect delay
RDL remote device loader
REBRO rebroadcast
REF reference
REQ request
RF radio frequency
RFC request for commands
RGA radio global address
RIT receiver incremental tuning
RNMS3000 radio network management system
ROB robust
RPT report
RQ request
RSSI received signal strength indication
RTC real-time clock
RTT round-trip-time
Rx receive, receiver
S/N signal-to-noise ratio
S4285 STANAG4285
S4415 STANAG4415
S4529 STANAG4529
S4538 STANAG4538
S4539 STANAG4539
SACK selective acknowledgment
SDM short data message
SECOM-H special EPM procedure for HF/VHF
SECOM-V special EPM procedure for VHF/UHF
SELV safety extra low voltage
SENS sensitivity
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 vii

SHT short
SIL silent
SOD synchronization on data
SP search pattern
SSB single sideband modulation
STANAG NATO Standardization Agreement
STN station
SQL squelch
SW software
SYN synthesizer
SYNC synchronous
TAQ time acquisition
TB time beacon
TCP transmission control Protocol
Thres threshold
TLC transmitter level control
TOS type of service
TRANSEC transmission security
TRU time reference unit
TTL time-to-live
TTY teletypewriter
Tx transmit, transmitter
UDP user datagram protocol
UNPROT unprotect
UUF user unique function
USB upper sideband, universal serial bus
VC voice compressor
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik eV
VFw voice forward
VOC vocoder
VPoD voice priority over IP data
VPoIPD voice priority over IP data
VSWR voltage standing wave ratio
viii Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

WARC World Administrative Radio Conference
WF waveform
Wild wildcard
xDL ARQ protocols, x = H or L
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 ix

M3SR Series 4100 List of Terms
List of Terms
Check In appropriate measurements by means of the specified test equipment, prop-
er functioning of a unit or module is established.
Discolouration Components such as connectors and printed circuit boards are examined if
they have changed colour due to temperature effects and thus differ widely
from their normal condition.
Disconnect Pull off connector.
Examine In case of trouble the unit / module or components such as e.g. connectors,
are to be thoroughly checked for obvious mechanical damage.
Functional check This means that components / modules / units are checked for proper func-
tioning while installed.
Hazardous voltages Voltages > 30 Vrms or 50 Vpp (AC) or 50 V (DC)
Make sure Ascertain whether all mentioned requirements are met or all measures are tak-
en to establish the required condition.
Open Access is to be gained to the unit / module by observing the given instructions
and safety precautions.
Perfect condition This means that a component / module / unit has to be in a state which does
not give cause to complaints.
Replacement In case of trouble the replacement of modules is carried out in order to localize
and eliminate the fault.
Replace Components / modules / units which - due to damage and / or other defects -
no longer meet the respective requirements or components / modules / units
which during troubleshooting were identified as the cause of fault, are to be re-
placed.
Visual examination This is a visual inspection of the outer appearance and completeness of a
component / module / unit without manual interference by the examiner. This
does not include the necessary preparations and finishing work such as open-
ing and closing of covers or similar.
x Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

M3SR Series 4100 Documentation Overview
Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the radio is divided as follows:
• Getting Started
• Operating Manual
• Service Manual (Intermediate Level, on separate order only)
The system delivered has the configuration as confirmed in the order.
Please use the ADOBE® Acrobat Reader® for PDF files.
Getting Started
delivered with the on separate order The Getting Started manual provides the information needed to
radio only set up and start working with the radio. The Getting Started
manual includes general information (e.g. Basic Safety Instruc-
tions) and the following chapters:
• Unpacking, Checking, Packing, Transport and Storage

• Installation
• Connect Procedures
• Rear Cabling
• Front Cabling
• System Cabling
• Switching the Radio On
• Switching the Radio Off
• Basic Configuration of the Radio
• Basic Configuration of the Control Unit
The Getting Started Manual is part of the Operating Manual!
This manual is delivered with the radio in printed form.
xii Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

Operating Manual
delivered with the on separate order In the User Manual, all radio functions are described in detail. It
radio only provides the information needed to maintain organisational level
of repair.
The manual includes the following chapters:
• User Information
• Getting Started
• Operation
• Operation in Special Communication Modes
• Services
• Malfunction
• Maintenance
• Technical Information
• Drawings
This manual is available in PDF format on the CD-ROM deliv-

ered with the radio.
The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde & Schwarz

GmbH & Co. KG.
Service Manual (Intermediate Level, on separate order only)
delivered with the on separate order The Service Manual provides all information the service staff
radio only need to maintain intermediate level of repair.
The manual includes the following chapters:
• Description
• Working Modes and Functions
• Test of Equipment Functions and Troubleshooting
• Replacement of Modules
• System / Equipment Configuration
• Spare Parts
• Drawings
This manual is available in printed form and in PDF format on

the CD-ROM.
The printed manual and / or CD-ROM can be ordered from
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 xiii

xiv Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

M3SR Series 4100
Table of Contents
1 User Information .................................................................................... 1.1
1.1 General Features ........................................................................................................... 1.2
1.2 Explanation of Models .................................................................................................. 1.4
1.3 Required Personnel....................................................................................................... 1.4
1.4 Design............................................................................................................................. 1.5
1.5 Functioning of e.g. Receiver / Exciter ......................................................................... 1.8
1.6 General Data .................................................................................................................. 1.9
1.7 Required Power Supply .............................................................................................. 1.10
1.7.1 Required Power Supply for Receiver ............................................................................ 1.10
1.7.2 Required Power Supply for Receiver / Exciter or PMU ................................................. 1.11
1.7.3 Required Power Supply for Transceiver........................................................................ 1.13
1.8 Communication Capabilities ...................................................................................... 1.14
1.8.1 Voice Communication.................................................................................................... 1.14
1.8.2 Data Communication ..................................................................................................... 1.15
1.9 Radio Control............................................................................................................... 1.16
1.9.1 Radio with Several Control Units................................................................................... 1.18
1.9.2 Several Radios and Control Units in a Network ............................................................ 1.20
2 Getting Started....................................................................................... 2.1

2.1 Unpacking, Checking, Packing, Transport and Storage............................................ 2.1
2.1.1 Unpacking and Checking................................................................................................. 2.1
2.1.2 Packing............................................................................................................................ 2.1
2.1.3 Transport ......................................................................................................................... 2.2
2.1.4 Storage ............................................................................................................................ 2.2
2.2 Installation and Removal .............................................................................................. 2.3
2.3 Rear Cabling .................................................................................................................. 2.6
2.3.1 Rear Cabling for Receiver ............................................................................................... 2.6
2.3.2 Rear Cabling for Receiver / Exciter ................................................................................. 2.8
2.3.3 Rear Cabling for Transceiver......................................................................................... 2.10
2.3.4 Rear Cabling for Power Management Unit.................................................................... 2.12
2.4 Front Cabling ............................................................................................................... 2.15
2.5 System Cabling............................................................................................................ 2.16
2.5.1 System Cabling for Receiver / Exciter ........................................................................... 2.16
2.5.2 System Cabling for Transceiver .................................................................................... 2.19
2.5.3 System Cabling for HF Broadband System................................................................... 2.21
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 1

M3SR Series 4100 Table of Contents
2.6 Switching the Radio On .............................................................................................. 2.23

2.6.1 Automatic Update of Modules ....................................................................................... 2.27
2.7 Switching the Radio Off .............................................................................................. 2.30
2.8 Basic Configuration of the Radio............................................................................... 2.32
2.8.1 Changing Radio IP Settings Using a Built-in Control Unit ............................................. 2.33
2.8.2 Changing Radio IP Settings Using Upd32.exe Tool...................................................... 2.35
2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit.................................................................... 2.40
2.10 Example Configuration ............................................................................................... 2.44
3 Operation................................................................................................ 3.1
3.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 3.1
3.2 Operating Concept ........................................................................................................ 3.5
3.2.1 Radio Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3.6
3.2.2 Control Unit.................................................................................................................... 3.10
3.2.2.1 LEDs.............................................................................................................................. 3.11
3.2.2.2 Graphical User Interface Design ................................................................................... 3.11
3.2.2.3 Menu Page Design ........................................................................................................ 3.11
3.2.2.4 Icons and Symbols ........................................................................................................ 3.13
3.2.2.5 Softkeys......................................................................................................................... 3.16
3.2.2.6 Menu Organization ........................................................................................................ 3.20
3.2.2.7 Menu Tree ..................................................................................................................... 3.25
3.2.2.8 Navigation within the Menu Tree ................................................................................... 3.27
3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit .................................................. 3.29
3.3.1 Home Menu (0001)........................................................................................................ 3.29
3.3.1.1 Connecting to Radio ...................................................................................................... 3.30
3.3.1.2 Disconnecting from Radio ............................................................................................. 3.34
3.3.1.3 Session Types and Access Rights ................................................................................ 3.35
3.3.1.4 Communication Mode Menus........................................................................................ 3.42
3.3.1.5 Preset Page................................................................................................................... 3.44
3.3.1.6 Fill Gun .......................................................................................................................... 3.46
3.3.1.7 Maintenance Menus ...................................................................................................... 3.47
3.4 Radio Maintenance...................................................................................................... 3.48
3.4.1 Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001) ......................................................................................... 3.50
3.4.1.1 Menu Radio Error List (3011) ........................................................................................ 3.55
3.4.1.2 Menu Radio Error Details (3012)................................................................................... 3.57
3.4.1.3 Menu Radio Inventory (3021) ........................................................................................ 3.59
3.4.1.4 Radio Inventory Details (3022) ...................................................................................... 3.62
3.4.2 Menu PMU (3031) ......................................................................................................... 3.64
3.4.3 Menu Split Site 1/2 (3041) ............................................................................................. 3.68
2 Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

3.4.4 Menu Split Site 2/2 (3042) ............................................................................................. 3.71

3.4.5 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002) ......................................................................................... 3.74
3.4.6 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061) ................................................................................................... 3.79
3.4.7 Menu VoIP 2/2 (3062) ................................................................................................... 3.80
3.4.8 Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003) ......................................................................................... 3.82
3.4.9 Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (3004) ......................................................................................... 3.86
3.4.10 Menu Radio MTC 5/7 (3005) ......................................................................................... 3.91
3.4.11 Menu Radio MTC 6/7 (3006) ......................................................................................... 3.94
3.4.12 Menu Radio MTC 7/7 (3006) ......................................................................................... 3.96
3.5 Control Unit Maintenance ........................................................................................... 3.97
3.5.1 Control Unit MTC 1/4 (4001) ......................................................................................... 3.99
3.5.1.1 Control Unit Error List (4011)....................................................................................... 3.103
3.5.1.2 Control Unit Error Details (4012) ................................................................................. 3.105
3.5.1.3 Control Unit Inventory (4021) ...................................................................................... 3.106
3.5.1.4 Control Unit Inventory Details (4022) .......................................................................... 3.108
3.5.1.5 Control Unit Keyboard Test (4031).............................................................................. 3.110
3.5.2 Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002) ....................................................................................... 3.111
3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003) ....................................................................................... 3.114
3.5.4 Control Unit MTC 4/4 (4004) ....................................................................................... 3.120
3.6 User Level .................................................................................................................. 3.122
3.7 Fixed Frequency ........................................................................................................ 3.126
3.7.1 Fixed Frequency Menu Tree ....................................................................................... 3.126
3.7.1.1 Fixed Frequency Home Menu ..................................................................................... 3.127
3.7.2 Fixed Frequency Operational Menus .......................................................................... 3.129
3.7.2.1 Storing Current Settings .............................................................................................. 3.134
3.7.2.2 Recalling Settings........................................................................................................ 3.136
3.7.2.3 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency ...................................................... 3.138
3.7.2.4 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity....................................................................... 3.139
3.7.2.5 Selecting the Squelch Type......................................................................................... 3.140
3.7.2.6 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold................................................................... 3.141
3.7.2.7 Switching the Rx Preamplifier On and Off ................................................................... 3.142
3.7.2.8 Switching the Automatic Gain Control On or Off ......................................................... 3.143
3.7.2.9 Changing the AGC Threshold ..................................................................................... 3.144
3.7.2.10 Changing the MGC Level ............................................................................................ 3.145
3.7.2.11 Changing the Release Time ........................................................................................ 3.146
3.7.2.12 Changing the Receiver Filter Bandwidth ..................................................................... 3.147
3.7.2.13 Changing the Modulation Mode................................................................................... 3.148
3.7.2.14 Changing the Clarifier Frequency................................................................................ 3.149
3.7.2.15 Changing the Frequency ............................................................................................. 3.150
3.7.2.16 Switching the VOX Signal Source ............................................................................... 3.153

3.7.2.17 Switching the Voice Compressor On or Off................................................................. 3.154

3.7.2.18 Selecting the Noise Blanker Type ............................................................................... 3.155
3.7.2.19 Selecting the Notch Filter Speed ................................................................................. 3.156
3.7.2.20 Changing the Passband Tuning Frequency ................................................................ 3.157
3.7.2.21 Selecting the Power Level ........................................................................................... 3.158
3.7.2.22 Starting ATU Tuning .................................................................................................... 3.159
3.7.2.23 Changing the BFO Frequency for A1A........................................................................ 3.160
3.7.2.24 Changing the Delta Frequency.................................................................................... 3.161
3.7.2.25 Selecting the Data Link Mode...................................................................................... 3.162
3.7.2.26 Switching the Multitone Function On or Off ................................................................. 3.163
3.7.2.27 Changing the PEP (Peak Envelope Power) to Average Power Factor ....................... 3.164
3.7.2.28 Selecting the F1D Baud Rate ...................................................................................... 3.165
3.7.2.29 Changing the F1D Transmitter / Receiver Signal Polarity ........................................... 3.166
3.7.2.30 Changing the Frequency Shift for F1D ........................................................................ 3.167
3.7.2.31 TTY RUN/STOP Selection .......................................................................................... 3.168
3.7.3 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus........................................................................ 3.169
3.7.3.1 Starting ATU Learning ................................................................................................. 3.171
3.7.3.2 Switching ATU Silent Tuning On or Off ....................................................................... 3.172
3.7.3.3 Bypassing the ATU...................................................................................................... 3.173
3.7.3.4 Changing the A1A Holdtime ........................................................................................ 3.174
3.7.3.5 Switching Environment Shore or Ship ......................................................................... 3.175
3.7.3.6 Changing the ATU Learning Range ............................................................................ 3.176
3.7.3.7 Changing the Default Release Times.......................................................................... 3.177
3.7.3.8 Changing the Squelch Hangover Time........................................................................ 3.178
3.7.3.9 Changing the Signal Squelch Mode ............................................................................ 3.179
3.7.3.10 Changing the VOX Holdtime ....................................................................................... 3.180
3.7.3.11 Changing the VOX Sensitivity ..................................................................................... 3.181
3.7.3.12 Activating / Deactivating SELCAL ............................................................................... 3.182
3.8 Radio Configuration with Pre-configured Parameters........................................... 3.183
3.8.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................. 3.183
3.8.2 Procedures for Loading the Configuration into the Radio............................................ 3.185
3.8.2.1 Download from PC into Radio via Serial Cable ........................................................... 3.186
3.8.2.2 Download from Fillgun into Radio................................................................................ 3.191
3.8.2.3 Download via LAN ....................................................................................................... 3.196
3.9 Fixed Frequency Scanning....................................................................................... 3.199
3.9.1 Basics of Fixed Frequency Scanning .......................................................................... 3.199
3.9.2 FF SCAN Menu Tree................................................................................................... 3.200
3.9.3 FF SCAN Home Menu................................................................................................. 3.201
3.9.4 FF SCAN Menu ........................................................................................................... 3.202
3.9.4.1 Storing Current Settings .............................................................................................. 3.204
3.9.4.2 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold................................................................... 3.205

3.9.4.3 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency ...................................................... 3.206

3.9.4.4 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity....................................................................... 3.207
3.9.4.5 Selecting the Squelch Type......................................................................................... 3.208
3.9.4.6 Changing the Frequency Scanning Parameters.......................................................... 3.209
3.9.4.7 Lock Frequency or Channel ........................................................................................ 3.210
3.9.4.8 Changing the Modulation Mode................................................................................... 3.211
3.9.4.9 Selecting the Scan Action............................................................................................ 3.212
3.9.4.10 Selecting the Scan Type.............................................................................................. 3.215
3.9.4.11 Changing the Dwell Time ............................................................................................ 3.216
3.9.4.12 Changing the Hold Time.............................................................................................. 3.217
3.9.4.13 Channel List................................................................................................................. 3.218
3.9.4.14 Priority Channel ........................................................................................................... 3.219
4 Operation in Special Communication Modes ..................................... 4.1

4.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 4.1
4.2 Preparations................................................................................................................... 4.2
4.3 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation (ALE-2G) .......................................... 4.3
4.3.1 Basics of ALE-2G ............................................................................................................ 4.3
4.3.1.1 Selective Call and Handshake......................................................................................... 4.3
4.3.1.2 Link Quality Analysis and Automatic Link Establishment ................................................ 4.3
4.3.1.3 Message Transmission.................................................................................................... 4.3
4.3.1.4 ALE-2G Calls................................................................................................................... 4.4
4.3.1.5 ALE-2G Missions and Database ..................................................................................... 4.5
4.3.1.6 User Unique Functions .................................................................................................... 4.5
4.3.2 Basics of ALE-2G LP....................................................................................................... 4.6
4.3.2.1 Achieving Network Synchronism ..................................................................................... 4.7
4.3.2.2 Maintaining Network Synchronism .................................................................................. 4.8
4.3.2.3 Changing the Time Server............................................................................................... 4.9
4.3.3 ALE-2G Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 4.10
4.3.4 ALE-2G Home Menus ................................................................................................... 4.12
4.3.5 ALE-2G Operational Menus .......................................................................................... 4.14
4.3.5.1 Selecting the Scan Groups............................................................................................ 4.16
4.3.5.2 Selecting the Address for Individual Call ....................................................................... 4.17
4.3.5.3 Selecting the Address for Net Call................................................................................. 4.18
4.3.5.4 Selecting the Tx Message ............................................................................................. 4.19
4.3.5.5 Selecting the Link Mode ................................................................................................ 4.20
4.3.5.6 Terminating a Link ......................................................................................................... 4.21
4.3.5.7 Linked Stations List ....................................................................................................... 4.22
4.3.5.8 Initiating a Link via MMI ................................................................................................. 4.23
4.3.5.9 Selecting the Scan Rate ................................................................................................ 4.24

4.3.5.10 Selecting the Active Channel for ‘Fix’ Operation ........................................................... 4.25
4.3.5.11 Selecting the Self Address ............................................................................................ 4.26
4.3.5.12 ALE Group Call Address Selection and Address Editor ................................................ 4.27
4.3.5.13 Adding an Individual Address ........................................................................................ 4.29
4.3.5.14 Selecting the Next Call to be an Any or All Call............................................................. 4.30
4.3.5.15 Displaying Received Rx Messages ............................................................................... 4.31
4.3.5.16 Selecting the Power Level ............................................................................................. 4.32
4.3.5.17 Starting ATU Learning for ALE Channels...................................................................... 4.33
4.3.6 ALE 2G Configuration Menus........................................................................................ 4.34
4.3.6.1 Switching the Acceptance of an All/Any/Wildcard Call On or Off .................................. 4.37
4.3.6.2 Switching the Popup for Received AMD Messages On or Off ...................................... 4.38
4.3.6.3 Switching the LQA Request On or Off.......................................................................... 4.39
4.3.6.4 Switching the LQA Report On or Off ............................................................................. 4.40
4.3.6.5 Selecting the Weight of a New LQA Event .................................................................... 4.41
4.3.6.6 Bypassing the ATU........................................................................................................ 4.42
4.3.6.7 Switching the Default Link Mode for Voice On or Off .................................................... 4.43
4.3.6.8 Switching the User Unique Function On or Off.............................................................. 4.44
4.3.6.9 Changing the Response Timeout .................................................................................. 4.45
4.3.6.10 Changing the LBT Timeout............................................................................................ 4.46
4.3.6.11 Changing the Link Timeout............................................................................................ 4.47
4.3.6.12 Switching the Sounding On or Off ................................................................................. 4.48
4.3.6.13 Changing the Sounding Interval .................................................................................... 4.49
4.3.6.14 Changing the Date and Time......................................................................................... 4.50
4.3.6.15 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off .............................................................. 4.51
4.3.6.16 Enabling or Disabling Unprotected Time Request (Random Value) ............................. 4.52
4.3.6.17 Switching Protected Coarse Time Request (Time Lag < 1 min) On or Off.................... 4.53
4.3.6.18 Switching Protected Fine Time Request (Time Lag < 2 s) On or Off ............................ 4.54
4.3.6.19 Designating the Local Station Time Server or Net Station ............................................ 4.55
4.3.6.20 Changing the SINAD Threshold .................................................................................... 4.56
4.3.6.21 Switching the Acceptance of Calls with a Lower Linking Protection Level On or Off .... 4.57
4.3.6.22 Changing the Time Request Interval ............................................................................. 4.58
4.3.6.23 Entering the Key ............................................................................................................ 4.59
4.3.6.24 Selecting the Protection Level ....................................................................................... 4.60
4.3.7 Common ALE-2G and ALE-3G FF and HF Modem Menus .......................................... 4.61
4.3.7.1 ALE-2G/ALE-3G FF Operational and Configuration Menus.......................................... 4.62
4.3.7.2 ALE-2G/ALE-3G HF Modem Operational and Configuration Menus ............................ 4.65
4.4 Automatic Link Establishment 3rd Generation (ALE-3G) ........................................ 4.67
4.4.1 Basics of ALE-3G .......................................................................................................... 4.67
4.4.1.1 Achieving Network Synchronization .............................................................................. 4.67
4.4.1.2 Improved LQA Mechanism and Automatic Channel Selection...................................... 4.67
4.4.1.3 ALE-3G Calls................................................................................................................. 4.68

4.4.1.4 ALE-3G Missions and Database ................................................................................... 4.68

4.4.1.5 ALE-2G Concurrent Operation in ALE-3G..................................................................... 4.68
4.4.1.6 Optimized Transfer of IP Packets.................................................................................. 4.69
4.4.1.7 Voice Priority over IP Data ............................................................................................ 4.69
4.4.1.8 Automatic Link Maintenance (ALM)............................................................................... 4.70
4.4.1.9 Communication Security (COMSEC) ............................................................................ 4.70
4.4.1.10 Last Ditch Voice (LDV) .................................................................................................. 4.70
4.4.1.11 Secure Digital Voice (SDV) ........................................................................................... 4.70
4.4.2 ALE-3G Menu Tree ....................................................................................................... 4.71
4.4.3 ALE-3G Home Menus ................................................................................................... 4.74
4.4.4 ALE-3G Operational Menus .......................................................................................... 4.76
4.4.4.1 Selecting the Address for Multicast Call ........................................................................ 4.78
4.4.4.2 Selecting the Link Mode ................................................................................................ 4.79
4.4.4.3 Selecting the Type of Link Setup................................................................................... 4.80
4.4.4.4 Selecting the Call Channel Type ................................................................................... 4.81
4.4.4.5 Selecting the Address for Broadcast Call ...................................................................... 4.82
4.4.4.6 Playback a Received Last Ditch Voice Message .......................................................... 4.83
4.4.5 ALE-3G Configuration Menus........................................................................................ 4.84
4.4.5.1 Switching the Acceptance of a Broadcast Call On or Off .............................................. 4.90
4.4.5.2 Switching the Acceptance of an ALE-2G Call On or Off................................................ 4.91
4.4.5.3 Changing the Link Timeout for Analog Voice/FF Links ................................................. 4.92
4.4.5.4 Changing the Timeout for Data Links ............................................................................ 4.93
4.4.5.5 Deleting the LQA Table ................................................................................................. 4.94
4.4.5.6 Switching the Priority Based Session Management On or Off ...................................... 4.95
4.4.5.7 Selecting the xDL Mode ................................................................................................ 4.96
4.4.5.8 Selecting the HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame ................................................... 4.98
4.4.5.9 Selecting the LDL Number of Bytes per Tx Frame........................................................ 4.99
4.4.5.10 Changing the Number of Retries for Initiated Link Setup ............................................ 4.100
4.4.5.11 Switching the Acceptance of LQA Exchange On or Off .............................................. 4.101
4.4.5.12 Address Selection for LQA Exchange ......................................................................... 4.102
4.4.5.13 Switching the LQA Mode On or Off ............................................................................. 4.103
4.4.5.14 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off ............................................................ 4.104
4.4.5.15 Switching the Time Synchronization On or Off............................................................ 4.105
4.4.5.16 Switching the Occupancy Detection On or Off ............................................................ 4.106
4.4.5.17 Selecting the Voice Priority over IP Data Function...................................................... 4.108
4.4.5.18 Selecting the Time Source .......................................................................................... 4.109
4.4.5.19 Changing the Time Request Interval ........................................................................... 4.110
4.4.5.20 Switching the ALE-3G Linking Protection On or Off .................................................... 4.111
4.4.5.21 Switching the ALE-3G ALM Enable On or Off ............................................................. 4.112
4.4.5.22 Changing ALM Threshold for Voice/FF Links.............................................................. 4.113
4.4.5.23 Changing ALM Threshold for Data Links..................................................................... 4.114

4.4.5.24 Changing ALM Channel Usage ................................................................................... 4.115

4.4.5.25 Changing ALM Interval for Voice Links ....................................................................... 4.116
4.4.5.26 Changing ALM Execution Delay for Voice Links ......................................................... 4.117
4.4.5.27 Changing ALM Interval for LLE ................................................................................... 4.118
4.4.5.28 Changing ALM Interval for Data Links......................................................................... 4.119
4.4.5.29 Changing ALM Interval for Link Quality Monitoring ..................................................... 4.120
4.4.5.30 Changing ALM Relink Mode........................................................................................ 4.121
4.4.5.31 Changing ALM Execution Mode .................................................................................. 4.122
4.5 HF Modem .................................................................................................................. 4.123
4.5.1 Basics of HF Modem ................................................................................................... 4.123
4.5.1.1 HF Modem Menu Tree ................................................................................................ 4.124
4.5.2 HF Modem Home Menu .............................................................................................. 4.125
4.5.3 HF Modem Operational Menu ..................................................................................... 4.127
4.5.3.1 Changing the Rx and Tx Data Rate............................................................................. 4.128
4.5.3.2 Changing the Rx and Tx Interleaver Length................................................................ 4.131
4.5.3.3 Terminating the Data Transmission............................................................................. 4.132
4.5.4 HF Modem Configuration Menu .................................................................................. 4.133
4.5.4.1 Changing the Modem Deacquire Limit ........................................................................ 4.134
4.5.4.2 Changing the Modem Doppler Tracking Time............................................................. 4.135
4.5.4.3 Enabling the Modem Synchronization on Data Function............................................. 4.136
4.5.4.4 Changing the Maximal Message Block Length ........................................................... 4.137
4.5.4.5 Changing the Modem Tx Level Control Blocks ........................................................... 4.138
4.5.4.6 Switching the EOM Flag .............................................................................................. 4.139
4.5.4.7 Selecting the HF Modem Waveform............................................................................ 4.140
4.5.4.8 Selecting the Asynchronous Modem Operation Mode ................................................ 4.142
4.6 Link SW ...................................................................................................................... 4.143
4.7 Secure Digital Voice .................................................................................................. 4.145
4.7.1 Basics of Secure Digital Voice..................................................................................... 4.145
4.7.2 SEC VOICE Menu Tree............................................................................................... 4.147
4.7.3 SEC VOICE Home Menu ............................................................................................ 4.148
4.7.4 SEC VOICE Operational Menu ................................................................................... 4.150
4.7.4.1 Changing the Frequency for SDV Communication...................................................... 4.150
4.7.4.2 Changing the Power Level for SDV Communication................................................... 4.150
4.7.4.3 Switching the VOX Signal Source for SDV Communication........................................ 4.151
4.7.4.4 Tuning the Antenna ..................................................................................................... 4.151
4.7.4.5 Changing the SDV Vocoder Mode .............................................................................. 4.152
4.7.4.6 Selecting the Active COMSEC Key for SDV Communication ..................................... 4.153
4.7.5 SEC VOICE Configuration Menus............................................................................... 4.154
4.7.5.1 Changing the VOX Sensitivity for SDV Communication.............................................. 4.154
4.7.5.2 Changing the VOX Holdtime for SDV Communication................................................ 4.154

4.7.5.3 Editing a User-defined COMSEC Key for SDV Communication ................................. 4.155
4.8 SECOM-H.................................................................................................................... 4.157
4.8.1 Basics of SECOM-H .................................................................................................... 4.157
4.8.1.1 SECOM-H Net ............................................................................................................. 4.157
4.8.1.2 COMSEC and TRANSEC............................................................................................ 4.158
4.8.1.3 Time Synchronization .................................................................................................. 4.158
4.8.1.4 Linking ......................................................................................................................... 4.159
4.8.1.5 Free Hopset Search .................................................................................................... 4.160
4.8.2 SECOM-H Menu Tree ................................................................................................. 4.161
4.8.3 SECOM-H Home Menu ............................................................................................... 4.163
4.8.3.1 SECOM-H Operational Menu ...................................................................................... 4.165
4.8.3.2 Addressing Different Link Types.................................................................................. 4.166
4.8.3.3 Selecting the Service Mode......................................................................................... 4.167
4.8.3.4 Initiating a Free Hopset Search ................................................................................... 4.169
4.8.3.5 Switching the Advanced Hopset On or Off .................................................................. 4.170
4.8.3.6 Selecting the Search Pattern Time.............................................................................. 4.171
4.8.3.7 Terminating a Link ....................................................................................................... 4.172
4.8.3.8 Selecting the Power Level ........................................................................................... 4.173
4.8.3.9 Initiating Time Acquisition............................................................................................ 4.174
4.8.3.10 Switching the VOX Signal Source ............................................................................... 4.175
4.8.3.11 Starting ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset ............................................................. 4.176
4.8.3.12 Selecting a Hopset ...................................................................................................... 4.178
4.8.3.13 Selecting a Keyset....................................................................................................... 4.179
4.8.4 SECOM-H Configuration Menus ................................................................................. 4.180
4.8.4.1 Switching the Time Beacon Mode On or Off ............................................................... 4.182
4.8.4.2 Defining a Radio as a Time Reference Unit ................................................................ 4.183
4.8.4.3 Switching the Free Hopset Search Mode On or Off .................................................... 4.184
4.8.4.4 Changing the Number of Channels in an Advanced Hopset ....................................... 4.185
4.8.4.5 Selecting the Waveform .............................................................................................. 4.186
4.8.4.6 Selecting the Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission ................................................. 4.187
4.8.4.7 Selecting the Interleaving Length ................................................................................ 4.189
4.8.4.8 Bypassing the ATU...................................................................................................... 4.190
4.8.4.9 Configuring the Vocoder.............................................................................................. 4.191
4.8.4.10 Changing the SECOM-H Date and Time..................................................................... 4.192
4.8.4.11 Selecting the Time Source .......................................................................................... 4.193
4.8.4.12 Editing a User Hopset.................................................................................................. 4.194
4.8.4.13 Editing a User Keyset .................................................................................................. 4.205
4.8.5 Further Settings are Relevant for SECOM-H Operation.............................................. 4.209
5 Services .................................................................................................. 5.1

5.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 5.1

5.2 GPS Reporting ............................................................................................................... 5.2
5.2.1 Basics of GPS Reporting................................................................................................. 5.2
5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting.................................................................... 5.6
5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission............................................................................................ 5.7
5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions................................................................................ 5.10
5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features ............... 5.12
5.2.1.5 SECOM-H Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option) ........................................................... 5.14
5.2.1.6 ALE-3G Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option) ............................................................... 5.15
5.2.2 GPS Operational Menus................................................................................................ 5.16
5.2.2.1 Display of the GPS Position .......................................................................................... 5.18
5.2.2.2 Display of the GPS Reporting Data ............................................................................... 5.20
5.2.2.3 Display the GPS Position Accuracy............................................................................... 5.22
5.2.2.4 Selecting the Role of a Participant ................................................................................ 5.23
5.2.2.5 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Immediately) ..................... 5.24
5.2.2.6 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Scheduled)........................ 5.25
5.2.2.7 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Immediately, as Controller Feature).......... 5.26
5.2.2.8 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Scheduled, as Controller Feature) ............ 5.27
5.2.2.9 Initiating an Auto Push List Request Transmission (as Controller Feature) .................. 5.28
5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.................................................................... 5.30
5.2.2.11 Switching the Controller Reports Position as Controller Feature On or Off................... 5.31
5.3 IP over Air (IPoA) ......................................................................................................... 5.32
5.3.1 Basics of IP over Air (IPoA) ........................................................................................... 5.32
5.3.1.1 General Constraints....................................................................................................... 5.36
5.3.1.2 Recommendations for the Transport Layer ................................................................... 5.36
5.3.1.3 Special IP Services........................................................................................................ 5.38
5.3.2 FastLink Mode (FLM) .................................................................................................... 5.42
5.3.2.1 FLM Control................................................................................................................... 5.45
5.3.2.2 Rebroadcast / Relay Mode ............................................................................................ 5.52
5.3.3 IPoA Configuration Menus............................................................................................. 5.69
5.3.3.1 Changing the Radio Air Interface IP Address................................................................ 5.71
5.3.3.2 Changing the Radio Air Interface Netmask ................................................................... 5.72
5.3.3.3 Changing the PPP IP Interface Address ....................................................................... 5.73
5.3.3.4 Changing the Rebroadcast IP Address ......................................................................... 5.75
5.3.3.5 Switching the Voice Forward Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off..................................... 5.76
5.3.3.6 Switching the Local Voice Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off ......................................... 5.77
5.3.3.7 Switching the Relay IP Mode for Broadcast On or Off .................................................. 5.78
5.3.3.8 Changing the Operation Mode ...................................................................................... 5.79
5.3.3.9 Changing the Connection Mode .................................................................................... 5.80
5.3.3.10 Editing the Routing Table .............................................................................................. 5.81

5.3.3.11 Editing the Multicast Routing Table ............................................................................... 5.84

5.4 Message Service.......................................................................................................... 5.89
5.4.1 Basics of Message Service ........................................................................................... 5.89
5.4.1.1 Storage Strategy............................................................................................................ 5.89
5.4.1.2 Message Size ................................................................................................................ 5.89
5.4.1.3 Prerequisites.................................................................................................................. 5.90
5.4.1.4 IP-Based Interface for External Applications ................................................................. 5.90
5.4.1.5 Message Addressing ..................................................................................................... 5.90
5.4.1.6 Participant Selection List (R&S M3TR only) .................................................................. 5.90
5.4.1.7 Indication of a New SDM in the Waveform- Specific Operational Menu
(R&S M3TR only) .......................................................................................................... 5.91
5.4.2 Menu Structure .............................................................................................................. 5.92
5.4.2.1 Inbox.............................................................................................................................. 5.93
5.4.2.2 Drafts Folder.................................................................................................................. 5.95
5.4.2.3 Text Editor ..................................................................................................................... 5.96
5.4.2.4 Alert Messages.............................................................................................................. 5.98
5.5 Voice over IP (VoIP)................................................................................................... 5.101
5.5.1 Basics of Voice over IP (VoIP) .................................................................................... 5.101
5.5.1.1 Configuration Scenarios .............................................................................................. 5.102
5.5.1.2 General Constraints..................................................................................................... 5.109
5.5.1.3 Call Session................................................................................................................. 5.109
5.5.1.4 Phone Service ............................................................................................................. 5.110
5.5.1.5 Scenario: Call Session between a Radio Network and a VoIP Telephone ................. 5.111
5.5.2 PHONE Menu.............................................................................................................. 5.114
5.5.2.1 Entering the Phone Number for a Manual Dial............................................................ 5.115
5.5.2.2 Selecting the Phone Number for a Speed Dial (Using the Phone Book)..................... 5.116
5.5.2.3 Accept an Incoming Call.............................................................................................. 5.117
5.5.2.4 Terminating an Active Call Session............................................................................. 5.118
5.5.3 SIP – Useful Information for System Integration ......................................................... 5.119
5.5.3.1 Session Signalling ....................................................................................................... 5.119
5.5.3.2 SIP Signalling .............................................................................................................. 5.122
5.5.3.3 Proprietary Signalling Inside the Radio Network ......................................................... 5.123
6 Malfunction............................................................................................. 6.1
6.1 Visual Inspection ........................................................................................................... 6.1
6.1.1 Fuses F1 / F2 - Change................................................................................................... 6.2
6.2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 6.3
6.2.1 Radio Built-In Test ........................................................................................................... 6.3
6.2.2 Power-On Built-In Test (PBIT)......................................................................................... 6.5
6.2.3 Continuous Built-In Test (CBIT)....................................................................................... 6.8

6.2.4 Initiated Built-in Test (IBIT) .............................................................................................. 6.9

6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test ............................................................................................... 6.10
7 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 7.1

7.1 Scheduled Maintenance................................................................................................ 7.2
7.1.1 Synthesizer Calibration.................................................................................................... 7.4
7.1.1.1 Required Test Equipment................................................................................................ 7.4
7.1.1.2 Calibration Procedure...................................................................................................... 7.4
7.1.1.3 Possible Errors during Calibration ................................................................................. 7.10
7.2 Care, Cleaning ............................................................................................................. 7.11
7.2.1 Care............................................................................................................................... 7.11
7.2.2 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ 7.11
7.3 Retouching the Paint Work......................................................................................... 7.12
8 Technical Information ........................................................................... 8.1

8.1 Technical Data ............................................................................................................... 8.1
8.2 External Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 8.2
8.3 Remote Control.............................................................................................................. 8.3
9 Drawings................................................................................................. 9.1

M3SR Series 4100
List of Figures
Figure 1.1 R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radio (Front View) ............................................................................. 1.2
Figure 1.2 R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radio, e.g. Transceiver (Top View without Cover, Example)............. 1.6
Figure 1.3 R&S IN4190 Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 1.11
Figure 1.4 R&S IN4000A Power Supply ................................................................................................... 1.13
Figure 1.5 Radio with Built-In Control Unit................................................................................................ 1.16
Figure 1.6 Radio with Additional Remote Control Unit.............................................................................. 1.17
Figure 1.7 Radio with Built-In Control Unit and with two Remote Control Units ....................................... 1.19
Figure 1.8 Several Radios and Remote Control Units in a Network (Example)........................................ 1.21
Figure 2.1 Installation into a 19" Rack, Example ........................................................................................ 2.4

Figure 2.2 Rear Connectors of Receiver .................................................................................................... 2.7
Figure 2.3 Rear Connectors of Receiver / Exciter ...................................................................................... 2.9
Figure 2.4 Rear Connectors of Transceiver.............................................................................................. 2.11
Figure 2.5 Rear Connectors of Power Management Unit ......................................................................... 2.13
Figure 2.6 Front Cabling ........................................................................................................................... 2.15
Figure 2.7 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190 and R&S IN4190 ...................................... 2.17
Figure 2.8 System Cabling for Transceiver .............................................................................................. 2.20
Figure 2.9 Switching the Radio On ........................................................................................................... 2.23
Figure 2.10 Switching the Radio with Built-In Control Unit On.................................................................... 2.24
Figure 2.11 Example for the Automatic Update Process of a Frontend...................................................... 2.28
Figure 2.12 Switching the Radio Off ........................................................................................................... 2.30
Figure 2.13 Switching the Radio with Built-In Control Unit Off.................................................................... 2.31
Figure 2.14 Radio IP Settings (Example) ................................................................................................... 2.35
Figure 2.15 Changing Radio IP Settings Using the upd32.exe Tool .......................................................... 2.36
Figure 2.16 Upd32: Select 'LAN Settings via Ethernet'............................................................................... 2.38
Figure 2.17 Upd32: Select Targets for Ethernet Communication Dialog (Example)................................... 2.38
Figure 2.18 Upd32: LAN Setting Dialog (Example) .................................................................................... 2.39
Figure 2.19 Upd32: Finish the Update ........................................................................................................ 2.39
Figure 2.20 Control Unit IP Settings ........................................................................................................... 2.42
Figure 2.21 Radio IP Address List of Control Unit ...................................................................................... 2.43
Figure 2.22 Example Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2.44
Figure 3.1 Radio with Local Control Unit .................................................................................................... 3.1

Figure 3.2 Radio Backplane with Interfaces ............................................................................................... 3.2
Figure 3.3 Radio and Remote Control Unit Connected via LAN................................................................. 3.3
Figure 3.4 Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 3.6
Figure 3.5 Control Elements of R&S GB4000C Control Unit .................................................................... 3.10
Figure 3.6 Menu Page Design (Example)................................................................................................. 3.12

M3SR Series 4100 List of Figures
Figure 3.7 Example of a Softkey............................................................................................................... 3.16

Figure 3.8 Example of a Listbox ............................................................................................................... 3.17
Figure 3.9 Example of an Editor ............................................................................................................... 3.18
Figure 3.10 Menu Number and Title ........................................................................................................... 3.20
Figure 3.11 Menu Numbering ..................................................................................................................... 3.21
Figure 3.12 Menu Tree in Fixed Frequency Operation ............................................................................... 3.26
Figure 3.13 Position of Softkey 'Previous' (Example) ................................................................................. 3.28
Figure 3.14 Home Menu, Not Connected ................................................................................................... 3.30
Figure 3.15 Selecting Remote Radio .......................................................................................................... 3.31
Figure 3.16 Home Menu, Connecting to Radio .......................................................................................... 3.32
Figure 3.17 Example: Home Menu connected, active communication mode is Fixed Frequency.............. 3.33
Figure 3.18 Connection Lost....................................................................................................................... 3.34
Figure 3.19 Radio Access Rights ............................................................................................................... 3.35
Figure 3.20 Example: Three Monitoring Sessions ...................................................................................... 3.36
Figure 3.21 Example: Radio grants a Fixed Session.................................................................................. 3.37
Figure 3.22 Example: Radio denies an Advanced Session ........................................................................ 3.38
Figure 3.23 Selecting a Session ................................................................................................................. 3.40
Figure 3.24 Session Indication in Menu Header ......................................................................................... 3.41
Figure 3.25 Connection Denied .................................................................................................................. 3.42
Figure 3.26 Navigation Softkeys to Communication Mode Submenus....................................................... 3.43
Figure 3.27 Preset Page Selection (Example)............................................................................................ 3.45
Figure 3.28 Fill Gun Navigation Softkey (Example) .................................................................................... 3.46
Figure 3.29 Maintenance Navigation Softkey (Example)............................................................................ 3.47
Figure 3.30 Menu Tree: Radio Maintenance .............................................................................................. 3.49
Figure 3.31 Menu 3001: Radio MTC 1/7 .................................................................................................... 3.50
Figure 3.32 Menu 3011: Radio Error List (Example) .................................................................................. 3.55
Figure 3.33 Menu 3012: Radio Error Details (Example) ............................................................................. 3.57
Figure 3.34 Menu 3021: Radio Inventory of Installed Modules (Example) ................................................. 3.59
Figure 3.35 Menu 3021: Radio Inventory of Firmware Versions (Example) ............................................... 3.60
Figure 3.36 Menu 3022: Radio Inventory Details (Example) ...................................................................... 3.62
Figure 3.37 Menu 3022: Radio Inventory Details (Empty) .......................................................................... 3.63
Figure 3.38 Menu 3031: PMU, e.g. 4 kW System ...................................................................................... 3.66
Figure 3.39 Menu 3031: PMU, e.g. 2 kW System ...................................................................................... 3.67
Figure 3.40 Menu 3041: Split Site 1/2 ........................................................................................................ 3.69
Figure 3.41 Menu 3042: Split Site 2/2 ........................................................................................................ 3.71
Figure 3.43 Menu 3061: VoIP 1/2 ............................................................................................................... 3.79
Figure 3.44 Menu 3062: VoIP 2/2 ............................................................................................................... 3.80
Figure 3.45 Menu 3003: Radio MTC 3/7 3003 ........................................................................................... 3.82
Figure 3.46 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Valid Option Key........................................................................ 3.86
Figure 3.47 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Invalid Option Key ..................................................................... 3.87

Figure 3.48 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Response Option Key ............................................................... 3.87
Figure 3.49 Option Key Editor .................................................................................................................... 3.89
Figure 3.50 Option Key Details Message Box (Example)........................................................................... 3.90
Figure 3.54 Menu Structure of Radio Maintenance Domain....................................................................... 3.98
Figure 3.55 Menu 4001: CU MTC 1/4......................................................................................................... 3.99
Figure 3.56 Menu 4011: CU Error List (Example)..................................................................................... 3.103
Figure 3.57 Menu 4012: CU Error Details ................................................................................................ 3.105
Figure 3.58 Menu 4021: CU Inventory...................................................................................................... 3.106
Figure 3.59 Menu 4022: CU Inventory Details (Example) ........................................................................ 3.108
Figure 3.60 Menu 4031: CU Keyboard Test ............................................................................................. 3.110
Figure 3.61 Menu 4003: CU MTC 2/4....................................................................................................... 3.111
Figure 3.62 Menu 4003: CU MTC 4/3 (Example) ..................................................................................... 3.114
Figure 3.63 Listbox Connect to Radio ...................................................................................................... 3.115
Figure 3.64 Radio IP Address List (Example with Local Radio) ............................................................... 3.116
Figure 3.65 Listbox Connect to Radio ...................................................................................................... 3.117
Figure 3.68 User Level Editor ................................................................................................................... 3.123
Figure 3.69 Unlock.................................................................................................................................... 3.125
Figure 3.70 Menu Tree: Fixed Frequency ................................................................................................ 3.126
Figure 3.71 Home Menu: Fixed Frequency, e.g. F3E Operation Mode (Rx Mode) .................................. 3.127
Figure 3.72 Home Menu: Fixed Frequency, e.g. F3E Operation Mode (Tx Mode)................................... 3.128
Figure 3.73 Menu 1121: FF CFG 1/2........................................................................................................ 3.169
Figure 3.74 Menu 1122: FF CFG 2/2........................................................................................................ 3.170
Figure 3.75 Available Preset Page after Delivery from Factory ................................................................ 3.184
Figure 3.76 Loading Configuration to Radio via Serial Cable ................................................................... 3.187
Figure 3.77 Download in Progress (Example) .......................................................................................... 3.189
Figure 3.78 First Step: Loading Configuration to Fillgun .......................................................................... 3.191
Figure 3.79 Second Step: Loading Configuration from Fillgun into Radio ................................................ 3.193
Figure 3.80 Download in Progress (Example) .......................................................................................... 3.195
Figure 3.81 Loading Configuration to Radio via LAN ............................................................................... 3.197
Figure 3.82 State Diagram of the Scanning Feature ................................................................................ 3.199
Figure 3.83 Menu Tree: FF SCAN ............................................................................................................ 3.200
Figure 3.84 Home Menu: FF SCAN.......................................................................................................... 3.201
Figure 3.85 Menu 1115: FF SCAN 1/2 (Frequency Scan)........................................................................ 3.202
Figure 3.86 Menu 1115: FF SCAN 1/2 (Channel Scan) ........................................................................... 3.202
Figure 3.87 Menu 1125: FF SCAN 2/2 ..................................................................................................... 3.203

Figure 4.1 Valid Option Keys in Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (Example).............................................................. 4.2
Figure 4.2 Menu Tree: ALE-2G ................................................................................................................ 4.11
Figure 4.3 Home Menu: ALE-2G (Listening, Rx Mode) ............................................................................ 4.12
Figure 4.4 Home Menu: ALE-2G (Listening, Tx Mode)............................................................................. 4.13
Figure 4.5 Menu 1211: ALE OP 1/2 (ALE-2G) ........................................................................................ 4.14
Figure 4.6 Menu 1212: ALE OP 2/2 (ALE-2G) ........................................................................................ 4.15
Figure 4.7 Menu 1221: ALE CFG 1/3 (ALE-2G) ....................................................................................... 4.34
Figure 4.10 Menu 1111: FF OP1/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A ............................................................................. 4.62
Figure 4.11 Menu 1112: FF OP2/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A ............................................................................. 4.63
Figure 4.12 Menu 1122: FF CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G)............................................................................ 4.64
Figure 4.13 Menu 1511: HFM OP 1/1 (ALE-2G) ........................................................................................ 4.65
Figure 4.14 Menu 1521: HFM CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G) ........................................................................ 4.66
Figure 4.15 Menu Tree: ALE-3G ................................................................................................................ 4.72
Figure 4.16 Home Menu: ALE 3G (Listening, Rx Mode) ............................................................................ 4.74
Figure 4.17 Home Menu: ALE-3G (Listening, Tx Mode)............................................................................. 4.75
Figure 4.18 Menu 1211: ALE OP 1/2 (ALE-3G) ......................................................................................... 4.76
Figure 4.19 Menu 1212: ALE OP 2/2 (ALE-3G) ......................................................................................... 4.77
Figure 4.24 Menu Tree: HF Modem ......................................................................................................... 4.124
Figure 4.25 Home Menu: HF Modem (Rx Mode)...................................................................................... 4.125
Figure 4.26 Home Menu: HF Modem (Tx Mode) ...................................................................................... 4.126
Figure 4.27 Menu 1511: HFM OP 1/1....................................................................................................... 4.127
Figure 4.28 Menu 1521: HFM CFG 1/1 .................................................................................................... 4.133
Figure 4.29 Menu FF OP 1/2 in Modulation Mode B7D and Link 11 (Option) .......................................... 4.144
Figure 4.30 Architecture of the SDV Communication Mode (Principle) .................................................... 4.145
Figure 4.31 Menu Tree: SEC VOICE........................................................................................................ 4.147
Figure 4.32 Home Menu: SEC VOICE (Rx Mode).................................................................................... 4.148
Figure 4.33 Home Menu: SEC VOICE (Tx Mode) .................................................................................... 4.149
Figure 4.34 Menu1611: Sec. Voice OP 1/1 .............................................................................................. 4.150
Figure 4.35 Menu 1621: Sec. Voice Cfg 1/1 ............................................................................................. 4.154
Figure 4.36 Menu Tree: SECOM-H .......................................................................................................... 4.162
Figure 4.37 Home Menu: SECOM-H (Rx Mode) ...................................................................................... 4.163
Figure 4.38 Home Menu: SECOM-H (Tx Mode)....................................................................................... 4.164
Figure 4.39 Menu1311: SECOMH OP 1/1................................................................................................ 4.165
Figure 4.40 Menu 1321: SECOMH CFG 1/2 ............................................................................................ 4.180
Figure 4.41 Menu 1322: SECOMH CFG 2/2 ............................................................................................ 4.181

Figure 4.42 Hopset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu ......................................................................... 4.194
Figure 4.43 Keyset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu ......................................................................... 4.195
Figure 4.44 Keyset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu ......................................................................... 4.205
Figure 5.1 GPS Reporting System ............................................................................................................. 5.3

Figure 5.2 Menu 1151: GPS OP (without GPS Reporting) ....................................................................... 5.16
Figure 5.3 Menu 1351: GPS OP (GPS Reporting enabled) ..................................................................... 5.17
Figure 5.4 Own GPS Position ................................................................................................................... 5.19
Figure 5.5 GPS Reporting Data ................................................................................................................ 5.20
Figure 5.6 Network Infrastructure ............................................................................................................. 5.33
Figure 5.7 Radio IP Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 5.35
Figure 5.8 FLM Connection ...................................................................................................................... 5.43
Figure 5.9 State Transitions (Graphic Representation) ............................................................................ 5.47
Figure 5.10 FastLink over Rebroadcast...................................................................................................... 5.50
Figure 5.11 Configuration/Indication Service IP_REBRO on MMI.............................................................. 5.52
Figure 5.12 Configuration of IP Address for Relay/Rebroadcast Mode on MMI ......................................... 5.54
Figure 5.13 Rebroadcast Scenario ............................................................................................................. 5.56
Figure 5.14 Local Voice for Rebroadcast Mode ......................................................................................... 5.58
Figure 5.15 Local Voice Selection on MMI ................................................................................................. 5.59
Figure 5.16 Voice Forwarding Selection on MMI ........................................................................................ 5.61
Figure 5.17 Relay Scenario ........................................................................................................................ 5.63
Figure 5.18 Relay IP Broadcast Selection on MMI ..................................................................................... 5.65
Figure 5.19 Local Voice Selection on MMI ................................................................................................. 5.67
Figure 5.20 Menu 1331: IPoA CFG 1/2 ...................................................................................................... 5.69
Figure 5.21 Menu 1332: IPoA CFG 2/2 ...................................................................................................... 5.70
Figure 5.22 IPoA Unicast Routing Menu .................................................................................................... 5.82
Figure 5.23 IPoA Multicast Routing Menu .................................................................................................. 5.86
Figure 5.24 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, SDM Message Inbox................................................................. 5.92
Figure 5.25 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, Text Editor ................................................................................ 5.96
Figure 5.26 Alert Messages ........................................................................................................................ 5.98
Figure 5.27 Menu 1342 Msg Service 2/2, Alert Inbox................................................................................. 5.99
Figure 5.28 IP-Based Remote Operation Application ............................................................................... 5.101
Figure 5.29 Connecting a Radio Network to a VoIP Network ................................................................... 5.102
Figure 5.30 CNR - Change of the Radio Cell ........................................................................................... 5.105
Figure 5.31 SIP Domain Connect Over Air ............................................................................................... 5.107
Figure 5.32 Connection between a Radio Network and a VoIP Telephone ............................................. 5.112
Figure 5.33 Menu 1255: PHONE .............................................................................................................. 5.114
Figure 5.34 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (DIAL) ................................................................................... 5.120
Figure 5.35 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (ACCEPT, Gateway Radio) .................................................. 5.121
Figure 5.36 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (ACCEPT, Endpoint Radio) .................................................. 5.122

Figure 6.1 Replacing the Fuses F1 / F2 ..................................................................................................... 6.2

Figure 6.2 GO LED on Radio Front Panel and GO LED on Control Panel Switched Off in Case of Error
(Example) .................................................................................................................................. 6.4
Figure 6.3 Menu Radio MTC 1/7 Indicating an Error (Example)................................................................. 6.6
Figure 6.4 Menu Radio Inventory Indicating a Defective Module (Example) .............................................. 6.7
Figure 6.5 Menu Radio Error List (Example) .............................................................................................. 6.7
Figure 7.1 Label, e.g. XK 4115: Date of Battery Installation ....................................................................... 7.2
Figure 7.2 Fixing the Cover to the Front Panel ........................................................................................... 7.3
Figure 7.3 Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration not Allowed ................................................................... 7.5
Figure 7.4 Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration Possible ........................................................................ 7.6
Figure 7.5 Calibration Running ................................................................................................................... 7.7
Figure 7.6 Calibration Failed....................................................................................................................... 7.8
Figure 7.7 Calibration Successful ............................................................................................................... 7.9
Figure 9.1 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S BV4190 ................. 9.2
Figure 9.2 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S FK4190M .............. 9.4
Figure 9.3 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S FK4190X............... 9.6
Figure 9.4 Control and Display Elements ................................................................................................... 9.8

M3SR Series 4100
List of Tables
Table 1.1 Applicable Software and Software Options (Option Keys) ........................................................ 1.1
Table 1.2 Available Power Supply Models .............................................................................................. 1.12
Table 1.3 Signal Modulations .................................................................................................................. 1.14
Table 2.1 Default IP Settings of a Radio ................................................................................................. 2.32

Table 2.2 Default IP Settings of Control Unit ........................................................................................... 2.40
Table 3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 3.8

Table 3.2 Phone ........................................................................................................................................ 3.9
Table 3.3 Icons ........................................................................................................................................ 3.13
Table 3.4 Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 3.14
Table 3.5 Toggle Softkeys ....................................................................................................................... 3.17
Table 3.6 Listbox Softkeys ...................................................................................................................... 3.17
Table 3.7 Editor Softkeys ........................................................................................................................ 3.18
Table 3.8 Navigation Softkeys ................................................................................................................. 3.19
Table 3.9 Editor Softkeys ........................................................................................................................ 3.20
Table 3.10 Menu Organization, Numbering and Titles .............................................................................. 3.22
Table 3.11 Domains and Parameters ........................................................................................................ 3.25
Table 3.12 Navigation Softkeys ................................................................................................................. 3.27
Table 3.13 Navigation Buttons .................................................................................................................. 3.28
Table 3.14 Session Types ......................................................................................................................... 3.39
Table 3.15 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001) ................................................................................ 3.51
Table 3.16 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error List (3011)................................................................................ 3.56
Table 3.17 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error Details (3012) .......................................................................... 3.58
Table 3.18 Softkeys in Menu Radio Inventory (3021) ............................................................................... 3.61
Table 3.19 Supported Devices (Split Site System).................................................................................... 3.68
Table 3.22 PTT Crossreference List.......................................................................................................... 3.92
Table 3.24 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 6/7 ............................................................................................ 3.95
Table 3.25 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 7/7 ............................................................................................ 3.96
Table 3.26 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 1/4 (4001)................................................................................... 3.100
Table 3.27 Softkeys in Menu CU Error List (4011) .................................................................................. 3.104
Table 3.28 Softkeys in Menu CU Error Details (4012)............................................................................. 3.105
Table 3.29 CU Inventory Types ............................................................................................................... 3.107
Table 3.30 Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory (4021).................................................................................. 3.107
Table 3.31 Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory Details ................................................................................. 3.109

M3SR Series 4100 List of Tables
Table 3.32 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 2/4 .............................................................................................. 3.112

Table 3.33 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 3/4 .............................................................................................. 3.118
Table 3.34 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 4/4 (4004)................................................................................... 3.120
Table 3.35 Menu Structure as Function of Modulation Mode .................................................................. 3.130
Table 3.36 Possible States of FF Scanning ............................................................................................ 3.213
Table 4.1 User Unique Functions .............................................................................................................. 4.5

Table 4.2 Time Uncertainty Definition ....................................................................................................... 4.6
Table 4.3 Time to Keep Radio (Net Station) Synchronized ....................................................................... 4.8
Table 4.4 Dependency of Packet Size on Selected Traffic Mode ........................................................... 4.97
Table 4.5 Waveform Message............................................................................................................... 4.107
Table 4.6 Data Rates and Interleaver Setting Dependencies on the Waveform ................................... 4.129
Table 4.7 Dependency of Tolerable Deviation on Selected Search Pattern.......................................... 4.171
Table 4.8 Dependency of Waveform/Air Data Rates on Data Rates/Modes of Data Term 1 ................ 4.188
Table 5.1 Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting ...................................................... 5.12
Table 5.2 Influence of the Currently Selected Role ................................................................................. 5.23
Table 5.3 Influence of the Currently Selected CRP Status...................................................................... 5.31
Table 5.4 Priority, IP Mapping (Protocol / Port) and ARQ ....................................................................... 5.38
Table 5.5 Send Buffer and Thresholds .................................................................................................... 5.39
Table 5.6 FLM States .............................................................................................................................. 5.45
Table 5.7 FLM Activities .......................................................................................................................... 5.46
Table 5.8 State Transitions (Events) ....................................................................................................... 5.48
Table 5.9 State Transitions (Rebroadcast) .............................................................................................. 5.48
Table 7.1 List of Materials ....................................................................................................................... 7.11

M3SR Series 4100
Index
Numerics ALE-3G ALM Enable ......................................................4.112
ALE-3G Configuration Menus ...........................................4.84
1 kW Mode ........................................................................3.64 ALE-3G Home Menus ......................................................4.74
2 kW Mode ........................................................................3.64 ALE-3G Linking Protection .............................................4.111
4 kW Mode ........................................................................3.64 ALE-3G Menu Tree ..........................................................4.71
ALE-3G Operational Menus .............................................4.76
A
Alert Inbox ........................................................................5.99
A1A Holdtime ..................................................................3.174 Alert Messages .................................................................5.98
Accept .............................................................................5.117 Alert Sending ..................................................................5.100
Accept an Incoming Call .................................................5.117 All Calls (Broadcast Calls) ..................................................4.4
Acceptance of All Call .......................................................4.37 ALM Channel Usage ......................................................4.115
Acceptance of an ALE-2G Call .........................................4.91 ALM Execution Delay for Voice Links .............................4.117
Acceptance of Any Call .....................................................4.37 ALM Execution Mode .....................................................4.122
Acceptance of Broadcast Call ...........................................4.90 ALM Interval for Data Links ............................................4.119
Acceptance of Calls with a Lower Linking Protection Level ALM Interval for Link Quality Monitoring .........................4.120
On or Off ...........................................................................4.57 ALM Interval for LLE .......................................................4.118
Acceptance of LQA Exchange ........................................4.101 ALM Interval for Voice Links ...........................................4.116
Acceptance of Wildcard ....................................................4.37 ALM Relink Mode ...........................................................4.121
Achieving Network Synchronism ........................................4.7 ALM Threshold for Data Links ........................................4.114
Achieving Network Synchronization ..................................4.67 ALM Threshold for Voice/FF Links .................................4.113
Activate softkey .................................................................3.19 AMBE .............................................................................4.191
Activating / Deactivating SELCAL ...................................3.182 ANALOG VOICE / FF .......................................................4.79
Active Channel for 'Fix' Operation .....................................4.25 ANALOG VOICE/FF .........................................................4.20
Adaptive Selection of ARQ Protocols ...............................4.69 Any Calls ............................................................................4.5
adaptive xDL+ ...................................................................4.96 Architecture of the SDV Communication Mode
Adding an Individual Address ...........................................4.29 (Principle) .......................................................................4.145
Address for Broadcast Call ...............................................4.82 ARQ Functionality .............................................................5.40
Address for Individual Call ................................................4.17 Asynchronous Modem Operation Mode .........................4.142
Address for Multicast Call .................................................4.78 ATU Learning .................................................................3.171
Address for Net Call ..........................................................4.18 ATU Learning for ALE Channels ......................................4.33
Address Selection for LQA Exchange .............................4.102 ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset ..............................4.176
Addressing a Group ........................................................4.166 ATU Learning Range ......................................................3.176
Addressing a Station .......................................................4.166 ATU Tuning ....................................................................3.159
Addressing Different Link Types .....................................4.166 Auto Push List Request Transmission
Advanced ..........................................................................3.39 (as Controller Feature) ......................................................5.28
Advanced Hopset ................................................4.160, 4.170 Automatic Gain Control ..................................................3.143
AGC Threshold ...............................................................3.144 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation ...................4.3
Air Interface IP Address ....................................................5.71 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation with
Air Interface Netmask .......................................................5.72 Linking Protection ...............................................................4.6
ALE 2G ...............................................................................4.3 Automatic Link Establishment 3rd Generation (ALE 3G) ..4.67
ALE 2G Calls ......................................................................4.4 Automatic Push ..................................................................5.7
ALE 2G Concurrent Operation in ALE 3G ........................4.68 Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) ....................................5.40
ALE 2G Configuration Menus ...........................................4.34 Automatic Update of Modules ..........................................2.27
ALE 2G LP ..........................................................................4.6 Average Power Factor ....................................................3.164
ALE 3G .............................................................................4.67
ALE 3G / xDL ARQ Functionality ......................................5.41 B
ALE 3G Calls ....................................................................4.68 Backup Battery ...................................................................7.2
ALE 3G Missions and Database .......................................4.68 Bandwidth .......................................................................3.147
ALE Group Call Address Editor ........................................4.27 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit .............................2.40
ALE Group Call Address Selection and Address Editor ...4.27 Basic Configuration of the Radio ......................................2.32
ALE-2G Home Menus .......................................................4.12 Basics of ALE 2G ...............................................................4.3
ALE-2G Menu Tree ...........................................................4.10 Basics of ALE 2G LP ..........................................................4.6
ALE-2G Operational Menus ..............................................4.14 Basics of ALE 3G .............................................................4.67
ALE-2G/ALE-3G FF Operational and Basics of Fixed Frequency Scanning .............................3.199
Configuration Menus .........................................................4.62 Basics of GPS Reporting ....................................................5.2
ALE-2G/ALE-3G HF Modem Operational and Basics of HF Modem ......................................................4.123
Configuration Menus .........................................................4.65 Basics of IP Over Air (IPoA) .............................................5.32

M3SR Series 4100 Index
Basics of Message Service ...............................................5.89 Changing the MGC Level ...............................................3.145

Basics of SECOM-H .......................................................4.157 Changing the Modem DeAcquire Limit ...........................4.134
Basics of Secure Digital Voice ........................................4.145 Changing the Modem Doppler Tracking Time ................4.135
Basics of Voice over IP (VoIP) ........................................5.101 Changing the Modem TX Level Control Blocks ..............4.138
Baud Rate .......................................................................3.165 Changing the Modulation Mode .......................... 3.148, 3.211
Best Channel ....................................................................4.81 Changing the Multicast Routing Table ..............................5.87
BFO Frequency for A1A ..................................................3.160 Changing the Number of Channels in an
Broadcast ..........................................................................5.10 Advanced Hopset ...........................................................4.185
Broadcast Call .........................................................4.82, 4.90 Changing the Number of Retries for
Button 'ERASE' ...................................................................3.7 Initiated Link Setup .........................................................4.100
Button 'INT/EXT' .................................................................3.7 Changing the Operation Mode .........................................5.79
Button 'ON/OFF' ..................................................................3.7 Changing the Passband Tuning Frequency ...................3.157
Bypassing the ATU ................................... 3.173, 4.42, 4.190 Changing the PEP (Peak Envelope Power)
to Average Power Factor ................................................3.164
C Changing the PPP IP Interface Address ..........................5.73
Calibration Failed ................................................................7.7 Changing the Radio Air Interface IP Address ...................5.71
Calibration Procedure .........................................................7.4 Changing the Radio Air Interface Netmask ......................5.72
Calibration Running ............................................................7.6 Changing the Rebroadcast IP Address ............................5.75
Calibration Successful ........................................................7.8 Changing the Receiver Filter Bandwidth ........................3.147
Call Channel Type ............................................................4.81 Changing the Release Time ...........................................3.146
Call from Phonebook ......................................................5.116 Changing the Response Timeout .....................................4.45
Call Initiated from Radio Network ...................................5.124 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity .............. 3.139, 3.207
Call Initiation ...................................................................5.111 Changing the Rx and Tx Data Rate ................................4.128
Call Number ....................................................................5.115 Changing the Rx Interleaver Length ...............................4.131
Call Session ....................................................................5.109 Changing the SDV Vocoder Mode .................................4.152
Call Termination ..............................................................5.111 Changing the SECOM-H Date ........................................4.192
Care ..................................................................................7.11 Changing the SECOM-H Time .......................................4.192
CBIT (Continuous Built-In Test) ..........................................6.8 Changing the Signal Squelch Mode ...............................3.179
Change Radio IP Settings using a Built In Control Unit ....2.33 Changing the SINAD Threshold .......................................4.56
Change Radio IP Settings using Upd32.exe Tool .............2.35 Changing the Sounding Interval .......................................4.49
Changing ALM Channel Usage ......................................4.115 Changing the Squelch Hangover Time ...........................3.178
Changing ALM Execution Delay for Voice Links .............4.117 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold .......... 3.141, 3.205
Changing ALM Execution Mode .....................................4.122 Changing the Time Request Interval .................... 4.58, 4.110
Changing ALM Interval for Data Links ............................4.119 Changing the Time Server ..................................................4.9
Changing ALM Interval for Link Quality Monitoring .........4.120 Changing the Timeout for Data Links ...............................4.93
Changing ALM Interval for LLE .......................................4.118 Changing the Tx Interleaver Length ...............................4.131
Changing ALM Interval for Voice Links ...........................4.116 Changing the Unicast Routing Table ................................5.82
Changing ALM Relink Mode ...........................................4.121 Changing the VOX Holdtime ..........................................3.180
Changing ALM Threshold for Data Links ........................4.114 Changing the VOX Sensitivity ........................................3.181
Changing ALM Threshold for Voice/FF Links .................4.113 Channel List ....................................................................3.218
Changing the A1A Holdtime ............................................3.174 Clarifier Frequency .........................................................3.149
Changing the AGC Threshold .........................................3.144 Clean the Dust Protection Filter ..........................................7.3
Changing the ATU Learning Range ................................3.176 Cleaning ...........................................................................7.11
Changing the BFO Frequency for A1A ...........................3.160 Clearing the List ................................................................5.30
Changing the Clarifier Frequency ...................................3.149 CNR - Change of the Radio Cell .....................................5.106
Changing the Connection Mode .......................................5.80 Common ALE-2G and ALE-3G FF and
Changing the Date and Time ............................................4.50 HF modem menus ............................................................4.61
Changing the Default Release Times .............................3.177 Communication Mode Menus ...........................................3.42
Changing the Delta Frequency .......................................3.161 COMSEC ........................................................................4.158
Changing the Dwell Time ................................................3.216 COMSEC Key for SDV Communication .........................4.153
Changing the Editor Mode ..............................................3.151 Configuration of IP Address for
Changing the F1D Transmitter / Receiver Relay/Rebroadcast Mode on MMI ....................................5.53
Signal Polarity .................................................................3.166 Configuration/Indication Service IP_REBRO on MMI .......5.52
Changing the Frequency .................................................3.151 Configure Periodic (Timer Initiated) Transmission of
Changing the Frequency Scanning Parameters .............3.209 GPS Information .................................................................5.8
Changing the Frequency Shift for F1D ...........................3.167 Configuring the Vocoder .................................................4.191
Changing the Hold Time .................................................3.217 Connecting a Radio Network to a VoIP Network ............5.102
Changing the LBT Timeout ...............................................4.46 Connecting to Radio .........................................................3.30
Changing the Link Timeout ...............................................4.47 Connection Denied ...........................................................3.41
Changing the Link Timeout for Analog Voice/FF Links .....4.92 Connection Lost ................................................................3.34
Changing the Maximal Message Block Length ...............4.137 Connection Mode .............................................................5.80

Continuous Built-In Test (CBIT) ..........................................6.8 Dust Protection Filter ..........................................................7.3

Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit ............3.29 Dwell Time ......................................................................3.216
Control Unit ............................................................... 1.8, 3.10
Control Unit Built-In Test ...................................................6.10 E
Control Unit Error Details (4012) .....................................3.105 Editing a User Hopset .....................................................4.194
Control Unit Error List (4011) ..........................................3.103 Editing a User Hopset Subband .....................................4.200
Control Unit Inventory (4021) ..........................................3.106 Editing a User Keyset .....................................................4.205
Control Unit Inventory Details (4022) ..............................3.108 Editing a User-defined COMSEC Key for
Control Unit Keyboard Test (4031) .................................3.110 SDV Communication ......................................................4.155
Control Unit Maintenance .................................................3.97 Editing the Multicast Routing Table ..................................5.84
Control Unit MTC 1/4 (4001) .............................................3.99 Editor Mode ....................................................................3.151
Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002) ...........................................3.111 Editor softkey ....................................................................3.18
Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003) ...........................................3.114 EK4100A ............................................................................1.1
Control Unit MTC 4/4 (4004) ...........................................3.120 EK4100D ............................................................................1.1
Controller ............................................................................5.6 Embedded Digital Voice Services .....................................1.15
Controller Acting as Provider ..............................................5.6 Enabling or Disabling Unprotected Time Request
Controller Reports Position as Controller Feature ............5.31 (Random Value .................................................................4.52
CRP (Controller Report Position) ......................................5.31 Enabling the Modem Synchronization on
CU Inventory Types ........................................................3.107 Data Function .................................................................4.136
Enhanced mixed excitation linear prediction voice
D
encoder (MELPe) ...........................................................4.145
Data Communication ........................................................1.15 Entering the Key ...............................................................4.59
Data Link Mode ...............................................................3.162 Entering the Phone Number for a Manual Dial ...............5.115
Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission ..........................4.187 Environment ...................................................................3.175
Data Rates and Interleaver Setting Dependencies on the Wave- EOM Flag .......................................................................4.139
form .................................................................................4.129 Errors ..................................................................................6.5
DATA_TERM_1 ..............................................................4.167 Example Configuration .....................................................2.44
Date and Time ..................................................................4.50 External Interfaces ..............................................................8.2
Default Link Mode for Voice ..............................................4.43
Default Release Times ....................................................3.177 F
Defining a New Hopset ...................................................4.196 F1D Baud Rate ...............................................................3.165
Defining a Radio as a Time Reference Unit ....................4.183 F1D Transmitter / Receiver Signal Polarity .....................3.166
Delete Address' .................................................................5.83 FastLink Mode (FLM) ........................................................5.42
Deleting a User Hopset Subband ...................................4.203 FastLink over Rebroadcast ...............................................5.49
Deleting the LQA Table .....................................................4.94 FastLink over Rebroadcast, e.g. with R&S M3TR Radios 5.49
Delta Frequency ..............................................................3.161 Feedback Messages ........................................................5.39
Dependency of Packet Size on Selected Traffic Mode .....4.97 FF SCAN Home Menu ....................................................3.201
Dependency of Tolerable Deviation on FF SCAN Menu ..............................................................3.202
Selected Search Pattern .................................................4.171 FF SCAN Menu Tree ......................................................3.200
Dependency of Waveform/Air Data Rates on Fill Gun .............................................................................3.46
DataRates/Modes of Data Term 1 ..................................4.188 Filter Bandwidth ..............................................................3.147
Designating the Local Station Time Server or Fixed .................................................................................3.39
Net Station ........................................................................4.55 Fixed Channel ..................................................................4.81
Differences between HDL and LDL ..................................4.96 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus ...........................3.169
Digital Voice Transfer ........................................................5.55 Fixed Frequency Home Menu ........................................3.127
Disconnect ......................................................................5.118 Fixed Frequency Menu Tree ...........................................3.126
Disconnecting from Radio .................................................3.34 Fixed Frequency Operational Menus ..............................3.129
Display of the GPS Reporting Data ..................................5.20 Fixed Frequency Scanning .............................................3.199
Display of the Own GPS Position .....................................5.18 FK 4120 ..............................................................................1.5
Display of the Packet Aggregation Setting (ON/OFF) .......4.87 FK 4140 ..............................................................................1.5
Display of the xDL Port Setting .........................................4.87 FLM Activities ...................................................................5.46
Displaying Received RX Messages ..................................4.31 FLM Connect Request <destination IP> ...........................5.45
Download from Fillgun into Radio ...................................3.191 FLM Connection, e.g. with R&S M3TR Radios .................5.42
Download from PC into Radio via Serial Cable ..............3.186 FLM Control ......................................................................5.45
Download in Progress (Example) ...................................3.189 FLM Disconnect Request .................................................5.45
Download via LAN ..........................................................3.196 FLM Message Size Threshold ..........................................5.49
Drafts Folder .....................................................................5.95 FLM Re-Connect Delay ....................................................5.49
Drawbacks using TCP-based Applications over FLM Relative Idle Timeout ................................................5.49
Radio Channels ................................................................5.36 FLM State .........................................................................5.45
DS 4100A ............................................................................1.1 FLSU async ......................................................................4.80
DS 41100D .........................................................................1.1 FLSU sync ........................................................................4.80

Free Hopset Search ............................................ 4.160, 4.169 HF Modem Waveform .....................................................4.140

Free Hopset Search Mode ..............................................4.184 HiSp Async .....................................................................4.142
Frequency .......................................................................3.151 Hold Time ....................................................................... 3.217
Frequency Editor .............................................................3.151 Home Menu
Frequency Scanning Parameter .....................................3.209 ALE 2G (Listening, Rx Mode) ........................................4.12
Frequency Shift for F1D ..................................................3.167 ALE-2G (Listening, Tx Mode) ........................................4.13
Frequency Step Size Editor ................................ 3.151, 3.176 ALE-3G (Listing, Rx Mode) ............................................4.74
Front Cabling ....................................................................2.15 ALE-3G (Listing, Tx Mode) ............................................4.74
Front Panel .........................................................................1.8 FF SCAN .....................................................................3.201
Frontend ..............................................................................1.8 Fixed Frequency, e.g. F3E Operation Mode
(Rx Mode) ....................................................................3.127
G HF Modem (Rx Mode) .................................................4.125
GB 4000C ...........................................................................1.5 HF Modem (Tx Mode) .................................................4.125
General Constraints ..........................................................5.36 SEC VOICE (Rx Mode) ...............................................4.148
General Data .......................................................................1.9 SECOM-H (Rx Mode) .................................................. 4.163
General Requirements and Valid Combinations of SECOM-H (Tx Mode) ...................................... 4.148, 4.163
GPS Reporting Features ...................................................5.12 Home Menu (0001) ...........................................................3.29
GEO (Geographic Positioning Information) ......................5.18 Home Menu connected, active communication
Geographic (GEO) Positioning Information ......................5.18 mode is Fixed Frequency .................................................3.32
GM4120S ............................................................................1.1 Home Menu, Connecting to Radio ....................................3.31
GM4122S ............................................................................1.1 Home Menu, Not Connected ............................................3.30
GPS Configuration (Automatic Push Configuration Hopset ............................................................................4.178
Request) .............................................................................5.8 Hopset Subband ................................................. 4.200, 4.203
GPS Information Request (Pull, Immediately, as
I
Controller Feature) ............................................................5.26
GPS Information Request (Pull, Scheduled, as IBIT (Initiated Built-in Test) .................................................6.9
ontroller Feature) ..............................................................5.27 Icons and Symbols ...........................................................3.13
GPS Operational Menus ...................................................5.16 Immediate (Unscheduled) Transmission ............................5.9
GPS Position Accuracy .....................................................5.22 Improved LQA Mechanism and Automatic Channel
GPS Position Information Transmission Selection ...........................................................................4.67
(Push, Scheduled) ............................................................5.25 IN 4400A ............................................................................. 1.5
GPS Reporting ....................................................................5.2 Inbox .................................................................................5.93
GPS Reporting Data .........................................................5.20 Incoming Call ..................................................................5.117
GPS Transmission ..............................................................5.7 Indication of a New SDM in the Waveform Specific
Graphical User Interface Design .......................................3.11 Operational Menu (R&S M3TR only) ................................5.91
Group Calls .........................................................................4.4 Individual Call ...................................................................4.17
GS 4102 ..............................................................................1.5 Individual Calls (Point-to-Point Connection) .......................4.4
GS3001S ............................................................................1.1 Initiated Built-in Test (IBIT) .................................................6.9
GS4101S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating a Free Hopset Search ......................................4.169
GS4114S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull,
GS4115S ............................................................................1.1 Immediately, as Controller Feature) .................................5.26
GS4117S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull,
GS4121S ............................................................................1.1 Scheduled, as Controller Feature) ....................................5.27
GS4123S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission
GS4155S ............................................................................1.1 (Push, Scheduled) ............................................................5.25
GS4156S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating a Link via MMI .................................................... 4.23
GS4157S ............................................................................1.1 Initiating an Auto Push List Request Transmission
GV4190A ............................................................................1.1 (as Controller Feature) ......................................................5.28
GV4190D ............................................................................1.1 Initiating Time Acquisition ...............................................4.174
GX4100A ............................................................................1.1 Inserting a User Hopset Subband ..................................4.197
GX4100D ............................................................................1.1 Installation ..........................................................................2.3
Installation into a 19" rack ...................................................2.3
H INT VOCODER ...............................................................4.167
Handshake ..........................................................................4.3 Interface Module .................................................................1.8
HDL ...................................................................................4.96 Interleaving Length .........................................................4.189
HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame .............................4.98 INTERNAL MODEM ............................................... 4.20, 4.79
HF Modem ......................................................................4.123 Introduction .....................................................................3.183
HF Modem Configuration Menu ......................................4.133 IP Based Remote Operation Application ........................5.101
HF Modem Home Menu ..................................................4.125 IP Over Air (IPoA) .............................................................5.32
HF Modem Menu Tree ....................................................4.124 IP Routing ......................................................................... 5.64
HF Modem Operational Menu .........................................4.127 IP_DATA ......................................................................... 4.167

IP_DATA .........................................................................4.167 M
IP_REBRO ......................................................................4.167
IP-Based Interface for External Applications ....................5.90 Maintaining Network Synchronism .....................................4.8
IPoA (IP Over Air) .............................................................5.32 Maintenance Menus .........................................................3.47
IPoA Configuration Menus ................................................5.69 Manu 3022
IPoA Multicast Routing Menu ............................................5.87 Radio Inventory Details (Example) ................................3.62
IPoA protocol ARQ ............................................................5.40 Manual Push .......................................................................5.7
IPoA Unicast Routing Menu ..............................................5.82 MELP ..............................................................................4.191
MELPe (Enhanced Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction
K Voice Encoder) ...............................................................4.145
Menu 1111
Key ....................................................................................4.59
FF OP1/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A .......................................4.62
Keyset .............................................................................4.179
Menu 1112
L FF OP2/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A .......................................4.62
Menu 1115
Last Ditch Voice Message ................................................4.83 FF SCAN 1/2 ...............................................................3.202
LBT Timeout .....................................................................4.46 Menu 1121
LDL ...................................................................................4.96 FF CFG 1/2 ..................................................................3.169
LDL Number of Bytes per Tx Frame .................................4.99 Menu 1122
LED 'AC/DC' .......................................................................3.7 FF CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G) ......................................4.62
LED 'BAT' ............................................................................3.7 FF CFG 2/2 ..................................................................3.169
LED 'CU' ...........................................................................3.11 Menu 1125
LED 'G' ..............................................................................3.11 FF SCAN 2/2 ...............................................................3.203
LED 'GO' ................................................................... 3.7, 3.11 Menu 1151
LED 'ON' ...........................................................................3.11 GPS OP (without GPS Reporting) .................................5.16
LED 'RF' ..............................................................................3.7 Menu 1211
LED 'RX' ..............................................................................3.7 ALE OP 1/2 (ALE-2G) ...................................................4.14
LEDs .................................................................................3.11 ALE OP 1/2 (ALE-3G) ...................................................4.77
Link Mode ............................................................... 4.20, 4.79 Menu 1212
Link Quality Analysis and Automatic Link Establishment ....4.3 ALE OP 2/2 (ALE-2G) ...................................................4.14
Link Setup .........................................................................4.80 ALE OP 2/2 (ALE-3G) ...................................................4.77
Link SW ...........................................................................4.143 Menu 1221
Link Timeout .....................................................................4.47 ALE CFG 1/3 (ALE 3G) .................................................4.85
Link Timeout for Analog Voice/FF Links ...........................4.92 ALE CFG 1/3 (ALE-2G) .................................................4.34
Link Types .......................................................................4.166 Menu 1222
Linked Stations List ...........................................................4.22 ALE CFG 2/3 (ALE-2G) .................................................4.34
Linking .............................................................................4.159 ALE CFG 2/3 (ALE-3G) .................................................4.86
List of Materials .................................................................7.11 Menu 1223
Listbox Connect to Radio .................................... 3.114, 3.116 ALE CFG 3/3 (ALE-2G) .................................................4.34
Listbox softkey ..................................................................3.17 ALE CFG 3/3 (ALE-3G) .................................................4.88
Loading Configuration to Radio via LAN .........................3.196 Menu 1255
Loading Configuration to Radio via Serial Cable ............3.186 PHONE ........................................................................5.114
Loading the Configuration from the Fillgun to the Radio .3.193 Menu 1321
Loading the Configuration from the PC to the Fillgun .....3.191 SECOMH CFG 1/2 ......................................................4.180
Local .................................................................................3.39 Menu 1322 SECOMH CFG 2/2 - Folder
Local Station Time Server or Net Station ..........................4.55 User Hopset .................................................................4.194
Local Voice for Rebroadcast Mode, e.g. M3TR Radios ....5.58 User Keyset .................................................................4.195
Local Voice Forwarding ....................................................5.60 Menu 1331
Local Voice Mode for Rebroadcast ...................................5.77 IPoA CFG 1/2 ................................................................5.69
Local Voice Participation ......................................... 5.58, 5.66 Menu 1332
Local Voice Selection on MMI ...........................................5.66 IPoA CFG 2/2 ................................................................5.69
Lock Channel ..................................................................3.210 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, SDM Message Inbox ..........5.92
Lock Frequency or Channel ............................................3.210 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, Text Editor ..........................5.96
Locked Softkey .................................................................3.20 Menu 1342 Msg Service 2/2, Alert Inbox ..........................5.99
LOW RXREF LEVEL ........................................................7.10 Menu 1351
LQA Calls ............................................................................4.5 GPS OP (GPS Reporting enabled) ...............................5.16
LQA Exchange ................................................................4.102 Menu 1511
LQA Mode .......................................................................4.103 HFM OP 1/1 .................................................................4.127
LQA Report .......................................................................4.40 HFM OP 1/1 (ALE-2G) ..................................................4.65
LQA Request ....................................................................4.39 Menu 1521
LQA Table .........................................................................4.94 HFM CFG 1/1 ..............................................................4.133
HFM CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G) ..................................4.65

Menu 1621 Menu Page Design ...........................................................3.11

Sec. Voice Cfg 1/1 .......................................................4.154 Menu Radio Error Details (3012) ......................................3.57
Menu 3001 Menu Radio Error List (3011) ...........................................3.55
Radio MTC 1/7 ...............................................................3.50 Menu Radio Error List (Example) .......................................6.6
Menu 3002 Menu Radio Inventory (3021) ...........................................3.59
Radio MTC 2/7 ...............................................................3.74 Menu Radio Inventory Indicating a Defective Module
Menu 3003 (Example) ...........................................................................6.6
Radio MTC 3/7 ...............................................................3.82 Menu Radio MTC 1/6 Indicating an Error (Example) ..........6.5
Menu 3004 Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001) ............................................3.50
Radio MTC 4/6 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002) ............................................3.74
Invalid Option Key ..........................................................3.86 Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003) ............................................3.82
Response Option Key ....................................................3.86 Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (3004) ............................................3.86
Radio MTC 4/7 Menu Radio MTC 5/7 (3005) ............................................3.91
Valid Option Key ............................................................3.86 Menu Radio MTC 6/7 (3006) ............................................3.94
Menu 3005 Menu Radio MTC 7/7 (3007) ............................................3.96
Radio MTC 5/7 ...............................................................3.91 Menu Split Site 1/2 (3041) ................................................3.68
Menu 3006 Menu Split Site 2/2 (3042) ................................................3.71
Radio MTC 6/7 ...............................................................3.94 Menu Structure .................................................................5.92
Menu 3007 Menu Structure of Radio Maintenance Domain ................3.97
Radio MTC 7/7 ...............................................................3.96 Menu Tree ........................................................................3.25
Menu 3011 ALE-2G ..........................................................................4.10
Radio Error List (Example) ............................................3.55 ALE-3G ..........................................................................4.71
Menu 3012 FF SCAN .....................................................................3.200
Radio Error Details (Example) .......................................3.57 Fixed Frequency ..........................................................3.126
Menu 3021 HF Modem ...................................................................4.124
Radio Inventory of Firmware Versions (Example) .........3.59 SEC VOICE .................................................................4.147
Radio Inventory of Installed Modules (Example) ...........3.59 SECOM-H ....................................................................4.161
Menu 3022 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061) ......................................................3.79
Radio Inventory Details (Empty) ....................................3.63 Menu VoIP 2/2 (3062) ......................................................3.80
Menu 3031 Menu1311
PMU, e.g. 2 kW System .................................................3.67 SECOMH OP 1/1 .........................................................4.165
PMU, e.g. 4 kW System .................................................3.66 Menu1611
Menu 3041 Sec. Voice OP 1/1 .......................................................4.150
Splite Site 1/2 .................................................................3.68 Message Addressing ........................................................5.90
Menu 3042 Message Block Length ...................................................4.137
Splite Site 2/2 .................................................................3.71 Message Service ..............................................................5.89
Menu 3061 Message Size ...................................................................5.89
VoIP 1/2 .........................................................................3.79 Message Transmission .......................................................4.3
Menu 3062 MGC Level ......................................................................3.145
VoIP 2/2 .........................................................................3.80 MGRS (Military Grid System Positioning Information) ......5.18
Menu 4001 Military Grid System (MGRS) Positioning Information ......5.18
CU MTC 1/4 ...................................................................3.99 Minimum Requirements ....................................................2.23
Menu 4003 MMBE .............................................................................4.191
CU MTC 2/4 .................................................................3.111 Modem DeAcquire Limit .................................................4.134
CU MTC 4/3 (Example) ...............................................3.114 Modem Doppler Tracking Time ......................................4.135
Menu 4004 Modem Synchronization on Data Function .....................4.136
CU MTC 4/4 .................................................................3.120 Modem TX Level Control Blocks ....................................4.138
Menu 4011 Modulation Mode ................................................ 3.148, 3.211
CU Error List (Example) ...............................................3.103 Monitoring .........................................................................3.39
Menu 4012 Monitoring Session ...........................................................3.36
CU Error Details ...........................................................3.105 Motherboard .......................................................................1.8
Menu 4021 MR4100E ............................................................................1.1
CU Inventory ................................................................3.106 MR4100G ...........................................................................1.1
Menu 4022 MR4100G-B ........................................................................1.1
CU Inventory Details (Example) ..................................3.108 MR4100X ............................................................................1.1
Menu 4031 Multicast Routing Basics ...................................................5.84
CU Keyboard Test .......................................................3.110 Multicast Routing Table .......................................... 5.84, 5.87
Menu Number and Title ....................................................3.20 Multitone Function ..........................................................3.163
Menu Numbering ..............................................................3.21
Menu Organisation ............................................................3.20 N
Menu Organization, Numbering and Titles .......................3.22 Navigation Softkeys to Communication Mode Submenus 3.42

Navigation within the Menu Tree ......................................3.27 Power-On Built-In Test (PBIT) ............................................6.5
Net (Network Connection Mode) .......................................5.80 PPP IP Interface Address .................................................5.73
Net Call .............................................................................4.18 Preamplifier ....................................................................3.142
Net Calls .............................................................................4.4 Preset Page ......................................................................3.44
Network Connection Mode ................................................5.80 Priority Based Session Management ................................4.95
Network Infrastructure, e.g. with R&S M3TR Radios ........5.32 Priority Channel ..............................................................3.219
New Hopset ....................................................................4.196 Priority, IP Mapping (Protocol / Port) and ARQ ................5.38
Next Channel ....................................................................4.81 Priority-Based Session Management ...............................4.69
Noise Blanker Type .........................................................3.155 Procedures for Loading the Configuration into the
Notch Filter Speed ..........................................................3.156 Radio ..............................................................................3.185
Number of Channels in an Advanced Hopset .................4.185 Propagation ......................................................................5.64
Number of Retries for Initiated Link Setup ......................4.100 Propagation and Routing ..................................................5.57
Proprietary Signalling Inside the Radio Network ............5.123
O Protected Coarse Time Request (Time Lag < 1 min) .......4.53
ocal Voice Selection on MMI .............................................5.58 Protected Fine Time Request (Time Lag < 2 s) ................4.54
Occupancy Detection ......................................................4.106 Protection Level ................................................................4.60
Operating Concept ..............................................................3.5 Provider ..............................................................................5.6
Operation Mode ................................................................5.79 PTT Crossreference List ...................................................3.92
Optimized Transfer of IP Packets .....................................4.69 Pull Request and Response ...............................................5.7
Option Key Details Message Box (Example) ....................3.90 Pull Response ....................................................................5.7
Option Key Editor ..............................................................3.89 Push ...................................................................................5.7
Overview .............................................................................3.1
Q
Overview over all Possible Modes ....................................3.65
Own GPS Position ............................................................5.18 Quick Erase ........................................................................3.7
P R
P to P (Point-to-Point Connection Mode) ..........................5.80 R
Packet Aggregation ...........................................................4.69 -- ....................................................................................3.12
Packet Aggregation Setting ..............................................4.87 >< ..................................................................................3.12
Packet Sizes .....................................................................4.97 ?? ..................................................................................3.12
Packing ...............................................................................2.1 Radio ..............................................................................5.112
Participant .........................................................................5.23 Radio Access Rights ........................................................3.35
Participant Selection List ...................................................5.10 Radio Air Interface IP Address .........................................5.71
Participant Selection List (R&S M3TR only) .....................5.90 Radio Air Interface Netmask .............................................5.72
Passband Tuning Frequency ..........................................3.157 Radio Built-In Test ..............................................................6.3
Passive Time Acquisition ...................................... 4.51, 4.104 Radio Configuration with Pre-configured Parameters ....3.183
PBIT (Power-On Built-In Test) ............................................6.5 Radio Control ....................................................................1.16
PEP (Peak Envelope Power) ..........................................3.164 Radio Controller ..................................................................1.8
PEP (Peak Envelope Power) to Average Power Factor .3.164 Radio denies an Advanced Session .................................3.36
Periodic (Timer Initiated) Transmission of Radio Front Panel ...............................................................3.6
GPS Information .................................................................5.7 Radio grants a Fixed Session ...........................................3.36
periodic LQA sounding ....................................................4.103 Radio Inventory Details (3022) .........................................3.62
perodic LQA exchange ...................................................4.103 Radio IP Address List (Example with Local Radio) ........3.115
Phone Book ....................................................................5.116 Radio IP Interfaces ...........................................................5.34
PHONE Menu .................................................................5.114 Radio Maintenance ...........................................................3.48
Phone Number for a Manual Dial ....................................5.115 Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration not Allowed ............7.4
Phone Number for a Speed Dial (Using the Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration Possible .................7.5
Phone Book) ...................................................................5.116 Radio Network Receives a Call ......................................5.124
Phone Service .................................................................5.110 Radio Settings ....................................................................3.7
Phonebook ......................................................................5.110 Radio with Several Control Units ......................................1.18
Playback a Received Last Ditch Voice Message ..............4.83 Readjust the Oscillators ......................................................7.2
PMU (3031) .......................................................................3.66 Rear Cabling for PMU .......................................................2.13
Point-to-Multipoint link (PtM) ...........................................4.160 Rear Cabling for Receiver ..................................................2.6
Point-to-Point ....................................................................5.10 Rear Cabling for Receiver / Exciter ....................................2.8
Point-to-Point Connection Mode .......................................5.80 Rear Cabling for Transceiver .................................. 2.10, 2.12
Point-to-Point link (PtP) ...................................................4.160 Rear Connectors of Power Management Unit ..................2.13
Popup for Received AMD Messages ................................4.38 Rear Connectors of Receiver .............................................2.7
Position Accuracy .............................................................5.22 Rear Connectors of Receiver / Exciter ...............................2.9
Possible Errors during Calibration ....................................7.10 Rear Connectors of Transceiver .......................................2.11
Power Level .............................................. 3.158, 4.32, 4.173 Rebroadcast / Relay Mode ...............................................5.52
Power Supply ......................................................................1.8 Rebroadcast Mode ...........................................................5.55

Rebroadcast Scenario, e.g. M3TR Radios .......................5.55 Selecting a Keyset ..........................................................4.179

Rebroadcsat IP Address ...................................................5.75 Selecting One of the Received GPS Position
Recalling Settings ...........................................................3.136 Information ........................................................................5.30
Received GPS Position Information ..................................5.30 Selecting Remote Radio ...................................................3.30
Receiver Filter Bandwidth ...............................................3.147 Selecting the Active Channel for 'Fix' Operation ...............4.25
Recommendations for the Transport Layer ......................5.36 Selecting the Active COMSEC Key for
Recommended Adjustments for TCP ...............................5.37 SDV Communication ......................................................4.153
REFTUNE LIMIT ...............................................................7.10 Selecting the Address for Broadcast Call .........................4.82
Relay IP Broadcast Forwarding ........................................5.66 Selecting the Address for Individual Call ..........................4.17
Relay IP Broadcast Selection on MMI ..............................5.64 Selecting the Address for Multicast Call ...........................4.78
Relay IP Mode for Broadcast ............................................5.78 Selecting the Address for Net Call ....................................4.18
Relay Mode .......................................................................5.62 Selecting the Asynchronous Modem Operation Mode ...4.142
Relay Scenario, e.g. M3TR Radios ...................................5.62 Selecting the Call Channel Type ......................................4.81
Release Time ..................................................................3.146 Selecting the Data Link Mode .........................................3.162
Release Times ................................................................3.177 Selecting the Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission ....4.187
Remote Control ...................................................................8.3 Selecting the F1D Baud Rate .........................................3.165
Remote Control via PPP ...................................................5.74 Selecting the HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame .......4.98
Removal ..............................................................................2.5 Selecting the HF Modem Waveform ...............................4.140
Replace the Backup Battery ...............................................7.2 Selecting the Interleaving Length ...................................4.189
Replace the Dust Protection Filter ......................................7.3 Selecting the LDL Number of Bytes per Tx Frame ...........4.99
Replacing the Fuses F1 / F2 ...............................................6.2 Selecting the Link Mode ......................................... 4.20, 4.79
Required Personnel ............................................................1.4 Selecting the Next Call to be an Any or ALL Call .............4.30
Required Power Supply for Receiver ................................1.10 Selecting the Noise Blanker Type ...................................3.155
Required Power Supply for Receiver / Exciter or PMU .....1.11 Selecting the Notch Filter Speed ....................................3.156
Required Power Supply for Transceiver ...........................1.13 Selecting the Phone Number for a Speed Dial
Required Test Equipment ...................................................7.4 (Using the Phone Book) .................................................5.116
Response Timeout ............................................................4.45 Selecting the Power Level ........................ 3.158, 4.32, 4.173
Retouching the Paint Work ...............................................7.12 Selecting the Protection Level ..........................................4.60
Robust Mode .....................................................................5.79 Selecting the Role of a Participant ...................................5.23
Role of a Participant ..........................................................5.23 Selecting the Scan Action ...............................................3.212
Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting .......................5.6 Selecting the Scan Groups ...............................................4.16
RS-IRP Mode ....................................................................5.79 Selecting the Scan Rate ...................................................4.24
RSSI Squelch Sensitivity .................................... 3.139, 3.207 Selecting the Scan Type .................................................3.215
Rx Data Rate ..................................................................4.128 Selecting the Search Pattern Time .................................4.171
Rx Interleaver Length ......................................................4.131 Selecting the Self Address ...............................................4.26
RX Messages ....................................................................4.31 Selecting the Service Mode ............................................4.167
Rx Preamplifier ...............................................................3.142 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency 3.138, 3.206
Selecting the Squelch Type ................................ 3.140, 3.208
S Selecting the Time Source ................................. 4.109, 4.193
Scan Action .....................................................................3.212 Selecting the Tx Message ................................................4.19
Scan Rate .........................................................................4.24 Selecting the Type of Link Setup ......................................4.80
Scan Type .......................................................................3.215 Selecting the Voice Priority over IP Data Function .........4.108
Scheduled Maintenance .....................................................7.2 Selecting the Waveform .................................................4.186
SDV (Secure Digital Voice) .............................................4.145 Selecting the Weight of a New LQA Event .......................4.41
SDV Vocoder Mode ........................................................4.152 Selecting the xDL Mode ...................................................4.96
Search Pattern Time .......................................................4.171 Selective Call and Handshake ............................................4.3
SEC VOICE Configuration Menus ..................................4.154 Self Address .....................................................................4.26
SEC VOICE Home Menu ................................................4.148 Send Buffer and Thresholds .............................................5.39
SEC VOICE Menu Tree ..................................................4.147 Service Mode ..................................................................4.167
SEC VOICE Operational Menu .......................................4.150 Service Setup ...................................................................5.52
SECOM-H .......................................................................4.157 Session Signalling ..........................................................5.119
SECOM-H Configuration Menus .....................................4.180 Session Types ..................................................................3.39
SECOM-H Date ..............................................................4.192 Session Types and Access Rights ...................................3.35
SECOM-H Home Menu ..................................................4.163 Several Radios and Control Units in a Network ................1.20
SECOM-H Menu Tree .....................................................4.161 Signal Polarity .................................................................3.166
SECOM-H Net ................................................................4.157 Signal Squelch Mode ......................................................3.179
SECOM-H Operational Menu .........................................4.165 Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency ................... 3.138, 3.206
SECOM-H Time ..............................................................4.192 Silent Tuning ...................................................................3.172
Secure Digital Voice ........................................................4.145 SINAD Threshold ..............................................................4.56
See ....................................................................................5.14 SIP – Useful Information for System Integration .............5.119
Selecting a Hopset ..........................................................4.178 SIP Domain Connect Over Air ........................................5.108

SIP Proxy and SIP Registrar ...........................................5.119 Softkey 'Data Params' ......................................................3.83
SIP Registrar ...................................................................5.119 Softkey 'Datarate' ............................................................4.187
SIP Signalling ..................................................................5.122 Softkey 'Date Time' ..................................... 3.77, 4.50, 4.192
Softkey .................................................................... 4.19, 4.78 Softkey 'DCD Mode' ..........................................................3.84
Softkey '<-' ........................................................................3.19 Softkey 'Deacquire' .........................................................4.134
Softkey '->' ........................................................................3.19 Softkey 'Default LM Voice' ................................................4.43
Softkey '1 <SP> .,1!-/<@' ..................................................5.97 Softkey 'DEL LQA TABLE' ................................................4.94
Softkey 'A1A-Hold' ..........................................................3.174 Softkey 'Delete Address' ....................................... 3.118, 5.88
Softkey 'Accept A2G' ........................................................4.91 Softkey 'Delete Prio Chan' ..............................................3.219
Softkey 'Accept LQA' ......................................................4.101 Softkey 'Delete Receiver' ..................................................3.73
Softkey 'Add Channel' .....................................................3.218 Softkey 'Delete Transmitter' ..............................................3.73
Softkey 'Add INDV ADDR' ................................................4.29 Softkey 'DELETE' .............................................................4.28
Softkey 'Add to Drafts' .......................................................5.93 Softkey 'Delete' ...................... 4.203, 5.93, 5.95, 5.97, 5.100
Softkey 'ADD' ....................................................................4.28 Softkey 'Delta FREQ' ......................................................3.161
Softkey 'AGC Threshold' .................................................3.144 Softkey 'Details' ........... 3.56, 3.61, 3.79, 3.88, 3.104, 3.107
Softkey 'AHS' ..................................................................4.170 Softkey 'DIG SEL AT' ........................................................3.52
Softkey 'Air IP Address' .....................................................5.71 Softkey 'DIG SEL' .............................................................3.51
Softkey 'Air Subnet Mask' .................................................5.72 Softkey 'Disconnect' ..........................................................3.70
Softkey 'Alert Tone' .........................................................5.100 Softkey 'DISP AMD' ..........................................................4.38
Softkey 'All Call' ................................................................4.37 Softkey 'DLM' ..................................................................3.162
Softkey 'ALM' ..................................................................4.112 Softkey 'Doppler' .............................................................4.135
Softkey 'Any Call' ..............................................................4.37 Softkey 'Drafts' ..................................................................5.94
Softkey 'Any/All ADDR' .....................................................4.30 Softkey 'DSC LIN in' .........................................................3.84
Softkey 'ATU Bypass' ................................ 3.173, 4.42, 4.190 Softkey 'DSC LIN out' .......................................................3.84
Softkey 'ATU Learn' .................................. 3.171, 4.33, 4.176 Softkey 'DSC Mode' ..........................................................3.85
Softkey 'ATU SIL' ............................................................3.172 Softkey 'DSC' ....................................................................3.95
Softkey 'ATU Tune' .........................................................3.159 Softkey 'Dwell Time RSSI Sq' .........................................3.216
Softkey 'Audio Ind .............................................................3.75 Softkey 'Dwell Time Signal Sq' .......................................3.216
Softkey 'Auto Push List' ....................................................5.28 Softkey 'Dwell Time Syll Sq' ...........................................3.216
Softkey 'BAUD' ................................................................3.165 Softkey 'ED137 URI RX' ...................................................3.81
Softkey 'BER Thres' ..........................................................4.56 Softkey 'ED137 URI TX' ....................................................3.81
Softkey 'BFO' ..................................................................3.160 Softkey 'Edit Address' ................................. 3.118, 5.83, 5.88
Softkey 'Bright' ................................................................3.121 Softkey 'Edit' ..................................4.155, 4.200, 4.205, 5.95
Softkey 'Bro Fwd' ..............................................................5.78 Softkey 'End RPT Port' .....................................................3.81
Softkey 'Broadcast ADDR' ................................................4.82 Softkey 'ENVIR' ..............................................................3.175
Softkey 'Broadcast' ...........................................................4.90 Softkey 'EOM' .................................................................4.139
Softkey 'BW' ....................................................................3.147 Softkey 'Errors' ...................................................... 3.53, 3.101
Softkey 'Call !' ...................................................................4.23 Softkey 'Exec Delay' .......................................................4.117
Softkey 'Caps Lock' ...........................................................5.97 Softkey 'Exec Mode' .......................................................4.122
Softkey 'CCT' ....................................................................4.81 Softkey 'EXL' ...................................................................4.102
Softkey 'Ch Usage' ..........................................................4.115 Softkey 'FHS Start' ..........................................................4.169
Softkey 'Channel Recall' .................................................3.136 Softkey 'FHS' ..................................................................4.184
Softkey 'Channel Store' ....................................... 3.134, 3.204 Softkey 'Fine Time REQ' ...................................................4.54
Softkey 'Channel' ..............................................................4.25 Softkey 'Firmware Version' ...............................................3.61
Softkey 'CLARIF' .............................................................3.149 Softkey 'FREQ' ...............................................................3.151
Softkey 'Clear OPL' ...........................................................5.30 Softkey 'Front Panel' .........................................................3.93
Softkey 'Close' ..................................................................5.97 Softkey 'Gateway Address' ................................... 3.76, 3.112
Softkey 'Coarse Time REQ' ..............................................4.53 Softkey 'GPS Fmt' .............................................................5.18
Softkey 'Codes' ...............................................................5.100 Softkey 'Group Address' .................................................4.166
Softkey 'Compose' ..................................................5.94, 5.95 Softkey 'GRP ADDR' ........................................................4.27
Softkey 'Configure Autopush' ............................................5.28 Softkey 'HDL Pack' ...........................................................4.98
Softkey 'ConMode' ............................................................5.80 Softkey 'HFM' ..................................................................4.140
Softkey 'Connect' ..............................................................3.70 Softkey 'Hold Time' .........................................................3.217
Softkey 'Connection Quality' ...........................................3.101 Softkey 'Hopset' ..............................................................4.178
Softkey 'Contrast' ............................................................3.121 Softkey 'IF/RF Gain' ........................................................3.143
Softkey 'CRP' ....................................................................5.31 Softkey 'Immediate PULL' .................................................5.26
Softkey 'Cursor At' ..................................................5.94, 5.95 Softkey 'Inbox' ....................................................... 5.93, 5.100
Softkey 'Data Baudrate' ....................................................3.83 Softkey 'Indicators' ..........................................................3.121
Softkey 'Data Flow' ...........................................................3.83 Softkey 'INDV ADDR' ........................................................4.17
Softkey 'Data Link Timeout' ..............................................4.93 Softkey 'Insert Address' .............................. 3.119, 5.83, 5.88
Softkey 'Data Mode' ..........................................................3.83 Softkey 'Insert Receiver' ...................................................3.72

Softkey 'Insert Transmitter' ...............................................3.72 Softkey 'Passive Time ACQ' ................................. 4.51, 4.104
Softkey 'Insert' .................................................................4.197 Softkey 'PBT' ..................................................................3.157
Softkey 'Installed Modules' ................................................3.61 Softkey 'Play LDV Message' .............................................4.83
Softkey 'INTLV' ...............................................................4.189 Softkey 'PMU Mode' .........................................................3.67
Softkey 'Intvl Data' ..........................................................4.119 Softkey 'PMU' ...................................................................3.53
Softkey 'Intvl Voice' .........................................................4.116 Softkey 'POL RX' ............................................................3.166
Softkey 'Inventory' .............................................................3.53 Softkey 'POL TX' .............................................................3.166
Softkey 'Inventroy' ...........................................................3.101 Softkey 'Position Accuracy' ...............................................5.22
Softkey 'IP Address' .............................................. 3.77, 3.113 Softkey 'POST SEL' ..........................................................3.53
Softkey 'ISB select' ...........................................................3.75 Softkey 'Power' ......................................... 3.158, 4.32, 4.173
Softkey 'Jitter Buffer' .........................................................3.81 Softkey 'PPP IP Address' ..................................................5.73
Softkey 'Key Illum' ...........................................................3.121 Softkey 'Preamp' .............................................................3.142
Softkey 'Key' ......................................................... 4.59, 4.153 Softkey 'Pre-Eding' ...........................................................5.94
Softkey 'Keyboard Test' ..................................................3.100 Softkey 'Pre-Editing' ..........................................................5.95
Softkey 'Keyset' ...............................................................4.179 Softkey 'PREV' ..................................................................3.19
Softkey 'LBT' .....................................................................4.46 Softkey 'Prio Chan' .........................................................3.219
Softkey 'LDL Byte' .............................................................4.99 Softkey 'ReBro IP Address' ...............................................5.75
Softkey 'Learn High' ........................................................3.176 Softkey 'ReBro VFw' .........................................................5.76
Softkey 'Learn Low' .........................................................3.176 Softkey 'ReBro Voice' .......................................................5.77
Softkey 'Line 6V' ...............................................................3.93 Softkey 'Release Time' ...................................................3.146
Softkey 'Line LSB' .............................................................3.93 Softkey 'Relink Mode' .....................................................4.121
Softkey 'Line TTL1' ...........................................................3.93 Softkey 'Replay' ................................................................5.93
Softkey 'Line TTL2' ...........................................................3.93 Softkey 'Response Timeout' .............................................4.45
Softkey 'Line USB' ............................................................3.93 Softkey 'Retry Count' ......................................................4.100
Softkey 'Line V.28' ............................................................3.93 Softkey 'RF LV Scale' .....................................................3.101
Softkey 'Link Mode' .................................................4.20, 4.79 Softkey 'Role' ....................................................................5.23
Softkey 'Link on lower' ......................................................4.57 Softkey 'RSSI Thres' ........................................... 3.139, 3.207
Softkey 'LINK PROT Level' ...............................................4.60 Softkey 'R-Time A1A' ......................................................3.177
Softkey 'LINK PROT' .......................................................4.111 Softkey 'R-Time A3E' ......................................................3.177
Softkey 'Link Timeout' ............................................. 4.47, 4.92 Softkey 'R-Time B8E' ......................................................3.177
Softkey 'Linked Stations' ...................................................4.22 Softkey 'R-Time J2D' ......................................................3.177
Softkey 'LLE Intvl' ............................................................4.118 Softkey 'R-Time J3E' ......................................................3.177
Softkey 'Lockout Channel' ...............................................3.210 Softkey 'RX AMD' .............................................................4.31
Softkey 'Lockout Frequency' ...........................................3.210 Softkey 'RX ANT' ..............................................................3.52
Softkey 'LQA MD' ............................................................4.103 Softkey 'Rx Data' ............................................................4.128
Softkey 'LQA RPT' ............................................................4.40 Softkey 'Rx INTL' ............................................................4.131
Softkey 'LQA RQ' ..............................................................4.39 Softkey 'SAVE' ..................................................................5.97
Softkey 'LQMon Intvl' ......................................................4.120 Softkey 'SCAN CONT' ....................................................3.212
Softkey 'LSB LIN in' ..........................................................3.76 Softkey 'SCAN EXIT' ......................................................3.212
Softkey 'LSB LIN out' ........................................................3.76 Softkey 'SCAN GRP' .........................................................4.16
Softkey 'LSU Mode' ...........................................................4.80 Softkey 'Scan Mode' .......................................................3.215
Softkey 'Max. AHS Freq.' ................................................4.185 Softkey 'SCAN PAUSE' ..................................................3.212
Softkey 'MB Length' ........................................................4.137 Softkey 'SCAN START' ...................................................3.212
Softkey 'MGC Level' ........................................................3.145 Softkey 'SCAN' ...............................................................3.212
Softkey 'Min. AHS Freq.' .................................................4.185 Softkey 'Scheduled PULL' ................................................5.27
Softkey 'MODE' ...................................................3.148, 3.211 Softkey 'Scheduled PUSH' ...............................................5.25
Softkey 'Mode' .........................................................4.24, 5.97 Softkey 'Scrn Saver' ........................................................3.120
Softkey 'MST' ....................................................................4.95 Softkey 'SDT ATT .............................................................3.75
Softkey 'Multicast Routing' ...................................... 5.83, 5.88 Softkey 'SELCAL PTT' ....................................................3.182
Softkey 'Multitone' ...........................................................3.163 Softkey 'SELF ADDR' .......................................................4.26
Softkey 'NB Type' ............................................................3.155 Softkey 'Send' ............................................. 5.95, 5.97, 5.100
Softkey 'NET ADDR' .........................................................4.18 Softkey 'Service' .............................................................4.167
Softkey 'New' .......................................................... 3.88, 5.95 Softkey 'Shift' ..................................................................3.167
Softkey 'Next Call SCAN GRP' .........................................4.16 Softkey 'SOD' ..................................................................4.136
Softkey 'NEXT' ..................................................................3.19 Softkey 'Sound Interval' ....................................................4.49
Softkey 'Notch' ................................................................3.156 Softkey 'Sound' .................................................................4.48
Softkey 'OD' ....................................................................4.106 Softkey 'SP' .....................................................................4.171
Softkey 'Op Mode' ...........................................................4.142 Softkey 'Split Site Receiver' .................................... 3.70, 3.73
Softkey 'OpMode' ..............................................................5.79 Softkey 'Split Site Transmitter' ................................ 3.70, 3.73
Softkey 'OSC' ....................................................................3.51 Softkey 'Split Site' .............................................................3.52
Softkey 'Other Pos. List (OPL)' .........................................5.30 Softkey 'SQL HANG' .......................................................3.178

Softkey 'SQL Mode' ........................................................3.179 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error Details (3012) ...................3.58
Softkey 'SQL Tone' .............................................3.138, 3.206 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error List (3011) .........................3.56
Softkey 'Squelch' .................................................3.140, 3.208 Softkeys in Menu Radio Inventory (3021) .........................3.61
Softkey 'Start (kHz)' ........................................................3.209 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001) ..........................3.51
Softkey 'Start IBIT' ................................................3.54, 3.102 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002) ..........................3.75
Softkey 'Start RPT Port' ....................................................3.81 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003) ..........................3.82
Softkey 'Start SYN CAL' ....................................................3.52 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 6/7 ................. 3.70, 3.95, 3.96
Softkey 'Station Address' ................................................4.166 Softkeys in Menu Split Site 2/2 .........................................3.72
Softkey 'Step (kHz)' .........................................................3.209 Softkeys in Menu VoIP 1/2 ...............................................3.79
Softkey 'STEP DOWN' ........................................ 3.151, 3.176 Softkeys in Menu VoIP 2/2 ...............................................3.81
Softkey 'STEP UP' ..............................................3.151, 3.176 Softkeys to Make Settings ................................................3.17
Softkey 'Stop (kHz)' .........................................................3.209 Sound Calls ........................................................................4.5
Softkey 'Subnet Mask' ........................................... 3.76, 3.112 Sounding ..........................................................................4.48
Softkey 'Syll. Thres' .............................................3.141, 3.205 Sounding Interval ..............................................................4.49
Softkey 'Terminate Link' ............................ 4.21, 4.132, 4.172 Special IP Services ...........................................................5.38
Softkey 'Thresh Data' ......................................................4.114 Speed Dial (Using the Phone Book) ...............................5.116
Softkey 'Thresh Voice' ....................................................4.113 Squelch Hangover Time .................................................3.178
Softkey 'Time ACQ' .............................................4.105, 4.174 Squelch Modes .................................................................1.15
Softkey 'Time Beacon' ....................................................4.182 Squelch Sensitivity ............................................. 3.139, 3.207
Softkey 'Time REQ INTV' ..................................................4.58 Squelch Type ...................................................... 3.140, 3.208
Softkey 'Time REV INTV' ................................................4.110 Standard (Scheduled) Transmission ..................................5.8
Softkey 'Time Server' ........................................................4.55 standard asynchronous ..................................................4.142
Softkey 'Time Source' ......................................... 4.109, 4.193 Starting ATU Learning ....................................................3.171
Softkey 'TLC Blocks' .......................................................4.138 Starting ATU Learning for ALE Channels .........................4.33
Softkey 'TRU' ..................................................................4.183 Starting ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset .................4.176
Softkey 'TTY' ...................................................................3.168 Starting ATU Tuning .......................................................3.159
Softkey 'TX AMD' ..............................................................4.19 State Transitions (Events) ................................................5.48
Softkey 'Tx Data' .............................................................4.128 State Transitions (Graphic Representation) .....................5.46
Softkey 'TX IHBT' ..............................................................3.52 State Transitions (Rebroadcast) .......................................5.48
Softkey 'Tx INTL' .............................................................4.131 Storage ...............................................................................2.2
Softkey 'Unicast Routing' ........................................ 5.83, 5.88 Storage Strategy ...............................................................5.89
Softkey 'UNPROT Time REQ' ...........................................4.52 Storing Current Settings ..................................... 3.134, 3.204
Softkey 'USB LIN in' ..........................................................3.75 Switching ATU Silent Tuning On or Off ..........................3.172
Softkey 'USB LIN out' ........................................................3.75 Switching Environment Shore or Ship ............................3.175
Softkey 'UUF' ....................................................................4.44 Switching On ....................................................................2.25
Softkey 'VC' .....................................................................3.154 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off ...... 4.51, 4.104
Softkey 'VOC TX' ............................................................4.152 Switching Protected Coarse Time Request
Softkey 'VOC' ..................................................................4.191 (Time Lag < 1 min) On or Off ............................................4.53
Softkey 'VoIP Service' .......................................................3.76 Switching Protected Fine Time Request
Softkey 'VoIP' ....................................................................3.81 (Time Lag < 2 s) On or Off ................................................4.54
Softkey 'VOX HANG' .......................................................3.180 Switching the Acceptance of All Call On or Off .................4.37
Softkey 'VOX SENS' .......................................................3.181 Switching the Acceptance of an ALE-2G Call On or Off ...4.91
Softkey 'VOX' ...................................................... 3.153, 4.175 Switching the Acceptance of Any Call On or Off ..............4.37
Softkey 'VPoD' ................................................................4.108 Switching the Acceptance of Broadcast Call On or Off ....4.90
Softkey 'Weight' ................................................................4.41 Switching the Acceptance of Calls with a
Softkey 'WF' ....................................................................4.186 Lower Linking Protection Level On or Off .........................4.57
Softkey 'Wild Call' .............................................................4.37 Switching the Acceptance of LQA Exchange On or Off ..4.101
Softkey 'xDL Mode' ...........................................................4.96 Switching the Acceptance of Wildcard Call On or Off .......4.37
Softkey ‘Auto Push List' ...................... 5.24, 5.25, 5.26, 5.27 Switching the Advanced Hopset On or Off .....................4.170
Softkey Local Address' ...................................................3.118 Switching the ALE-3G ALM Enable On or Off ................4.112
Softkey PEP / PAvg ........................................................3.164 Switching the ALE-3G Linking Protection On or Off .......4.111
Softkeys ............................................................................3.16 Switching the Automatic Gain Control On or Off ............3.143
Softkeys for Navigation .....................................................3.19 Switching the Controller Reports Position as
Softkeys in Menu CU Error Details (4012) ......................3.105 Controller Feature On or Off .............................................5.31
Softkeys in Menu CU Error List (4011) ...........................3.104 Switching the Default Link Mode for Voice On or Off .......4.43
Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory (4021) ...........................3.107 Switching the EOM Flag .................................................4.139
Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory Details ..........................3.109 Switching the Free Hopset Search Mode On or Off .......4.184
Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 1/4 (4001) ............................3.100 Switching the Local Voice Mode for Rebroadcast
Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 2/4 .......................................3.112 On or Off ...........................................................................5.77
Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 3/4 .......................................3.118 Switching the LQA Mode On or Off ................................4.103
Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 4/4 (4004) ............................3.120 Switching the LQA Report On or Off .................................4.40

Switching the LQA Request On or Off ..............................4.39 Unicast Routing Table ......................................................5.82
Switching the Multitone Function On or Off ....................3.163 Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Positioning
Switching the Occupancy Detection On or Off ................4.106 Information ........................................................................5.18
Switching the Popup for Received AMD Messages Unpacking and Checking ....................................................2.1
On or Off ...........................................................................4.38 Unprotected Time Request (Random Value) ....................4.52
Switching the Priority Based Session Management UPDATE NEEDED ...........................................................2.27
On or Off ...........................................................................4.95 User Hopset ....................................................................4.194
Switching the Radio Off ....................................................2.30 User Hopset Subband ............................ 4.197, 4.200, 4.203
Switching the Radio On ....................................................2.23 User Information .................................................................1.1
Switching the Relay IP Mode for Broadcast On or Off ......5.78 User Keyset ....................................................................4.205
Switching the Rx Preamplifier On and Off ......................3.142 User Unique Functions .......................................................4.5
Switching the Sounding On or Off .....................................4.48 User Unquite Function ......................................................4.44
Switching the Time Beacon Mode On or Off ...................4.182 User-defined COMSEC Key for SDV Communication ....4.155
Switching the Time Synchronization On or Off ...............4.105 UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator Positioning
Switching the User Unquite Function On or Off ................4.44 Information) ......................................................................5.18
Switching the Voice Compressor On or Off ....................3.154
Switching the Voice Forward Mode for Rebroadcast V
On or Off ...........................................................................5.76 Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features ..............5.12
Switching the VOX Signal Source ....................... 3.153, 4.175 Viewing the GPS Position Accuracy .................................5.22
Syllabic Squelch Threshold ................................. 3.141, 3.205 Visual Inspection ................................................................6.1
Synthesizer .........................................................................1.8 Vocoder ..........................................................................4.191
Synthesizer Calibration .......................................................7.4 Voice Communication .......................................................1.14
System Cabling for HF Broadband System ......................2.21 Voice Communication inside the Radio Network during
System Cabling for Receiver / Exciter ..............................2.16 a Session ........................................................................5.110
System Cabling for Transceiver ........................................2.19 Voice Compressor ..........................................................3.154
Voice Forward Mode for Rebroadcast ..............................5.76
T
Voice Forwarding Selection on MMI .................................5.60
Technical Data ....................................................................8.1 Voice over IP (VoIP) .......................................................5.101
Telescopic slides .................................................................2.3 Voice Priority over IP Data .................................... 4.69, 4.108
Terminating a Link ................................................4.21, 4.172 Voice Stream Conversion between Radio and
Terminating an Active Call Session ................................5.118 VoIP Network ..................................................................5.109
Terminating the Data Transmission ................................4.132 VOICE_O_DATA ............................................................4.167
Terminating the Session .................................................5.124 VOICE_O_IPD ................................................................4.168
Text Editor .........................................................................5.96 VoIP (Voice over IP) .......................................................5.101
Time Acquisition ..............................................................4.174 VoIP Gateway Radio Invites an External VoIP User to a
Time Beacon ...................................................................4.159 SIP Session ....................................................................5.122
Time Beacon Mode .........................................................4.182 Volume Control ...................................................................3.7
Time Reference Unit .......................................................4.183 VOX Holdtime .................................................................3.180
Time Request Interval ........................................... 4.58, 4.110 VOX Sensitivity ...............................................................3.181
Time Source ........................................................ 4.109, 4.193 VOX Signal Source ............................................. 3.153, 4.175
Time Synchronization ......................................... 4.105, 4.158
Time to Keep radio (Net Station) Synchronized ..................4.8 W
Time Uncertainty Definition .................................................4.6 Warnings ............................................................................6.4
Timeout for Data Links ......................................................4.93 Waveform .......................................................................4.186
Toggle softkey ...................................................................3.17 Waveform Message ........................................................4.107
Tones ..................................................................................3.8 Weight of a New LQA Event .............................................4.41
TRANSEC .......................................................................4.158 WRONG REF FREQ ........................................................7.10
Transmitter / Receiver Signal Polarity .............................3.166
Transport .............................................................................2.2 X
Transport Layer .................................................................5.36
Troubleshooting ..................................................................6.3 xDL (ARQ protocols) .........................................................4.79
TTY RUN/STOP Selection ..............................................3.168 xDL Mode .........................................................................4.96
Tx Data Rate ...................................................................4.128 xDL Port Setting ...............................................................4.87
Tx Interleaver Length ......................................................4.131 XK4115A ............................................................................1.1
TX Message ......................................................................4.19 XK4115D ............................................................................1.1
Type of Link Setup ............................................................4.80
Z
Types of GPS Transmission ...............................................5.7
ZF4101, mod. 04 ................................................................2.8
U ZF4101, mod. 05 ................................................................2.6

ZF4401, mod. 02 ...............................................................2.10

M3SR Series 4100 User Information
1 User Information
This description deals with the following equipment:
• R&S EK4100A / R&S EK4100D Receiver

• R&S GX4100A / R&S GX4100D Receiver / Exciter
• R&S XK4115A / R&S XK4115D Transceiver
• R&S GV4190A / R&S GV4190D Power Management Unit (PMU)
Applicable software and options are shown in Table 1.1. Throughout this manual reference
is made to the ‘radio’ in general, differences are pointed out, where necessary.
Table 1.1 Applicable Software and Software Options (Option Keys)
DS 4100D
DS 4100A
R&S MR4100E HF Receiver (Basic) x x
R&S MR4100G HF Receiver / Exciter (Basic) x x
R&S MR4100X Transceiver (Basic) x x
R&S MR4100G-B PMU (Basic) x x
R&S GS3001S SECOM-H x
R&S GS4101S ALE-2G x x
R&S GS4155S ALE-2G / ALE-3G x
R&S GM4120S HF Modem x
R&S GM4122S HF Modem x
R&S GS4114S Link Software x

Option Keys
(SW options)
R&S GS4123S MULTITONE x
R&S GS4157S RSS-181 CONFORMITY x x
R&S GS4115S Selective Level Control (PA) x x
R&S GM4121S Secure Voice / Data x
R&S GS4156S Split Site x x
R&S GS4117S CE Conformity Mark x x
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 1.1

With the activated option R&S GS4117S the HF transceivers of the

R&S M3SR Series 4100 family were tested in accordance with
ETSI EN 300 373-1 V1.2.1 (2002-10) with the following deviation:
• ETSI EN 300 373-1 / 7.6 Corrosion Test

The device must be operated in a room where it is protected against the effects of cor-
rosive environment.
1.1 General Features

Figure 1.1 R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radio (Front View)
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
The R&S M3SR Series 4100 of HF radios represents a new, innovative and versatile gener-
ation of software defined radios that extends the popular R&S M3SR Radio Family to include
the HF frequency range.
1.2 Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

Beside the traditional classes of emission used in HF radiocommunications (A1A, J3E and
J2D in the upper and lower sidebands, A3E, F3E, F1B, B8E, B7D, R3E and H3E), the fol-
lowing important standards from the "HF house" are integrated and available as software
options:
HF modems STANAG-4285, 4481, 4529 and 5065, 4415, 4539, Annex B,

MIL-STD-188-110B and the ISB modem MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F automatic link es-
tablishment (ALE), 2nd generation, MIL-STD-188-141B, App. A + B automatic link establish-
ment (ALE), 3rd generation, STANAG-4538 (fast link setup) data link protocols LDL, HDL
from STANAG-4538
This series provides an EPM (ECCM) method for secure and jam-resistant voice and data
links. With the exception of the independent sidetone emissions B8E, B7D,
MIL-STD-188-110B Appendix F and the navy modem standards STANAG-4481 and
STANAG-5065, it is fully interoperable with the Rohde & Schwarz family R&S M3TR.
Important equipment functions such as automatic link establishment (ALE) or several

HF modems are implemented purely in software.
The radios support frequency hopping and provide interoperability with the
R&S M3TR Family.
R&S M3SR Series 4100 offers solutions to all aspects of HF radiocommunications as well
as a uniform interlogistics concept. The transceiver family is primarily designed for use on
board ships, in coastal stations and semi-mobile shelters.
The main features of R&S M3SR Series 4100 are:
• Unrivaled radio parameters

- Collocation capability due to excellent receiver and transmitter specifications
- Selective level control for optimum transmit power (SW option)
- Frequency-agile pre-/post-selectors improve large-signal characteristics
(HW option)
- Digital IF and audio signal processing
• GMDSS interface for the integration in naval DSC systems (HW option)
• Flexible range of applications
- Software defined radio system
- HF house with embedded ALE 2nd, 3rd generation and several HF modems from
75 bps up to 19200 bps (SW option)
- Three power classes (150 W, 500 W and 1000 W) and suitable line of accessories
- Local or remote operation
- Power supplies for several standard electrical networks
- AMBE (Advanced Multi-Band Excitation), MMBE (Modified Multi-Band Excitation)
and MELP (Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction) vocoders provide optimal voice com-
prehensibility for difficult propagation conditions Free Hopset Search improves link
quality in a heavily jammed or distorted environment

• Secure communication
- EPM (ECCM) method R&S SECOM-H for secure and jam-resistant voice and data
links
- Powerful crypto algorithm
- Management of "black" keys offers additional security
- Data link capability in line with STANAG-5511 and STANAG-5522 (SW option)
- Centralized network, crypto, and frequency management capabilities for configuring
Rohde & Schwarz radio networks
• Low maintenance effort
- Rugged design, suitable even for difficult environmental conditions
- Excellent reliability
- Hardware complies with relevant MIL standards dealing with environmental
conditions
• Powerful built-in-test (BIT) with clear text messages and pop-up message windows
- Error log available
1.2 Explanation of Models

Differences between model 12 and 22:
Model 12:
• Frontend (5300.0970.02)
• Radio Controller (6126.4877.02)
Model 22:
• Frontend (6119.4552.02)
• Radio Controller (6140.7240.02)
1.3 Required Personnel

Configuration of the radio must be done by qualified personnel. Skilled personnel are needed
for the installation and the operation of the radio.
The personnel must be familiar with the relevant documentation.

1.4 Design
All radios consist of the following modules:
• Front Panel
• Motherboard
• R&S IN4400A AC/DC Power Supply (Receiver)
• Power Supply (Receiver / Exciter)
• Power Amplifier (Transceiver)
• PMU Unit (Power Management Unit)
• Frontend
• Synthesizer
• Radio Controller
• Interface Module
• Antenna Interface
• Additional internal hardware options
- R&S FK4120 20 dB Digital Selector
- R&S FK4140 40 dB Digital Selector
- R&S GB4000C Comfort Control Unit
- R&S GS4102 NMEA Interface
• Software options (see Table 1.1)

Figure 1.2 R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radio, e.g. Transceiver (Top View without Cover, Example)
4 3
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00005-A-01-1

1 Interface Module
2 Power Amplifier
3 Front Panel
4 R&S GB4000C (option)
5 R&S FK4120 (option)
6 Synthesizer
7 Frontend
8 Radio Controller

1.5 Functioning of e.g. Receiver / Exciter

The modules are controlled and monitored by the control logic, part of the module Mother-
board. In addition, the control logic contains a memory for configuration data and module
parameters.
The Radio Controller (= RC) as a central module controls the entire radio and handles all
user voice and data services. The RC consists of a microcontroller with external memory,
and digital signal processors (= DSP) and control logic. The control interface to the modules
is the parallel radio control bus (RCB). The control interface to the power amplifier is the se-
rial radio control bus. The enhanced serial synchronous interface (= ESSI) is the digital in-
terface between digital IF processing on the radio controller and IF sampling/IQ modulation
in the frontend.
When the radio operates in receive mode, the radio frequency signal is taken from antenna
connector X2112 to the module Frontend. In the frontend, the radio frequency signal is
transmitted along the HF path to the mixer stages. The mixer stages get the LO signals (LO1:
40.058 MHz to 70.048 MHz, LO2: 80 MHz) from the module synthesizer. The AGC-con-
trolled 2nd IF signal with a frequency of 48 kHz is demodulated in the digital section of the
frontend.
In transmit operation, the signal generation of the modulated carrier at 48 kHz is achieved by
a direct digital synthesizer (= DDS) with a digital quadrature modulator. Afterwards the IF is
upconverted to the final RF frequency. This is done by mixer stages. The mixed signal is am-
plified for low noise generation. Unwanted products of the mixed signal are suppressed with
a pre-selector and a low-pass filter, respectively.
The module Synthesizer generates two RF signals (LO1, LO2) for the module frontend and
two reference signals (100 kHz, 10 kHz) for other modules. All generated frequencies are
synchronized by an internal 10 MHz oven-controlled crystal oscillator (= OCXO) or by an ex-
ternal 1 MHz, 5 MHz or 10 MHz reference frequency.
The module Power Supply uses the +28 VDC input voltage to generate all voltages required
in the radio.
The Interface Module connects the RCB and discrete signals between the motherboard and
up to three further rear modules.
The audio Front Panel accommodates control and display elements.
The optional module Control Unit plus the FSW0 software form the man-machine interface
(= MMI) of the radio. The MMI guides the operator through menu-based operating proce-
dures and selectively visualizes all status types on the display. Commands are entered by
making use of the control elements and the keypad. Operation and indication of the radio's
operating status are both menu-oriented, operator interaction is performed via the display
and keyboard.

1.6 General Data

For more information refer to sect. 9 Drawings

M3SR Series 4100 Required Power Supply
1.7 Required Power Supply
1.7.1 Required Power Supply for Receiver
No power supply is required.
The internal Power Supply R&S IN4400A needs an input voltage of

100 V AC to 240 V AC / 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
The radio may also be powered by an external battery (19V DC to 31 V DC). An automatic
switchover facility integrated in the radio provides for automatic standby switchover in case
primary power fails.

M3SR Series 4100 Required Power Supply for Receiver / Exciter or PMU
1.7.2 Required Power Supply for Receiver / Exciter or PMU
The 500 W / 1000 W transceiver system needs several supply voltages, provided by the ex-
ternal R&S IN4150 or R&S IN4190 Power Supply ((see Figure 1.3), same appearance). The
power supply is available in several models which are designed for different input voltages
(see table overleaf). All models support emergency operation (21 V DC to 29.5 V DC,
I < 35 A). The DC cable is not supplied.
Mating connectors are contained in R&S ZS4101 Mating Connector Set (for R&S MG4100G)
and R&S ZS4103 Mating Connector Set (for R&S VK4190).
Figure 1.3 R&S IN4190 Power Supply
ICN-4D-D-231000-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
The BATT LED is switched off if the main power supply fails; however, the radio and
amplifers are still connected to the battery.

M3SR Series 4100 Required Power Supply for Receiver / Exciter or PMU
Table 1.2 Available Power Supply Models
Type designation Order no. Model Supply Vin Frequency (Hz)
R&S IN4150 6120.0705.02 02 1/3PH (+n) 230 V AC (1PH)+10/-15% 47 to 63
208 V AC ()+10/-15% 47 to 63
230 V AC (Y)+10/-15% 47 to 63
R&S IN4190 6120.2708.02 02 1/3PH (+n) 230 V AC (1PH)+10/-15% 47 to 63
208 V AC ()+10/-15% 47 to 63
230 V AC (Y)+10/-15% 47 to 63
115 V AC (1PH)+/-20% 47 to 63
R&S IN4150 6120.0705.12 12 DC 220 V DC -
R&S IN4190 6120.2708.12 12 DC 220 V DC -
R&S IN4150 6120.0705.03 03 3PH 440 V AC ()+/-20% 47 to 63
R&S IN4190 6120.2708.03 03 3PH 440 V AC ()+/-20% 47 to 63

M3SR Series 4100 Required Power Supply for Transceiver
1.7.3 Required Power Supply for Transceiver
The radio operates on a DC voltage of 28 V DC (28 V DC to 29 V DC). This voltage is pro-

vided as an option by the external R&S IN4000A Power Supply (19" rackmount of 1 height
unit, see Figure 1.4) available for the purpose. The connecting cable between radio and
R&S IN4000A is available on demand. The radio may also be powered by an external battery
(19 V DC to 31 V DC). An automatic switchover facility integrated in the radio provides for
automatic standby switchover in case primary power fails.
Figure 1.4 R&S IN4000A Power Supply
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-02003-A-01-1
If the transceiver is not supplied by R&S IN4000A, please check the transceiver DC
supply voltage very carefully.

M3SR Series 4100 Communication Capabilities
1.8 Communication Capabilities
1.8.1 Voice Communication
Voice transmission is possible in both digital and analog mode. Depending on the software
configuration, the radio is able to transmit and receive the signal modulations in the RF band
(emission designators according to CCIR) as listed in Table 1.3.
Table 1.3 Signal Modulations
Type of emission Abbreviation (old) Abbreviation (new, acc. to

WARC 1979)
Amplitude change signalling, no CW A1A

modulation, Morse telegraphy
Amplitude modulation, double side- AM A3E

band and carrier
Single sideband, full carrier AME H3E
Single sideband, reduced carrier A3A R3E
Single sideband, upper sideband, USB J3E+

suppressed carrier
Single sideband, lower sideband, LSB J3E-

suppressed carrier
Single sideband, suppressed carri- Modem operation USB J2D+

er, digital modulated subcarrier in
upper sideband
Single sideband, suppressed carri- Modem operation LSB J2D-

er, digital modulated subcarrier in
lower sideband
Frequency modulation, voice trans- FM F3E

mission
Frequency modulation, voice trans-

mission, wideband
Frequency modulation, digital FSK F1D

transmission without subcarrier
Amplitude modulation, independent ISB B8E

sideband, acc. to
MIL-STD188-110B, app. F
Amplitude modulation, independent Modem operation ISB B7D

sideband, modem operation, acc.
to MIL-STD188-203

M3SR Series 4100 Communication Capabilities
Squelch Modes
The following squelch functions are incorporated:
• Carrier squelch RSSI (Receive Signal Strength Indication)

• Signal squelch (tone frequency selectable from a list)
• Syllabic squelch (voice-operated squelch)
• Squelch off
Embedded Digital Voice Services (only in optional R&S SECOM-H mode)
For digital voice transmission the following vocoders are implemented as software modules:
• The AMBE (Advanced Multiband Excitation) vocoder (plain digital voice) with a code rate
of 2400 bit/s.
• The MELP (Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction) vocoder with a code rate of 2400 bit/s
and 600 bit/s.
• The MMBE (Mixed Multiband Excitation) vocoder with a code rate of 2400 bit/s and
1200 bit/s.
1.8.2 Data Communication
The software-loadable modems provide for data communication in two modes:
• Fixed Frequency (direct FSK)

The data interface provides adjustable data rates in steps of 50 bit/s, 75 bit/s, 150 bit/s,
300 bit/s and 600 bit/s. The data interface works in transparent mode.
• Optional R&S SECOM-H (2.4 kbit/s)
R&S SECOM-H supports data rates of 300 bit/s, 600 bit/s, 1200 bit/s and 2400 bit/s with
FEC
• Optional HF Data modems
Several HF modems are available with SW option R&S GM4120S HF Modem.
Data rates from 75 bit/s up to 19200 bit/s are supported.
• Optional R&S GS4155S ALE-2G / ALE-3G with data protocols HDL/LDL
This SW option offers data transfer using the ALE-3G burst waveforms and an embed-
ded ARQ protocol.

M3SR Series 4100 Radio Control
1.9 Radio Control

The control unit and the radio front panel are the main user interface to control and monitor
the radio operation (for details see sect. 3 Operation). The radio as stand-alone tabletop unit
with built-in control unit is shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure 1.5 Radio with Built-In Control Unit
1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1
1 Built-In Control Unit

2 Radio Front Panel
The radio without built-in control unit but with a remote control unit (R&S GB4000C) is shown
in Figure 1.6. The remote control unit is connected to the radio via LAN (Local Area Network).

Figure 1.6 Radio with Additional Remote Control Unit
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1
1 Remote Control Unit

2 Network (LAN) the Radio and Control Unit are connected to
3 Radio with Built-In Control Unit

To guarantee the proper operation of both radio and control unit connected to a local
area network (LAN), the IP settings of the radio as well as the IP settings of the control
unit need to be configured accordingly before connecting radio and control unit to the
LAN (see sect. 2.8 Basic Configuration of the Radio and sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration
of the Control Unit).
Once the radio has been configured via control unit, the radio can operate without control
unit. This is possible due to the fact that the radio with all parts necessary for transmitting,
receiving and data processing can operate completely independent of the control unit. In the
same way the control unit is independent from the radio.
Therefore in the remainder of the document a reference to 'radio' always means the trans-
ceiver or receiver, without control unit.
The term 'control unit' is used where there is no difference between the built-in (local) control
unit and a remote (stand-alone) control unit. Differences are only mentioned where neces-
sary.
1.9.1 Radio with Several Control Units
The radio can service the built-in control unit as well as up to two remote control units at the
same time. All the control units are connected to the radio via LAN (see Figure 1.7).

Figure 1.7 Radio with Built-In Control Unit and with two Remote Control Units
1 1
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00012-A-01-1

2 Network (LAN) the Radio and Control Units are connected to

A radio can service several control units, but only one control unit can have opera-
tional access rights at a time, the other control units can have only monitoring rights
(for details about radio access rights see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit).
1.9.2 Several Radios and Control Units in a Network
Several radios and control units may be connected to a local area network (LAN, see
Figure 1.8). Each radio and each control unit is identified by a unique IP address. The control
units can reach the radios in the network using the unique radio IP addresses. Due to this
fact any radio connected to the LAN can be operated and monitored by any control unit con-
nected to the same LAN. Precondition is that all the components in the LAN, in particular ra-
dios and control units, are configured accordingly in advance (see sect. 2.8 Basic
Configuration of the Radio and sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit).

Figure 1.8 Several Radios and Remote Control Units in a Network (Example)
1 3
1 3
4 4
2 3
4 6
1 6
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00013-A-01-1

2 Radio without Built-In Control Unit
4 Hub (Network Component)
5 Router (Network Component)
6 e.g. further radios


M3SR Series 4100 Getting Started
2 Getting Started
2.1 Unpacking, Checking, Packing, Transport and Storage
2.1.1 Unpacking and Checking
After delivery carry out the following steps:
1. Check the packaging for damage.

2. Unpack the delivered goods.
3. Check the delivered goods (including accessories) against the delivery note.
4. Check the delivered goods for signs of transport damage.
5. Contact the shipping agent immediately, if damage is found.
6. Keep the packaging (box etc.) for later use, e.g. if the radio is to be sent to
7. Rohde & Schwarz for service. You can find the current address of your representa-
tive on our homepage www.rohde-schwarz.com. Navigate to Service & Support / Service
Locations.
2.1.2 Packing
Prior to any transport carry out the following steps:
1. Use the original package (box etc.) and packaging material, if possible, to prevent me-
chanical and electrical damage. Make sure that the stability of the packaging is adequate
to the contents.
2. Put the unit in the plastic bag (protection against moisture and dust).
3. Put the unit in the package by using the packaging material. Avoid direct lateral contact
between unit and packaging.
4. Seal the package.
5. Affix a HANDLE WITH CARE label on the package.
6. Remove the old address and shipment labels from the package and affix the new ones.

M3SR Series 4100 Unpacking, Checking, Packing, Transport and Storage
2.1.3 Transport
For data such as permissible altitude for air transport see the data sheet.
During transport provide sufficient mechanical and antistatic protection of the unit (see
”Packing” on p. 2.1)!
2.1.4 Storage
For data such as permissible storage temperature see the data sheet.
Store the unit in a dry dust-free place. Otherwise pack the unit (e.g. seal it in antistatic foil).
Unless otherwise specified, we recommend to put the unit into operation once a year for at
least three hours. This helps to extend the unit's service life, in particular the durability of the
electrolytic capacitors contained therein (by preventing disintegration of dielectric).
The unit contains a lithium battery which should be replaced once every five years. For fur-
ther information see the Service Manual (on separate order only).

M3SR Series 4100 Installation and Removal
2.2 Installation and Removal

Refer to (sect. 9 Drawings: Interface Description).
Installation
For installation (see Figure 2.1) into a 19" rack with telescopic slides proceed as follows:
1. Take the right-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as possible.

2. Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
3. Attach the innermost slide to the right-hand side panel of the radio with four Phillips
screws and the associated washers.
4. Take the left-hand telescopic slide and extend it as far as possible.
5. Press the automatic unlocking device and pull the innermost slide completely out.
6. Attach the innermost slide to the left-hand side panel of the radio with four Phillips screws
and the associated washers.
7. Take the outer telescopic slides and mount them to the rack.
8. Insert the radio, with its slides fitted, into the extended slides of the rack and slide it in
until the stop is reached.
9. Fasten the radio to the rack using four screws.

Figure 2.1 Installation into a 19" Rack, Example
.1
92
.1
92
.1
92
1
.5
29 .1)
(29
3
2
26.4
12.4 11.2
7.4
4
16
42.9
35.9
6 5
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00148-A-01-1

1 Fixing at rack at the front-side

2 The maximum screw-in depth is 3.5 mm
3 8 x Phillips screws M4 x 6 (Ident. no.: 0396.8181.00)
8 x washers (Ident. no.: 0005.0315.00)
4 Telescopic slide (Ident. no.: 0657.5807.00 (6105.9263.00))
5 Extension of the telescopic slide: 377.7 mm (530.1 mm)
6 Side length: 457.2 mm (508 mm)
The telescopic slides are available on demand (Ident. no. 0657.5807.00, only for racks
provided for a fixed depth of 600 mm and accessible from the rear, or 6105.9263.00 for
trailing cable installation).
The load capacity for the telescopic slides is 380 N.
Removal
Remove radio in reverse order of installing it.

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling
2.3 Rear Cabling
2.3.1 Rear Cabling for Receiver
Connect the mains cable only after all other wiring has been made.
The unit has an all-pole protection (neutral line protection).
If an external power supply is used to provide the device with extra-low DC voltage
(SELV), the requirements for reinforced or double insulation according to
DIN/EN/IEC 61010 (UL 3111, CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1) or DIN/EN/IEC 60950
(UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950) have to be fulfilled.
The R&S M3SR Series 4100 radio includes a single mode transceiver, which is a
class 1 laser product. It complies with EN 60825-1 and FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and
1040.11. The optical connector X21 (RCB SER) of the radio is to be terminated with
another optical connector or with a dust plug.
For detailed information on connectors and contact assignment see the interface de-
scription (sect. 9 Drawings).
Mating connectors are contained in R&S ZF4101 Mating Connector Set (6120.5007.05).

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling
Necessary cabling at the rear side:
Figure 2.2 Rear Connectors of Receiver
1 2 3 4 5
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-02006-A-01-1
1 Mains Connector X1
2 Ground Connector
3 Rx Antenna Connector X2111
4 not used in this application
5 GPS Antenna Connector X2113
6 LAN Connector X20
7 REMOTE Connector X24
8 RCB SER Connector X21(control)
9 DATA/RS232 Connector X23
10 AUDIO/PTT Connector X26
11 EXT SYNC Connector X10
13 Connector X32 (BATTERY) to external battery
In case of a power supply failure the system switches automatically to a 28 V DC battery sup-
ply which can be connected to X32.

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling for Receiver / Exciter
2.3.2 Rear Cabling for Receiver / Exciter
When using an RF broadband system provide appropriate lightning protection and

grounding.

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling for Receiver / Exciter
Figure 2.3 Rear Connectors of Receiver / Exciter
1 2 3 4
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1
1 Ground Connector
3 Rx/Tx Connector X2112 to external power amplifier (e.g. R&S VK4150 or R&S VK4190)
5 LAN Connector X20
7 RCB SER Connector X21(control) to external power amplifier (e.g. R&S VK4150 or R&S
VK4190)
11 Connector X31 (DC IN) to external power amplifier (e.g. R&S VK4150 or R&S VK4190))
The cable between connector X31 DC IN (part of the radio) and the relevant connector
of the power amplifier is available on demand.
In case of a power supply failure the system switches automatically to a 28 VDC battery sup-

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling for Transceiver
2.3.3 Rear Cabling for Transceiver
Keep off the antenna while transmission is in progress. During transmission danger-
ous high voltages and electromagnetic fields are produced. Respect the instructions
of DIN VDE 0842-2 and the ICNIRP (international commission on non-ionizing radia-
tion protection) guidelines for non-ionizing emission (see www.icnirp.com).

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling for Transceiver
Figure 2.4 Rear Connectors of Transceiver
1 2 3 4
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00007-A-01-1
1 Antenna Connector X30

2 Ground Connector
5 LAN Connector X20
7 RCB SER Connector X21(control)
11 Connector X31 (DC IN)
The cable between connector X31 DC IN (part of the radio) and the relevant connector
of the power supply is available on demand.
• R&S IN4000A: R&S GK4103 Cable (6120.5807.xx, xx = 05: 0.5 m, 10: 1.0 m or 25:
2.5 m)

M3SR Series 4100 Rear Cabling for Power Management Unit
2.3.4 Rear Cabling for Power Management Unit

grounding.

Figure 2.5 Rear Connectors of Power Management Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
24
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00008-A-01-1

1 Multi-purpose Input/Output Connector X457 (MP I O)

2 HF Connector X602 (GX2) to X604 (GX4) to external receiver / exciter
3 Ground Connector
4 HF Connector X635 (TO PMU) to external PMU
5 HF Connector X611 (VK1) to X614 (VK4) to R&S VK4190 1 kW Power Amplifier
6 DELAY B Connector X638
9 LAN Connector X20 for remote control and software updates
11 RCB SER Connector X21(control) to R&S VK4190 1 kW Power Amplifier (VK1)
13 DELAY A Connector X637
15 HF Connector X636 (FROM PMU) to external PMU
17 RCB SER Connector X436 (FROM PMU) to external PMU
18 Connector X31 (DC IN) to R&S VK4190 1 kW Power Amplifier
19 RCB SER Connector X435 (TO PMU) to external PMU
21 RCB SER Connector X412 (VK2) to X414 (VK4) to R&S VK4190 1 kW Power Amplifier
23 RCB SER Connector X402 (GX2) to X404 (GX4) to external receiver / exciter
24 Monitoring Connector X451 (FK1) to X456 (FK6) to external combiner (R&S FK4192 and/or
R&S FK4194) and/or Diplexer R&S FK2960 and/or Triplexer R&S FK2950

M3SR Series 4100 Front Cabling
2.4 Front Cabling

Necessary cabling at the front side:
Figure 2.6 Front Cabling
2 1
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00009-A-01-1
1 Headset Connector for e.g. R&S GA3002

2 Fillgun Connector for e.g. R&S GP3000

M3SR Series 4100 System Cabling
2.5 System Cabling
2.5.1 System Cabling for Receiver / Exciter

Figure 2.7 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190 and R&S IN4190
3 2
7
4
5
8
9
10 6
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00014-A-02-1

1 Control Cable / Fiber Optic (receiver / exciter X21 – power amplifier X31), R&S GK4101,
6120.5607.xx (xx: 10 = 1.0 m, 35 = 3.5 m, 50 = 50 m)
2 DC Cable (receiver / exciter X31 – power amplifier X24), R&S GK4104, 6120.5907.xx
(05 = 0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)
3 RF Cable (receiver / exciter X2112 – power amplifier X20)

R&S GK4105 6120.3604.03 (03 = 3 m)
4 Control Cable (power amplifier X23 – power supply X33)
R&S GK4106 6120.3656.03 (03 = 30 m)
5 DC Cable (power amplifier X21 – power supply X34)
R&S GK4107 6120.3704.03 (03 = 3 m)
6 Ground Connection (M6)
7 Antenna Tuning Unit Connection (Control)
R&S FK4190M / R&SFK2900M: R&S GK2903M 6117.9757.xx
R&S FK4150U: R&S GK2903 6117.9505.xx
(xx = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 = 80 m, 99 = 100 m)
8 Antenna or Antenna Tuning Unit Connection (RF), Type N
9 Mains Connection
10 Battery Connection
For the connection of an R&S BV4190 Transformer 440 V to R&S IN4150 / R&S IN4190 (.03)
use a cable of the type R&S GK4108 6120.3756.03.
For further system cablings for receiver/exciter see sect. 9 Drawings.

M3SR Series 4100 System Cabling for Transceiver
2.5.2 System Cabling for Transceiver

M3SR Series 4100 System Cabling for Transceiver
Figure 2.8 System Cabling for Transceiver
1 2 3
6 5
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00136-A-01-1
1 Mains Connection
2 Ground Connection
4 DC cable (R&S IN4000A Power Supply – R&S XK4115), for instance R&S GK4103,
6120.5807.xx ( xx: 05 = 0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)

M3SR Series 4100 System Cabling for HF Broadband System
2.5.3 System Cabling for HF Broadband System
(SELV), the requirements for reinforced or double insulation according t

grounding.

M3SR Series 4100 System Cabling for HF Broadband System
For basic information, see sect. 2.5 System Cabling.
The connections
• receiver / exciter X31 – power amplifier X24,

• power amplifier X23 – power supply X34,
• ground connection,
• mains connection and
• battery connection
are needed for the HF broadband system as well.
For information concerning the remaining HF broadband cabling, see sect. 9 Drawings.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Radio On
2.6 Switching the Radio On

Minimum Requirements
Before putting the radio into operation make sure that the following minimum requirements
are met:
• Power supply is switched on (see the power supply documentation).

• Check relevant rear and front cabling.
See
- sect. 2.3 Rear Cabling
- sect. 2.4 Front Cabling
- sect. 2.5 System Cabling
Figure 2.9 Switching the Radio On
4 3 1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00015-A-01-1
1. Radio Button ON / OFF

2. Radio LED AC / DC
3. Radio LED BATT (Battery)
4. Radio LED GO

Figure 2.10 Switching the Radio with Built-In Control Unit On
5 6 7 8 4 3 1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00016-A-01-1
1 Radio Button ON / OFF

2 Radio LED AC / DC
3 Radio LED BATT (Battery)
4 Radio LED GO
5 Control Unit Button ON / OFF
6 Control Unit LED ON
7 Control Unit LED CU
8 Control Unit LED GO

Switching On
For HF-Broadband system (HF-BB)
All system components has to be switched on at the same time (R&S GV4190 and all
R&S GX4100 and R&S VK4190).
By pressing 'ON/OFF' (1 and Figure 2.10) at the radio front panel the radio is switched on. If
a built-in control unit is installed, it will be switched on automatically, too.
The 'ON/OFF' button (5) at a built-in control unit does not switch the radio on (see
Figure 2.10).
After switching the radio on it takes a few seconds for the boot process to complete. When
the boot process has finished, the following LEDs at the radio front panel are illuminated to
indicate readiness for operation:
• Radio LED AC / DC (2, Figure 2.10) or LED BATT (3 and Figure 2.10): power available
• Radio LED GO (4, Figure 2.10): radio ok
Switching the radio on automatically also switches a built-in control unit on. After switching
on, the built-in control unit comes up with the Home menu (see sect. 3.3 Control and Moni-
toring of Radio and Control Unit) and the following LEDs at the built-in control unit are illumi-
nated:
• Control Unit LED ON (6): control unit is switched on

• Control Unit LED CU (7): control unit is fully operative
When the built-in control unit is connected to the radio, the control unit LED GO (8)
indicates that this radio is fully operative.

For R&S IN4150 / R&S IN4190
The BATT LED is switched off if the main power supply fails; however, the radio and ampli-
fers are still connected to the battery.

M3SR Series 4100 Automatic Update of Modules
2.6.1 Automatic Update of Modules
The radios test the firmware versions of connected internal and external hardware modules
after switching on. If any old or wrong versions are detected, an automatic update is offered
to ensure optimal performance of the radio system. If the operator does not accept the of-
fered update within 30 seconds, the radio continues its boot process as usual.
If not performing the update process, the radio will indicate the wrong module firmware ver-
sions after startup with warnings. In addition, the error list will contain the message "UPDATE
NEEDED".
As long as the update is offered or running, it is not possible to operate the radio and
only a reduced set of remote commands is available. Please refer to the remote inter-
face documentation for details.
Automatic Update is supported for the following modules:
• Frontend
• Synthesizer
• Motherboard
• R&S GS4102
• R&S FK4120 / R&S FK4140
• R&S VK4115
• R&S VK4150 / R&S VK4150
• PMU
• FK4115x
• FK4190x

Figure 2.11 Example for the Automatic Update Process of a Frontend
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00099-A-01-1
1 Wrong Module Version Found

2 Continue Boot Process

When the update process is finished, switch off all components for at least 15 seconds in
order to activate the new firmware.
The update process (erasing and programming of new firmware) can take several min-
utes to finish. Unless immediate communication is required, it is recommended to car-
ry out the necessary updates in order to ensure optimal performance.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Radio Off
2.7 Switching the Radio Off

Figure 2.12 Switching the Radio Off
4 3 1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00015-A-01-1

2 Radio LED AC / DC
4 Radio LED GO

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Radio Off
Figure 2.13 Switching the Radio with Built-In Control Unit Off
5 6 7 8 4 3 1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00017-A-01-1

2 Radio LED AC / DC
4 Radio LED GO
5 Control Unit Button ON / OFF
6 Control Unit LED ON
7 Control Unit LED CU
By pressing the 'ON/OFF' button (1, Figure 2.13) at the radio front panel the radio is switched
off. If a built-in control unit is installed, it will be switched off automatically, too.
By pressing the 'ON/OFF' button (5) at a built-in control unit, only the control unit dis-
play is switched off.

M3SR Series 4100 Basic Configuration of the Radio
2.8 Basic Configuration of the Radio

The radio can be controlled and monitored via local area network (LAN) with one or more
external control units also connected to the LAN (see sect. 1.9 Radio Control). To guarantee
proper operation in this case it is required to change the default Internet protocol (IP) settings
of the radio (for default IP settings of the radio see Table 2.1) as well as the default IP settings
of the control unit (for default IP settings of the control unit see sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration
of the Control Unit) before connecting the radio(s) and control unit(s) to the LAN.
If your radio is controlled via built-in control unit and you do not want to connect your
radio to a LAN, you may skip the following sections and continue with section 3.
There are two possibilities to change the radio IP settings:
• Using a built-in control unit (if available)

• Using the upd32.exe tool provided by Rohde & Schwarz.
Both are explained in this documentation.
Table 2.1 Default IP Settings of a Radio
Default Radio IP Address 192.168.52.34
Default Radio IP Netmask 255.255.255.000
Default Radio IP Gateway 0.0.0.0 (no gateway)
Default Local Control Unit IP Address 192.168.52.218
Be careful if you change the IP settings. For the configuration of a greater network,
detailed knowledge concerning IP networks is required. Such knowledge is not im-
parted by this documentation. Please ask your network administrator or refer to ap-
propriate technical literature, if necessary.

2.8.1 Changing Radio IP Settings Using a Built-in Control Unit
The following description guides through the individual steps required to change the radio
default IP settings (see Table 2.1) with the help of the built-in control unit. These instructions
assume that to begin with the default IP settings are selected on both radio and built-in con-
trol unit (see Table 2.1 and sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit). Further expla-
nations for radio configuration can be found in sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and
Control Unit.
The default local control unit IP address saved in the radio cannot be changed using the built-
in control unit. For this purpose use the upd32.exe.
To change the default IP settings of the radio proceed as follows:
1. Switch the radio with built-in control unit on (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On)
2. If the control unit is not connecting automatically to the radio, proceed with the following
steps and connect the built-in control unit to the radio (see also sect. 3.3 Control and
Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).
Press softkey.
Press button.
3. Once the control unit is connected to the radio, press the following softkeys and the dis-
play appears as shown in Figure 2.14.
Press softkey.
Press softkey.
4. Change the IP settings (IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway) of the radio. For details
see also sect. 3.4.5 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002).

Press softkey.
Press softkey.
Press softkey.
5. IP settings are complete.
Press button.
6. Disconnect the CU from the radio.
Press softkey.
7. Switch the radio off to make the changes take effect.
After changing the radio IP settings (especially radio IP address) it is also required to
change the built-in control unit IP settings (especially radio IP address list, see
sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit).

Figure 2.14 Radio IP Settings (Example)
ICN-4D-J-231000-R-D0894-00085-A-01-1
1 Radio IP Address
2 Radio Subnet Mask
3 Radio Gateway Address
2.8.2 Changing Radio IP Settings Using Upd32.exe Tool
The following description guides through the individual steps required to change the radio
default IP settings (see Table 2.1) with the help of the upd32.exe tool. The upd32.exe tool is
a PC (Windows) application provided by Rohde & Schwarz to update your radio with new
software and to change the radio IP settings.
To change the radio IP settings using the upd32.exe, the following devices are required:
• PC with upd32.exe software installed (with appropriate configuration and data files avail-
able, see upd32.exe online help)
• LAN where the PC and the radio are connected (e.g. using a switch or HUB).

Figure 2.15 Changing Radio IP Settings Using the upd32.exe Tool
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00086-A-01-1
1 PC
2 LAN
3 Radio

To change the IP settings of the radio using the upd32.exe proceed as follows:
1. Connect radio backplane LAN connector and PC to LAN (see Figure 2.15).
2. Press the Erase button at the radio front panel (make sure that radio is switched off be-
forehand).
3. Switch the PC on and start the upd32.exe.
4. Select 'LAN Settings via Ethernet' in Config menu of upd32.exe (see Figure 2.16).
5. Switch the radio on (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On).
6. Wait until the MAC address of your radio has come up in upd32.exe dialog 'Select Tar-
gets for Ethernet communication' (see Figure 2.17).
7. Select the radio MAC address of your radio in upd32.exe dialog 'Select Targets for Eth-
ernet communication' and select 'Ok' (see Figure 2.17).
8. The upd32.exe dialog 'LAN settings' is coming up showing the current IP settings of your
radio (IP address, subnet mask, gateway and local IP address).
9. Change the radio IP settings as required in the dialog 'LAN settings'.
10. Press 'OK' to load the settings to the radio.
11. After a moment a message box comes up with the option to continue and update the ra-
dio functional SW as well. Select 'No' to finish the update without updating the radio func-
tional SW (see Figure 2.19).
12. Switch the radio off to make the changes take effect. Switch the PC off.
After changing the radio IP settings (especially radio IP address) it is also required to
change the built-in control unit IP settings (especially radio IP address list, see
Figure 2.17). The local IP address is the IP address of the local (built-in) control unit.
The radio identifies the local control unit by its IP address (see also sect. 3.3 Control
and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).

Figure 2.16 Upd32: Select 'LAN Settings via Ethernet'
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00087-A-01-1
Figure 2.17 Upd32: Select Targets for Ethernet Communication Dialog (Example)
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00088-A-01-1

Figure 2.18 Upd32: LAN Setting Dialog (Example)
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00089-A-01-1
Figure 2.19 Upd32: Finish the Update
ICN-4D-F-231000-R-D0894-00090-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit
2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control Unit

The control unit IP configuration consists of two parts.
• The control unit IP Settings: IP address, netmask and gateway. The IP address uniquely
identifies the control unit within the LAN (see Figure 2.20).
• A list of radios the control unit can connect to. The 'Radio IP Address List' (see
Figure 2.21).
The following description guides through the individual steps required to change the control
unit default IP settings and the default entry in the Radio IP Address List of the control unit
(see Table 2.2).
Table 2.2 Default IP Settings of Control Unit
Default Control Unit IP Address 192.168.52.4
Default Control Unit IP Netmask 255.255.255.000
Default Control Unit IP Gateway 0.0.0.0 (no gateway)
Radio IP Address List first logical address (default) Logical address Radio IP address
34 (not selected as local, 192.168.52.34

see Figure 2.21)
propriate technical literature if necessary.
To change the default IP settings and the radio IP address list of the control unit, proceed as
follows:
1. Switch the control unit on (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On)
2. Press softkey to make sure that the control unit is disconnected from the radio.
3. Press softkeys and the display appears as shown in Figure 2.20.

4. Press softkeys to change the IP settings (IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway) of
the control unit. For details see also sect. 3.5.2 Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002).
5. Press softkey and the display appears as shown in Figure 2.21.
6. Press softkeys to Insert, Delete or Edit an entry in the list.
Press softkey to select the radio as local (for details see Figure 2.21).
7. Switch the control unit and radio, respectively, off to make the changes take effect.

Figure 2.20 Control Unit IP Settings
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00093-A-01-1
1 Control Unit IP Address

2 Control Unit Subnet Mask
3 Control Unit Gateway Address

Figure 2.21 Radio IP Address List of Control Unit
1 2
ICN-4D-H-231000-R-D0894-00094-A-01-1
1 Logical Radio Address in Radio IP Address List

2 Radio IP Address in Radio IP Address List
When the radio IP address is changed (via softkey on menu page 3002 or by a remote con-
trol system), the MMI receives this new IP address and creates an entry in the radio address
list in control unit maintenance menu 4003. This entry has the logical name NEWIPADD
(new IP address) and contains the new IP address of the radio. If this entry already exists, it
gets updated with the new address. This information now can be used to make the correct
settings for the CU so that it can connect to the radio again: Set the CU’s own IP address to
an address in the same network as the radio is in. If desired, create a new entry in the ad-
dress list with a meaningful name using the new IP address or connect the CU directly to
entry NEWIPADD.

M3SR Series 4100 Example Configuration
2.10 Example Configuration

An example configuration is shown in Figure 2.22.
Figure 2.22 Example Configuration
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00095-A-01-1

1 Control Unit
Control Unit IP Address
IP Addr: 192.168.52.23
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway Addr: 0.0.0.0
Radio IP Address List
Addr: 14
Local:
IP-Addr: 192.168.52.14
2 LAN
3 Radio with Control Unit (Option)
Control Unit IP Address
IP Addr: 192.168.52.24
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Radio IP Address List
Addr: 14
Local:
IP-Addr: 192.168.52.14
Static LAN Configuration
IP Addr: 192.168.52.14
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Local IP-Address: 192.168.52.54
The radio IP address must be listed in the Radio IP Address List of the control units.
The IP address of the local control unit must be set in the radio as Local IP Address
(see sect. 2.8 Basic Configuration of the Radio). The IP address of the radio must be
marked in the Radio IP Address List of the local (built-in) control unit as 'Local' (see
sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance).


M3SR Series 4100 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Overview
R&S M3SR Series 4100 is a new generation of software radios. Its parameters can be con-
trolled both locally and remotely. For local control the radio can be delivered with a local
(built-in) control unit. The local control unit in combination with the radio front panel provides
the means to control and monitor the radio as a stand-alone tabletop unit.
Figure 3.1 Radio with Local Control Unit
1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1
1 Control Unit (Option)

2 Front Panel
In addition, an audio connector and a line connector are provided on the backplane of the
radio. These interfaces can be used for operations such as keying the radio (push to talk,
PTT). The backplane also contains data interfaces available for applying data e.g. for F1D
operation in Fixed Frequency mode (see sect. 3.7 Fixed Frequency) or other special opera-
tion modes (see sect. 4 Operation in Special Communication Modes).

M3SR Series 4100 Overview
Figure 3.2 Radio Backplane with Interfaces
1 2 3 4
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00021-A-01-1
1 Audio/Line Connector
2 Serial Connector (RS-232-C, Data)
3 Serial Connector (RS-232-C, Remote Control)
4 LAN Connector
If connected to a LAN, all functions of the radio can be remotely configured and controlled
for example with the R&S GB4000C Control Unit.

Figure 3.3 Radio and Remote Control Unit Connected via LAN
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1

2 LAN
3 Radio

The parameters of the radio are set and monitored via remote control interface. The remote
control interface is available as packet interface (TCP/IP port) based on standard Ethernet.
The R&S GB4000C uses this interface. However, any other client may use this interface for
control or monitoring purposes as well. For a detailed description of the remote control inter-
face see remote control interface document.
The remote control interface is also available as serial interface (RS-232-C, see
Figure 3.2).

M3SR Series 4100 Operating Concept
3.2 Operating Concept

This documentation gives an overview of how to operate the radio via the front panel and a
control unit. As for operation via control unit all operation is menu-based, details are provided
relating to the menu page structure and the possibilities to navigate within the menu tree or
to change settings.

3.2.1 Radio Front Panel
The front panel contains several buttons, volume controls and the ERASE button, which are
used to make a limited number of radio settings. LEDs are available to indicate the status of
the radio.
Figure 3.4 Front Panel
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00100-A-01-1
1 Indicators for used power supply (battery, AC/DC)

2 ON/OFF button
3 ERASE button
4 Radio status indicators (TX, GO, RX)
5 INT/EXT button
6 Volume control (loudspeaker / headphone)
7 Connector for the loudspeaker / headphone
8 Connector for the headset
9 Volume control (headset)
10 Connector for fillgun

Radio Settings
The following settings can be made at the front panel:
• Adjusting the volume with the volume controls for the loudspeaker and headset
• Switching the radio on or off with the ON/OFF button (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio
On and sect. 2.7 Switching the Radio Off)
• Switchover between internal or external loudspeaker with the INT/EXT button (the status
is indicated by the control unit loudspeaker symbol)
• Initiating a quick erase, erasing the database with waveform and configuration parame-
ters
The indicators at the front panel show the following radio status:
• AC/DC LED or BATT LED shows that power is available.

• TX LED shows that the radio is transmitting (to monitor the output power, please see
power bar graph on the control unit instead)
• GO LED shows that the radio is fully operative.
• RX LED shows that the receiver has a signal above its configured squelch level. In op-
eration without squelch, this LED is always on, indicating that audio signals are available.
Quick Erase
When the ERASE button is actuated, all settings (such as special waveform configuration,
keysets, hopsets, scan ALE scan groups, modem settings, channels) are cleared.
The radio enters Preset Page 0, fixed frequency operation with default settings, except the
default setting on Preset Page 0 (fixed frequency operation).
1. Open protective flap.

2. Press ERASE button for 1 s.
The safest way to erase sensitive data is to press the ERASE button for at least 1 s.
The data will be erased after 100 ms.
The ERASE button is functioning even if the radio is not powered.

Tones
Table 3.1 General
Name Timing Diagram Audio 1)
Busy
Alarm Mes-
sage Re-
ceived
Error
Notification /
Confirmation
Net Entry Re-

quest
Battery Low

Table 3.2 Phone
Name Timing Diagram Audio 1)
Busy
Ringback
Call Waiting
PTT active
Connected

3.2.2 Control Unit
The control unit is the main user interface to control and monitor the radio.
The control unit has various control elements (see Figure 3.5).
Figure 3.5 Control Elements of R&S GB4000C Control Unit
5 6
3 4 4 3 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00022-A-01-1
1 Numeric keypad
2 Knob
3 Four buttons (ON/OFF, MENU HOME, ESC CLR, ENT)
4 Four LEDs (ON, CU, G, GO)
5 Fifteen softkeys
6 Display
To test the proper operation of keypad, knob, softkeys and buttons see
sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance.

3.2.2.1 LEDs
The control unit has the following LEDs to indicate the status:
• LED ON
The LED is lighted if the control unit is switched on.
The LED blinks if the control unit is switched off (= standby).
• LED CU
The LED is lighted if the control unit is fully operative.
• LED GO
The LED is lighted if the control unit is connected to a radio (see sect. 3.3 Control and
Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit) and the radio is fully operative.
• LED G
Not used when controlling for R&S M3SR Series 4100 radios.
To test the proper operation of the LEDs see sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance.
3.2.2.2 Graphical User Interface Design
All the graphical elements displayed on the screen form the graphical user interface (GUI).
As all the information and control elements necessary to fully control and monitor the radio
cannot be displayed at once, the GUI is organised in menu pages. The GUI consists of many
menu pages organised in a menu tree with hierarchical structure (see ”Menu Organization”
on p. 3.20 and sect. 9 Drawings).
3.2.2.3 Menu Page Design
Each menu page consists of up to 15 softkey labels arranged around the screen, a menu
header and a menu central area.
The softkey labels are software-assigned depending on the selected menu. As softkey labels
and softkeys are essential in the operating concept, there follows a separate section about
softkeys (see ”Softkeys” on p. 3.16).
The menu header design is identical for all menu pages. It consists of a menu number, a
menu domain symbol, a menu title, the connected radio (e.g. connection status), the type of
the radio control session and icons indicating radio states and modes.
The central area depends on the selected menu. It contains labels, bar graphs, editors, a sta-
tus line, folders etc.

Figure 3.6 Menu Page Design (Example)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10
8
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00023-A-01-1
1 Menu Domain Symbol (see ”Icons and Symbols” on p. 3.13)

2 Indication : “Ciphered Communication“ or "PLAIN Communication"
3 Menu Number (see ”Menu Organization” on p. 3.20)
4 Menu Title (see ”Menu Organization” on p. 3.20)
5 Icons (see ”Icons and Symbols” on p. 3.13)
6 GPS Icon (see ”Icons and Symbols” on p. 3.13)
7 Type of Radio Control Session (MON / ADV / FIX / LOC, see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitor-
ing of Radio and Control Unit)
8 Menu Header
9 Softkey Label (see ”Softkeys” on p. 3.16)
10 Number of Connected Radio (e.g.: LOC for local radio) or Connection Status:
• R:-- = not connected to radio (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control
Unit)
• R:>< = Connecting to Radio (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control
Unit)
• R:?? = Check Connection (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control
Unit)

3.2.2.4 Icons and Symbols
Icons and symbols are displayed in the menu header (see Figure 3.6). The icons indicate
menu domains and communication modes. The following icons are available:
Table 3.3 Icons
Icon Note
Indicates the main menu.
Indicates the maintenance menu (see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance) and fill gun menu (see
sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).
Indicates the FF menus. FF menus are menus to operate the communication mode Fixed
Frequency.
Indicates the ALE menus (option). ALE menus are menus to operate the special communi-
cation mode Automatic Link Establishment.
Icon stands for ALE-2G operation
Icon stands for ALE-3G operation
Icon stands for general ALE operation, ALE-2G and ALE-3G.
Indicates the SECOM-H menus (option). SECOM-H menus are menus to operate the spe-
cial communication mode SECOM-H.
Indicates the HF Modem menus (option). HF Modem menus are menus to operate the spe-
cial communication mode HF Modem.
Indicates the Secure Digital Voice menus (option). SDV menus are menus to operate the
special communication mode Secure Digital Voice.

In addition, various symbols may be displayed in the menu header (see Figure 3.6).
Table 3.4 Symbols
Symbol Note
Indicates that the radio squelch function currently mutes the audio.
Indicates that the radio squelch function currently unmutes the audio.
Switched to external loudspeaker.
Any transmission and reception are enabled
Any transmission is disabled by softkey ‘TX IHBT’, remote command or external source
connected to X26.20 (TX inhibit)
For details see sect. 9 Drawings Interface description = line TxInhibit.
Any reception is disabled by external source connected to X26.35 (RX inhibit).
For details see sect. 9 Drawings Interface description = line RxInhibit.
Any transmission and reception are disabled (RX and TX inhibit).
For details see sect. 9 Drawings Interface description = line RxInhibit and TxInhibit.
Split Site mode active. Split Site Controller is connected to the selected Split Site Transmit-
ter and Split Site Receiver, both operational (RX and TX possible).
The Split Site Transmitter is in TX-Inhibit and therefore not able to transmit. The Split Site
Receiver is in RX-Inhibit and not able to receive. If only the Transmitter is inhibited only the
'X' of TX is shown red. The same applies if only the Split Site Receiver is at RX inhibit.
Split Site Transmitter and Split Site Receiver are not operational. If only the Split Site Trans-
mitter is not operational only the TX symbol is shown red. The same applies if only the Split
Site Receiver is not operational.
The Split Site Controller is currently configuring the Split Site Receiver and Split Site Trans-
mitter.
Split Site mode active. The Receiver is detached, transmission with the local hardware.

Symbol Note
Splite Site mode active. The Transmitter is detached, reception with the loacal hardware.
No GPS position available.
2D GPS position fix (up to three satellites).
3D GPS position fix (four or more satellites).
Indicates DSC interface module (option):
DSC not connected or not controlling the radio.

DSC is taking over control.

DSC has control over radio parameters.
DSC fault situation.
For further details see sect. 3.4.8 Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003).

3.2.2.5 Softkeys
Definition:
A softkey is a key with variable, software-assigned function. The relevant function is indicat-
ed by the softkey label shown beside the key. The softkey labels are software-assigned de-
pending on the selected menu. In the remainder of the document a softkey label and its
corresponding softkey are referred to as softkey in short. Figure 3.7 shows an example of a
softkey.
Figure 3.7 Example of a Softkey
1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00024-A-01-1
1 Softkey
2 Softkey Label
A softkey can be activated or deactivated. Deactivated softkeys have a grayed-out softkey

label. There are two possible reasons for a softkey to be deactivated:
• No access rights (e.g. control unit is monitoring or menu page is not available).
• The parameter is not usable in the current context.

Softkeys to Make Settings

Softkeys are control elements used to make settings. The following four possibilities are
available to make settings with softkeys:
Toggle softkey:
Table 3.5 Toggle Softkeys
Softkey label Note
Press this softkey to toggle between two settings. Both settings are listed in the toggle soft-
key. The currently active setting is shown in blue.
Listbox softkey:
Table 3.6 Listbox Softkeys
Softkey label Note
Press this softkey to open a listbox (see Figure 3.8).
Figure 3.8 Example of a Listbox
1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00025-A-01-1
1. Active Setting
2. Currently Selected Setting
Use the knob to select one of the settings listed in the listbox.

The active setting is shown in blue in the softkey label, the selected setting is shown high-
lighted in the listbox. If active and selected setting are not identical, press the ENT button to
accept the selected value. Press the ESC CLR button to discard the selected setting and to
close the listbox.
Editor softkey:
Table 3.7 Editor Softkeys
Softkey label Note
Press this softkey to open an editor (see Figure 3.8).
Figure 3.9 Example of an Editor
1 2
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00026-A-01-1
1 Active Value
2 Currently Selected Value
Use the knob or the keypad to select a value.
The active value is shown in blue in the softkey label, the selected value is shown in the ed-
itor. If the active value and the selected value are not identical, press the ENT button to ac-
cept the selected value. Briefly press the ESC CLR button to clear an entered value. Press
the ESC CLR button a bit longer to discard the entered value and close the editor.

There are several editors with special functions available in the GUI (e.g. frequency
editor, IP address editor, ...). For details on how to operate these editors refer to the
description of the corresponding menu pages.
Activate softkey:
If a trigger-like activate softkey (e.g. SAVE, CALL) is pressed, the function is executed im-
mediately.
No further action is required.
Softkeys for Navigation

Softkeys are control elements used to navigate in the menu tree. For this purpose different
softkey labels are available.
The following three possibilities are available to navigate within the menu tree with softkeys:
Table 3.8 Navigation Softkeys
Softkey label Note
Press this softkey to move one page back in the menu tree.
Press this softkey with tree dots to move to the next page in the menu tree or enter a menu
tree branch.
Press this softkey to select the next folder in a menu page.
Press this softkey to select the previous folder in a menu page.
For navigation within the menu tree also see sections ”Menu Tree” on p. 3.25 and
”Navigation within the Menu Tree” on p. 3.27.

Locked Softkey
All softkeys are protected via a user level. Three user levels are available (0 to 2). Softkeys
which require higher user levels than the currently set system-wide level, are marked with a
lock symbol at the left or right top corner. For further information see sect. 3.6 User Level.
Table 3.9 Editor Softkeys
Softkey label Note
This softkey is locked. To unlock this softkey a password is required.
3.2.2.6 Menu Organization
The GUI consists of many menu pages. To each menu page a unique four-digit menu num-
ber and a menu title are assigned.
Figure 3.10 Menu Number and Title
1 2 3
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00027-A-01-1
1 Domain Icon
2 Four-digit Menu Number
3 Menu Title

The menu numbers are organized as follows:
Figure 3.11 Menu Numbering
1 2 3 4
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00028-A-01-1
1 First digit: domain

2 Second digit: waveform
3 Third digit: sub-domain
4 Fourth digit: submenu

• The first digit designates the domain the menu belongs to:
0 = Home menu
1 = Communication mode
2 = Fillgun
3 = Radio Maintenance (Radio MTC)
4 = CU Maintenance (CU MTC)
• The second digit designates the communication mode the menu belongs to:
0 = Is not assigned to a communication mode (N.A.)
1 = Fixed Frequency (FF)
2 = Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) (option)
3 = SECOM-H (option)
4 = Data Modem (option)
• The third digit designates the subdomain in the domain:

0 = domain root
1 = first sub-domain
2 = second sub-domain
3 = third sub-domain
• The fourth digit designates the submenu within domain root or subdomain:
1 to 6 depending on the number of submenus available in the domain
Table 3.10 gives an overview of all possible menus, their numbers, symbols and titles.
Table 3.10 Menu Organization, Numbering and Titles
Domain Communication Mode Subdomain Submenu or Sub-Subdo-

main
1st Name/Icon 2nd Name/Icon 3rd Name 4th Menu Title

dig. dig. dig. dig.
0 Home 0 N.A. 0 Root 1 Home


main

dig. dig. dig. dig.
1 Communication 1 FF 1 Operation 1 FF OP 1/2

Mode
2 FF OP 2/2
5 FF SCAN 1/2
2 Configuration 1 FF CFG 1/2
2 FF CFG 2/2
2 FF SCAN 2/2
5 GPS 1 GPS OP (without

GPS Reporting)
2 ALE 1 Operation 1 ALE OP 1/2
2 ALE OP 2/2
2 Configuration 1 ALE CFG 1/3
2 ALE CFG 2/3
3 ALE CFG 3/3
4 ALE CFG 4/4
3 IPoA Configuration 1 ALE IPoA CFG 1/2
2 ALE IPoA CFG 2/2
4 Message Service 1 ALE Msg Service 1/

1
5 VoIP Operation 5 PHONE
3 SECOM-H 1 Operation 1 SECOMH OP 1/1
2 Configuration 1 SECOMH CFG 1/2
2 SECOMH CFG 2/2
3 IPoA Configuration 1 SECOM-H IPoA

CFG 1/2
2 SECOM-H IPoA
CFG 2/2
4 Message Service 1 SECOM-H Msg

Service 1/1
5 GPS Reporting 1 GPS OP
5 HF Modem 1 Operation 1 HFM OP 1/1
2 Configuration 1 HFM CFG 1/1
6 Secure Digital 1 Operation 1 Sec Voice OP 1/1

Voice
2 Configuration 1 Sec Voice Cfg 1/1


main

dig. dig. dig. dig.
2 Fillgun 0 N.A. 0 Root 1 Fillgun Menu
3 Radio MTC 0 N.A. 0 Root 1 Radio MTC 1/7
2 Radio MTC 2/7
3 Radio MTC 3/7
4 Radio MTC 4/7
5 Radio MTC 5/7
6 Radio MTC 6/7
7 Radio MTC 7/7
1 Error 1 Radio Error List
2 Radio Error Details
2 Inventory 1 Radio Inventory
2 Radio Inventory
Details
3 PMU 1 PMU
4 Split Site 1 Split Site 1/2
2 Split Site 2/2
6 VoIP 1 VoIP 1/2
2 VoIP 2/2
4 CU MTC 0 N.A. 0 Root 1 CU MTC 1/4
2 CU MTC 2/4
3 CU MTC 3/4
4 CU MTC 4/4
1 Error 1 CU Error List
2 CU Error Details
2 Inventory 1 CU Inventory
2 CU Inventory List
3 Keyboard Test 1 Keyboard Test
The domains subdivide the parameters of the radio and communication modes which are
closely related. This structure helps to quickly find parameters and allows the radio to be con-
trolled intuitively.
Table 3.11 gives an overview of the domains and a description of the kind of parameters they
contain.

Table 3.11 Domains and Parameters
Domain Description
Communication Operation This domain contains the parameters of the active communication
Mode mode which are essential to operate the radio in this communication
mode.
Configuration This domain mainly contains the parameters to (pre)configure the ac-
tive communication mode.
Fillgun In the menu of this domain the download of a radio configuration via fill-
gun can be controlled (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit).
Radio maintenance This domain contains all settings of the radio independent of the com-
munication mode (for details see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance).
CU maintenance This domain offers all parameters concerning the CU only (for details
see sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance).
3.2.2.7 Menu Tree
As all the operation is menu-based, the menu tree gives an overview of all the menus avail-
able to operate the radio and the CU.
The menu tree shows where to find a particular menu.

Fixed Frequency Home
3.26
1111 1112
FF OP 1/2 FF OP 2/2
1121 1122
FF CFG 1/2 FF CFG 2/2
M3SR Series 4100
1115 1125
FF SCAN 1/2 FF SCAN 2/2
1151 3011 3012

GPS OP Radio Error List Radio Error Details
3021 3022
Radio Inventory List Radio Inv. Details
3031
PMU
2001 3001
Fillgun 1/1 Radio MTC 1/7 3041 3042
Split Site 1/2 Split Site 2/2
4012 4011
CU Error Details CU Error List
Figure 3.12 Menu Tree in Fixed Frequency Operation
4022 4021 4001 3002 3061 3062

CU Inventory Details CU Inventory List CU MTC 1/4 Radio MTC 2/7 VoIP 1/2 VoIP 2/2
4031
Keyboard Test
4002 3003
CU MTC 2/4 Radio MTC 3/7
4003 3004 Valid Invalid Response

CU MTC 3/4 Radio MTC 4/7 Option Key Option Key Option Key
4004 3005
CU MTC 4/4 Radio MTC 5/7
3006
Radio MTC 6/7
ICN-4D-J-231000-R-D0894-00029-A-01-1
3007
Operating Concept
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

Radio MTC 7/7
See sect. 9 Drawings for a complete menu tree.
3.2.2.8 Navigation within the Menu Tree
To navigate in the menu tree use the navigation softkeys.
Table 3.12 Navigation Softkeys
Softkey label Note
Softkeys labelled with three dots '...' or with an arrow are softkeys for navigation.
Press this softkey to navigate one menu back (e.g. from CU MTC 2/4 to CU MTC 1/4 or from
CU MTC 1/4 to the Home menu). The softkey 'PREV...' is to be found in all menus (except
the Home menu) in the left upper corner.
Press this softkey to navigate from the Home menu to the first menu of a domain (e.g. from
Home menu to menu Radio MTC 1/7).
Press this softkey to navigate to the next menu in a domain (e.g. from menu Radio MTC 1/
7 to menu Radio MTC 2/7).
Press this softkey to select the next folder in a menu page (e.g. in menu Radio MTC 4/7
select the folder Valid Option Key, Invalid Option Key or Response Option Key).
Press this softkey to select the previous folder in a menu page (e.g. in menu Radio MTC 4/
7 select the folder Valid Option Key, Invalid Option Key or Response Option Key).

Figure 3.13 Position of Softkey 'Previous' (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00030-A-01-1
1 Softkey 'PREV'
Depending on the state of connection (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit), the session type (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and
Control Unit) or special radio states or modes, some menus will be disabled. In this
case the softkeys to navigate to these menus are disabled (grayed out) or not shown
at all. In the case a menu is displayed and the connection state, session type or radio
mode changes, so that the current menu cannot be displayed any longer, the GUI will
automatically navigate to the Home menu.
Table 3.13 Navigation Buttons
Button Note
Press this button to return from anywhere in the menu tree to the Home menu.

M3SR Series 4100 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit
3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit

This chapter gives all the details necessary to operate and configure the radio with the help
of the control unit. It introduces the Home menu in detail.
3.3.1 Home Menu (0001)
After switching on the radio, the built-in control unit comes up with the Home menu. After
switching on a remote control unit, its graphical user interface (GUI) also comes up with the
Home menu. If the control unit was connected to a radio before power-off, the control unit
automatically reconnects to that radio.
If after power-on your control unit automatically connects to a radio, you may skip the
following section. After radio power-on (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On) con-
necting to a radio may take a few seconds.

3.3.1.1 Connecting to Radio
If the control unit was not connected to a radio before power-off, the Home menu appears as
shown in Figure 3.14.
Figure 3.14 Home Menu, Not Connected
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00031-A-01-1
1 Softkey: Connect to Radio

2 Indication in Menu Header for Not Connected
3 Status Line: Not connected to radio
The central area of the Home menu is empty except for the status line which shows that the
control unit is not connected to a radio. All navigation softkeys for radio-specific domain
menus and radio-specific softkeys are disabled.
The menu header also indicates that the control unit is not connected to a radio (R:--).
To control or monitor a radio, first connect to the radio.
To connect to the radio, proceed as follows:
1. Press softkey 'Connect to Radio'.

2. Select the radio logical address to connect to a remote radio or 'LOCAL' to connect to
the local radio (see Figure 3.15 and read the following note).
3. Press button 'ENT' to confirm.

Figure 3.15 Selecting Remote Radio
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00101-A-01-1
1 Remote
2 Local
By pressing the 'Connect to Radio' softkey a list of logical addresses of radios which
are configured in the control unit is opened. In case of a built-in control unit the 'LO-
CAL' address might also be listed (see 1 and 2). Select 'LOCAL' to connect to the local
radio. If the list is empty or the desired radio is not listed, the address list must first
be modified (see sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003)). Each control unit has an ad-
dress list (logical addresses with associated IP addresses, one of the listed addresses
can be specified as local). A connection can only be established to radios that are list-
ed. For more information refer to sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003) and
sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance.
Now the control unit tries to establish a connection to the selected radio, and the following
screen appears:

Figure 3.16 Home Menu, Connecting to Radio
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00032-A-01-1
1 Softkey: Disconnect from Radio

2 Indication in Menu Header for connecting
3 Status Line: Connecting to radio, e.g. 34
If the radio to connect to is switched on and can be reached via LAN, the connecting
status may be too short for the user to notice. However, immediately after radio pow-
er-on (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On) connecting to the radio may take a few
seconds until the radio boot process has finished. If the radio to connect to cannot be
reached via LAN, the CU remains in state Connecting until the radio can be reached
or the softkey 'Disconnect from Radio' is pressed.
When the connection has been established, the Home menu's central area appears accord-
ing to the active communication mode and setting of the radio (see Figure 3.17).

Figure 3.17 Example: Home Menu connected, active communication mode is Fixed Frequency
2 1
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00033-A-01-1
1 Currently Active Session (see ”Session Types and Access Rights” on p. 3.35)
2 Logical Address of Radio Connected to
3 Navigation Softkeys to Communication Mode Domain Menus
Now the radio-specific softkeys and also the navigation softkeys for radio-specific and com-
munication mode domains are enabled.
The elements in the central area of the Home menu are dependent on the currently ac-
tive communication mode. For an explanation of the elements in the central area refer
to sect. 3.7 Fixed Frequency for communication mode FF, sect. 4.3.3 ALE-2G Menu
Tree for communication mode ALE (option) and sect. 4.8.2 SECOM-H Menu Tree for
communication mode SECOM-H (option).

3.3.1.2 Disconnecting from Radio
Press the softkey 'Disconnect from Radio' if you no longer wish to control or monitor the radio
you are connected to. If you want to control or monitor another radio, also press the softkey
'Disconnect from Radio'. To connect to another radio see ”Connecting to Radio” on p. 3.30.
After pressing the softkey 'Disconnect from Radio' you will see the Home menu as shown in
Figure 3.14.
A control unit may be disconnected from a radio automatically. This may be due to
switching off the radio or due to a broken LAN. In any case a message box 'TCP/IP
Connection Lost' pops up and the GUI automatically navigates to the Home menu (see
Figure 3.18).
Figure 3.18 Connection Lost
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00034-A-01-1
In case of a broken (or too slow) LAN connection, the GUI temporarily changes to the 'Check
Connection' state. In this state the GUI tries to reconnect to the radio for a short time. The
status 'Check Connection' can be seen in the menu header (R: ??). If the reconnection was
successful, the connection state changes to Connected. If reconnecting fails, the connection
state changes to Disconnected (R: --).

3.3.1.3 Session Types and Access Rights
A radio can have up to 3 sessions at a time with control units connected to it. Only one control
unit can have a session with operational access right, which gives it the right to manipulate
settings of the radio..
Up to three control units (one of them is the local control unit) can have sessions with mon-
itoring access right, allowing them to monitor the radio at the same time.
Figure 3.19 illustrates the access rights available in a radio if no control unit is connected.
Figure 3.19 Radio Access Rights
3
1
Radio
Operational
Access Right
Control Unit
CU1 Monitoring Access
Right (1)
Monitoring Access
Right (2)
Monitoring Access
Control Unit Right (3)
CU2 (reserved for local CU)
Control Unit
1 CU3
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00035-A-01-1

2 Built-In (Local) Control Unit
3 Pool of Available Access Rights
One session is reserved for the local control unit. The radio identifies the local control
unit by the IP address of the local control unit only. For details on how to change the
local IP address known by the radio see sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration of the Control
Unit. For details on how to change the IP address of the control unit see
sect. 3.5.2 Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002).

To handle the available access rights, to each connection a session is assigned which occu-
pies access rights. Each session occupies one monitoring access right and dependent on
the type of the session also the operational access right. For details about the session types
see Table 3.14. If all monitoring access rights are occupied, no further session and no further
connection is available. The radio denies the access.
Figure 3.20 Example: Three Monitoring Sessions
Radio
1
Operational
Monitoring Session Access Right
Control Unit Monitoring Access

CU1 Right (1)
2
3
Monitoring Session
CU2 Right (2)
Monitoring Session
1 Monitoring Access Control Unit
Right (3) CU3
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00036-A-01-1
1 Connection
2 Session Assigned to Connection
3 Occupied Access Right
To handle the limited number of access rights and to make it possible to pass the unique op-
erational access right to other control units on demand, different session types are available:
• Monitoring Session (MON)

• Advanced Session (ADV)
• Fixed Session (FIX)
• Local Session (LOC)
To ensure that only one control unit has operational access at a time, the following procedure
is necessary:
1. The control unit requests a session with operational access rights.

2. The radio grants or denies the requested session.

Figure 3.21 Example: Radio grants a Fixed Session
Radio
Operational
Monitoring Session Access Right

CU1 Right (1)
1. Request Fixed Monitoring Session

Control Unit Session Monitoring Access
CU2 Right (2)
Monitoring Session
Monitoring Access Control Unit
Right (3) CU3
Radio
Monitoring Session
CU1 Right (1)
2. Permit Fixed Fixed Session

Session
Control Unit Operational
CU2 Access Right
Monitoring Session
Right (3) CU3
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00037-A-01-1

Figure 3.22 Example: Radio denies an Advanced Session
Radio
1. Request
Monitoring Session
Control Unit Advanced Session Monitoring Access
CU1 Right (1)
Fixed Session
CU2 Access Right
Monitoring Session
Right (3) CU3
Radio
2. Denie Monitoring Session

Advanced Session
CU1 Right (1)
Fixed Session
CU2 Access Right
Monitoring Session
Right (3) CU3
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00038-A-01-1

The session types are explained in detail in the following table.
Table 3.14 Session Types
Session Type Meaning Occupied Access Rights
Monitoring Operational
Monitoring The user has no right to change radio param- Yes No

eters, but he is able to monitor the settings. All
(MON) the monitored settings are updated at least ev-
ery 30 sec.
Most of the settings will be updated imme-

diately as they change.
Advanced The user has the right to manipulate and mon- Yes Yes
itor all radio parameters.
(ADV) (but can be sup-
If another control unit requests a session with pressed)
operational access rights (ADV, FIX or LOC),
the session of the own control unit turns into a
monitoring session (the operational access
rights are lost).
Fixed The user has the right to manipulate and mon- Yes Yes
(FIX) (but can be sup-
If another control unit requests a session of pressed by LOC ses-
type Advanced or Fixed, the radio denies this sion)
request and the session of the own control unit
remains Fixed.
If another control unit requests a session of

type Local the session of the own unit turns
into a Monitoring session (the operational ac-
cess rights are lost).
Local The user has the right to manipulate and mon- Yes Yes
(LOC)
If another control unit requests a session of
type Advanced, Fixed or Local, the radio de-
nies this request and the session of the own
control unit remains Local.
The session type can be changed with the 'Session' softkey in the Home menu (see
Figure 3.23).
Select the desired session type with the 'Session' softkey in the Home menu (see
Figure 3.23).

Figure 3.23 Selecting a Session
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00039-A-01-1
You can select the session type before you connect to a radio. You can also change the ses-
sion type with a connection already being established.
The currently active session is displayed in the right upper corner of the menu header (MON,
ADV, FIX or LOC, see Figure 3.24) and in the softkey label 'Session' in the Home menu.

Figure 3.24 Session Indication in Menu Header
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00040-A-01-1
The Advanced (ADV) or Fixed (FIX) session may be spontaneously withdrawn from
the radio and turned to a Monitoring session. See also Table 3.14.
When a control unit tries to connect to a radio which has already three sessions established
(e.g. one session with operation access right and two sessions with monitoring right), the ra-
dio immediately denies the connection (see Figure 3.25).

Figure 3.25 Connection Denied
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00041-A-01-1
3.3.1.4 Communication Mode Menus
In case of a connected control unit the softkeys in the right upper corner of the Home menu
are navigation softkeys to communication mode domain operational and configuration sub-
menus.
Navigation is only possible to the submenus of the currently active communication mode.
The navigation softkeys change according to the currently active communication mode (see
Figure 3.26). The active communication mode is the communication mode of the selected
Preset Page. For details about Preset Page selection see ”Preset Page” on p. 3.44.

Figure 3.26 Navigation Softkeys to Communication Mode Submenus
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00042-A-01-1
• For details about submenus of Fixed Frequency (FF) see sect. 3.7 Fixed Frequency.
• For details about submenus of Automatic Link Establishment (ALE, option) see
- sect. 4.3.3 ALE-2G Menu Tree or
- sect. 4.4.2 ALE-3G Menu Tree.
• For details about submenus of SECOM-H (SCH, option) see sect. 4.8.2 SECOM-H
Menu Tree.
• For details about submenus of HF Modem (HFM, option) see sect. 4.5.1.1 HF Modem
Menu Tree.

3.3.1.5 Preset Page
Select the Preset Page with the softkey labelled 'Preset' in the Home menu. The number of
the currently selected Preset Page is displayed in the label of the softkey.
To change the Preset Page it is necessary that the control unit is connected to the radio (see
”Connecting to Radio” on p. 3.30) and that the control unit has operational access rights (see
”Session Types and Access Rights” on p. 3.35).
To change the Preset Page:
1. Make sure to be in the Home menu.

2. Press the softkey 'Preset' and a listbox opens with the currently available Preset Pages.
The listbox lists the numbers of the presets and the communication modes of the preset
(see Figure 3.27).
3. Use the knob to select one of the Preset Pages listed.
4. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
Now the 'Preset' softkey gets inactive and the Preset Page changes. This means that the cur-
rent operation of the radio is finished and the radio resumes operation according to the set-
tings of the just selected Preset Page. The settings of a Preset Page include the
communication mode and all the parameters of the communication mode. Changing the cur-
rently active Preset Page implies that a large number of radio parameters need to be recon-
figured, so this will take a moment.
The Preset Page change is finished when the Preset softkey gets active again. Now the radio
is operating according to the newly selected Preset Page settings. The central area of the
Home menu shows the important parameters of the communication mode. Use the naviga-
tion softkeys in the right upper corner to navigate to communication mode domain operation-
al and configuration submenus (see ”Communication Mode Menus” on p. 3.42).

Figure 3.27 Preset Page Selection (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00043-A-01-1
After delivery from factory the radio holds only one Preset Page. This initial Preset
Page 0 is pre-configured with communication mode Fixed Frequency (FF). But the ra-
dio can hold up to 100 Preset Pages (presets). A preset contains a complete set of pa-
rameter settings of a communication mode. All presets are easily prepared with a PC,
using the Radio Network Management System (R&S RNMS3000, for details see R&S
RNMS3000 documentation), and are loaded into the radio via fillgun, from a PC via se-
rial cable or via LAN (see sect. 3 Operation). Preset Page 0 can be edited by the oper-
ator as well. On Preset Page 0 only fixed frequencies (FF) can be set. Any
communication mode may be assigned to the Preset Pages 1 to 99 (see
sect. 4 Operation in Special Communication Modes ). All of these Preset Pages (1 to
99) have to be prepared with a PC, using R&S RNMS3000.

3.3.1.6 Fill Gun
The softkey labelled 'Fill Gun' is a navigation softkey and is located on the right side of the
Home menu (see Figure 3.28).
Figure 3.28 Fill Gun Navigation Softkey (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00044-A-01-1
1 Softkey 'Fill Gun'
As for almost all softkeys besides 'Control Unit Maintenance', it is needed to establish the IP
connection between control unit and radio before this functions can be used (see ”Connect-
ing to Radio” on p. 3.30).
In the fillgun submenu a radio configuration prepared with RNMS3000 can be downloaded
to the radio via fillgun or via serial cable. For details see sect. 3.7.3 Fixed Frequency Config-
uration Menus.

3.3.1.7 Maintenance Menus
The softkeys labelled 'Control Unit Maintenance' and 'Radio Maintenance' are located at the
bottom in the Home menu (see Figure 3.29).
Figure 3.29 Maintenance Navigation Softkey (Example)
1 2
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00045-A-01-1
1 Softkey 'Control Unit Maintenance'

2 Softkey 'Radio Maintenance'
The softkey 'Control Unit Maintenance' is a navigation softkey which brings you to the control
unit maintenance domain submenus. The control unit maintenance submenus contain con-
trol unit related parameters. For details see sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance.
The control unit submenus contain control unit related parameters only. Due to this
fact navigation to these submenus is possible even if the control unit is not connected
to a radio.
The softkey 'Radio Maintenance' is a navigation softkey which brings you to the radio main-
tenance domain submenus. For details see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance. To navigate to the
radio maintenance submenus it is required that the control unit is connected to the radio (see
”Connecting to Radio” on p. 3.30).

M3SR Series 4100 Radio Maintenance
3.4 Radio Maintenance

For more information refer to sect. 9 Drawings: Menu Structure
This domain contains all parameters and settings of the radio which are independent of a
communication mode.
To navigate to the radio maintenance submenus it is required that the control unit is connect-
ed to the radio (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).
The radio maintenance domain has 7 submenus in the domain root and three subdomains.
Each of the subdomains ('Radio Error', 'Radio Inventory' and 'Split Site') has two submenus.
From the Home menu navigate to the first radio maintenance menu (see sect. 3.3 Control
and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit). From the first radio maintenance menu navigate
to the subdomains. The fourth radio maintenance menu has three folders. The structure of
the radio maintenance menu domain is shown in Figure 3.30.

Figure 3.30 Menu Tree: Radio Maintenance
0001 Home
3011 3012
Radio Error List Radio Error Details
3021 3022
3001 Radio Inventory List Radio Inv. Details
Radio MTC 1/7 3031
PMU
3041 3041
Split Site 1/2 Split Site 2/2
3002 3061 3062

Radio MTC 2/7 VoIP 1/2 VoIP 2/2
3003
Radio MTC 3/7
3004 Valid Invalid Response

Radio MTC 4/7 Option Key Option Key Option Key
3005
Radio MTC 5/7
3006
Radio MTC 6/7
3007
Radio MTC 7/7
ICN-4D-J-231000-R-D0894-00046-A-01-1

3.4.1 Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001)

Figure 3.31 Menu 3001: Radio MTC 1/7
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00047-A-01-1
The central area of this menu shows the status of the radio built-in test (BIT). It indicates 'OK'
if no BIT error is currently active. It indicates 'ERROR' if any BIT error is currently active. To
get a list of all BIT errors press softkey 'Errors...'
For more details about the built-in test see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting.

Table 3.15 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 1/7 (3001)
Softkey Description Possible Values
Navigate to the previous menu (Home menu)
Open a listbox and use the Default: Intern Intern:

knob to select the reference
frequency oscillator to be internal oscillator used.
used.
Press 'ENT' to confirm.
Extern 1 MHz:
external oscillator 1 MHz
Extern 5 MHz:
Extern 10 MHz:
Open a listbox and use the Default: SCAN MODE BYPASS:

knob to select the operation
mode of the module digital Selection is active in transmis-
selection (option). sion. Selection is bypassed
for reception with activated
Press 'ENT' to confirm. frequency change.
SCAN MODE:
(This softkey gets
active only if the Selection is active in transmis-
digital selection is sion. Selection is bypassed
built-in) for reception without activated
frequency change.
SELECTIVE:
Selection is active in transmis-

sion and reception.
The attenuator has a nominal value of 20 dB for

R&S FK4120 and R&S FK4140, but is depending on the
selected frequency. It is only active in Rx mode.

Open a listbox and use the 0 dB:

knob to select the attenua-
tion of the digital selection The attenuator in the digital
(option). selection is bypassed.
Press 'ENT' to confirm. 20 dB:

(This softkey gets Attenuator in digital selection
active only if the Default: 0 dB
is switched on. This improves
digital selection is the large signal behaviour of
built-in) the receiver.
If the attenuator in the digital selection is activated, i.e.

the display shows 20 dB, the input signal will be atten-
uated by about 20 dB. This function can be used for
particularly difficult collocation situations to improve
the large-signal behaviour of the receiver.
Navigate to the subdomain Split Site. The first menu is the

Split Site 1/2 menu (see sect. 3.4.3 Menu Split Site 1/2
(3041)).
Start the calibration (see sect. 7.1.1 Synthesizer Calibra-

tion)
Switch the Rx antenna ON Default: OFF ON:

or OFF.
Rx antenna connector is ac-
tive.
OFF:
Rx/Tx antenna connector is

active.
ON:
Transmissions are disabled
for all waveforms.
This option is set to ON by default for R&S EK4100
Systems. When set to OFF manually, transmissions OFF:
are enabled.
Transmissions enabled for all
waveforms.

Open a listbox and use the SELECTIVE:

knob to select the post-se-
lector mode. Press 'ENT' to Selective in Rx and Tx direc-
confirm. tion where possible.
BYPASS:
The post-selector is by-

passed.
SCAN MODE:
Selective in Tx direction,
where possible. It stays selec-
tive if Rx and Tx frequencies
are equal, but enters Rx by-
pass if Rx frequency changes.
The following waveform dependencies apply to the

post-selector:
SECOM-H: The post-selector is always bypassed.
ALE-2G/ALE-3G: SELECTIVE MODE is automatically

changed to SCAN MODE.
This automatism is not reflected on MMI.
Navigate to the subdomain Radio Inventory. The first menu

is the Radio Inventory List menu (see ”Menu Radio Inven-
tory (3021)” on p. 3.59).
Navigate to the subdomain Radio Error. The first menu is

the Radio Error List menu (see ”Menu Radio Error List
(3011)” on p. 3.55).
The receiver / exciter is part of a broadband system.

Only monitoring access is possible. This softkey is
only available when the radio is connected to a PMU.

Start the Initiated Built-in Test (IBIT).
It takes a few seconds to perform the IBIT. While IBIT

is running, a message window comes up indicating
that the IBIT is in progress. When the IBIT it is over, an-
other message window comes up indicating that the
IBIT is finished. During IBIT it is not possible to navi-
gate to other menus or to make any other settings.
This function is available on Preset Page 0 only. For
further details about built-in test see
sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting.
Navigate to the menu Radio MTC 2/7 (see

sect. 3.4.5 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002)).

3.4.1.1 Menu Radio Error List (3011)
Figure 3.32 Menu 3011: Radio Error List (Example)
2 3
1
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00048-A-01-1
1 Sequence Number
2 Device Identifier
3 Error Description
In its central area, the menu Radio Error List shows a log (Error List) of the BIT errors and
events (e.g. for each power-on there is an entry in the Error List ). The first entry in the Error
List is the most recent error/event.
The Error List shows the sequence number (No. 1 to 256) of the error/event, the Device Iden-
tifier (Device ID., see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting) and a short description of the error/event
(see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting). To get more details about an entry, select it with the knob
and press the navigation softkey 'Details...' to navigate to the menu Radio Error Details (see
”Menu Radio Error Details (3012)” on p. 3.57).
The ERASE button does not only clear the Error List but also erases all Preset Pages
(see sect. 3.2 Operating Concept).

Table 3.16 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error List (3011)
Navigate to the previous menu (Radio MTC 1/7).
Navigate to the menu Radio Error Details (see ”Menu Ra-

dio Error Details (3012)” on p. 3.57).
This navigation softkey is disabled if the Error List is

empty.

3.4.1.2 Menu Radio Error Details (3012)
Figure 3.33 Menu 3012: Radio Error Details (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00049-A-01-1
In its central area, the menu Radio Error Details shows the details of a radio error or event
which was selected in the menu 'Radio Error List' (see ”Menu Radio Error List (3011)” on p.
3.55). The following details are shown:
• Fault type (ERROR or WARNING)

• Faulty device (Fault dev., see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting)
• Fault identifier (Fault ID, each detected event has a unique number for clear identifica-
tion)
• Test type (CBIT, PBIT, PBIT START, PBIT STOP, PBIT START-STOP, IBIT, IBIT
START, IBIT STOP, IBIT START-STOP)
• Initial time (the time the fault was detected). This is the time shown in menu Radio MTC
2/7 (see sect. 3.4.5 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002).)
• Recovery time
• Count
• Description (see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting)

Table 3.17 Softkeys in Menu Radio Error Details (3012)
Navigate to the previous menu (Radio Error List).

3.4.1.3 Menu Radio Inventory (3021)
Figure 3.34 Menu 3021: Radio Inventory of Installed Modules (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00050-A-01-1
In its central area, the menu Radio Inventory shows a list of all the installed modules and their
current status (OK or FAILED). To get more details about a module, select the module with
the knob and press the navigation softkey 'Details...' to navigate to the menu Radio Inventory
Details (see ”Radio Inventory Details (3022)” on p. 3.62).
Press the softkey 'Firmware Version' and the central area shows a list of all the installed firm-
ware (FW) and software (SW) items and their versions (see Figure 3.35).

Figure 3.35 Menu 3021: Radio Inventory of Firmware Versions (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00053-A-01-1
The list of all the installed firmware (FW) and software (SW) items cannot be displayed
at once in the central area. Use the knob to scroll the list.

Table 3.18 Softkeys in Menu Radio Inventory (3021)
Press this softkey and the list of all the installed modules is
shown in the central area of the menu (see Figure 3.34).
Press this softkey and the list of all the installed firmware
and software items and their version is shown in the central
area of the menu (see Figure 3.35).
Navigate to the menu Radio Inventory Details (see ”Radio

Inventory Details (3022)” on p. 3.62)
This softkey is active only if the list of the installed

modules is shown in the central area (for the installed
firmware modules no further details are available).

3.4.1.4 Radio Inventory Details (3022)
Figure 3.36 Menu 3022: Radio Inventory Details (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00051-A-01-1
The menu Radio Inventory Details shows the details of a radio module which was selected
in the menu 'Radio Inventory List' (see ”Menu Radio Inventory (3021)” on p. 3.59). The
shown details are:
• Module Identifier (Module Ident.)

• Block Identifier (Block ID)
• Rohde & Schwarz Part Number (Part No)
• Hardware Code (HW Code)
• Version Number (Version No)
• Serial Number (Serial No)
• Production Date (Prod. Date)
• Read Code
• Test Instruction (Test Instr.)
• Name of the Module

For some radio modules shown in the Radio Inventory menu (see Figure 3.34) no de-
tailed information is available. In this case the radio inventory details are displayed as
shown in Figure 3.37.
Figure 3.37 Menu 3022: Radio Inventory Details (Empty)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00052-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Menu PMU (3031)
3.4.2 Menu PMU (3031)
In an HF-Broadband system (HF-BB) it is possible to control up to four R&S VK4190 Power

Amplifiers from one R&S GX4100 Receiver / Exciter. The Power Management Unit (PMU),
built into the R&S GV4190, allows to connect up to three additional R&S GX4100 and up to
four R&S VK4190 to produce an output power of 1 kW, 2 kW or 4 kW. The different possibil-
ities to achieve these output powers are called "Mode". Each mode has a two-digit name of
the form xy.
The R&S GX4100 and R&S VK4190 in an HF-BB system get shortened names. GX2 means
R&S GX4100 connected to port 2 of the PMU, GX1 is the receiver / exciter unit of the R&S
GV4190.
In 1 kW and 2 kW modes
• x describes how GX1 and GX2 are connected to VK1 and VK2 (first group)
• y describes how GX3 and GX4 are connected to VK3 and VK4 (second group).
Description of x, y values in 1 kW and 2 kW modes
0 1 kW mode: Each GX controls the VK with the same port number.
1 2 kW mode: The first GX (GX1 / GX3) of a group controls, and coherently drives, both amplifiers
of its group.
2 2 kW mode: The second GX (GX2 / GX4) of a group controls, and coherently drives, both amplifi-
ers of its group.
In 4 kW modes
• x describes the R&S GX4100 which controls, and coherently drives, all four R&S
VK4190
• y is always “3”.

Overview over all possible modes:
1 kW and 2 kW modes
Mode
GX1 controls: GX2 controls: GX3 controls: GX4 controls:
x y
0 0 VK1 VK2 VK3 VK4
0 1 VK1 VK2 VK3, VK4
0 2 VK1 VK2 VK3, VK4
1 0 VK1, VK2 VK3 VK4
1 1 VK1, VK2 VK3, VK4
1 2 VK1, VK2 VK3, VK4
2 0 VK1, VK2 VK3 VK4
2 1 VK1, VK2 VK3, VK4
2 2 VK1, VK2 VK3, VK4
4 kW modes
Mode
GX1 controls: GX2 controls: GX3 controls: GX4 controls:
x y
1 3 VK1, VK2, VK3, VK4
2 3 VK1, VK2, VK3, VK4
3 3 VK1, VK2, VK3, VK4
4 3 VK1, VK2, VK3, VK4

Figure 3.38 Menu 3031: PMU, e.g. 4 kW System
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-02200-A-01-1
The central area of the menu PMU shows a graphical representation of the HF-BB system.
The green area marks the R&S GV4190. The receiver / exciter functionality and the PMU are
shown as two logical devices. The receiver / exciter is shown as GX1, the rectangular box
above represents the PMU. Black lines in the PMU box show the HF and control connections
between the different R&S GX4100 and R&S VK4190. These are also shown as rectangular
boxes.
Symbol Description
There is no R&S GX4100 connected to port 2.
There is a R&S GX4100 connected to the port 2.
The R&S GB4000C is connected to the R&S GX4100 which is connected to port 2.

Figure 3.39 Menu 3031: PMU, e.g. 2 kW System
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-02201-A-01-1
To change the mode at R&S GV4190 use the 'PMU Mode' softkey on the right-hand side.
The list box contains a short description of each mode. At R&S GX4100 the mode cannot be
changed, the button is grayed out and shows the current mode of the PMU it is connected to.
Open a list box and use Default: mode 00 00, 01, 02, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21,
the knob to select the 22, 13, 23, 33, 43
mode.
This softkey gets active only at R&S GV4190.
The MMI only shows one PMU of a possibly larger HF-BB system. Installations con-
taining more than one PMU must not be configured via R&S GB4000C! To configure
such installations use a superior control system like R&S SIMCOS.

M3SR Series 4100 Menu Split Site 1/2 (3041)
3.4.3 Menu Split Site 1/2 (3041)
The operation of transmitters with high power levels close to receivers in the same site may
cause interference for some receptions. To avoid this problem, the locations of the transmit-
ter and receiver units can be physically separated (split site).
The Split Site System allows flexible assignment of separated receivers and transmitters to
controllers located at the Control-Site. A list of predefined Split Site Transmitters and Split
Site Receivers can be configured through R&S RNMS3000 or using the MMI.
The Split Site Controller is able to connect to any of the available transmitters and receivers
at the remote Tx and Rx sites. The allocation of the Split Site Transmitter and Receiver can
be done via remote control command or from the MMI of the Split Site Controller. The Split
Site radios (Transmitter or Receiver) allow only one connection at a time to a Split Site Con-
troller. They are monitored by the Split Site Controller through the supervision of the Contin-
uous Built-In Test (CBIT) (see sect. 6.2 Troubleshooting: Radio Built-In Test). All parameters
configured for the Split Site Controller and relevant for the system operation are automatical-
ly sent from the Split Site Controller to the allocated Split Site radios. To allow the Split Site
Controller to have the access right for controlling the Split Site radios, these radios must not
have a Local or Fixed Session (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control
Unit: Session Types and Access Rights).
If the Split Site Transmitter loses its connection to the Split Site Controller, an ongoing trans-
mission is aborted. For the transmission of data and remote control signals between the Split
Site Controller and the allocated Split Site radios (Transmitter and Receiver), the IP interface
of each radio is used. The audio is encoded with G.711 A-law and sent in RTP packets from
the Split Site Controller to the Split Site Transmitter and from the Split Site Receiver to the
Split Site Controller.
The following devices are supported for playing a role in a Split Site system.
Table 3.19 Supported Devices (Split Site System)
Split Site Role
Devices Controller Receiver Transmitter
R&S EK4100 yes yes yes1
R&S XK4115 yes yes yes
R&S GX4100 yes yes yes1
R&S GV4190 yes yes yes1
1
with additional power amplifier stages (R&S VK4150 or R&S VK4190)
All audio accessories and RF interface accessories, e.g., ATU and Transmitter Filter, avail-
able for R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radios are also supported. These devices have to be con-
figured directly at the device they are connected to.
All external half duplex modems compatible to R&S M3SR Series 4100 Radios are support-
ed if they can cope with the Split Site System delay.

Figure 3.40 Menu 3041: Split Site 1/2
ICN-4D-G-231006-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1
In the central area of this menu the names of the selected Split Site Receiver and Split Site
Transmitter are displayed, as well as the connection status of the Split Site Controller with
each Split Site radio (‘State Rx’ and ‘State Tx’).
Only the Split Site Controller will have this information displayed. The Split Site radios
(Receiver and Transmitter) are not aware that they are operating in a Split Site mode,
therefore this menu is not relevant for them. However, it is accessible if the Split Site
option key is installed. If no Receiver is assigned, or the own IP Address is assigned,
the local hardware is used for reception. If no Transmitter is assigned, or the own IP
Address is assigned, the local hardware is used for transmission.

Navigate to the previous menu (Radio MTC 1/7, see

sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance).
The Split Site Controller connects to the chosen Split Site Possible connection status:
Receiver and Transmitter displayed in the central area of
this menu. • not connected
• connecting
The status of the connection is displayed in the central • connection established
area of the screen. • config in progress
• operational ( configura-
tion successful, “GO LED”
on)
• controller internal error
• connection to unit failed
• config of unit failed
• Built-in test of unit failed
(“GO LED” off)
After pressing the ‘Connect’ softkey, the softkey ‘Discon-

nect’ appears on the same place and allows the operator
to terminate the connection to the Split Site radios by
pressing it.
Open a listbox with the name of predefined Split Site Any of the radios configured
Transmitters. as Split Site Receiver into this
Split Site Controller through
Use the knob to select the Split Site Transmitter to connect the R&S RMNS or using the
to. MMI (see sect. 3.4.4 Menu
Press 'ENT' to confirm. Split Site 2/2 (3042))
Open a listbox with the name of predefined Split Site Re- Any of the radios configured
ceivers. as Split Site Receiver into this
Split Site Controller through
Use the knob to select the Split Site Receiver to connect to. the R&S RMNS or using the
Press 'ENT' to confirm. MMI (see sect. 3.4.4 Menu
Split Site 2/2 (3042))
Navigate to the menu Split Site 2/2 (see sect. 3.4.4 Menu
Split Site 2/2 (3042)).

3.4.4 Menu Split Site 2/2 (3042)
In this menu it is possible to edit the lists of Split Site Receivers and Split Site Transmitters.
In the central area of the menu each Split Site radio is listed with its IP address (IP Addr.)
and its name. The numbers in the format “n/m” represent the ordering number of the selected
radio (n) giving the total number of radios is this list (m).
Through the softkeys at the bottom it is possible to insert or delete a radio entry in a list. By
default, the list of Split Site Receiver is selected and the softkeys at the bottom are ‘Insert
Receiver’ and ‘Delete Receiver’. By pressing the ‘Split Site Transmitter’ softkey the list of
Split Site Transmitter is selected and now it is possible to edit this list through the softkeys
‘Insert Transmitter’ and ‘Delete Transmitter’.
Figure 3.41 Menu 3042: Split Site 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231006-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
In the central area of this menu the names and IP-addresses of the Split Site Receiver and
Split Site Transmitter are displayed. With the rotary knob, the entrys can be scrolled through.

Navigate to the previous menu (Split Site 1/2, see

sect. 3.4.3 Menu Split Site 1/2 (3041)).
Depending on chosen list by means of the softkeys ‘Split

Site Receiver’ or ‘Split Site Transmitter’, a new Split Site
radio (receiver or transmitter) can be inserted to the list.
After pressing it, give the IP address of the new radio.
Press ‘ENT’.
Now give a name to this radio, which will appear as well as
in the list of Split Site Receiver or Split Site Transmitter in
the menu Split Site 1/2.
Use the numeric keypad or the knob for alphabetic charac-

ters.
Press ‘ENT’.

Depending on the chosen list by means of the softkeys

‘Split Site Receiver’ or ‘Split Site Transmitter’, the selected
Split Site radio (receiver or transmitter) is deleted from the
list.
The list of Split Site Transmitter can be edit.
Use the knob to select the desired Split Site Transmitter.
The list of Split Site Receiver can be edit.
Use the knob to select the desired Split Site Receiver.

M3SR Series 4100 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002)
3.4.5 Menu Radio MTC 2/7 (3002)

ICN-4D-J-231000-R-D0894-00054-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 2/7, the global radio date and time (e.g. mainly
used for radio error log, see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance), the radio IP address, the radio
subnet mask and the radio gateway address are shown.
Additionally the accumulated operating time since production (Total On Time) and the oper-
ating time since last switching-on (Curr. On Time) are indicated. The layout is: Months –
Days – Hours – Minutes and 30 Days are one Month.


sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance)
Open a listbox and use the Default: 0 dB 0 dB to 26 dB in steps of 1 dB,

knob to select the additional or position OFF to switch off
attenuation for all audio out- the Tx sidetone.
puts during transmission.
Only non-data services are
affected by this setting, like
A1A, J3E, A3E, F3E. In-
crease the attenuation, if
acoustic feedback is dis-
turbing the operation or de-
crease it, if sidetone during
reception is low.
Toggle between Audio Indi- Default: ON ON

cations On and Off.
All audio indications are on.
OFF
All audio indications are off.
This parameter selects:
• In case of PTT applied on the front panel headset con-

nector keyline, it selects if the signal applied on the
front panel headset connector audio line is transmitted
on the upper sideband (USB) or on the lower sideband
(LSB).
• In case of PTT applied on the backplane line connector
LSB PTT keyline and/or USB PTT keyline, it selects
the sidetone audible on the front panel headset con-
nector and/or loudspeaker.
Default: USB
This setting takes effect only in case of independent

sideband modulation modes (e.g. B8E or B7D (op-
tion)).
Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the

backplane audio connector USB (audio line in signal).
Select the attenuation with the knob or with the numeric

keypad.
Default: 0.0 dB
Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the

backplane audio connector USB (audio line out signal).

keypad.
Default: 0.0 dB

Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the -10.0 dB to 10.0 dB
backplane audio connector LSB (audio line in signal).

keypad.
Default: 0.0 dB
Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the -10.0 dB to 10.0 dB
backplane audio connector LSB (audio line out signal).

keypad.
Default: 0.0 dB
Navigate to the subdomain VoIP. The first menu is the

VoIP 1/2 menu (see sect. 3.4.6 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061)).
The radio supports VoIP. It can be used with devices com-

pliant to ED137B, as well as with standard SIP equipment.
Open an editor to change the radio gateway address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Use the knob or the numeric keypad to edit each of the four
numbers of the address separately.
To select the next octet (xxx.) press the key
The gateway address 0.0.0.0 means that no gateway is

used. There are not all gateway addresses allowed.
See also the note below.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Open an editor to change the radio subnet address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
There are not all subnet addresses allowed. See also

the note below.
Default: 255.255.255.0

Open an editor to change the radio IP address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255


A message box appears: 'Radio IP Address has changed
to xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
In addition, an entry in the radio address list (menu 4003)

with the logical name NEWIPADD and the new IP address
of the radio is created (see sect. 2.9 Basic Configuration of
the Control Unit).
As the new IP address setting takes effect immediate-

ly, the MMI loses the connection to the radio and a new
connect to the radio with the new IP address is re-
quired (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit and sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4
(4003).
Default: 192.168.52.34
Open an editor to change the global radio date and time. YYYY.MM.DD. HH.MM.SS
Use the knob or the numeric keypad to edit year (YYYY), 1970.01.01.0.0.0 to
month (MM), day (DD), hour (HH), minute (MM) and sec- 2099.12.31.23.59.59
ond (SS), each entry separately.
To select the next entry press the key
Default: 1970.01.01.0.0.0


The 3:2 compression ratio (according to 10.7 of ETSI EN 300 373-1) required for CE confor-
mity is provided for audio voice inputs.
The audio line interfaces of this radio do not use any compression to allow linear operation
in data link modes (e.g. required for J2D and B7D).

M3SR Series 4100 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061)
3.4.6 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061)
This menu gives an overview over the currently connected session initiation protocol (SIP)
sessions. The softkey 'Details' shows the whole SIP uniform resource identifier (URI) if they
have to be shortened.
Figure 3.43 Menu 3061: VoIP 1/2
ICN-4D-J-231054-R-D0894-80001-A-01-1

The whole SIP URI is shown.
Navigate to the menu VoIP 2/2 (see sect. 3.4.7 Menu VoIP
2/2 (3062)).

3.4.7 Menu VoIP 2/2 (3062)
This menu allows configuring the VoIP parameters necessary for ED137B support.
Phone patch, domain connect can only be configured with the RNMS3000 software.
Figure 3.44 Menu 3062: VoIP 2/2
ICN-4D-J-231054-R-D0894-80002-A-01-1

Navigate to the previous menu (VoIP 1/2, see

sect. 3.4.6 Menu VoIP 1/2 (3061)).
Open an editor to change Default: TX Up to 64 characters

the Tx URI which is required
to set the radio into ED137 • a to z
mode. • A to Z
• _
Open an editor to change Default: RX Up to 64 characters

the Rx URI which is re-
quired to set the radio into • a to z
ED137 mode. • A to Z
• _
Open an editor to change Default: 4000 0 to 65535

the lowest port which can be
used by the radio for the
RTP datastream.
Select the size with the

knob or with the numeric
keypad.

the highest port which can
be used by the radio for the
RTP datastream.

keypad.
Open a listbox and use the Default: ED137+SIP OFF

knob to select the mode of
the VoIP service. Disable VoIP service.
Press 'ENT' to confirm. ED137+SIP
Accepts both, ED137 and SIP

calls.
ED137B only
Rejects SIP calls which are

not ED137B.
Open an editor to change Default: 60 ms 0 to 200 ms in steps of 20 ms

the jitter buffer size.

keypad.

3.4.8 Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003)

Figure 3.45 Menu 3003: Radio MTC 3/7 3003
ICN-4D-J-231000-R-D0894-00055-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 3/7 the settings of the serial interface (parameters
of serial data connector on the radio backplane, e.g. baudrate, flow control, data parameters,
data and DCD mode) and the selected operation mode of the digital selective calling module
(DSC, option) are displayed.


Open a listbox and use the Default: 115200 baud 115200 baud
knob to select the baudrate
of the serial data connector 57600 baud
on the radio backplane. 56000 baud
Press 'ENT' to confirm. 48000 baud
38400 baud
19200 baud
The data rate always has to be higher than the air-data 14400 baud
rate. The recommended setting is 115200 baud in com-
bination with hardware flow control (RTS/CTS). 9600 baud
7200 baud
5400 baud
4800 baud
3600 baud
Open a listbox and use the Default: RTS/CTS NONE

knob to select the flow con-
trol mode of the serial data no handshake
connector on the radio RTS/CTS
backplane.
hardware handshake
In synchronous mode, RTS has to be held at a con-

stant level at least for two data clock cycles to be rec-
ognized correctly. In case of a violation, the data
stream will be corrupted.
Open a listbox and use the Default: 8N1 8N1

knob to select a combina-
tion of the number of data 8N2
bits (7 or 8), parity (odd, 8E1
even or none, O/E/N ) and
number of stop bits (1 or 2) 8E2
of the serial data connector
on the radio backplane. 8O1
Press 'ENT' to confirm. 8O2
7N1
7N2
7E1
7E2
7O1
7O2
Open a listbox and use the Default: ASYNC ASYNC

knob to select the operation
mode of the serial data con- asynchronous operation
nector on the radio back- SYNC
plane.
synchronous operation

Open a listbox and use the Default: HF DETECTION The DCD mode controls the
knob to select the DCD behavior of the RS232 DCD
mode. pin.
Press 'ENT' to confirm. HF DETECTION
The Data Carrier Detected

(DCD) is active as long as the
receiver receives an RF sig-
nal.
DATA WRAPPING
The DCD is active as long as
the serial interface has valid
output data.
Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the -100 to +100
DSC module (option) audio connector (audio in signal).
(equivalent to -10.0 dB to
+10.0 dB in steps of 0.1 dB)

keypad.
This softkey is enabled only if the DSC module (op-

tion) is present in the radio.
Default: 0.0 dB
Open an editor and select the attenuation applied on the -100 to +100
DSC module (option) audio connector (audio out signal).
(equivalent to -10.0 dB to
+10.0 dB in steps of 0.1 dB)

keypad.
This softkey is enabled only if the DSC module (op-

tion) is present in the radio.
Default: 0.0 dB

Open a listbox and use the knob to select the operation

mode of the DSC module (option).
Press 'ENT' to confirm. OFF
The DSC module

stays inactive. If the
DSC module was ac-
This softkey is enabled only if the DSC interface mod- tive, the DSC module
ule (option) is present in the radio. will be deactivated.
Default: OFF ATTENTION
The DSC interface module is a board providing an addi- The radio is operating
tional interface on the radio backplane to connect an as configured by the
NMEA controller. The DSC module (with connected NMEA operator. DSC is inac-
controller) may control radio parameters. Icons in the tive until NMEA com-
menu header indicate the current state of the DSC module mands are coming in.
(see sect. 3.2 Operating Concept). If the DSC module is
active, it has control over the following radio parameters: Then the DSC mod-
ule is taking over con-
• Communication mode (always FF) trol and finally
• Preset Page (always 0) controls radio param-
• Modulation mode eters.
• Frequency
• Power DSC is active.
• PTT (see also sect. 3.4.11 Menu Radio MTC 6/7
(3006))
If the DSC module is active, the operator may not change

these parameters until the DSC module is deactivated. ON
The DSC module is

taking over control im-
mediately and finally
Switching the DSC mode OFF is the only possibility to controls radio param-
deactivate a DSC module once activated. eters.
DSC is active.


3.4.9 Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (3004)
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 4/7 three folders with a corresponding list of Op-
tion keys are displayed. The folder 'Valid Option Key' shows a list of all valid option keys in-
stalled on the radio.
Figure 3.46 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Valid Option Key
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00056-A-01-1
If a valid option key is present, the corresponding special operation mode is available
on this radio. For details about special operation modes see sect. 3.4 Radio Mainte-
nance.
The folder 'Invalid Option Key' shows a list of all the invalid option keys on the radio. The fold-
er 'Response Option Key' shows a corresponding list of all the response option keys.

Figure 3.47 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Invalid Option Key
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00106-A-01-1
Figure 3.48 Menu 3004: Radio MTC 4/7: Response Option Key
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00107-A-01-1


Navigate to the 'Invalid Option Key' folder or to the 'Valid

Option Key' folder and display the corresponding list of op-
tion keys.
Open an editor (see Figure 3.49) and enter 30 digits of an

option key using the knob or the numeric keypad.
By this means install a new option key or deactivate an in-

stalled option key.
A successfully installed option key appears in the list in the

folder 'Valid Option Key'. A deactivated option key appears
in the list in the folder 'Invalid Option Key'. For each entry
in the list of the 'Invalid Option Key' folder an entry exists in
the list of the 'Response Option Key' folder.
Open a message box containing the key (30 digits) of the

selected option key (see Figure 3.50).
This softkey gets active only if an option key is select-

ed in a list. If a list is empty, this softkey will stay inac-
tive.
Navigate to the 'Invalid Option Key' folder or to the 'Re-

sponse Option Key' folder and display the corresponding
list of option keys.


Figure 3.49 Option Key Editor
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00146-A-01-1
The 30 digits of the option key are arranged in 6 groups of 5 digits each. Press
to select the next group to edit. Enter all 30 digits before accepting the key with 'ENT'.

Figure 3.50 Option Key Details Message Box (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00058-A-01-1
After removing or adding option keys, the R&S RNMS3000 radio configuration should
be erased and loaded again to initialize all Preset Pages and their special communi-
cation modes.

3.4.10 Menu Radio MTC 5/7 (3005)
Not available for EK4100!
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00057-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 5/7, the PTT mask for configuration of the key-
lines available on the radio front panel and on the connector X26 at the rear of the radio
(V.28, TTL1, TTL2, USB, LSB and 6V) is displayed. Each keyline can be activated (ON, key-
ing activated) or deactivated (OFF, keying deactivated, PTT input masked out) with the cor-
responding softkey (see Table 3.23).

Table 3.22 PTT Crossreference List
PTT name in menu MTC5/7 PTT input pin PTT pin name in interface description
Front Panel X7.F ~PTT_HEADSET
Line V.28 X26.37 PTT1_V28
Line TTL1 X26.7 ~PTT1_TTL
Line TTL2 X26.38 ~PTT2_TTL
Line USB X26.8 ~PTT_USB
Line LSB X26.23 ~PTT_LSB
Line 6V X26.22 +6V_KEYLINE
DSC X5012.1 ~DSC_PTT
Each keyline may be used to key the radio (with exceptions for some special operation
modes, see sect. 4 Operation in Special Communication Modes).
If the front panel keyline keys the radio, the front panel audio line is active.
If the LSB keyline keys the radio, the backplane Line Connector LSB audio line is active.
If any other keyline of the backplane Line Connector keys the radio, the USB audio line is
active.
If the radio is already keyed by a keyline and another keyline gets active, the active audio
line will not be changed until the first keyed keyline is released. This means that the first
keyed keyline determines the active audio line (first come, first served).
These rules are valid for all operation modes except for independent sideband modulation
modes in Fixed Frequency. For these operation modes the Line Connector USB keyline can
be used to key the upper sideband (USB) with the USB audio line active, and at the same
time the LSB keyline can be used to key the lower sideband (LSB) with the LSB audio line
active.


Select if the front panel keyline is to be active or inactive. ON

The current state is displayed in the central area of this
menu (see Figure 3.49). OFF
Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector V.28 keyline is to be ON

active or inactive. The current state is displayed in the cen-
tral area of this menu (see Figure 3.49). OFF
Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector TTL1 keyline is to be ON

Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector TTL2 keyline is to be ON

Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector 6V keyline is to be ON

Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector LSB keyline is to be ON

Default: ON
Select if the backplane line connector USB keyline is to be ON

Default: ON


3.4.11 Menu Radio MTC 6/7 (3006)
Not available for EK4100!
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00060-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 6/7, the PTT mask for configuration of auxiliary
modules is displayed. The keyline can be switched ON or OFF with the corresponding soft-
key (see Table 3.24).
A keyline switched ON means that this line is active. A signal applied on this line keys the
radio.
A keyline switched OFF means that this line is inactive (masked out). The radio cannot be
keyed with a keyline which is switched OFF.

Table 3.24 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 6/7

Select if the keyline of the DSC module interface (option) ON

is to be active or inactive. The current state is displayed in
the central area of this menu (see Figure 3.50). OFF
Default: ON


3.4.12 Menu Radio MTC 7/7 (3006)

ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00160-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu Radio MTC 7/7, the name, status and time of current active
NTP (Network Time Protocol) server is shown.
Table 3.25 Softkeys in Menu Radio MTC 7/7


M3SR Series 4100 Control Unit Maintenance
3.5 Control Unit Maintenance

For more information refer to sect. 9 Drawings: Menu Structure
The control unit maintenance domain contains all parameters and settings of the control unit.
The control unit maintenance domain has four submenus in the domain root and three sub-
domains. The subdomains 'Control Unit Error' and 'Control Unit Inventory' have two sub-
menus and the subdomain 'Keyboard Test' has one submenu. From the Home menu
navigate to the first control unit maintenance menu (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of
Radio and Control Unit). From the first control unit maintenance menu navigate to the sub-
domains. The structure of the control unit maintenance menu domain is shown in
Figure 3.54.

Figure 3.54 Menu Structure of Radio Maintenance Domain
0001 Home
4011 4012
CU Error List CU Error Details
4001 4021 4022
CU MTC 1/4 CU Inventory List CU InventoryDetails
4031
Keyboard Test
4002
CU MTC 2/4
4003
CU MTC 3/4
4004
CU MTC 4/4
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00061-A-01-1

3.5.1 Control Unit MTC 1/4 (4001)

Figure 3.55 Menu 4001: CU MTC 1/4
ICN-4D-H-231000-R-D0894-00062-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu CU MTC 1/4 the status of the last performed initiated built-in
test (IBIT) of the control unit is displayed. It shows 'OK' if no built-in test error has occurred.
It shows 'ERROR' if any error has occurred since power-on of the CU. Use the softkey 'Er-
ror...' to navigate to the control unit error list menu (for details see ”Control Unit Error List
(4011)” on p. 3.103).
The central area also shows the currently selected connection quality (see Table 3.26).

Table 3.26 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 1/4 (4001)
Navigate to the previous menu (Home menu).
The level of user access (user levels 0 to 2 are available)

can be selected, allowing the user to perform the functions
he is authorized to use. For further details see
sect. 3.6 User Level.
Navigate to the Control Unit Keyboard Test menu (see

”Control Unit Keyboard Test (4031)” on p. 3.110).
Defines the time after which the channel is automatically OFF

recalled. For further details see sect. 3.7.3.2 Recalling
Settings. 0.3 s
0.5 s
1s
3s
5s
10 s
Toggle between Smart Frequency Editor (SFE) On and

Off.
With SFE switched to ON, it is possible in HFM, FF and

SDV (with the FF SCAN inactive) to edit the frequency with
the knob at the operational menu, as long as no list box or
editor is opened. With the key
the operator can select which frequency to edit: RX, TX or

simultaneously RX/TX. With the keys
and
the operator can select which decimal position to edit. A

blue line under the RX frequency and/or over the TX fre-
quency show the operator the selected frequency and dec-
imal position that can be edit with the knob.

Open a listbox and select Default: 120 dBµV 20 dBµV

with the knob the Receive
Level Scale to be used for 50 dBµV
the Receive Level Bar- 120 dBµV
graph.
The receive level bargraph

is displayed in the Home
menu and in the operational
domain menus when the ra-
dio is receiving (Rx). It
shows the strength of the
receive level in dBµV.
Open a list box and select with the knob the Signal-to-
Noise (SN) Scale. In the reception mode for digital trans-
mission methods there is a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) bar
displayed in the central area of the operation menu and
through this softkey the operator can change the indicating
range of it. If the SN Scale has the value 28 dB, the bar in-
dicating range goes from -5 dB to +23 dB. If the SN Scale
has the value 70 dB, the bar indicating range goes from -
20 dB to +50 dB.
The SNR bar is provided for the following digital transmis-

sion methods: ALE, HFM and SDV.
Open a listbox and use the Default: Fast Fast

knob to select the connec-
tion quality between control Medium
unit and radio. Slow
Press 'ENT' to confirm. Very Slow
The connection quality is dependent on the LAN the

radio and the control unit are connected to. In case of
a slow connection due to slow LAN connection select
'Slow' or 'Very Slow'. Otherwise select 'Medium' or
'Fast'.
Navigate to the Control Unit Inventory menu (see ”Control

Unit Inventory (4021)” on p. 3.106).
Navigate to the Control Unit Error List menu (see ”Control

Unit Error List (4011)” on p. 3.103).

Start the initiated built-in test of the control unit.
Several tests are performed during initiated built-in

test (see sect. 6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test). During
IBIT also the CU LEDs flash for a short time. To make
sure that the four LEDs are working properly, observe
the LEDs during IBIT. If during IBIT an error occurs, the
IBIT status displayed in the central area of this menu
changes to 'ERROR'. To get more information about
the detected error press softkey 'Error...' to navigate to
menu Control Unit Error List (see ”Control Unit Error
List (4011)” on p. 3.103).
Navigate to the menu CU MTC 2/4 (see sect. 3.5.2 Control

Unit MTC 2/4 (4002)).

3.5.1.1 Control Unit Error List (4011)
Figure 3.56 Menu 4011: CU Error List (Example)
1 2 3 4
5
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00063-A-01-1
1 Sequential Error Number

2 Error Description and Type of BIT (PBIT, CBIT or IBIT)
3 Error Still Active (Y = Yes, Active; N = No, Not Active)
4 Count of Occurrence since Power-On
5 List of Errors since CU Power-On
The menu CU Error List shows in the central area the error list of the BIT errors. The error
list shows the errors having occurred since power-on of the CU. It shows the sequence num-
ber (No.) of the errors, a short description of the error, if the error is still active (Yes/No) and
the number of occurrences since power-on. To get more details about an entry, select it with
the knob and press the navigation softkey 'Details...' to navigate to the menu Control Unit Er-
ror Details (see ”Control Unit Error Details (4012)” on p. 3.105).
If no error occurred since power-on, the error list is empty. As long as any error in the
error list is active, the CU LED is switched off (see sect. 3.2 Operating Concept).
For details about the CU built-In test see also sect. 6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test.

Table 3.27 Softkeys in Menu CU Error List (4011)
Navigate to the previous menu (CU MTC 1/4).
Navigate to the menu Control Unit Error Details (see ”Con-

trol Unit Error Details (4012)” on p. 3.105).
This navigation softkey is disabled if the error list is

empty.

3.5.1.2 Control Unit Error Details (4012)
Figure 3.57 Menu 4012: CU Error Details
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00064-A-01-1
In the central area, the menu CU Error List shows the details of the error selected in menu
page CU Error List.
• Description of error (see sect. 6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test)

• Test type (PBIT, CBIT or IBIT)
• If the error is still active (Yes or No)
• Number of occurrences since power-on
Table 3.28 Softkeys in Menu CU Error Details (4012)
Navigate to the previous menu (CU Error List).
For details about the CU built-In test see also sect. 6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test.

3.5.1.3 Control Unit Inventory (4021)
Figure 3.58 Menu 4021: CU Inventory
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00065-A-01-1
The menu CU Inventory lists in the central area all the components of the control unit. It
shows type (see Table 3.29) and name of each component.

Table 3.29 CU Inventory Types
Type abbreviation Description
HWM Hardware Mainboard
SW Software
FW Firmware
HW Hardware
Table 3.30 Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory (4021)
Navigate to the previous menu (CU MTC 1/4).
Navigate to the menu Control Unit Inventory Details (see

”Control Unit Inventory Details (4022)” on p. 3.108).

3.5.1.4 Control Unit Inventory Details (4022)
Figure 3.59 Menu 4022: CU Inventory Details (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00066-A-01-1
The central area of the menu CU Inventory Details shows all the available details identifying
the component selected in menu CU Inventory:
• Component type (Comp. Type)

• Block identifier (Block ID)
• Rohde & Schwarz part number (Part No)
• Hardware code (HW Code)
• Version number (Version No)
• Serial number (Serial No)
• Production date (Prod. Date)
• Read code
• Test instruction (Test Instr.)
• Name

Table 3.31 Softkeys in Menu CU Inventory Details
Navigate to the previous menu (CU Inventory).

3.5.1.5 Control Unit Keyboard Test (4031)
Figure 3.60 Menu 4031: CU Keyboard Test
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00067-A-01-1
The menu CU Keyboard Test is used to test proper operation of all the keys (numeric key-
pad, softkeys and buttons, see sect. 3.2 Operating Concept) and the knob of the control unit.
Press the key you want to test or operate the knob. While pressing the key or operating the
knob, a clear indication will appear in the central area of the menu. If the indication does not
appear, the key or the knob is defective.
To leave the menu
• press the MENU/HOME key and the ENT key simultaneously or

• wait for 10 seconds (do not press a key or operate the knob for 10 seconds)
and you will navigate back to the menu CU MTC 1/4.
The 'ON/OFF' button does not switch the control unit off in this menu. The 'MENU/
HOME' button does not navigate to the home menu in this menu. To switch the control
unit off or to navigate to the Home menu, first leave the menu as explained above.

M3SR Series 4100 Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002)

ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00068-A-01-1
The central area of the menu CU MTC 2/4 shows the current IP setting of the control unit.
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway address

Table 3.32 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 2/4
Navigate to the previous menu (CU MTC 1/4, see

sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance).
Open an editor to change the control unit gateway ad- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
dress.
To select the next number press the key
A message box appears: 'Please reboot the CU to make

this change take effect.'
The gateway address 0.0.0.0 means that no gateway is

used. There are not all gateway addresses allowed.
See also the note below.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Open an editor to change the control unit subnet address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
A message box appears: Please reboot the CU to make

this change take effect.
There are not all subnet addresses allowed. See also

the note below.
Default: 255.255.255.0

Open an editor to change the control unit IP address. 1.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
A message box appears: Please reboot the CU to make

this change take effect.
There are not all IP addresses allowed. See also the

note below.
Default: 192.168.52.4

Unit MTC 3/4 (4003)).


Figure 3.62 Menu 4003: CU MTC 4/3 (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00069-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu CU MTC 3/4 the Radio IP Address List is displayed. The Ra-
dio IP Address List contains a list of radios (represented by their IP addresses) the control
unit can connect to. To each radio a logical address (up to eigth characters) is assigned in
the list. One of the radios in the list can be marked as local (see Figure 3.64). To insert a new
entry in the list press the softkey 'Insert Address' (see Figure 3.62). The address will always
be inserted above the currently selected entry. To delete an entry in the list, select it with the
knob and press the softkey 'Delete Address' (see Figure 3.62). To edit an entry in the list,
select it and press the softkey 'Edit Address' (see Figure 3.62). To mark a radio in the list as
local, select it with the knob and press the softkey 'Local Address' (see Table 3.33).
In the example above (see Figure 3.62) the Radio IP Address List contains two radios:
Radio 1 with logical address 11 and IP address 192.168.52.11 and

Radio 2 with logical address 22 and IP address 192.168.52.22.
The control unit can connect to these two radios (see Figure 3.63).

Figure 3.63 Listbox Connect to Radio
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00070-A-01-1
In the example below (see Figure 3.64) the same two radios are listed as in the previous ex-
ample, but radio 1 with the logical address 11 is specified as local. (This means that the con-
trol unit is built into the radio with logical address 11 and radio IP address 192.168.52.34.)

Figure 3.64 Radio IP Address List (Example with Local Radio)
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00071-A-01-1
The control unit still can connect to these two radios, but the selection of the radio now ap-
pears as depicted in Figure 3.65.

Figure 3.65 Listbox Connect to Radio
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00072-A-01-1
For details about connecting to radios see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit.

Table 3.33 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 3/4

sect. 3.5.2 Control Unit MTC 2/4 (4002)).
Press this softkey to mark the selected radio in the Radio

IP Address List as local. The local radio is marked with the
symbol
To unmark a radio select the marked radio with the knob

and press this softkey.
Only one radio can be marked as local. If the Radio IP

Address List is empty or the selected line is empty or
the selected line contains the address the CU is cur-
rently connected to, this softkey is disabled.
Press this softkey to edit the selected entry in the Radio IP Logical Address:
Address List.
up to eight characters
Two steps are necessary for editing an entry:
IP Address:
1. After pressing this softkey an editor comes up to edit
the logical address of the selected radio. Edit the logi- 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
cal address with the numeric keypad or the knob and
press 'ENT' to confirm.
2. After pressing 'ENT' another editor comes up to edit
the IP address. Use the knob or the numeric keypad to
edit each of the four digits of the address separately.
To select the next number press the key and then
press 'ENT' to confirm
If the Radio IP Address List is empty or the selected

line is empty or the selected line contains the address
the CU is currently connected to, this softkey is dis-
abled.
Press this softkey to delete the selected entry in the Radio

IP Address List.
If the Radio IP Address List is empty or the selected

line is empty, this softkey is disabled.

Press this softkey to insert a new entry in the Radio IP Ad-

dress List above the currently selected entry.
Two steps are necessary to insert a new entry:
1. After pressing this softkey an editor comes up to enter

the logical address of the radio. Enter the logical ad-
dress with the numeric keypad or the knob and press
'ENT' to confirm.
2. After pressing 'ENT' another editor comes up to enter
the IP address. Use the knob or the numeric keypad to
enter each of the four numbers of the address sepa-
rately. To select the next number press the key and
then press 'ENT' to confirm
The total number of entries in the Radio IP Address

List is limited to 100.

Unit MTC 4/4 (4004)).
It is not possible to edit the radio IP address list when the control unit is connecting
to a radio or is connected to a radio.


ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00075-A-01-1
In the central area of the menu CU MTC 4/4 the current settings of the display parameters
are shown. The display parameters are used to adapt the control unit to personal require-
ments. The display contrast and brightness, the keyboard brightness and the indicator (LED)
brightness can be adjusted, each in the range from 0 % to 100 %. Use the softkeys to change
the setting (see Table 3.34).
Table 3.34 Softkeys in Menu CU MTC 4/4 (4004)

sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003)).
Open a listbox and use the OFF

knob to select the time for
the screen saver or switch 15 min.
off. 30 min.
Press 'ENT' to confirm. 1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours

When at low temperatures (below 10 °C) the display

background illumination is frequently switched on and
off, the durability of the illumination decreases consid-
erably. For operation at low temperatures we therefore
recommend 15 minutes as the shortest time for
screen saver activation.
At temperatures around or below the freezing point the
screen saver should not be used at all (setting OFF), so
that the control unit is constantly kept warm by the back-
ground illumination.

the current indicator bright-
ness.
Use the numeric editor or

the knob to change the val-
ue until the desired bright-
ness is reached.

the current keyboard bright-
ness.

ness is reached.

the current display bright-
ness.

ness is reached.

the current display contrast.

ue until the desired contrast
is reached.

M3SR Series 4100 User Level
3.6 User Level

In the Control Unit Maintenance menu the level of user access (user levels 0 to 2 are avail-
able) can be selected, allowing the user to perform the functions he is authorized to use. Se-
lection is made by entering a password and confirming with 'ENT'.
• The following default passwords are defined:

- Level 0: no password required
- Level 1: 1234
- Level 2: 2345
These passwords can be changed via the R&S RNMS3000 (Radio Network Manage-
ment System).
• The issuance of user rights (i.e. user levels) is managed by the system administrator.
• The assignment of user levels to radio functions is fix and cannot be changed.
The default is user level 0. To set a user level the password for this user level has to be en-
tered. When the correct password has been entered, the text color changes to green. After
confirming the password with ’ENT’ the new user level is set and shown in the center window.
This setting is used radio wide for all softkeys. Entering an invalid password or an empty val-
ue sets the radio to user level 0.
Once logged in the user can access all functions which require this level or a lower level.
Figure 3.52 shows the currently set system-wide user level.

ICN-4D-H-231000-R-D0894-00062-A-01-1
Figure 3.68 User Level Editor
ICN-4D-H-231000-R-D0894-00102-A-01-1

After confirming this entry with 'ENT', the system-wide user level will be set to level 1.
The password can have a length of up to 32 alphanumeric characters (uppercase letters, nu-
merals). The editor always shows the 15 rightmost characters of a password. Within the dis-
played portion of a password, it can be edited. Selection of the character to be edited is done
by pressing “.” (dot) until the desired position gets highlighted.
Deletion of characters always starts at end of the password and is done by pressing 'ESC
CLR'.
Characters can be entered by turning the wheel until the desired character appears, then
confirming this character by pressing “.” (dot). Numeric entry is also possible by means of the
keypad.
Alternatively, it is possible to have a low system-wide user level set and enter the PIN if it is
necessary to use a sofkey which requires a higher user level.
Softkeys which require higher user levels than the currently set system-wide level, are
marked with a lock symbol ( ) at the left or right top corner.
The password editor now displays which user level is required for the selected action. For
example: Level 1/2. This means, that the level 1 password as well as the level 2 password
will start the action. Now enter the correct password and press 'ENT'. The action behind the
softkey is started.
Please keep in mind that this proceeding only unlocks the softkey for ONE action. After per-
forming this action, the softkey will be locked again. It also does NOT change the radio wide
system user level setting.

Figure 3.69 Unlock
ICN-4D-H-231000-R-D0894-00103-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency
3.7 Fixed Frequency
3.7.1 Fixed Frequency Menu Tree
This documentation gives information on the operation mode Fixed Frequency.
The operation mode Fixed Frequency (FF) of the radio allows analog voice and data com-
munication on fixed frequencies.
Settings and actions concerning Tx operation are not applicable for

R&S EK4100 Systems.
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for fixed frequency operation.
The menu tree shows where to find a particular menu.
Figure 3.70 Menu Tree: Fixed Frequency
Fixed Frequency Home
1111 1112
FF OP 1/2 FF OP 2/2
1121 1122
FF CFG 1/2 FF CFG 2/2
1151
GPS OP
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00076-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Home Menu
3.7.1.1 Fixed Frequency Home Menu
After selecting a Preset Page with Fixed Frequency operation mode (FF, sect. 3.3 Control
and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit) the control unit comes up with the Home menu as
shown in Figure 3.71. In the central area the currently set main FF parameters are displayed.
Figure 3.71 Home Menu: Fixed Frequency, e.g. F3E Operation Mode (Rx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00077-A-01-1
1 Effective Tx Frequency
2 Effective Rx Frequency
3 Current Modulation Mode
4 Current Delta Frequency Deviation
5 Input Signal Level (RSSI)
If the radio is set to transmit mode, the central area shows different bar graphs.

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Home Menu
Figure 3.72 Home Menu: Fixed Frequency, e.g. F3E Operation Mode (Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00078-A-01-1
1 Effective Output Power

2 Effective Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR)

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Operational Menus
3.7.2 Fixed Frequency Operational Menus
More than in any other frequency range, the short wave operation with legacy waveforms –
like single sideband modulation – is still very important. It is called Fixed Frequency operation
here, in contrast to Frequency Hopping waveforms like SECOM-H or waveforms with auto-
matic link establishment (ALE).
Please be aware that within the communication mode ALE there are Fixed Frequency oper-
ational menus as well. Due to the automatism within the ALE, not all parameters are avail-
able there, but otherwise the menu layout is the same as described below.
Menu Structure of Fixed Frequency Operational Menus
Within Fixed Frequency Preset Pages, the radio supports the following classes of emission:
A1A, A3E, R3E, H3E, B8E, B7D, F1D, F3E, J3E (LSB, USB), J2D (LSB, USB)
Where needed, the MMI representation uses the ‘+’ to indicate the Upper Sideband (USB)
and the ‘-’ for the Lower Sideband accordingly.
Default Values
When selecting a class of emission like +J3E (single sideband operation in the upper side-
band), all dependent parameters are set to their default values, fitting most of the needs and
simplifying the manual operation. That means for instance a default Rx bandwidth setting of
2400 Hz for +J3E.
However, if this default settings does not fit the needs, they can be changed by pressing the
corresponding softkeys.
Depending on the class of emission chosen, the number of available settings and their pos-
sible values are changing as well. In F3E for instance, due to the demodulation method, there
are no AGC and MGC functions and settings needed. To keep the MMI as simple as possi-
ble, the corresponding softkeys are suppressed in these cases.
For each modulation mode the FF Operational menu (FF OP) structure and softkeys may
vary.

Table 3.35 Menu Structure as Function of Modulation Mode
Modulation OP 1/2 OP 2/2
A1A
A3E
B7D

B8E
F1D
F3E

R3E
H3E
+J2D

-J2D
+J3E
-J3E

M3SR Series 4100 Storing Current Settings
3.7.2.1 Storing Current Settings
Softkey Softkey Type Description
Editor 1. Press 'Channel Store' softkey.

2. Enter desired channel.
3. Press 'ENT' key to confirm.
If the 'Channel Store' softkey is pressed, it

shows the frequency and modulation of the
channel.
Channel not used (e.g.)
Channel used (e.g.)
By means of softkey 'Channel Store' the oper-

ator can store the current equipment setting in
a particular channel. The effective channel is
displayed in the menu header, e.g. CH: 101.
If the entered channel number is within the

permitted entry range, the editor window will
be closed.
Possible values:
Channels 1 to 400, pre-configured with the

R&S RNMS3000 software tool.
With the R&S RNMS software tool you can

configure these channels as modifiable or
not modifiable by the user.
If a channel has already been stored via R&S

RMNS3000 and was configured as modifiable,
the storing will overwrite it. If the channel was
configured as not modifiable via R&S
RMNS3000, it is not possible to store it or
overwrite it from the MMI.
Channel store/recall is only available on Pre-

set Page 0. Other Fixed Frequency Preset
Pages consist only of one channel.

400 channels are always available on Preset

Page 0 independent of the number of further
Preset Pages assigned to Fixed Frequency
operation.
The 'Channel store' softkey is used to store

Fixed Frequency parameters set on the radio.
Settings can be recalled as described in
sect. 3.7.3.2 Recalling Settings.
The following parameters are stored in a chan-

nel:
• Modulation
• Bandwidth
• Data rate
• Noise blanker
• Power
• FSK run / stop function
• Frequency shift F3
• Frequency
• BFO frequency
• Delta frequency
• Polarity
• Preamplifier
• Squelch
• Data link mode (option see
sect. 4.6 Link SW)

M3SR Series 4100 Recalling Settings
3.7.2.2 Recalling Settings
Editor 1. Press 'Channel Recall' softkey.

3. Press 'ENT 'key to confirm.
If the 'Channel Recall' softkey is pressed, it

shows the frequency and modulation of the
channel.
Channel not used (e.g.)
Channel used (e.g.)
The channel is recalled automatically after the

time set via softkey 'Ch. Auto Recall Time'
(see sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance)
The 'Channel Recall' softkey is used to recall

settings stored with the 'Channel Store' func-
tion (see sect. 3.7.3.1 Storing Current Set-
tings) or with the R&S RMNS3000 or to recall
the predefined fix maritime channels. The ef-
fective channel is displayed in the menu head-
er, e.g. CH: 101. Channels from 1 to 400 are
pre-configured with the R&S RNMS3000 soft-
ware tool and can be configured as modifiable
or not. If a channel is not modifiable, the user
will not be able to edit its parameters from the
MMI.. Channels between 401 and 25040 are
pre-defined maritime channels. For the mari-
time channels the radio is able to distinguish
between ship or shore configuration, where Rx
and Tx frequencies are swapped. See also
sect. 3.7.4.5 Switching Environment Shore or
Ship.

M3SR Series 4100 Recalling Settings
Possible values:
Channels 1 to 400 are configurable.
Channels 401 to 25030 are reserved for pre-

defined maritime channels (read-only chan-
nels)
Maritime channels used with modulation

J3E+:
401 to 429, 601 to 608, 801 to 837, 1201 to

1241, 1601 to 1656, 1801 to 1815, 2201 to
2253, 2501 to 2510
Maritime channels used with modulation F1D:
4001 to 4019, 6001 to 6034, 8001 to 8040,

12001 to 12156, 16001 to 16193, 18001 to
18045, 22001 to 22135, 25001 to 25040
Channel 101 is the default channel. When the operator presses the erase key, all chan-
nels, except channel 101, will be erased. Channel 101 will be reset to its default values
to give the operator a starting point to manually configure other channels.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency
3.7.2.3 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency
Listbox 1. Press 'SQL Tone' softkey.

2. Select desired frequency from listbox.
Possible values (in Hz):
67 - 69.3 - 71.9 - 74.4 - 77 - 79.7 - 82.5 - 85.4

- 88.5 - 91.5 - 94.8 - 97.4 - 100 - 103.5 - 107.2
- 110.9 - 114.8 - 118.8 - 123 - 127.3 - 131.8 -
136.5 - 141.3 - 146.2 - 151.4 - 156.7 - 162.2 -
167.9 - 173.8 - 179.9 - 186.2 - 192.8 - 203.5 -
210.7 - 218.1 - 225.7 - 233.6 - 241.8 - 250.3
Default value:
100 Hz
The signal squelch is supported in modulation
modes F3E, H3E, R3E and A3E.
When enabled, the audio signal is unmuted

only in case of reception of the predefined sig-
nal tone. On the other hand, the transmitter su-
perimposes that signal tone frequency as well.
The subtones within a network should be set
to identical values.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity
3.7.2.4 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity
Editor 1. Press 'RSSI Thres' softkey.

2. Change to desired value.
Possible values:
0 dB up to 110 dB
Default value:
20 dB
The RSSI (received signal strength indication)
squelch mutes the audio output for reception
levels below the threshold.
Please note that RSSI squelch has to be en-

abled to have an effect on the audio output.
Superimposed over these manual settings is

an automatic process (in case AGC function is
switched on) which controls the preamplifier
gain depending on received signal strength to
prevent saturation of subsequent stages. The
manual settings are limits up to which the au-
tomatic process controls, i.e. for low signals
the attenuation /gain values apply; if the signal
is above a threshold it is further attenuated.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Squelch Type
3.7.2.5 Selecting the Squelch Type
Listbox 1. Press 'Squelch' softkey.

2. Select desired mode from listbox.
If the squelch function is activated, the squelch 3. Press 'ENT' key to confirm.
symbol changes from
Possible values:
OFF, RSSI, Signal, Syllabic, RSSI & Syllabic,

RSSI & Signal
Default value:
to
OFF
The squelch is particularly effective for F3E, at

good reception conditions even for other
modes but A1A, B8E and B7D, where squelch
would not allow reasonable reception, it is not
selectable there.
RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)
The RSSI squelch opens only if the squelch

threshold is exceeded (see RSSI Squelch
Threshold).
Signal squelch
The signal squelch acts upon a variable sub-

tone. Only if the wanted signal contains this
subtone, which is always transmitted with it,
will the audio signal be unmuted. If signal
squelch is selected, a subtone is also added to
the transmitted signal. The subtones within a
network should be set to identical values.

modes F3E, H3E, R3E and A3E, but not in sin-
gle sideband modulations due to their side-
band filters.
Syllabic squelch
The syllabic squelch enables the audio output

when syllabic-like signals are detected in the
reception signal. This squelch method is less
fading-sensitive than RSSI squelch.
The syllabic squelch is supported in modula-

tion modes F3E, H3E, R3E, +J3E,-J3E and
A3E.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold
3.7.2.6 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold
Editor 1. Press 'Syll. Thres' softkey.

Possible values:
0 % to 100 %
0% very sensetive
100% very insensetive
The syllabic squelch threshold determines the

sensitivity of the syllabic squelch algorithm.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Rx Preamplifier On and Off
3.7.2.7 Switching the Rx Preamplifier On and Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'Preamp' to toggle preampli-

fier on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
ON
It is recommended to keep the preamplifier on

when the radio is operated on short, low-gain
antennas or at frequencies above 10 MHz,
where it can increase the signal-to-noise ratio
of the received signal.
In other cases, operation with Rx preamplifier

switched off can deliver even better reception
results.
Superimposed over these manual settings is

an automatic process (in case AGC function is
switched on) which controls the preamplifier
gain depending on received signal strength to
prevent saturation of subsequent stages. The
manual settings are limits up to which the au-
tomatic process controls, i.e. for low signals
the attenuation /gain values apply; if the signal
is above a threshold it is further attenuated.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Automatic Gain Control On or Off
3.7.2.8 Switching the Automatic Gain Control On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'RF/IF Gain' to toggle AGC

on/off.
Possible values:
• AGC
• MGC (= AGC Off)
Default value:
AGC
AGC and MGC setting is dependent on the se-

lected modulation mode. It is available for all
modulation modes, except F3E and F1D.
AGC ensures an almost constant peak audio

level even if the reception level varies. Be-
cause of that, it is recommended to use AGC
for all practical applications of the radio. Use
together with AGC threshold to set the maxi-
mum RF gain, if needed for more quiet voice
communication.
In practical applications it is recommended to

use AGC together with AGC threshold instead
of MGC. If switched to MGC, the softkey 'MGC
Intercept' is used to adjust the RF and IF gain
of the receiver.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the AGC Threshold
3.7.2.9 Changing the AGC Threshold
Press softkey ‘AGC Threshold’, then use the

knob to increase or decrease the automatic
gain control (AGC) threshold.
By means of this threshold, the operator can

reduce the maximum RF gain, known from
older shortwave receivers. This feature is very
useful in voice communication, where relative-
ly quiet audio outputs at low receive levels are
required.
Default value: 0.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the MGC Level
3.7.2.10 Changing the MGC Level
Editor 1. Press softkey 'MGC Level'.

2. The MGC level can be modified by knob.
Default value:
-12 dBµV
Before setting the MGC level, switch RF/IF

GAIN to MGC. The MGC (Manual Gain Con-
trol) function is used to manually adjust the
gain of the receiver. By decreasing the gain of
the demodulated signal, also its noise level is
reduced.
In practical applications it is recommended to

use AGC together with AGC threshold instead
of MGC.
AGC and MGC setting is dependent on the se-

lected modulation mode. It is available for all
modulation modes, except F3E and F1D.
With an appropriate level setting and a high

volume the audio quality can be improved. Ef-
fects on the antenna input signal (e.g. fading)
will no longer be levelled out automatically.
MGC operation will only be necessary in case
of critical receive conditions.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Release Time
3.7.2.11 Changing the Release Time
Listbox 1. Press 'Release Time' softkey.

2. Select desired time from listbox.
The currently selected release time is dis- 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
played in the central area.
The release time (= hold time + decay time) is
the time after which the AGC is achieving the
full receiver sensitivity.
It is available for all modulation types except

F3E and F1D. When changing the modulation
mode, the default release times are loaded
once again. So, for global changes, better use
the Fixed Frequency Configuration menu to
change the defaults directly.
Possible values:
25 ms - 150 ms - 500 ms - 1000 ms - 3000 ms

- 5000 ms - 9000 ms

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Receiver Filter Bandwidth
3.7.2.12 Changing the Receiver Filter Bandwidth
Only channels configured as modifiable can have its RX bandwidth modified. This can
be configured via R&S RMNS3000.
Listbox 1. Press 'BW' softkey.

2. Select desired receiver filter bandwidth
from listbox with the knob.
3. Press 'ENT' to close the listbox.
Possible values and dependencies on

modulation modes:
A1A : 50 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 300 Hz
+/-J3E: 50 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 2400 Hz
A3E 3500 Hz up to 8000 Hz, default 6000 Hz

H3E: 2100 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 3100 Hz
R3E: 2100 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 3100 Hz
F3E: 6000 Hz and 8000 Hz, default 8000 Hz

+/-J2D: 100 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 2700 Hz
F1D: Automatically set, depending on bitrate

50 bit/s, 75 bit/s, 100 bit/s, 150 bit/s, 300 bit/s,
600 bit/s
B8E: 1800 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 2700 Hz
B7D: 1800 Hz up to 3100 Hz, default 2700 Hz
Especially for voice and Morse code opera-

tion, changes in the receiver filter bandwidth
can help to improve the signal readability.
When the data link mode option is used,

the bandwidth is set to 2750 Hz.
Audio signal quality and selected bandwidth

are related as follows:
large bandwidth, increased noise compo-

nent possible
narrow bandwidth, small noise component

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Modulation Mode
3.7.2.13 Changing the Modulation Mode
Only channels configured as modifiable can have its modulation mode modified. This
can be configured via R&S RMNS3000.
Listbox 1. Press 'MODE' softkey.

2. Select desired modulation mode from list-
box with the knob.
The listbox is closed.
The new modulation mode is now used for re-

ception and transmission.
Possible values are:
A1A (CW, Morse telegraphy)

A3E (AM, amplitude modulation)
R3E (A3A, single sideband, reduced
carrier)
H3E( AME, single sideband, full carrier)
F3E (FM, frequency modulation)
+J3E ( USB, upper sideband, SSB)
-J3E ( LSB, lower sideband, SSB)
+J2D (USB for external modems)
-J2D (LSB for external modems)
F1D (FSK, frequency shift keying)
B8E (ISB, two independent sidebands for
voice)
B7D (ISB, two independent sidebands for
external modems)
Avoid using +/-J3E for operation with external

modems, this mode is optimized for voice
communication only. Use +/-J2D instead.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Clarifier Frequency
3.7.2.14 Changing the Clarifier Frequency
Editor 1. Press 'CLARIF' softkey.

Possible values:
-200 Hz up to +200 Hz
Default value:
0 Hz
The clarifier function is used for fine tuning to

the received signal (receiver incremental tun-
ing, RIT).
This function is particularly important for single

sideband modulation (SSB), where the clarifi-
er can improve the readability of the voice sig-
nal.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Frequency
3.7.2.15 Changing the Frequency
Rx and Tx frequencies can be changed either by using the knob, if the Smart Frequency Ed-
itor (SFE) is enabled (see softkeys in sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance), or by means of
the softkey FREQ.
Only channels configured as modifiable can have its TX and/or RX frequency modi-
fied. This can be configured via R&S RMNS3000.

Frequency Editor
Editor modes Rx and Tx frequency
Rx/Tx: Receive and transmit frequency are Changing the editor mode:
modified simultaneously.
1. Press 'FREQ' softkey.
2. By pressing the 'FREQ' softkey again you
can toggle through the three different fre-
quency editor modes, which are shown in
the second column.
Possible values:
Rx/Tx - Tx - Rx
Changing the frequency:
1. Enter new frequency.

Tx: Only transmit frequency will be modified. The frequency can be entered using nu-
meric keypad or/and knob.
The effective Rx and Tx carrier frequen-
cies (e.g. 25250.000 kHz) are displayed in
the central area.
Only frequencies changed with the knob

are effective immediately.
Rx: Only receive frequency will be modified.
Possible values:
Rx: 0 Hz to 29999.999 kHz
Tx: 1500 kHz to 29999.999 kHz
Editor Frequency step size editor
1. Increase the step size for frequency mod-

ifications with the rotary knob or by press-
ing 'STEP UP'.
2. Accordingly, use 'STEP DOWN' to de-
crease the step size.
The new value is automatically displayed with-

in the softkey.
Possible values:
1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz,

1 MHz, 10 MHz

Knob
With the Smart Frequency Editor enabled (see softkeys in sect. 3.5 Control Unit Mainte-
nance), it is possible to change the carrier frequencies using the knob, if the current Tx and
Rx carrier frequencies are displayed in the center of the window (this is the case for the
Home Menu and Menu FF OP 1/2 and FF OP 2/2).
Button Button Type Description
Editor modes Changing the editor mode:
Rx/Tx: Receive and transmit frequency are 1. Press '0' button.

modified simultaneously. 2. By pressing the '0' button again you can
toggle through the three different frequen-
cy editor modes, which are shown in the
second column.
Changing the frequency:
1. Change frequency .
The frequency can be changed using
Tx: Only transmit frequency will be modified. knob.
The effective Rx and Tx carrier frequen-
cies (e.g. 24450.000 kHz) are displayed in
the central area.
The currently selected step size is indicat-
ed with a bar above the Tx frequency / un-
derneath the Rx frequency .
Rx: Only receive frequency will be modified.
Button Button Type Description
Frequency step size editor
1. Increase / decrease the step size for fre-

quency modifications by pressing '+/-' or '·'
button.
or

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the VOX Signal Source
3.7.2.16 Switching the VOX Signal Source
Listbox 1. Press 'VOX' softkey.

Possible values:
OFF - LINE - VOICE
In VOX (voice-operated transmission), the ra-

dio is keyed when a voice signal is present on
the audio or line interface. VOX is only avail-
able in voice communication, i.e. in modulation
modes +/-J3E, A3E, F3E and H3E.
If VOX is set to VOICE, the operator can

switch to transmit mode by simply talking into
the microphone connected at the front panel,
and when he stops talking the radio automati-
cally returns to receive mode.
If VOX set to LINE, the transmit mode is acti-
vated as soon as a voice signal at the USB line
input on X26 is detected.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Voice Compressor On or Off
3.7.2.17 Switching the Voice Compressor On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'VC' to toggle voice com-

pressor on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
ON
The voice compressor is improves the voice

signal readability by increasing the average
transmitter output power. For short-range
communication it may be useful to switch the
voice compressor off.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Noise Blanker Type
3.7.2.18 Selecting the Noise Blanker Type
Listbox 1. Press 'NB Type' softkey.

Possible Values:
OFF - FLASH - SPARKS - ELECTRIC FENCE
The noise blanker cuts out spikes from differ-

ent noise sources like flash, sparks and elec-
tric fence.
Noise Blanker is only available in modulation

modes +/-J3E, A3E, F3E and H3E.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Notch Filter Speed
3.7.2.19 Selecting the Notch Filter Speed
Listbox 1. Press 'Notch' softkey.

2. Select desired value from list, slowest to
fastest.
This radio uses a high-efficiency auto notch fil-

ter, automatically searching for disturbing car-
riers that can be notched to improve the
readability of a voice reception signal.
Within this list, the speed of notch following the

interferer can be selected. In the fastest set-
ting, some distortion of weak voice signals
might occur.
Notch Filter is only available in modulation

mode J3E.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Passband Tuning Frequency
3.7.2.20 Changing the Passband Tuning Frequency
Editor 1. Press 'PBT' softkey.

2. Select desired value.
Possible values:
-2000 Hz up to +2000 Hz within a stepwidth of

10 Hz
Default value:
0 Hz
Passband tuning shifts the Rx IF filters to im-

prove the signal readability in case of strong
interferers at the lower and upper cut-off fre-
quencies. Available for all modulation modes
but B7D and B8E.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Power Level
3.7.2.21 Selecting the Power Level
Listbox 1. Press 'Power' softkey.

2. Select desired power level from listbox.
Possible output power levels for 150 W

systems:
10 mW - 10 W - 20 W - 50 W - 100 W - 150 W

systems:
10 mW - 20 W - 50 W – 100 W – 250 W –
500 W (when ordered with CE mark, limited to
250 W for f < 4 MHz)

systems:
10 mW – 50 W - 100 W – 250 W – 500 W –

1000 W (when ordered with CE mark, limited
to 250 W for f < 4 MHz)
By selecting a higher output power, the signal-

to-noise ratio at the receiver is increased,
which may extend the communication cover-
age.
The current output power during transmission

is shown in the RF Level bar graph in the cen-
tral area of the MMI. With the exception of the
constant envelope modulations F3E, F1D and
A1A, the maximum output power reached de-
pends on the audio modulation source. This is
the case especially in B8E, when only one of
the two modulation sources is present.
In B8E operation and with modulation from a

single sideband it may occur that the desired
PEP output power is not fully obtained.
10 mW denotes the output power of the

frontend. If an amplifier is connected to the
radio, there will be no RF power at the out-
put of this amplifier in the setting 10 mW.

M3SR Series 4100 Starting ATU Tuning
3.7.2.22 Starting ATU Tuning
Initiates ATU tuning on current Tx frequency. Press 'ATU Tune' softkey to initiate tuning pro-
cess.
The ATU starts tuning to the current Tx fre-

quency.
Usually, shortwave antennas have impedanc-

es far away from 50 ohms, the optimum load
impedance of the power amplifier (PA) or the
input impedance of the receiver.
During tuning the following status is dis- The task of the antenna tuning unit (ATU) is to
played: match the antenna impedance to the required
load impedance of 50 ohms.
This matching or ‘tuning’ can be performed by

either pressing 'ATU Tune', or more easily by
pressing the softkey 'ATU LEARN' in the Fixed
Frequency configuration menu, where the
matching of entire bands can be ‘learned’ in a
block.
If the band of interest was learned, it is not

longer needed to press ATU Tune after every
frequency change.
Please note, that ATU tuning and ATU learn-

ing result in RF radiation equivalent to approx-
imately 15 W output power.
For best results, avoid co-located transmitter

lines to transmit during ATU tuning.
If tuning is aborted, the following status is dis-

played:
Do not switch off the R&S GB4000C while

ATU tuning is in progress. Otherwise tun-
ing will be impeded when the
R&S GB4000C is switched on again.
If tuning failed, the following status is dis- In case of a 'Tuned failed' indication please try
played: to tune once again or check the antenna instal-
lation and the RF cable between PA and ATU.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the BFO Frequency for A1A
3.7.2.23 Changing the BFO Frequency for A1A
Editor 1. Press 'BFO' softkey.

2. Change the beat frequency oscillator
(BFO) frequency to the desired value.
Possible values:
–2000 Hz to +2000 Hz
Default value:
800 Hz
If the operator prefers a higher or lower A1A

receiving tone, it can be adjusted by the BFO.
The default value of 800 Hz is suitable for
most cases.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Delta Frequency
3.7.2.24 Changing the Delta Frequency
Editor 1. Press 'Delta FREQ' softkey.

Possible values:
–2000 Hz to +2000 Hz
Default value:
±1800 Hz for +/-J2D (suitable for most mo-

dems)
By means of softkey 'Delta FREQ' (Delta Fre-

quency) the operator can tune the centre of
the signal spectrum for modulation modes J2D
and F1D.
J2D: If external modems with center frequen-

cies other than 1800 Hz are to be used with
the radio, the radio IF filter's center frequency
can be set accordingly.
F1D: Some F1D radios work with a certain off-

set of the center frequency from the selected
carrier frequency. If this is the case, just use
the delta frequency setting to compensate for
that. In all other cases, the default value of
0 Hz will allow immediate operation.
When changing the Rx / Tx carrier frequency,

the delta frequency setting is kept, but when
changing the modulation, it is reset to default.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Data Link Mode
3.7.2.25 Selecting the Data Link Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'DLM' softkey.

2. Select desired value from listbox.
Possible values:
OFF - LINK MULTI - LINK SINGLE - LINK Y

MULTI
Use this function when operating the radio with

special external link modems to optimize the
receiver and transmitter AGC / ALC and filter-
ing.
Only available with option key 'Link Software'.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Multitone Function On or Off
3.7.2.26 Switching the Multitone Function On or Off
Only available with option key R&S GS4123S MULTITONE.
Listbox 1. Press 'Multitone' softkey.

Possible values:
OFF - ON
This function configures the radio for external

multitone modems like DRM.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the PEP (Peak Envelope Power) to Average Power Factor
3.7.2.27 Changing the PEP (Peak Envelope Power) to Average Power Factor
Editor 1. Press 'PEP/PAvg' softkey.

Possible values:
0 dB to 12 dB
With this setting, the automatic level control

(ALC) of the power amplifier can be adjusted
to the characteristic of external modems to
achieve highly linear signal amplification. It af-
fects the J2D and B7D Tx direction only.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the F1D Baud Rate
3.7.2.28 Selecting the F1D Baud Rate
Listbox 1. Press 'BAUD' softkey.

2. Select desired baud rate from listbox.
Possible values (bit/s):
50 - 75 - 100 - 150 - 300 - 600
The baud rate and the F1D shift directly influ-

ence the IF filter bandwidth. The bandwidth is
automatically adapted by the radio.
For ALE operation (option) within link

mode analog voice / FF and selected mod-
ulation mode F1D the baud rate is 600 bit/s.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the F1D Transmitter / Receiver Signal Polarity
3.7.2.29 Changing the F1D Transmitter / Receiver Signal Polarity
Toggle 1. Press relevant softkey to toggle polarity.
Possible values:
• Negative (-)
• Positive )+)
It influences the F1D data terminal signal po-

larity on X26.19 (RXD2) and X26.33 (TXD2).
Adjust the polarity if the F1D radio network is
not compliant with the default settings from the
STANAG 4204:
0 at the COM interface => lower transmit fre-

quency
1 at the COM interface => higher transmit fre-

quency

ulation mode F1D the Transmitter / Receiv-
er Signal Polarity is positive.
The standard assignment of data polarity to frequency is according to STANAG 4204:
Data level polarity RS232 polarity Frequency
0 positive Fc - fs
1 negative Fc + fs

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Frequency Shift for F1D
3.7.2.30 Changing the Frequency Shift for F1D
Listbox 1. Press 'Shift' softkey.

2. Select desired frequency from listbox,
42 Hz – 85 Hz – 225 Hz or 425 Hz
The frequency shift determines the frequency

deviation between the mark (to transfer a ‘1’)
and space (to transfer a ‘0’) frequency for any
F1D transmission or reception.
The IF filter bandwidths are selected automat-

ically.
For higher baud rates please use higher fre-

quency shifts as well.

ulation mode F1D the frequency shift is
85 Hz.

M3SR Series 4100 TTY RUN/STOP Selection
3.7.2.31 TTY RUN/STOP Selection
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'TTY'.

2. Toggle to STOP to stop the RXD2 on
X26.19 from sending symbols. This pre-
vents the teletyper from printing.
3. Toggle to RUN to continue, if required.
Possible values:
• RUN
• STOP

ulation mode F1D the TTY is RUN.

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus
3.7.3 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus
Menu Structure of Configuration Menus
The choice of available functions in submenus is independent of the modulation mode.
In the central area of the configuration menu 1/2 (FF CFG 1/2) the currently set configuration
parameters are displayed.
Figure 3.73 Menu 1121: FF CFG 1/2
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00083-A-01-1
1 ATU Learn High Frequency

2 ATU Learn Low Frequency
3 Current Tx Frequency
In the central area of the configuration menu 2/2 (FF CFG 2/2) the currently set configuration
parameters are displayed.

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus
Figure 3.74 Menu 1122: FF CFG 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00084-A-01-1
1 Release Time A1A

2 Release Time A3E
3 Release Time J3E
4 Release Time J2D
5 Release Time B8E
6 A1A-Hold Time

M3SR Series 4100 Starting ATU Learning
3.7.3.1 Starting ATU Learning
During learning the following status is dis- 1. Press 'ATU Learn' softkey to initiate learn-
played: ing process.
The ATU starts to perform consecutive ATU

tuning processes (see ATU TUNE) for the se-
lected frequency range.
The learning process can take between

some seconds and up to one hour, depend-
ing on the ATU and antenna connected. It
can be aborted at any time by pressing the
'ESC/CLR' button.
Do not switch off the R&S GB4000C Con-

trol Unit while ATU learning is in progress.
Otherwise learning will be impeded when
the control unit is switched on again.
If learning was successful, the following status

is displayed:
It will disappear as soon as the learning pro-

cess is finished successfully.
If learning is aborted or failed the following sta- In case of a 'Tuned failed'’ indication please try
tus is displayed to tune once again or check the antenna instal-
lation and the RF cable between PA and ATU.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching ATU Silent Tuning On or Off
3.7.3.2 Switching ATU Silent Tuning On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'ATU SIL' to toggle ATU si-

lent tuning on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default setting:
ON
In almost all practical situations it is recom-

mended to activate ATU silent tuning, where
the ATU will be retuned only by pressing the
'ATU Tune' softkey.
Only where ATU retuning is required with ev-

ery PTT, set this softkey to OFF instead (for in-
stance if the antenna is permanently moving
and its antenna impedance is changing).

M3SR Series 4100 Bypassing the ATU
3.7.3.3 Bypassing the ATU
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'ATU Bypass' to toggle

bypass function on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default setting:
OFF
Bypassing the ATU results in a longer life cy-

cle of the ATU relays, but will degrade recep-
tion performance.
If set to 'ON', the ATU enters Bypass state and

broadband reception using the HF antenna,
ATU and other receiver hardware is possible.
During transmission this feature is set to 'OFF'
and disabled.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the A1A Holdtime
3.7.3.4 Changing the A1A Holdtime
Listbox 1. Press 'A1A-Hold' softkey.

2. Choose desired time value from listbox.
3. Press ENT to confirm.
Possible values (in ms):
50 - 100 - 150 - 200 - 250 - 300 - 350 - 400 -

450 - 500
The A1A holdtime is the delay from the mo-

ment the operator releases the PTT key (Tx
operation) until the radio returns to state Rx.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching Environment Shore or Ship
3.7.3.5 Switching Environment Shore or Ship
Toggle Press softkey to toggle environment between

ship and shore.
Possible values:
• Shore
• Ship
This setting will swap the Rx and Tx fre-

quencies when working on predefined mar-
itime channels. See sect. 3.7.2.2 Recalling
Settings.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the ATU Learning Range
3.7.3.6 Changing the ATU Learning Range
Editor 1. Press either 'Learn Low' or 'Learn High'

softkey.
2. Enter new frequency. The frequency can
be entered by numeric keypad or/and
knob.
Possible values:
1500 kHz to 29999.999 kHz
The lower ATU learn range frequency has to

be lower than the higher, other inputs will be
rejected.
Example:
When communication at 3218 kHz, 3384 kHz
and 3981 kHz is requested, set Learn Low to
3218 kHz, Learn High to 3981 kHz.
Set these Learn frequency limits before press-

ing 'ATU Learn'.
For other modes than Fixed Frequency, the

channels to be learned are taken automatically
from the network configuration.
Softkey Selection / Editor Description
Frequency step size editor
1. Increase the step size for frequency mod-

ifications with the rotary knob after press-
ing 'STEP UP'.
2. Accordingly, use 'STEP DOWN' to de-
crease the step size.
The new value is automatically displayed with-

in the softkey.
Possible values:
1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz,

1 MHz, 10 MHz

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Default Release Times
3.7.3.7 Changing the Default Release Times
Listbox 1. Press desired 'R-Time' softkey.

2. Select desired time value from listbox.
Possible values (in ms):
25 - 150 - 500 - 1000 - 3000 - 5000 - 9000
See also 'Release Time' softkey in the Fixed

Frequency Operational menu 1.
By means of the softkeys 'R-Time .. A1A, A3E,

J3E, J2D, B8E' the operator can change and
store the default release times for several
modulation modes. E.g. if modulation mode
A1A is selected in operational menu, the new
default A1A release time will be loaded.
The release time (= hold time + decay time) is

the time after which the AGC is achieving the
full receiver sensitivity.
Avoid faster release times for voice operation,

it would sound too jittery.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Squelch Hangover Time
3.7.3.8 Changing the Squelch Hangover Time
Listbox The hangover time is the time where the audio

signal remains unmuted after the RF signal
disappeared. To change the hangover time for
the selected squelch type:
1. Press 'SQL HANG' softkey.

The new selection is now effective. When the

desired squelch type is selected, the squelch
hangover time will become automatically acti-
vated.
Possible values:
SHORT (300 ms) - MEDIUM (600 ms) -

LONG (900 ms)
Default value:
MEDIUM

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Signal Squelch Mode
3.7.3.9 Changing the Signal Squelch Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'SQL Mode' softkey.

Possible values:
RX (tone is affecting the receiver only)
TX (tone is affecting the transmitter only)
RXTX (tone is affecting the receiver and

transmitter, recommended for almost all appli-
cations)
Default value:
RXTX

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the VOX Holdtime
3.7.3.10 Changing the VOX Holdtime
Listbox 1. Press 'VOX HANG' softkey.

Possible values:
SHORT (300 ms)
MEDIUM (600 ms)
LONG (2 s)
Default value:
MEDIUM
In VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) the ra-

the audio or line interface. If VOX is on, the op-
erator can switch to transmit mode (TX) by
simply talking, and when he stops talking the
radio automatically returns to receive mode
(RX). The transmitter is keyed as long as a
voice signal is present. When the voice stops
the radio will return to receive mode (RX) only
after the holdtime has elapsed.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the VOX Sensitivity
3.7.3.11 Changing the VOX Sensitivity
Listbox 1. Press 'VOX SENS' softkey.

The new selection is now effective.
Possible values:
LOWEST - LOW - MEDIUM - HIGH - HIGH-

EST
Default value:
MEDIUM
For high audio input levels (or high ambient

noise at the speaker), choose a low VOX sen-
sitivity setting. To enable the VOX function,
check the Fixed Frequency Operational menu
2.

M3SR Series 4100 Activating / Deactivating SELCAL
3.7.3.12 Activating / Deactivating SELCAL
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'SELCAL PTT' to toggle

the Selective Calling (SELCAL) function
on/off.
Through SELCAL, it is possible to call a partic-

Switching SELCAL to ON is only possible, ular airborne radio inside a chosen FF channel
if the current modulation type is set to J3E+ network. In order to perform this, an external
and if the current channel is modifiable. In SELCAL coder connected to the M3TR line in-
case another modulation type is set, the terface has to be used and the SELCAL func-
SELCAL softkey is disabled. tionality has to be activated.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default setting:
OFF
The adjusted frequency for SELCAL

should be a learned frequency.
After activation, the operator enters the code

of the aircraft, which has to be called, into the
SELCAL coder and presses the “Call”-Button
at the coder to send the code via the adjusted
frequency. The SELCAL coder activates the
PTT, generates the code in form of a tone se-
quence at the audio line and deactivates the
PTT afterwards. Between PTT-ON and PTT-
OFF the radio changes the modulation to A3E,
takes this tone sequence from the audio line
and sends it in the air. After PTT-OFF the
modulation is switched back to J3E+ to wait for
the answer from the aircraft.
With SELCAL switched to ON, the modulation

type cannot be changed. The operator has to
first switch SELCAL to OFF, before changing
the modulation type.
To indicated this to the operator the softkey

MODE at the operational menu is greyed out
and the text “Selcal +J3E” is shown.

M3SR Series 4100 Radio Configuration with Pre-configured Parameters
3.8 Radio Configuration with Pre-configured Parameters
While downloading data from a fillgun it is not possible to load a mission directly from
a PC into the R&S M3SR Series 4100 radio using the PC software RDL (Remote Device
Loader), because they are configuring the same R&S M3SR Series 4100 database. If
RDL is needed, please wait until a running fillgun download has finished.
This documentation provides information about loading a radio with pre-configured parame-
ters. It is divided into several sections
• Introduction
• Possibilities to load the configuration to the radio
• Default FF settings if no configuration is loaded
3.8.1 Introduction
After delivery from factory (and after erasure, see sect. 3.2 Operating Concept) only one Pre-
set Page is available (see Figure 3.75 and also sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit). This is Preset Page 0 configured with communication mode FF (see
Figure 3.75) with a set of default FF parameters.

Figure 3.75 Available Preset Page after Delivery from Factory
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00101-A-01-1
Additionally up to 99 customized so called Preset Pages (presets) can be loaded to the radio.
To each Preset Page a communication mode with a complete set of parameters for this com-
munication mode is assigned. The possible communication modes are:
• Fixed Frequency (FF)

• Automatic Linking Establishment (ALE-2G and ALE-3G, option)
• R&S SECOM-H (option)
• HF Modem (option)
The communication mode FF is available on each radio. ALE, SECOM-H and HF Modem
are options.
All presets are easily prepared with a PC, using the Radio Network Management System
(R&S RNMS3000, for details see R&S RNMS3000 documentation).

3.8.2 Procedures for Loading the Configuration into the Radio
There are three possibilities to load the configuration into the radio. All three possibilities pro-
duce the same result. Decide yourself which possibility to use. The main differences are in
the required means of communication and equipment (PC and serial cable, PC and LAN or
fillgun). Additional user interactions on a control unit are required for:
• downloads using a serial cable (see sect. 3.8.2.1 Download from PC into Radio via Se-
rial Cable) and
• downloads using the fillgun (see sect. 3.8.2.2 Download from Fillgun into Radio).
No interactions on a control unit are required for:
• downloads from PC via LAN to the radio (see sect. 3.8.2.3 Download via LAN).

M3SR Series 4100 Download from PC into Radio via Serial Cable
3.8.2.1 Download from PC into Radio via Serial Cable
For downloading the radio configuration via serial cable the following devices are required:
• PC with serial interface (RS-232-C) and R&S RNMS3000 software installed.

• R&S GK3003 Serial Cable.

Figure 3.76 Loading Configuration to Radio via Serial Cable
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00086-A-01-1
1 PC
2 Serial Cable
3 Radio

The following steps are required to download the configuration:
1. Connect fillgun connector on radio front panel via serial cable to the PC (RS-232-C in-
terface, Figure 3.76).
2. Switch PC and radio on (make sure that the radio is on Preset Page 0).
3. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Mission Planner (MPlan) software on the PC. For further in-
formation refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
4. Create a new mission with the R&S RNMS3000.
5. Generate the radio configurations of the mission with the R&S RNMS 3000.
6. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Remote Device Loader (RDL) software. For further informa-
tion refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
7. In RDL switch to the tab "RS232 M3TR/S4100". All available RS-232-C ports of the PC
are displayed.
8. Select the desired radio configurations in the left window of RDL.
9. Copy the configurations to the desired RS-232-C port using drag and drop.
10. Perform the following actions on a control unit connected to the radio (see
sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit) with a session with opera-
tional access rights (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).
- From Home menu navigate to fillgun submenu (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring
of Radio and Control Unit)
- In the Fill Gun menu press softkey 'RGA'. The radio now searches for available con-
figurations from the PC and displays them in a listbox identified by the Radio Global
Address (RGA).
- Select the desired radio configuration to be loaded to the radio with the knob and
press 'ENT'.
- Press softkey
to start the download.

- The download progress is displayed in the central area of the Fill Gun menu (see
Figure 3.77).
- After the download has been finished (100 %) a message box comes up indicating
successful completion.

Confirm the message with 'ENT' or wait until the message box disappears automat-
ically after a few seconds.
11. Exit RDL software and switch off radio.
12. Disconnect R&S GK3003 from PC and radio.
Figure 3.77 Download in Progress (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00097-A-01-1

While the download is in progress, it is not possible to leave the Fill Gun menu. Press
the softkey 'Break' to abort the download or wait for the download to be finished. If the
download does not succeed for some reason, a message box comes up indicating
failure: 'Download failed!'. The reason for the error then is shown in the central area
of the Fill Gun menu in line 'Download Error' (see Figure 3.77).
If a successful download has been finished, the radio automatically reboots if the radio IP
address has been changed due to the new configuration. In this case a new connect of the
control unit to the radio with the new IP address is required (see sect. 3.3 Control and Mon-
itoring of Radio and Control Unit and sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003)).

M3SR Series 4100 Download from Fillgun into Radio
3.8.2.2 Download from Fillgun into Radio
For downloading the radio configuration via fillgun the following devices are required:
• PC with USB interface and R&S RNMS3000 software installed

• R&S GK3021 USB Cable
• R&S GP3000 Fillgun.
To load the configuration via fillgun into the radio two steps are required.
• The first step is to load the configuration from the PC to the fillgun (see Figure 3.78).
• The second step is to load the configuration from the fillgun to the radio (see
Figure 3.79).
Loading the Configuration from the PC to the Fillgun
Figure 3.78 First Step: Loading Configuration to Fillgun
ICN-4D-D-231000-R-D0894-00139-A-01-1
1 PC
2 USB Cable
3 Fillgun

The following steps are required to load the configuration to the Fill Gun:
1. Connect the R&S GP3000 Fillgun via the R&S GK3021 USB Cable to the PC (USB in-
terface, see Figure 3.78).
2. Switch PC on.
3. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Mission Planner (MPlan) software on the PC. For further in-
formation refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
4. Create a new mission with the R&S R&S RNMS3000.
5. Generate the radio configuration with the R&S R&S RNMS3000.
6. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Remote Device Loader (RDL) software. For further informa-
tion refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
7. In RDL switch to the tab "Fillgun GP3x00". The fillgun is displayed in the list with its ex-
isting radio configuration (if any).
8. Delete all existing configurations using the popup menu item "Delete fillgun".
9. Select the desired configuration in the left window of RDL.
10. Copy the configuration to the fillgun using drag and drop.
11. Exit RDL software.
12. Disconnect USB cable at the PC and fillgun.

Loading the Configuration from the Fillgun to the Radio
Figure 3.79 Second Step: Loading Configuration from Fillgun into Radio
ICN-4D-D-231000-R-D0894-00140-A-01-1
1 Radio
2 Fillgun Connector
3 Fillgun
The following steps are required to load the configuration from fillgun into the radio:
1. Connect fillgun with fillgun connector on radio front panel (see Figure 3.79).
2. Switch radio on (make sure that the radio is on Preset Page 0).
3. Perform the following actions on a control unit connected to the radio (see
sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit) with a session with opera-
tional access rights (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio and Control Unit).
- From Home menu navigate to submenu Fill Gun (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitor-
ing of Radio and Control Unit)
- In the Fill Gun menu press softkey RGA. The radio now gets the possible Radio Glo-
bal Addresses (RGAs) from the PC and a listbox with the possible RGAs to be load-
ed is displayed.

- Select the desired RGA (that is the radio configuration coming with this RGA) to be
loaded to the radio with the knob and press ENT.
- Press softkey
to start the download.

If you load an already loaded configuration, in the Fill Gun menu central area the
state changes to: DATA ALREADY USED!. Press again softkey 'Load' to continue
or press softkey 'Break' and select another configuration.
- The download progress is displayed in the central area of the Fill Gun menu (see
Figure 3.80).
- After the download has finished (100 %) a message box comes up indicating suc-
cessful completion.
Confirm the message with 'ENT' or wait until the message box disappears automat-
ically after a few seconds.
4. Switch the radio off.
5. Disconnect R&S GP3000 from the radio.

Figure 3.80 Download in Progress (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00143-A-01-1
While the download is in progress, it is not possible to leave the Fill Gun menu. Press
the softkey 'Break' to abort the download or wait for the download to be finished. If the
download does not succeed for some reason, a message box comes up indicating
failure: 'Download failed!'. The reason for the error then is shown in the central area
of menu Fill Gun in line 'Download Error' (see Figure 3.80).
If a successfull download has been finished, the radio automatically reboots if the radio IP
itoring of Radio and Control Unit and sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003)).

M3SR Series 4100 Download via LAN
3.8.2.3 Download via LAN
For downloading the radio configuration via LAN the following devices are required:
• PC with R&S RNMS3000 software installed.

• LAN where the PC and the Radio are connected (e.g. switch or HUB).

Figure 3.81 Loading Configuration to Radio via LAN
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00086-A-01-1
1 PC
2 LAN
3 Radio

The following steps are required to download the configuration:
1. Connect radio back plane LAN connector and PC to LAN (see Figure 3.81) and make
sure that both are in the same IP subnet.
2. Switch PC and radio on (make sure that the radio is on Preset Page 0).
3. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Mission Planner (MPlan) on the PC. For further information
refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
4. Create a new mission with the R&S RNMS3000.
5. Generate the radio configuration with the R&S RNMS3000.
6. Start the R&S RNMS3000 Remote Device and Loader (RDL) software. For further infor-
mation refer to R&S RNMS3000 documentation.
7. In RDL switch to the tab "LAN M3TR/S4100".
8. Search for available radios in the LAN using the popup menu item "Search in LAN". All
available radios are displayed after a short time. If no radios are found check the IP set-
tings of the PC and the radio.
9. Select the desired radio configurations in the left window of RDL.
10. Copy the configurations to the desired radio using drag and drop.
11. Exit RDL software.
12. Disconnect radio and PC from LAN.
For download via LAN monitoring as well as operational access rights are required. If
the access rights are not available (e.g. 3 CUs with monitoring sessions are connected
or 1 CU with Fixed or Local session is connected), the download will fail.
If a successful download has been finished, the radio automatically reboots if the radio IP
itoring of Radio and Control Unit and sect. 3.5.3 Control Unit MTC 3/4 (4003))

M3SR Series 4100 Fixed Frequency Scanning
3.9 Fixed Frequency Scanning
3.9.1 Basics of Fixed Frequency Scanning
The radio is capable of monitoring activity at different Fixed Frequency settings via two scan
modes. They are named "Frequency Scan" and "Channel Scan". Activity is detected by eval-
uating the configured squelch status. Each frequency or channel is scanned sequentially. Af-
ter scanning the whole defined range, scanning is resumed at the beginning of the defined
range again. Only user interaction will interrupt this loop.
During “Frequency Scan” a defined range (start/stop/step) and in “Channel Scan” a pre-
defined list of channels will be scanned. Each setting will be checked for activity as long as
defined by the parameter Dwell Time, which can be configured for each squelch type sepa-
rately. When activity has been detected, the received signal will be processed as long as de-
fined by the parameter Hold Time.
If an activity is detected, the operator is able to pause the scanning and store the actual fre-
quency into a user defined channel.
Pausing or stopping the scanning procedure is possible any time. When scanning is paused,
the last frequency or the last channel settings found will be taken over into the radio FF op-
erational mode. When the operator restarts frequency scanning without changing the start
frequency, scanning resumes at the last scanned frequency.
Figure 3.82 State Diagram of the Scanning Feature
Dwell time
Start softkey out
stopped scanning
FF-Operational Detection
Terminate
softkey
Hold time
out Continue
PTT-key softkey
Terminate Activity Pause
softkey detected softkey
Processing PTT-key
Pause
softkey
Terminate hold
softkey
Pause
paused
ICN-4G-N-231005-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 FF SCAN Menu Tree
3.9.2 FF SCAN Menu Tree
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for FF SCAN operation. The
menu tree shows where to find a particular menu.
Figure 3.83 Menu Tree: FF SCAN
FF SCAN Home
1115 1125
FF SCAN 1/2 FF SCAN 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231005-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 FF SCAN Home Menu
3.9.3 FF SCAN Home Menu
Figure 3.84 Home Menu: FF SCAN
ICN-4D-G-231005-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
3 Current Modulation Mode
4 Current Scan Mode
5 Current Delta Frequency Deviation

M3SR Series 4100 FF SCAN Menu
3.9.4 FF SCAN Menu
In the central area of the menu FF SCAN 1/2 the actual radio configuration and the actual
scanning state are displayed.
Figure 3.85 Menu 1115: FF SCAN 1/2 (Frequency Scan)
ICN-4D-G-231005-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
ICN-4D-H-231005-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
Figure 3.86 Menu 1115: FF SCAN 1/2 (Channel Scan)
ICN-4D-G-231005-R-D0894-00005-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 FF SCAN Menu
In the central area of the menu FF SCAN 2/2 scanning dwell times, hold time and the channel
list are displayed. To scroll through the scanning channel list use the knob.
Figure 3.87 Menu 1125: FF SCAN 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231005-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1

3.9.4.1 Storing Current Settings
Editor 1. Press 'Channel Store' softkey.

If the entered channel number is within the

permitted entry range, the editor window will
be closed.
Possible values:
Channels 1 to 400, modifiable by using the

R&S RNMS3000 software tool.
With the R&S RNMS software tool you can

configure these channels as modifiable or
not modifiable by the user.
Channel store/recall is only available on Pre-

set Page 0. Other Fixed Frequency Preset
Pages consist only of one channel.
400 channels are always available on Preset

Page 0 independent of the number of further
Preset Pages assigned to Fixed Frequency
operation.
The 'Channel store' softkey is used to store

Fixed Frequency parameters set on the radio.
Settings can be recalled as described in
sect. 3.7.3.2 Recalling Settings.
The following parameters are stored in a chan-

nel:
• Modulation
• Bandwidth
• Data rate
• Noise blanker
• Power
• FSK run / stop function
• Frequency
• BFO frequency
• Delta frequency
• Polarity
• Preamplifier
• Squelch
• Data link mode (option see
sect. 4.6 Link SW)

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold
3.9.4.2 Changing the Syllabic Squelch Threshold
Editor 1. Press 'Syll. Thres' softkey.

Possible values:
0 % to 100 %
0% very sensetive
100% very insensetiv

e
The syllabic squelch threshold determines the

sensitivity of the syllabic squelch algorithm.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency
3.9.4.3 Selecting the Signal Squelch Subtone Frequency
Listbox 1. Press 'SQL Tone' softkey.

2. Select desired frequency from listbox.
Possible values (in Hz):
67 - 69.3 - 71.9 - 74.4 - 77 - 79.7 - 82.5 - 85.4

- 88.5 - 91.5 - 94.8 - 97.4 - 100 - 103.5 - 107.2
- 110.9 - 114.8 - 118.8 - 123 - 127.3 - 131.8 -
136.5 - 141.3 - 146.2 - 151.4 - 156.7 - 162.2 -
167.9 - 173.8 - 179.9 - 186.2 - 192.8 - 203.5 -
210.7 - 218.1 - 225.7 - 233.6 - 241.8 - 250.3
Default value:
100 Hz
modes F3E, H3E and A3E.
When enabled, the audio signal is unmuted

only in case of reception of the predefined sig-
nal tone. On the other hand, the transmitter su-
perimposes that signal tone frequency as well.
The subtones within a network should be set
to identical values.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity
3.9.4.4 Changing the RSSI Squelch Sensitivity
Editor 1. Press 'RSSI Thres' softkey.

Possible values:
0 dB up to 110 dB
Default value:
20 dB
The RSSI (received signal strength indication)
squelch mutes the audio output for reception
levels below the threshold.
Please note that RSSI squelch has to be en-

abled to have an effect on the audio output.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Squelch Type
3.9.4.5 Selecting the Squelch Type
Listbox 1. Press 'Squelch' softkey.

Possible values:
OFF, RSSI, Signal, Syllabic, RSSI & Syllabic,

RSSI & Signal
Default value:
OFF
The squelch is particulary effective for F3E, at

good reception conditions even for other
modes but A1A, B8E and B7D, where squelch
would not allow reasonable reception, it is not
selectable there.
RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)

The RSSI squelch opens only if the squelch
threshold is exceeded (see RSSI Squelch
Threshold).
Signal squelch
The signal squelch acts upon a variable sub-

tone. Only if the wanted signal contains this
subtone, which is always transmitted with it,
will the audio signal be unmuted. If signal
squelch is selected, a subtone is also added to
the transmitted signal. The subtones within a
network should be set to identical values.

modes F3E, H3E and A3E, but not in single
sideband modulations due to their sideband fil-
ters.
Syllabic squelch
The syllabic squelch enables the audio output
when syllabic-like signals are detected in the
reception signal. This squelch method is less
fading-sensitive than RSSI squelch.
The syllabic squelch is supported in modula-

tion modes A3E, H3E and J3E.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Frequency Scanning Parameters
3.9.4.6 Changing the Frequency Scanning Parameters
Editor 1. Press 'Start (kHz)' softkey.

2. Enter start frequency in kHz.
Possible values:
1500.000 kHz to 511975.000 kHz
Default value:
1500 kHz
Editor 1. Press 'Step (kHz)' softkey.

2. Enter step width in kHz.
Possible values:
0.001 kHz to 510500.000 kHz
Default value:
500 kHz
Editor 1. Press 'Stop (kHz)' softkey.

2. Enter stop frequency in kHz.
Possible values:
1500.001kHz to 511975.000 kHz
Default value:
29900 kHz

M3SR Series 4100 Lock Frequency or Channel
3.9.4.7 Lock Frequency or Channel
Activate If an activity on a channel is detected, the

scanning changes to the 'activity detected'
state. If the operator decides that the detected
activity is not relevant, he can press the 'Lock-
out Frequency' softkey. From then on, this fre-
quency is no longer detected.
Activate If an activity on a channel is detected, the

scanning changes to the 'activity detected'
state. If the operator decides that the detected
activity is not relevant, he can press the 'Lock-
out Channel' softkey. The concerned channel
will be deleted from the scanning channel list.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Modulation Mode
3.9.4.8 Changing the Modulation Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'MODE' softkey.

2. Select desired modulation mode from list-
box with the knob.
The listbox is closed.
The new modulation mode is now used for re-

ception and transmission.
Possible values are:
A1A (CW, Morse telegraphy)

A3E (AM, amplitude modulation)
H3E( AME, single sideband, full carrier)
R3E( AME, single sideband, reduced car-
rier)
F3E (FM, frequency modulation)
+J3E ( USB, upper sideband, SSB)
-J3E ( LSB, lower sideband, SSB)
+J2D (USB for external modems)
-J2D (LSB for external modems)
F1D (FSK, frequency shift keying)
B8E (ISB, two independent sidebands for
voice)
B7D (ISB, two independent sidebands for
external modems)
Avoid using +/-J3E for operation with external
modems, this mode is optimized for voice
communication only. Use +/-J2D instead.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Scan Action
3.9.4.9 Selecting the Scan Action
Activate Command softkey, enabled only when scan-

ning is started.
Press softkey 'SCAN PAUSE'

to pause the scanning cycle.
Press softkey 'SCAN CONT'

to continue the scanning cy-
cle.
Activate Command softkey, enabled only if precondi-

tions are fulfilled.
• One squelch type has to be set on (Fre-
quency Scanning).
• There has to be more than one channel in
the channel list (Channel Scanning).
• PTT-key should not be pressed.
Press softkey 'SCAN START'

to start frequency scan.
Press softkey 'SCAN EXIT' to

stop frequency scan.

Table 3.36 Possible States of FF Scanning
Possible States of FF Scan- Display

ning
inactive
scanning
paused

Possible States of FF Scan- Display

ning
activity detected

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Scan Type
3.9.4.10 Selecting the Scan Type
Toggle Toggle softkey for selecting the scan mode:

channel scan (CHAN) or frequency scan
(FRQ).

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Dwell Time
3.9.4.11 Changing the Dwell Time
Editor 1. Press 'Dwell Time RSSI Sq' softkey.

2. Enter dwell time in milliseconds.
Possible values:
50 ms to 60000 ms
Default value:
100 ms
Editor 1. Press 'Dwell Time Signal Sq' softkey.

Possible values:
100 ms to 60000 ms
Default value:
250 ms
Editor 1. Press 'Dwell Time Syll Sq' softkey.

Possible values:
200 ms to 60000 ms
Default value:
400 ms

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Hold Time
3.9.4.12 Changing the Hold Time
Editor 1. Press 'Hold Time' softkey.

2. Enter hold time in milliseconds.
Possible values:
0 ms to 60000 ms
0 ms means OFF
Default value:
10000 ms

M3SR Series 4100 Channel List
3.9.4.13 Channel List
Editor 1. Press 'Add Channel' softkey.

2. Enter channel number.
Possible values:
All predefined channels that has at least one

type of squelch set on.
Only predefined channels can be stored

into the channel list.
1. Choose channel from scanning channel

list.
2. Press 'Delete Channel' softkey.
Possible values:
All channel numbers that are previously added

to the scanning list.
The softkey 'Delete Channel' is enabled

only if there is at least one channel added
to the channel list.
Activate 1. Press 'Delete Channel List' softkey.

2. Choose Yes or No to delete channel list.
The softkey 'Delete Channel List' is en-

abled only if there is at least one channel
added to the channel list.

M3SR Series 4100 Priority Channel
3.9.4.14 Priority Channel
1. Choose channel from scanning channel

list.
2. Press 'Prio Chan' softkey.
Possible values:

The softkey 'Prio Chan' is enabled only if

there is at least one channel added to the
channel list.
Activate By pressing this softkey the operator deacti-

vates the channel priority (Prio Chan).
Press 'Delete Prio Chan' softkey.
The actual priority channel is deleted.
Possible values:
The softkey 'Delete Prio Chan' is enabled

only if a priority channel is set.

M3SR Series 4100 Priority Channel

M3SR Series 4100 Operation in Special Communication Modes
4 Operation in Special Communication Modes
4.1 Introduction
Settings and actions concerning TX operation are not applicable for R&S EK4100 Sys-
tems.
This documentation gives information about the optional communication modes provided by
the optional software:
• sect. 4.3 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation (ALE-2G)

• sect. 4.4 Automatic Link Establishment 3rd Generation (ALE-3G)
• sect. 4.5 HF Modem
• sect. 4.6 Link SW
• sect. 4.7 Secure Digital Voice
• sect. 4.8 SECOM-H

M3SR Series 4100 Operation in Special Communication Modes
4.2 Preparations
The optional communication modes are enabled by means of option keys. A new option key
can be installed in menu Radio MTC 4/7. In menu Radio MTC 4/7 press softkey 'New' and
enter the option key provided by Rohde & Schwarz on demand. For details see
sect. 3.4.9 Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (3004).
All the option keys currently installed on your radio can be seen in the control unit menu Ra-
dio MTC 4/7 in folder 'Valid Option Key' (see Figure 4.1 and sect. 3.4.9 Menu Radio MTC 4/
7 (3004)).
Figure 4.1 Valid Option Keys in Menu Radio MTC 4/7 (Example)
To operate the radio in special communication modes, load a corresponding preset to your
radio. Any communication mode may be assigned to the Preset Pages 1 to 99. For details
about loading of configuration data see sect. 3.8 Radio Configuration with Pre-configured
Parameters.
If for a particular communication mode no option key is installed on your radio, the
radio cannot be operated in this communication mode. When you then try to switch
to a preset page of this communication mode, a message box will come up indicating
a 'Invalid Preset Page'. Please contact your sales representative if you want to order
additional option keys. To order additional option keys for radios that you already
have, you might prepare the form in sect. 9 Drawings. Please note, that SW option
keys are unique for every radio.

M3SR Series 4100 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation (ALE-2G)
4.3 Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation (ALE-2G)
4.3.1 Basics of ALE-2G
The ALE-2G mode (Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation) affords the radio operator
the following features which automate and simplify the task of establishing communications
with a distant station:
• Selective call and link with another station using only that station's address
• Automatic determination of the best calling channel using LQA (Link Quality Analysis)
• Link with a network of stations
• Automatic transmission of a message to a distant station or group of stations (AMD =
Automatic Message Display)
• Assignment and grouping of channels into so called scan groups and assignment of
scan groups to networks or stations
• Scanning of channels of the assigned (scanning) scan group at a rate of 2 chnPs (Chan-
nels Per Second) or 5 chnPs
4.3.1.1 Selective Call and Handshake
Each station in an ALE network has its own unique address (call sign). When calling another
ALE station, the calling station transmits the target address on the selected channel. When
the called station hears its own address, it stops scanning and responds to the calling station.
The calling station then transmits an acknowledgement (two way handshake) and the two
stations are linked. The operators of the calling and the called stations are notified that the
link has been established and can begin passing traffic.
4.3.1.2 Link Quality Analysis and Automatic Link Establishment
During link establishment LQA data may be exchanged between stations in addition to the
addresses. These LQA data are in the form of a number which represents the quality of the
transmission path between stations.
When the station operator wishes to make a call, the link is established automatically using
the accumulated LQA data to determine the best available channel out of the scan group as-
signed to the destination address (next call scan group).
4.3.1.3 Message Transmission
ALE provides for operation in an AMD mode, which enables operators to send messages up
to 90 characters long to other stations when linking. Such a message is subject to configu-
ration and is shown on the display.

4.3.1.4 ALE-2G Calls
The operator can initiate calls in the preselected call type (scan rate or fixed) and traffic type
(link mode) to the preselected destination address in one of the following ways:
• Pressing the call button

• Asserting PTT
• Presence of data on the data interface.
The operator may make a call at a scan rate of 2 chnPs or 5 chnPs where ALE uses the
channels of the currently selected next call scan group to place the call.
Or the operator may wish to make a call in fixed mode where ALE makes the call on a pre-
selected channel.
Individual Calls (Point-to-Point Connection)
Individual Calls are used to establish a link with another station (point-to-point connection).
The operator may make a call to the selected individual station at a scan rate of 2 chnPs or
5 chnPs, where the radio uses the stored LQA information to select the best channel on
which to attempt to make the call. With this type of call, the radio will attempt to call a station
on each channel in the currently selected next call scan group until link establishment is suc-
cessful. The call will be attempted first on the best channel, proceeding to the second best
and so forth, until a link is established or all channels in the scan group have been tried.
The operator may also make a call by first selecting a channel on which to call (scan rate
fixed).
Net Calls
A Net Call is a call made to all participants in a particular net.
Following the call, each net participant station responds only in its particular time slot. The
time slot is determined by where that station's address appears in the list of net participants.
For this reason, all participants in the net must be listed in identical order in each station of
the net.
Group Calls
For a Group Call first all stations to be called have to be selected. The called stations pick
out the time slot for their response following the sequence in the call list.
All Calls (Broadcast Calls)
An All Call is a broadcast call which is not directed to a specific station.
If the scan rate is set to FIX, the All Call is made on a particular channel. At scan rate 2 chnPs
or 5 chnPs the All Call is made on the first channel in the selected scanning scan group.
Whether a station actually sets up a link when receiving a broadcast call, is up to configura-
tion.

Any Calls
An Any Call is a linked call which can be answered by up to 16 stations. The called stations
pick out a random time slot for their response.
Whether a station actually sets up a link when receiving an Any Call is up to configuration.
LQA Calls
An LQA Call is a call directed to a particular station. As soon as the link has been established,
the LQA data of the two stations are exchanged.
Sound Calls
A Sound Call is a call which is not directed to any particular station. All stations listening in
on the calling channel automatically carry out a channel analysis.
4.3.1.5 ALE-2G Missions and Database
The operator plans ALE-2G networks using the R&S Mission Planner. The R&S Mission
Planner generates the ALE-2G database for each radio in the network and the operator has
to load the data into each participating radio in the network. The ALE-2G network shall con-
sist of at least 2 radios and up to 15 radios.
4.3.1.6 User Unique Functions
The User Unique Function (UUF) is used to control the link mode (i.e. traffic type). Two types
of link mode are defined. These types are manufacturer specific.
• Analog voice / FF
• Internal modem
The default link mode is analog voice / FF, i.e. when no UUF is used, the link mode is analog
voice. The radio has the capability to send and process the UUF words defined also for other
Rohde & Schwarz radios supporting UUF.
In the call phase, a UUF command word is transmitted which depends on the link mode cur-
rently set on the radio.
Table 4.1 User Unique Functions
Link Mode UUF
Analog voice / FF No UUF is transmitted.
Internal Modem UUF for modem operation is transmitted if UUF is

switched ON.
When the called radio receives a UUF, it automatically activates the link mode indicated by
the UUF.

M3SR Series 4100 Basics of ALE-2G LP
4.3.2 Basics of ALE-2G LP
The ALE-2G LP (Automatic Link Establishment 2nd Generation with Linking Protection) pro-
vides additional FED-STD-1049 capability. Compliance with this standard ensures that all in-
formation in the link protocol, such as e.g. addresses and network relations, is protected
against tapping. The protective function only covers the linking procedure. To safeguard the
subsequent data or voice transmission, additional cryptographic measures must be taken at
the transmitting and receiving stations.
The link protection function is performed in compliance with FED-STD-1049, the

Rohde & Schwarz implementation supporting three of the five protection levels defined by
FED-STD-1049, namely AL-0, AL-1 and AL-2. Protection level AL-2 guarantees maximum
security (protection interval 2 s) at high demands on network synchronization, whereas pro-
tection level AL-1 provides slightly less security (protection interval 60 s) at lower demands
on network synchronization. The protection interval defines the time during which the input
quantities of the encryption algorithm are constant.
The 24 bit ALE words for linking are encrypted by means of the lattice algorithm. Input quan-
tities for this algorithm are the user-defined key, the frequency, date and time of day. For
maintaining synchronism, a time acquisition protocol is started as soon as a certain time un-
certainty threshold has been exceeded. The key can be 56 bits long, allowing as many as
256 different keys in the network.
This procedure assumes a time synchronous network. For initial synchronization and for
maintaining synchronism various procedures are used. One station within the network is the
time master station (= time server) providing the other stations (net stations) with the exact
time.
Each station determines its own time uncertainty, also taking into account the precision of
the internal clock. When time information from the time server is being received, delay and
internal processing times will also be allowed for. The radio uses a clock with a precision of
±0.5 ppm (parts per million), so that even with a 2 s protection interval (AL-2) re-synchroni-
zation will only be necessary after 23 days or more (see Table 4.2). With the transceiver be-
ing switched off, however, the clock precision is not better than ±7.5 ppm.
The FED-STD-1049 defines eight time quality levels.
Table 4.2 Time Uncertainty Definition
Time quality code Time uncertainty
0 none
1 20 ms
2 100 ms
3 500 ms
4 2s
5 10 s
6 60 s
7 unbound

Protection level 2 requires a time quality of at least 4 and protection level 1 a time quality of
at least 6. The time server always has a time quality of 1 (= 20 ms). Time quality 0 is reserved
for stations with absolute time.
For maintaining synchronism, a time acquisition protocol is started as soon as a certain time
uncertainty threshold has been exceeded. In the course of this the exact time is acquired
from the time server or any other station within the network. The acquired time quality is al-
ways poorer by one level than the actual time quality of the inquired station. Therefore sta-
tions which are no time server cannot obtain time qualities better than 2. This protocol also
is protected for as long as the time uncertainties are tolerated by the link protection proce-
dure.
For stations which do not have at all any information on the date or time or whose time un-
certainty is too great, another time acquisition protocol is implemented. Due to the lack of
time information, however, this protocol cannot be protected. It has been provided mainly for
stations entering the network at a later stage.
4.3.2.1 Achieving Network Synchronism
In order to achieve network synchronism when installing the system, proceed as follows:
Installing the time server:
1. Enter the linking protection key.

2. Enter the ALE net time with a precision of ±10 s or better.
3. Set the configuration parameters for example as follows:
- Link protection level: 1 or 2
- Fine time request: ON
- Coarse time request: ON
- Unprotected time request: ON
- Passive time acquisition: ON
- Time request interval: 5 min
- Time server: ON
After setting the time server parameter to ON, the radio starts broadcasting the net time.
As per definition the time server has the exact time, the time server radio should not
be switched off. In the off-state the internal clock of the radio has a precision of only
±7.5 ppm.

Installing a net station:
1. Enter the linking protection key.

2. Set the configuration parameters for example as follows:
- Link protection level: 1 or 2
- Fine time request: ON
- Coarse time request: ON
- Unprotected time request: ON
- Passive time acquisition: ON
- Time request interval: 5 min
- Time server: OFF
3. Enter the ALE net time with a precision of ±10 s or better.
After the time request interval has elapsed the net station sends a time request to the server.
The station can be switched off, although in this case the time quality quickly deteri-
orates.
4.3.2.2 Maintaining Network Synchronism
Due to the inaccuracy of the internal clock, synchronism of the net stations will be lost in the
course of time. The table below shows how long a net station on protection level 1 or 2 is
able to keep itself synchronized.
Table 4.3 Time to Keep Radio (Net Station) Synchronized
Protection level Radio switched on or off all the time
Radio switched on Radio switched off
AL-1 approx. 2 years approx. 3 months
AL-2 23 days 2.5 days
The table assumes that the time server is not switched off.
When the time quality of a station falls below a certain threshold, the time acquisition protocol
is started automatically. Using this protocol the station tries to improve its time quality. The
intervals between these attempts can be programmed with the parameter time request inter-
val. The protocol runs until the time quality reaches a sufficient value.

The following procedures are available:
• Protected Fine Time Request

With the protected fine time request, a net station inquires the time from the time server
or from another net station. The time lag between the two stations must not be greater
than two seconds. The received time quality then is poorer by at least one level than the
actual reference time. Time transmission is protected.
• Protected Coarse Time Request
With the protected coarse time request, the time lag between the two stations is allowed
to be as great as one minute. Here time transmission also is protected.
• Unprotected Time Request
With the unprotected time request, time transmission takes place without protection. The
inquiring station transmits a random value. The time is then transmitted with this random
value encrypted using the lattice algorithm.
4.3.2.3 Changing the Time Server
In most cases, a failure of the time server is tolerable for several days even with protection
level AL-2.This level does not require resynchronization before the 23rd day.
If, however, the time server fails to operate for a longer time, a different net station (and only
one) has to be designated time server. The new time server then instantaneously broadcasts
its time with the selected AL for the time server, its time quality now being 1 (= 20 ms).

M3SR Series 4100 ALE-2G Menu Tree
4.3.3 ALE-2G Menu Tree
The Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) facilities allow to select the best HF channel and to
link two or more stations. This worldwide used standard is defined in FED-STD 1045 / 1046
/ 1049 and MIL-STD 188-141 for the so called ALE-2G (automatic link establishment 2nd
generation).
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for ALE-2G operation. The menu
tree shows where to find a particular menu.
This radio allows operation in ALE-2G as well as in ALE-3G, that can interoperate with ALE-
2G networks. This documentation describes the ALE-2G–only mode in detail. Even so, it is
helpful to read this documentation carefully even if you plan to setup ALE-2G / ALE-3G net-
works. Before a ALE Preset Page can be selected by the 'Preset' softkey, an R&S
RNMS3000 configuration with ALE containing ALE Preset Pages has to be downloaded into
the radio.

Figure 4.2 Menu Tree: ALE-2G
ALE-2G Home
1211 1212
ALE OP 1/2 ALE OP 1/2
1221 1222
ALE CFG 1/3 ALE CFG 2/3
1223
ALE CFG 3/3
1511
HFM OP 1/1
1111 1112
FF OP 1/2 FF OP 2/2
1251
GPS OP
1521
HFM CFG 1/1
1122
FF CFG 1/1
ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 ALE-2G Home Menus
4.3.4 ALE-2G Home Menus
After selecting the ALE operation mode the radio comes up with the ALE-2G Preset Page.
In the central area the current main ALE settings and status parameters are displayed. As in
all other waveforms, some parameters are changing when switching to transmission. For in-
stance, the Tx output power and VSWR indication are shown instead of the RF level bar
graph.
Figure 4.3 Home Menu: ALE-2G (Listening, Rx Mode)
10
11
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Linking status and frequency:

• LISTENING: No link established.
• CALL TO: Call initiated.
• CALL ACTIVE: Link established.
- CALL LQA: Link quality information is transmitted
- RCVE LQA: Link quality information is received
• TERMINATING LINK: Terminating the current established link.
2 Partner Address: list of responding partners
3 Self Address
4 Scan Group
5 Next Call Address
6 Scan Group to be used for the next outgoing call
7 Time Uncertainty
8 LSU Mode
9 Receive Level
10 Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
11 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N)

When the radio is set to transmit mode, the central area bar graphs change.
Figure 4.4 Home Menu: ALE-2G (Listening, Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
1 Effective output power


M3SR Series 4100 ALE-2G Operational Menus
4.3.5 ALE-2G Operational Menus
The central area of the operational menus shows the same parameters as in the ALE Home
menu to allow easy monitoring of the ALE status.
Figure 4.5 Menu 1211: ALE OP 1/2 (ALE-2G)
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00144-A-01-1

ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00145-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Scan Groups
4.3.5.1 Selecting the Scan Groups
Softkey Type Description
Listbox 1. Press 'SCAN GRP' softkey.

2. Select desired group from listbox.
In the central area the currently active value is 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm. The new scan
displayed. group is now effective.
The scanning and next call scan groups are

used in combination with scan rate 2chPs or
5chPs (see
sect. 4.3.5.9 Selecting the Scan Rate).
The scan group is a number of channels

grouped together to be scanned and used for
calling.
The currently selected scanning scan group is

the one in which the radio is presently scan-
ning and listening for incoming ALE-2G calls.
The next call scan group is associated to the

currently selected destination address and is
used for calling the currently selected destina-
tion. If as next call scan group "rx = tx" is se-
lected, the next call scan group is the same as
the currently selected scanning scan group.
As each address has its own associated

scan group, changing the destination ad-
dress may also change the next call scan
group.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Address for Individual Call
4.3.5.2 Selecting the Address for Individual Call
Listbox 1. Press 'INDV ADDR' softkey.

2. Select desired station name from listbox.
In the central area the currently active value is 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm the selection.
displayed.
To initiate an individual call after net Individual
Address was selected, proceed as follows:
If required, terminate an existing link by press-

ing the softkey ‘Terminate Link’ in ALE OP1 or
2 menu.
Select the scan rate by pressing the ‘Mode’

key in ALE OP1 Menu.
Select a message to be sent after link-setup by

pressing 'TX AMD' in ALE OP1 menu, if need-
ed.
Select the TX output power level by pressing

‘RF POWER’ in ALE OP2 menu.
Press PTT (link mode Analog Voice / FF), ap-

ply data (link mode Internal HF Modem) or
press the ‘CALL!’ button in ALE OP1 or 2
menu.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Address for Net Call
4.3.5.3 Selecting the Address for Net Call
Listbox 1. Press 'NET ADDR' softkey.

2. Select desired station name from listbox
In the central area the currently active value is with the knob.
displayed. 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
To perform a net call carry out the following

steps after the Net Call Address was selected:
If required, terminate an existing link by press-

ing the softkey ‘Terminate Link’ in ALE OP1 or
2 menu.
Select the scan rate by pressing the ‘Mode’

key in ALE OP1 menu.
Select a message to be sent after link-setup by

pressing ‘TX AMD’ in ALE OP1 menu, if need-
ed.
Select the TX output power level by pressing

‘RF POWER’ in ALE OP2 menu.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Tx Message
4.3.5.4 Selecting the Tx Message
Listbox 1. Press 'TX AMD' softkey.

2. Select desired message name from listbox
with the knob.
The now selected AMD message will be sent

with the next link setup.
--- = no Tx message is sent with the next

ALE call.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Link Mode
4.3.5.5 Selecting the Link Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'Link Mode' softkey.

2. Select desired link mode from listbox.
The 'Link Mode' softkey is only enabled if the 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm the new selection.
call status is 'Listening'.
Possible values:
In all other cases it stays disabled.
• ANALOG VOICE/FF
• INTERNAL MODEM (option HF modem
required)
It might be needed to set the link mode of the

ALE more precisely in the configuration menus
of FF and HF modem. If for instance the mod-
ulation –J3E is needed for link setup and traf-
fic, go to ALE FF Config (page 1111) and
select it using the 'MODE' softkey.
The same applies for INTERNAL MODEM, set

the waveform in ALE HF Modem Configuration
menu (page 1521) and the data rate in ALE HF
Modem Operational menu (page 1511).
Some dependent parameters can only by

changed without an active link, so press
'Terminate' before changing them.
In contrast to ALE-3G, the ALE-2G does not

transfer the link mode over air. So please
make sure to use the same link mode settings
on all participants in your radio link.

M3SR Series 4100 Terminating a Link
4.3.5.6 Terminating a Link
Activate 1. Press 'Terminate Link' softkey to return to

'Listening' state.
When the linked stations have finished com-

municating, it is necessary to terminate the link
so that the stations can return to availability
(listening).
The link can be terminated in two ways:
• Manually by pressing this softkey 'Termi-

nate Link'.
• Automatically through an adjustable non-
activity timeout, see softkey ‘Link Timeout’
in ALE CFG menu.
In a voice link, any PTT activity retriggers

the link timeout, but incoming voice does
not.
In a data link the link is terminated automati-

cally and completely if there has been no in-
coming or outgoing data for longer than the
link timeout chosen in the ALE CFG 2/3 menu
(page 1222).
Terminating a net call from a called radio

does not terminate the links of the other
net participants.

M3SR Series 4100 Linked Stations List
4.3.5.7 Linked Stations List
Open information list 1. Press 'Linked Stations' softkey.
Now a list of all connected stations is dis-

played.
This is no selection list.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a Link via MMI
4.3.5.8 Initiating a Link via MMI
Activate 1. Press 'Call !' softkey to initiate a link setup.
The call will be initiated with the selected link

mode (see
sect. 4.3.5.5 Selecting the Link Mode).
If 'Call!' softkey is pressed, a link setup to the

selected destination address(es) will be initiat-
ed.
A link setup can be initiated instead by

user data (for link modes with internal mo-
dems) or by one of the PTT inputs (for
voice link modes or external modems).

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Scan Rate
4.3.5.9 Selecting the Scan Rate
Listbox 1. Press 'Mode' softkey.

2. Select desired scan rate from listbox with
the knob.
Possible values:
• fix
• scan 2
• scan 5
When selecting ‘fix’, the ALE does not deter-

mine the best link setup frequency anymore,
instead the user has to select the active chan-
nel, using the softkey ‘Channel’.
‘scan 5’ means 5 frequency changes per sec-

ond, the maximum possible scan speed in
ALE networks. It allows the fastest Link Set-
ups- but is still slower than the fast link setup
(FLSU) of ALE-3G.
‘scan 2’ means 2 frequency changes per sec-

ond and even longer lifetime of electrome-
chanical ATU and R&S FK4120 / R&S FK4140
components, but the link setup is slower by
factor 2.5.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Active Channel for ‘Fix’ Operation
4.3.5.10 Selecting the Active Channel for ‘Fix’ Operation
Editor 1. Press 'Channel' softkey.

2. Change value.
3. Press 'ENT' to confirm the new selection.
This softkey allows the user to manually select

the channel. In mode ‘scan 2’ or ‘scan 5’, this
is done automatically by ALE, searching for
the best channel.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Self Address
4.3.5.11 Selecting the Self Address
Listbox 1. Press 'SELF ADDR' softkey.

2. Select desired self address from listbox
In the central area the currently active value is with the knob.
A radio usuallyhas a fixed ALE self address

that is not changed during the mission.
So this softkey is for information only.

M3SR Series 4100 ALE Group Call Address Selection and Address Editor
4.3.5.12 ALE Group Call Address Selection and Address Editor
Softkey Example Description
In the following example TOM and SAM have 1. Press 'GRP ADDR' softkey.
been selected for a group call.
2. Configure your station for a group call

by adding or removing stations. See
'Group Address Editor' below.
After pressing the 'ENT' softkey the selection 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm the group and
is displayed in the softkey and the group call is activate the group call.
active.
The new group call address list is now select-

ed and the top of the list is displayed in the
central area.

M3SR Series 4100 ALE Group Call Address Selection and Address Editor
Group address editor
Example for adding TOM and SAM to list Adding stations:
1. Station TOM is selected for adding. 1. Select station name which shall participate
in the group call by using the knob.
2. Press 'ADD'. The station now participates
in the group call, its address is highlighted
in blue.
2. Adding of TOM to list by pressing ADD
3. Station SAM is selected for adding
4. Adding of SAM to list by pressing ADD
Now TOM and SAM are selected for the group Removing stations:
call.
1. Select station name which shall no longer
participate in the group call by using the
knob
2. Press 'DELETE'.
The station is now deleted from the group call

list.

M3SR Series 4100 Adding an Individual Address
4.3.5.13 Adding an Individual Address
Editor 1. Press 'Add INDV ADDR' softkey.

2. Editor window appears to insert ALE-2G
Individual Address. Only characters 0-9
and A-Z are valid. The length of the Indi-
vidual Address could be up to 15 charac-
ters.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Next Call to be an Any or All Call
4.3.5.14 Selecting the Next Call to be an Any or All Call
Listbox @@?: Any Call, call all stations and wait for
acknowledge
@?@: All Call, call all stations, no acknowl-

edge

M3SR Series 4100 Displaying Received Rx Messages
4.3.5.15 Displaying Received Rx Messages
The AMD can be displayed completely by se- 1. Press 'RX AMD' softkey.
lecting the desired message. 2. Use the knob to select RX AMD from the
list which should be displayed completely.
The complete AMD is shown.
If a new AMD is received and the softkey

'DISP AMD' is set to ON, the new AMD is dis-
played immediately (see --- = no Rx message is received.
sect. 4.3.6.2 Switching the Popup for Receive
d AMD Messages On or Off).


3. Press ENT to confirm.
Possible output power levels for 150 W sys-

tems:
10 mW - 10 W - 20 W - 50 W - 100 W - 150 W

tems:
10 mW - 20 W - 50 W - 100 W - 250 W - 500 W

(when ordered with CE mark, limited to 250 W
for f < 4 MHz)

tems:
10 mW - 50 W - 100 W - 250 W - 500 W -


which allows the communication coverage to
be extended.

M3SR Series 4100 Starting ATU Learning for ALE Channels
4.3.5.17 Starting ATU Learning for ALE Channels
Softkey Example Description
A learn operation starts on the selected ALE 1. Press 'ATU Learn' softkey to initiate learn-
channel by pressing the softkey. ing process.
During learning the following status is dis- The ATU starts learning on all available ALE
played: channels.
The tuning process can be aborted any

time by pressing the 'ESC/CLR' key.
It will disappear as soon as the learning pro- In the learning procedure all ALE channels of
cess is finished successfully. all selectable scan groups are set and learned
one after another.
It is not needed to learn again until a new

R&S RNMS3000 ALE configuration is
downloaded or the antenna configuration
was changed.
To bypass ATU during scanning see

sect. 4.3.6.6 Bypassing the ATU.
If learning failed, the following status is dis- In case of a 'Learn failed' indication please try
played: to learn once again or check the antenna in-
stallation and the RF cable between PA and
ATU.

M3SR Series 4100 ALE 2G Configuration Menus
4.3.6 ALE 2G Configuration Menus
The ALE-2G configuration menu consists of three different pages. While the first two pages
are focused on address definition, AMDs, link quality analysis / sounding, ATU bypass, tim-
ings and user unique functions, the last page is dedicated for ALE-2G linking protection. The
Linking Protection menu (page 1223) is explained separately.
Menu Structure of Configuration Menus
In the central area of the configuration menus the currently set configuration parameters are
displayed.
Figure 4.7 Menu 1221: ALE CFG 1/3 (ALE-2G)
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00007-A-01-1
1. Listen before Transmit

2. Response Timeout
3. Default Link Mode Voice

ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00008-A-01-1
1 Link Timeout
2 Sounding Interval

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00149-A-01-1
1 Time
2 Date
3 Status of Passive Time Acquisition (enabled or disabled)
4 Time Uncertainty
5 Status of Unprotected Coarse Time Request (enabled or disabled)
6 Linking Protection Level
7 Current Time Request Interval (in minutes)
8 Radio Time Server Status (radio is time server / radio is net station)
9 Status of Protected Coarse Time Request (enabled or disabled)
10 Status of Protected Fine Time Request (enabled or disabled)
11 Status of Link on lower level (allow/ignore incoming link on lower level)

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Acceptance of an All/Any/Wildcard Call On or Off
4.3.6.1 Switching the Acceptance of an All/Any/Wildcard Call On or Off
Toggle 1. Press desired softkey to toggle accep-

tance of a call on/off .
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
ON
If 'All Call' is switched on, after reception of an

All Call, the radio links up.
If 'Any Call' is switched on, after reception of

an Any Call, the radio links up.
If 'Wild Call' is switched on, after reception of a

Wildcard Call, the radio links up.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Popup for Received AMD Messages On or Off
4.3.6.2 Switching the Popup for Received AMD Messages On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle automatic AMD

display on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
On: Incoming AMDs will be automatically dis-

played in a popup window in the central area.
Off: The popup window for incoming AMDs

will be suppressed, if an AMD is received.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the LQA Request On or Off
4.3.6.3 Switching the LQA Request On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey 'LQA RQ' to toggle link qual-

ity request on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
OFF
If LQA is switched on, as soon as the link has

been established (individual call) the LQA data
of the stations are exchanged.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the LQA Report On or Off
4.3.6.4 Switching the LQA Report On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle link quality report

on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
OFF
If the LQA report is switched on, all LQA re-

quests from other stations will be answered.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Weight of a New LQA Event
4.3.6.5 Selecting the Weight of a New LQA Event
Listbox 1. Press 'Weight' softkey.

2. Select desired value from listbox with the
knob.
Possible values:
• 25 %
• 50 %
• 75 %
Default value:
50 %
With this configuration the weighting of new

‘link quality’ values for the corresponding
channel is selected.

Toggle 1. Press 'ATU Bypass' softkey to toggle ATU

bypass on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
OFF
ATU Bypass On means that it is bypassed

while ATU is scanning. This improves the
ATU relay's lifetime, but reduces the sensitivity
on short antennas.
It is recommended to keep ATU bypass on

during operation, if low reception levels are to
be expected during link setup.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Default Link Mode for Voice On or Off
4.3.6.7 Switching the Default Link Mode for Voice On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle default link mode

for voice on/off.
In the central area the currently active value is
displayed. The new value is selected immediately.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
By means of softkey 'Default LM Voice' (de-

fault link mode voice) the operator can decide
how the radio shall respond in the event that
an incoming call does not contain a UUF (user
unique function).
If default link mode voice is switched on, the

radio which receives the call automatically es-
tablishes a link of type ANALOG VOICE J3E+.
If default link mode voice is switched off, the

radio which receives the call automatically es-
tablishes a link of the type which is specified in
'Link Mode' (see
sect. 4.3.5.5 Selecting the Link Mode)

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the User Unique Function On or Off
4.3.6.8 Switching the User Unique Function On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle user unique func-

tion on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
The user unique function is used to control the

link mode. Three types of link modes are de-
fined. These types are manufacturer specific.
• Analog voice (for modes +J3E and –J3E)

• F1D (for mode F1D)
• Modem (for external or internal modems)
The default link mode is analog voice (J3E),

i.e. if no UUF is used, the link mode is analog
voice.
The radio has the capability to send and pro-
cess the UUF words defined also for other Ro-
hde & Schwarz radios supporting UUF.
In the call phase a UUF command word de-

pending on selected the link mode is transmit-
ted.
When the receiving radio receives a UUF, it

automatically switches the link mode indicated
with the UUF.
The UUF ‘Analogue voice’ is transmitted for

modes +J3E and – J3E, so make sure that the
other radio was set beforehand to the right
sideband in the ALE FF Operational menu
(page 1111).
UUFs exist for F1D and external modem oper-

ation as well.
The UUF does not distinguish between the

various available modems like STANAG-
4539, S-4285, so please use equal modem
settings within your ALE net.
For interoperation with devices from other sup-
pliers it is recommended to switch UUF off.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Response Timeout
4.3.6.9 Changing the Response Timeout
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Response Timeout'.

2. Change value with the knob or the numer-
In the central area the currently active value is ic keypad.
Possible values:
2 s to 60 s
By using this function the timeout between

transmission and reception of an ALE call can
be set.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the LBT Timeout
4.3.6.10 Changing the LBT Timeout
Editor 1. Press softkey 'LBT'.

2. Change value with the knob.
In the central area the currently active value is 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
displayed.
Possible values:
0 to 10 s
The LBT (listen before transmit) timeout is the

time the radio waits and checks if a channel is
occupied by an ALE net before a call is made.
If an occupied channel is detected, this chan-
nel will be skipped and the next channel of the
configured scan group is used.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Link Timeout
4.3.6.11 Changing the Link Timeout
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Link Timeout'.

displayed.
Possible values:
0 s to 5000 s
step width of 1 ms
When voice modes are selected: If there is no

transmit activity, a terminate command will be
sent automatically after this timeout is
reached.
When data modes are selected: If there is no

transmit activity and if the modem does not
see any input signal, a terminate command will
be sent automatically after this timeout is
reached.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Sounding On or Off
4.3.6.12 Switching the Sounding On or Off
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'Sound' to toggle sound-

ing on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Default value:
OFF
If the sound interval is set to 0 min and 'Sound'

is switched on, the ALE performs just one sin-
gle sound call, in all other cases it performs cy-
clical sound calls.
On: Manual sounding or interval sounding is

on.
Use softkey ‘Sound Interval’ to change the in-

terval.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Sounding Interval
4.3.6.13 Changing the Sounding Interval
Editor 1. Press 'Sound Interval' softkey.

The currently set sounding interval is dis- 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
Possible values:
0 (single sound call) to 1440 minutes
If set to ’0’, the sound interval is switched

to ’single’, so that the operator is able to
make a single sound call. If the softkey
SND (see
sect. 4.3.6.12 Switching the Sounding On
or Off) was previously ON, the user has to
turn it OFF and then switch it ON again, in
order to perform the single sound call.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Date and Time
4.3.6.14 Changing the Date and Time
Example for entering date 2006.04.15 and 1. Press softkey 'Date Time'.
time 12:30:00 2. Enter a new date and/or time.
Press softkey 'Date Time'.
The new setting is now effective.
Enter valid date either with numeric keypad or/

and with knob:
When time and date are correct, press 'ENT' to

confirm.
The currently set date and time is also dis-

You can skip a value for entering by pressing:

M3SR Series 4100 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off
4.3.6.15 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle the passive time

acquisition on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
With the passive time acquisition protected

transmissions are monitored. If at least two
stations receive a time with a better time qual-
ity than their own, the clock of the receiver will
be adjusted.

M3SR Series 4100 Enabling or Disabling Unprotected Time Request (Random Value)
4.3.6.16 Enabling or Disabling Unprotected Time Request (Random Value)
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle unprotected time

synchronization on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
With the unprotected time request, time trans-

mission takes place without protection. The in-
quiring station transmits a random value. The
time is then transmitted with this random val-
ue, using the lattice algorithm.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching Protected Coarse Time Request (Time Lag < 1 min) On or Off
4.3.6.17 Switching Protected Coarse Time Request (Time Lag < 1 min) On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle coarse time syn-

chronization on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
With the protected coarse time request, the

time lag between the two stations is allowed to
be as great as one minute. Here time trans-
mission also is protected.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching Protected Fine Time Request (Time Lag < 2 s) On or Off
4.3.6.18 Switching Protected Fine Time Request (Time Lag < 2 s) On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle the fine time syn-

chronization on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
With the protected fine time request, a net sta-

tion inquires the time from the time server or
from another net station. The time lag between
the two stations must not be greater than two
seconds. The received time quality then is
poorer by one level than the actual reference
time. Time transmission is protected.

M3SR Series 4100 Designating the Local Station Time Server or Net Station
4.3.6.19 Designating the Local Station Time Server or Net Station
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle designation be-

tween time server and net station.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
By using the time server function, the local sta-

tion can be designated as time server (time
master station). When the local station is the
time server within the network, it transmits the
time in a protected broadcast call. Per defini-
tion the time quality now is 20 ms.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the SINAD Threshold
4.3.6.20 Changing the SINAD Threshold
Editor 1. Press softkey to change the SINAD

threshold.
Possible values:
0 to 30 where 0 means OFF
The threshold is responsible for the accep-

tance of a link setup response. If the calculat-
ed SINAD is above the threshold, the link is
accepted, otherwise, it is discarded. With a
value of 0, all link setup responses are accept-
ed.

M3SR Series 4100Switching the Acceptance of Calls with a Lower Linking Protection Level On or Off
4.3.6.21 Switching the Acceptance of Calls with a Lower Linking Protection Level On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle the acceptance of

calls with a lower linking protection level
In the central area the currently active value is on/off.
displayed.
The new value is selected immediately.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If 'Link on lower' is switched on, the own sta-

tion (if being on level 2) links also to other sta-
tions, which are on Link Protection level 0 or 1.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Time Request Interval
4.3.6.22 Changing the Time Request Interval
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Time REQ INTV'.

2. Enter a new interval or change interval se-
In the central area the currently active value is lectively.
Possible values:
0 minute up to 255 minutes within a stepwidth

of 1 minute
When the time quality of a station falls below a

certain threshold, the time acquisition protocol
is started automatically. Using this protocol the
station tries to improve its time quality. The in-
tervals between these attempts can be pro-
grammed via the function 'Time REQ INTV'.
The protocol runs until the time quality reaches
a sufficient value.
From 0 (off) up to 255 minutes within a step

width of 1 minute.

M3SR Series 4100 Entering the Key
4.3.6.23 Entering the Key
Example of how to insert the key 1. Press softkey 'Key'.

122343485A7BD0: 2. Enter a new key.
Press softkey 'Key' to enter the editor.
Possible values:
00000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
The 24 bit ALE words for linking are encrypted

by means of the lattice algorithm. One of the
input quantities for this algorithm is the user-
Enter the key either with numeric keypad or/ defined key. The key can be 56 bits long, al-
and with knob: lowing as many as 256 different keys.
When a valid key has been entered complete-

ly, the letters of the key are displayed in black
color.
Press 'ENT to confirm the key.
Letters like A to F can be entered only by

knob.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Protection Level
4.3.6.24 Selecting the Protection Level
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'LINK PROT Level'.

2. Select desired value from listbox with the
In the central area the currently active value is knob.
Possible values:
• AL-0
• AL-1
• AL-2
Protection level 2 guarantees maximum secu-

rity (protection interval 2 s) at high demands
on network synchronization, whereas protec-
tion level 1 allows slightly less security (protec-
tion interval 60 s) at lower demands on
network synchronization. The protection inter-
val defines the time during which the input
quantities of the encryption algorithm are con-
stant.
The 24-bit ALE (= Automatic Link Establish-

ment) words for linking are encrypted by
means of the lattice algorithm. Input quantities
for this algorithm are the user-defined key (see
sect. 4.3.6.23 Entering the Key), the frequen-
cy, date and time of day.
The key can be 56 bits long, allowing as many

as 256 different keys.

M3SR Series 4100 Common ALE-2G and ALE-3G FF and HF Modem Menus
4.3.7 Common ALE-2G and ALE-3G FF and HF Modem Menus
As already mentioned, after link establishment it is possible to operate in different link modes,
like Fixed Frequency FF, Internal Modem or, in case of ALE-3G, internal protocols HDL and
LDL.
On the other hand, the link modes Fixed Frequency and Internal Modem also called HF Mo-
dem, are available even without ALE, where they have their own operational and configura-
tion menus.
These menus are made available even within the ALE, with the same layout, but some re-
strictions due to the ALE definition.
For Fixed Frequency ALE links, the softkey ‘FF OPERATION’ in ALE Home menu (page
0001) is used to call the ALE FF Operational page with the same softkey layout as described
for Fixed Frequency. Softkey ‘FF CONFIG’ in page 0002 calls the FF Configuration menu.
For HF Modem ALE links, the softkey ‘HF Modem OPERATION’ in ALE Home menu (page
0001) is used to call the ALE FF Operational page with the same softkey layout as described
already for Fixed Frequency. Softkey ‘HF Modem CONFIG’ in page 0002 calls the FF Con-
figuration menu.

4.3.7.1 ALE-2G/ALE-3G FF Operational and Configuration Menus
Below, the FF menus with their operational and configurational softkeys are shown. For de-
tailed description of the softkeys, please see sect. 3.7.2 Fixed Frequency Operational Menus
and sect. 3.7.3 Fixed Frequency Configuration Menus.
Figure 4.10 Menu 1111: FF OP1/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A
ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1

Figure 4.11 Menu 1112: FF OP2/2 (ALE-2G), e.g. A1A
ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1
In contrast to normal Fixed Frequency operation the central area shows the ALE sta-
tus (2G or 3G) for easy monitoring of ALE events.

Figure 4.12 Menu 1122: FF CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G)
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00012-A-01-1
In contrast to Fixed Frequency operation without ALE, some softkeys are hidden be-
cause of the already mentioned limitations due to link mechanisms running in paral-
lel: Whatever is selected in the three menus above, an ALE terminate command from
a network participant can still be received.

4.3.7.2 ALE-2G/ALE-3G HF Modem Operational and Configuration Menus
Below, the HF modem menus with their operational and configuration softkeys are shown -
when used together with ALE-2G or ALE-3G. For detailed description of the softkeys, please
see sect. 4.5.3 HF Modem Operational Menu and sect. 4.5.4 HF Modem Configuration
Menu.
Figure 4.13 Menu 1511: HFM OP 1/1 (ALE-2G)
ICN-4D-H-231072-R-D0894-00013-A-01-1
In contrast to normal HF Modem operation the central area shows the ALE status (2G
or 3G) for easy monitoring of ALE events.

Figure 4.14 Menu 1521: HFM CFG 1/1 (ALE-2G/ALE-3G)
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00014-A-01-1
This menu is completely identical with the HF Modem Configuration menu without
ALE operation.

M3SR Series 4100 Automatic Link Establishment 3rd Generation (ALE-3G)
4.4 Automatic Link Establishment 3rd Generation (ALE-3G)
4.4.1 Basics of ALE-3G
The third generation Automatic Link Establishment ALE-3G is a standard defined in STAN-
AG-4538. It offers advantages over ALE-2G (second generation) like faster link setup, higher
sensitivity and higher throughput for data traffic.
The enhancements were achieved by
• using the same family of waveforms for link setup and data transmissions (PSK = Phase
Shift Keying)
• including embedded data transmission protocols with ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request)
• synchronous scanning of channels by all radios in an ALE-3G network (time synchroni-
zation of all radios in a network is required).
4.4.1.1 Achieving Network Synchronization
For highest performance network synchronization may be obtained using the GPS (Global
Positioning System) or NTP (Network Time Protocol) time in all radios of a network.
If GPS or NTP time is not available, one time server station in a network is defined. For the
other stations in the network at first manual time entry (e.g. time from wristwatch) and sub-
sequent time synchronization over the air is needed.
4.4.1.2 Improved LQA Mechanism and Automatic Channel Selection
During synchronous LQA (link quality analysis) sounding, LQA exchange, link setup and
data exchange, the ALE-3G system monitors the channel quality and stores BER (Bit Rrror
Rate) and S/N (Signal-to-Noise ratio) values in a database. To have the best channel condi-
tions for the next link setup, the radio refers to the database and chooses the best quality
channel. This function is called ACS (Automatic Channel Selection).

4.4.1.3 ALE-3G Calls
Individual calls (point-to-point), broadcast calls and multicast calls are supported.
R&S EK4100 Systems can only link to broadcast calls, because the acknowledgement
cannot be transmitted.
The operator can initiate synchronous or asynchronous calls in the preselected traffic type
(link mode) to the preselected destination address in one of the following ways:
• Pressing the call button.

• Asserting PTT.
• Presence of data on the data interface.
4.4.1.4 ALE-3G Missions and Database
The operator plans ALE-3G networks using the R&S Mission Planner. The R&S Mission
Planner generates the ALE-3G database for each radio in the network and the operator has
to load the data into each participating radio in the network. The ALE-3G network shall com-
prise 2 radios, but not more than 127 radios.
The ALE-3G database consists of a set of ALE-3G data (initial network parameters) as well
as an entire ALE-2G database. The ALE-3G data is needed to operate the ALE-3G network
and the ALE-2G data is needed for ALE-2G concurrent operation. Each ALE-3G network is
configured to transmit data encrypted (with COMSEC) or plain, which results in different op-
erating modes for ALE-3G.
4.4.1.5 ALE-2G Concurrent Operation in ALE-3G
A radio operating in ALE-3G mode is able to process ALE-2G incoming calls as well. This is
possible due to the fact that ALE-3G addresses and ALE-2G call signs are correlated. The
correlation is handled in the ALE database.
A radio operating in ALE-3G mode is also able to call radios operating in ALE-2G mode.
Due to these features it is possible to have ALE-3G networks with ALE-2G operating radios
integrated.

4.4.1.6 Optimized Transfer of IP Packets
IP-based data transmission with the embedded xDL (x = L = Low or H = High, Data Rate
Link) data link protocol offers the following features:
Adaptive Selection of ARQ Protocols
The ALE-3G protocol can automatically select the best setting of the xDL ARQ protocol
based on measurements of the actual channel condition and the used packets size. This
adaptive selection will achieve a better throughput than the manual selection.
Priority-Based Session Management
To optimize throughput of peer-to-peer traffic in an ALE-3G network, an innovative algorithm

for managing xDL sessions can be used. This priority-based session management takes into
account the priority of the traffic and improves throughput and latency.
Packet Aggregation
Another way to improve the throughput of the xDL packet transfer is the aggregation of small-
er packets to a datagram of maximum 10 Kbytes.
4.4.1.7 Voice Priority over IP Data
'Voice Priority over IP data' (VPoIPD) enables the user to initiate a voice link while configured
for IP-data connections. As possible voice modes 'Analog Voice', 'Secure Digital Voice' or
'Last Ditch Voice' could be selected. If VPoIPD is disabled, there will be no reaction to any
voice PTT requested, but incoming voice calls are still processed. If VPoIPD is enabled, the
radio behaves as follows:
The request for the voice call may be made in two different states of the radio:
• The radio is currently 'listening/scanning”, the voice call can be initiated immediately.
• The radio has established (or is establishing) an IP-data link. In this case this link will be
terminated automatically. Afterwards the radio will initiate the voice call.
After the voice link is disconnected (by user termination, or if the activity timeout is reached),
the radio will return to normal data operation: In case of available data a new call will be es-
tablished, or the radio will return to 'listening/scanning”.
The radio will preserve the IP-data to transmit while a voice priority call is active. Even if there
is no data loss caused by the voice call, the data could still become obsolete by the time-to-
live information. Also the normal congestion handling is active.

4.4.1.8 Automatic Link Maintenance (ALM)
The ALE-3G Automatic Link Maintenance (ALM) function is responsible for monitoring the
quality of an established link, and for initiating corrective action when necessary.
In the R&S M3TR, Late Link Entry LLE is mutually integrated into the ALM functionality. The
LLE allows unlinked stations to enter existing links at a later phase. The LLE feature is only
available for HF modem and voice transmission.
After a Link Setup the ALM function will calculate the channel quality of the link and compare
it against a configured ALM threshold. If the channel quality is below the configured thresh-
old, a relink operation will be issued on a different channel to find a channel with a quality
above the threshold. If the channel quality of all channels are below the threshold, the ALM
function will relink on the best available channel in the scan group. During an active 3G link
the ALM function can monitor the channel quality based on SNR information of HF-Modem
receptions and trigger an automatic ALM relink if necessary.
For successful operation it is important that the slave doesn’t send any data for 1.5 seconds
after the masters starts with relink operation.
4.4.1.9 Communication Security (COMSEC)
If COMSEC is activated for an ALE-3G network, all communication is secured and unse-
cured communication will be avoided. All data transmitted with xDL will be encrypted. More-
over, two additional secure voice transmission modes are available: Last Ditch Voice and
Secure Digital Voice.
4.4.1.10 Last Ditch Voice (LDV)
With the Last Ditch Voice mode the operator is able to transmit a 60 s voice message via the
ARQ Protocols. This guarantees that the voice message reaches the recipient under almost
all circumstances, but not in real-time like a conventional voice call. Each station can store
one LDV message. A new received LDV message is indicated to the user at the MMI and via
an audio indication. The user has also the ability to play back the received LDV message
until a new LDV message is received.
4.4.1.11 Secure Digital Voice (SDV)
In mode ALE-3G the feature Secure Digital Voice can be used for encrypted voice commu-
nication under highly degraded shortwave channel conditions. For details see
sect. 4.7 Secure Digital Voice. Additionally to the security features described at Secure Dig-
ital Voice operation mode, Secure Digital Voice with ALE-3G provides a replay protection.
The replay protection avoids the decryption of old waveform signals.

4.4.2 ALE-3G Menu Tree
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for ALE-3G operation. The menu
tree shows how to reach a particular menu.

ALE-3G Home
4.72
1211 1212
ALE OP 1/2 ALE OP 2/2
1221 1222 1223

ALE CFG 1/4 ALE CFG 2/4 ALE CFG 3/4
M3SR Series 4100
1224
ALE CFG 4/4
1511
HFM OP 1/2
1611 1111 1112

Sec. Voice OP 1/1 FF OP 1/2 FF OP 2/2
1341 1342
Msg Service 1/2 Msg Service 2/2
Figure 4.15 Menu Tree: ALE-3G
1251
GPS OP
1521
HFM CFG 1/1
1122
1621
FF CFG 1/1
Sec. Voice Cfg 1/1
1331 1332
IPoA CFG 1/2 IPoA CFG 2/2
1255
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
PHONE
ALE-3G Menu Tree
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

The services are described in:
sect. 5.3 IP over Air (IPoA)
sect. 5.2 GPS Reporting
sect. 5.4 Message Service
sect. 5.5 Voice over IP (VoIP)

4.4.3 ALE-3G Home Menus
After selecting the ALE-3G operation mode the radio comes up with the ALE-3G Preset
Page. In the central area the current main ALE-3G settings and status parameters are dis-
played.
As in all other waveforms, some parameters are changing when switching to transmission.
For instance, the Tx output power and VSWR indication are shown instead of the RF level
bargraph.
The central area is identical for the main operational page 0001 and the main configurational
page 0002, and even in the ALE-3G, ALE-3G FF, ALE-3G SECURE and ALE-3G HF Modem
operational pages.
Figure 4.16 Home Menu: ALE 3G (Listening, Rx Mode)
10
11 12
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1. Linking status and frequency: LISTENING - CALL TO - CALL BY - CALL ACTIVE – SND
TIME REQ – SND LQA
2. Partner Address: list of responding partners
3. Self Address
4. Scan Group
5. Next Call Address
6. Scan Group to be used for the next outgoing call
7. Time Uncertainty
8. Selected Key
9. Receive Level
10. Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
11. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (S/N)
12. Alm Threshold Status

Figure 4.17 Home Menu: ALE-3G (Listening, Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1


4.4.4 ALE-3G Operational Menus
The central area of the operational menus shows the same parameters as in the ALE-3G
Home menu to allow easy monitoring of the ALE-3G status.
All parameters that have to be changed within a typical mission are arranged in the two
ALE-3G operational pages, almost identical layout as in ALE-2G-only pages.
The FF and HF modem operational (and configuration) menus in ALE modes are dis-
cussed in sect. 4.3.7 Common ALE-2G and ALE-3G FF and HF Modem Menus. They
are almost identical to the corresponding menus without ALE. All parameters that
have to be changed within a typical mission are arranged in the two ALE operational
pages. The layout of the ALE operational pages is almost identical to ALE-2G-only
pages. Thus we recommend to read the ALE-2G documentation first, even if ALE-2G
operation is not planned. The central area of the operational menus shows the same
parameters as in the ALE Home menu to allow easy monitoring of the ALE status.
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00150-A-01-1

Following functions are identical for ALE-2G and ALE-3G:
• sect. 4.3.5.1 Selecting the Scan Groups (Next Call Scan Group Selection: Only for ALE-
2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.5.2 Selecting the Address for Individual Call
• sect. 4.3.5.6 Terminating a Link
• sect. 4.3.5.7 Linked Stations List
• sect. 4.3.5.8 Initiating a Link via MMI
• sect. 4.3.5.10 Selecting the Active Channel for ‘Fix’ Operation
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00151-A-01-1
• sect. 4.3.5.11 Selecting the Self Address

• sect. 4.3.5.3 Selecting the Address for Net Call
• sect. 4.3.5.15 Displaying Received Rx Messages (only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.5.16 Selecting the Power Level
• sect. 4.3.5.17 Starting ATU Learning for ALE Channels

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Address for Multicast Call
4.4.4.1 Selecting the Address for Multicast Call
Listbox 1. Press ‘MULTICAST’ softkey.

2. Select the desired multicast address.
3. Press ‘ENT’ to confirm.
A multicast address can be understood as a

predefined list of stations. These lists have to
be predefined in R&S RNMS3000 and loaded
into the radio.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Link Mode
4.4.4.2 Selecting the Link Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'Link Mode' softkey.

2. Select desired link mode from listbox.
The 'Link Mode' softkey is only enabled if the 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
call status is 'Listening'.
The new link mode is now selected.
In all other cases it stays disabled.
Possible values:
• ANALOG VOICE / FF
• INTERNAL MODEM
• xDL (ARQ protocols)
• SEC DIG VOICE
• LAST DITCH VOICE
If an ALE link is estblished, the selected link

mode gets active for traffic.
If Analog Voice/FF is selected as link mode,

the parameters preselected in FF Operation
menues and FF CONFIG menues get active
(see sect. 3.7.3 Fixed Frequency Configura-
tion Menus).
If Internal Modem is selected as link mode, the

parameters preselected in HF Modem Opera-
toin Menues and HF Modem CONFIG menues
get active (see sect. 4.5.4 HF Modem Config-
uration Menu).
If xDL is selected, one of the available ARQ
protocols (Automatic Repeat Request Proto-
cols) is acitve for packet data transmission,
dependant on the xDL Mode selection (see
sect. 4.4.5.7 Selecting the xDL Mode).
If Secure Digital Voice is selected as link

mode, the parameters preselected in Secure
Operation menues get active.
Availability of selectable Link Modes depends

on the configuration of the current preset
page. If COMSEC is activated on the current
preset page only the secure Link Modes “xDL”,
“SEC DIG VOICE” and “LAST DITCH VOICE”
are available. With COMSEC deactivated, the
unsecure Link Modes “ANALOG VOICE /
FF”,“INTERNAL MODEM” and “xDL” are avail-
able for selection.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Type of Link Setup
4.4.4.3 Selecting the Type of Link Setup
Listbox 1. Press 'LSU Mode' softkey.

2. Select desired LSU mode from listbox.
displayed.
Possible values:
• FLSU async (Fast Link Setup Asynchro-

nous)
• FLSU sync (Fast Link Setup Synchro-
nous)
FLSU async: The next call will be an asychro-

nous call, i.e. the duration of the call is extend-
ed to the time it takes to cycle through all
scanning frequencies. This ensures that an
asynchronously but periodically scanning ra-
dio scans the frequency which is used for the
call.
FLSU sync: This is the fastest type of link set-

up, but it requires a time accuracy of better
than 180 ms. All participating radios have to
keep synchronism by means of GPS synchro-
nization or a time request to a time server.
If the radio's time uncertainty value is out of

limit (i.e. exceeded), the latter asynchronous
call procedure is used for calling.
To achieve the needed time accuracy of better
than 180 ms without GPS reception on time
slaves (time server = off), proceed as follows:
• Set time source.

• Set data and time within a +/- 7 minute tol-
erance.
• Press softkey ‘Time REQ’ in ALE CFG 3/3
menu.
• After receiving time information from the
time server, the radio should show ‘Time
Uncertainty: 180 ms’.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Call Channel Type
4.4.4.4 Selecting the Call Channel Type
Listbox 1. Press 'CCT' softkey.

2. Select desired call channel type from list-
box.
The new call channel type is now selected.
Possible values:
• next channel
• best channel
• fixed channel
Next Channel:
The next link will be set up on the next possible
channel in the scanning cycle. If a link setup
fails, the radio uses a backoff strategy to select
the channel for the next link setup attempt.
With this selection, the link setup is very fast,

but the choice depends on the starting time of
the call, not on the channel quality. Useful
only, if the conditions are very good on all
channels.
Best Channel:
It is recommended to use this call channel type

as often as possible to let the ALE search for
the best available channel.
The next link will be set up on the channel with

the best signal-to-noise ratio (S/N). For this the
radio consults its link quality table.
If a link setup fails, the radio uses a backoff

strategy to select the channel for the next link
setup attempt.
Fixed Channel:
The ALE call will be initiated on an operator-

chosen channel. If a link setup fails, the radio
waits a random time until the fixed channel is
met again. Useful for experienced operators
and known channel conditions.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Address for Broadcast Call
4.4.4.5 Selecting the Address for Broadcast Call
Listbox 1. Press 'Broadcast ADDR' softkey.

2. Select desired address from listbox.
To perform a broadcast call carry out the fol-

lowing steps:
1. If required, terminate an existing link by

pressing ‘Terminate Link’.
2. Select the broadcast address as de-
scribed above.
3. Select the link mode by pressing ‘Link
Mode’.
4. Check for sufficient RF power level (page
1212).
5. Initiate the link setup by pressing 'Call!'
(not possible for xDL), pressing PTT (for
analog voice calls) or applying user data.

M3SR Series 4100 Playback a Received Last Ditch Voice Message
4.4.4.6 Playback a Received Last Ditch Voice Message
Activate 1. Press 'Play LDV Message' softkey.
The playback of a received Last Ditch Voice

message is started.
Additonally the information of the time when

the last ditch voice message was received and
from which station it was sent is displayed.
Press ‚ENT’ to close the additonal information

tab.

M3SR Series 4100 ALE-3G Configuration Menus
4.4.5 ALE-3G Configuration Menus
Menu Structure of ALE-3G Configuration Menus
In the central area of the configuration menus the currently set configuration parameters are
displayed.
ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00007-A-01-1
1 Listen before Transmit

2 Response Time
3 Default Link Mode Voice

• sect. 4.3.6.1 Switching the Acceptance of an All/Any/Wildcard Call On or Off (Only for
ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.2 Switching the Popup for Received AMD Messages On or Off (Only for
ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.3 Switching the LQA Request On or Off (Only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.4 Switching the LQA Report On or Off (Only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.5 Selecting the Weight of a New LQA Event (Only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.6 Bypassing the ATU
• sect. 4.3.6.7 Switching the Default Link Mode for Voice On or Off (Only for ALE-2G
links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.8 Switching the User Unique Function On or Off (Only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.9 Changing the Response Timeout (Only for ALE-2G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.10 Changing the LBT Timeout (Only for ALE-2G links valid)

1 Link Timeout
2 Data Link Timeout
3 Sounding Interval
4 Retry Counter
5 Packet Aggregation
6 xDL Port
Following function is identical for ALE-2G and ALE-3G:
• sect. 4.3.6.13 Changing the Sounding Interval

Display of the Packet Aggregation Setting (ON/OFF).
The operator can see if packet aggegation is used or not.
This parameter can only be changed using the R&S Mission Planner.
Display of the xDL Port Setting
When DT1 is used as data source for xDL, the xDL-protocols are used like a modem with a
RS232 interface. The data will be internally packetized to 1500 byte packets and transferred
with xDL to the next call address or the linked partner station.
If IPoA is used as data source the radio has a Transparent IP interface based on ethernet or
PPP. See sect. 5.3 IP over Air (IPoA) for further information concerning this.

ICN-4D-H-231074-R-D0894-00009-A-01-1
1 Time
2 Date
3 Passive Time Acquisition
4 Time Uncertainty
5 Time Request
6 Time Request Interval
7 Time Source
8 Time Server
• sect. 4.3.6.14 Changing the Date and Time

• sect. 4.3.6.19 Designating the Local Station Time Server or Net Station (Only for ALE-
3G links valid)
• sect. 4.3.6.20 Changing the SINAD Threshold
• sect. 4.3.6.23 Entering the Key (Only for ALE-3G links valid)

ICN-4D-G-231074-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Acceptance of a Broadcast Call On or Off
4.4.5.1 Switching the Acceptance of a Broadcast Call On or Off

a broadcast call on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If 'Broadcast' is switched on, after reception of

a broadcast call, the radio links up.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Acceptance of an ALE-2G Call On or Off
4.4.5.2 Switching the Acceptance of an ALE-2G Call On or Off

ALE-2G calls on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If 'Accept A2G' is switched on, after reception
of an ALE-2G call, the radio links up. Switch
this function off, if you are using an ALE-3G-
only network.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Link Timeout for Analog Voice/FF Links
4.4.5.3 Changing the Link Timeout for Analog Voice/FF Links
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Link Timeout'.

displayed.
Possible values:
0 s to 5000 s
0 means infinite link timeout!
stepwidth of 1 s
If there is no transmit activity during active an-

alog voice/FF links, a terminate command will
be sent automatically after this timeout is
reached.
For ALE-2G links this link timeout is valid for

all links (analog voice/FF links as well as inter-
nal modem links) .

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Timeout for Data Links
4.4.5.4 Changing the Timeout for Data Links
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Data Link Timeout'.

displayed.
Possible values:
0 s to 3600 s
0 means infinite link timeout!
stepwidth of 1 s
For ALE-3G data links (internal modem and

xDL links) the following is valid:
If there is no transmit activity and the radio

does not see any input signal, a terminate
command will be sent automatically after this
timeout is reached.
For ALE-2G links this parameter is not used at
all.

M3SR Series 4100 Deleting the LQA Table
4.4.5.5 Deleting the LQA Table
Activate 1. Press 'DEL LQA TABLE' softkey.
When the position of a radio was completely

changed or when the antenna was exchanged
(log periodic beam antenna instead of whip), it
might be reasonable to delete the LQA table to
avoid wrong decisions of the best channel al-
gorithm, which is based on this table.
This accelerates the adaptation to the new

propagation conditions.
During normal operation, it is not recommend-

ed to delete the LQA table, it would make the
next link setup less reliable.
See
sect. 4.4.4.4 Selecting the Call Channel Type
, where the ‘best channel’ can be selected au-
tomatically.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Priority Based Session Management On or Off
4.4.5.6 Switching the Priority Based Session Management On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle priority based ses-

sion management on/off.
The new value is effective immediately.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
By means of the softkey MST (Maximum Ses-

sion Time) the operator can switch priority
based session management on or off.
If MST is set to ON, a ALE-3G xDL link will be

released after a priority based maximum ses-
sion time of 180 sec.
With activated MST it is possible for 2 or

more stations to communicate with one
single station concurrently. The communi-
cation sessions rotate depending on the
priority of the data to transfer.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the xDL Mode
4.4.5.7 Selecting the xDL Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'xDL Mode' softkey.

The new value is now effective.
Possible values:
• LDL (Low Data Rate Link Protocol)

• HDL (High Data Rate Link Protocol)
• adaptive xDL
If adaptive xDL is selected, the ALE 3G auto-

matically chooses the best xDL selection
based on the measured channel conditions
and the used packet size.
If LDL is selected, the LDL ARQ (Automatic

Repeat Request) protocol is used with prese-
lected number of bytes per Tx-Frame (see
sect. 4.4.5.9 Selecting the LDL Number of
Bytes per Tx Frame).
If HDL is selected, the HDL ARQ protocol is

used with preselected number of packets per
Tx-Frame (see sect. 4.4.5.8 Selecting the
HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame).
xDL ARQ protocols which allow an acknowl-

edged point-to-point delivery of datagrams. In
case of an erroneous transmission, single
packets are repeated with changed FEC (For-
ward Error Correction) coding so that code
combining techniques can be used for error
correction.
Differences between HDL and LDL
The HDL protocol is best suited for delivering

relatively large datagrams under good to fair
HF channel conditions, while the LDL protocol
provides better performance for smaller data-
gram lengths under fair to very poor HF chan-
nel conditions. The HDL achieves a highest
possible data throughput of approximately
4 kbps under very good channel conditions.
Packet Sizes
LDL / HDL offers predefined packet sizes as

listed below which can be preconfigured via
R&S RNMS or selected manually by the user.
Due to traffic management capabilities the
packet size can be changed during an estab-
lished link.
To reach the best performance in changing

channel conditions it is recommended to use
the adaptive xDL mode.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the xDL Mode
Table 4.4 Dependency of Packet Size on Selected Traffic Mode
Traffic Mode Packet Size / Payload
LDL 32 32 bytes
LDL 64 64 bytes
LDL 96 96 bytes
LDL 128 128 bytes
LDL 160 160 bytes
LDL 192 192 bytes
LDL 224 224 bytes
LDL 256 256 bytes
LDL 288 288 bytes
LDL 320 320 bytes
LDL 352 352 bytes
LDL 384 384 bytes
LDL 416 416 bytes
LDL 448 448 bytes
LDL 480 480 bytes
LDL 512 512 bytes
HDL 3 699 bytes
HDL 6 1398 bytes
HDL 12 2796 bytes
HDL 24 5592 bytes

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame
4.4.5.8 Selecting the HDL Number of Packets per Tx Frame
Listbox 1. Press 'HDL Pack' softkey.

2. Select desired number of packets from
listbox.
The new HDL number of packets per Tx frame

is now effective.
Possible values:
• 3
• 6
• 12
• 24

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the LDL Number of Bytes per Tx Frame
4.4.5.9 Selecting the LDL Number of Bytes per Tx Frame
Listbox 1. Press 'LDL Byte' softkey.

2. Select desired number of bytes from list-
box.
Possible values (in bytes):
32 – 64 - 96 – 128 – 160 – 192 – 224 – 256 –

288 – 320 – 352 – 364 – 416 – 448 – 480 – 512

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Number of Retries for Initiated Link Setup
4.4.5.10 Changing the Number of Retries for Initiated Link Setup
Editor 1. Press 'Retry Count' softkey.

2. Enter desired number of retries.
displayed.
Possible values:
0 to 255

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Acceptance of LQA Exchange On or Off
4.4.5.11 Switching the Acceptance of LQA Exchange On or Off

incomming LQA (Link Quality Analysis)
exchange requests on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If switched on, the radio responds to incoming

LQA exchange requests.
If switched off, the radio does not respond to

incoming LQA Exchange requests.

M3SR Series 4100 Address Selection for LQA Exchange
4.4.5.12 Address Selection for LQA Exchange
Listbox 1. Press 'EXL' softkey.

2. Select a station address for LQA ex-
change.
Only individual addresses are possible

here. Simply select the same address as
the 'Next Call Address'.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the LQA Mode On or Off
4.4.5.13 Switching the LQA Mode On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle the LQA mode on

/ off.
Possible values:
• off
• on/Period LQA Sounding
• on/Periodic LQA Exchange
Choose the 'LQA MD' (link quality analysis

mode) according to the following hints.
When switched off, the signal-to-noise ratio is

analyzed for ALE traffic only. This setting is
suitable for good propagation conditions and
heavy ALE traffic, but can increase the needed
link setup retries, it can even reduce the link
reliability.
A better choice is the periodic LQA sounding,

where specific sounding calls are transmitted
to allow automatic signal-to-noise ratio mea-
surements at the other stations, improving the
search for the best channel.
Best link setup results are to be expected with

periodic LQA exchange. The measured LQA
values are exchanged with the station select-
ed in the exchange List, see softkey ‘EXL’ be-
low this key.
But please note that LQA exchange com-

pared with short selection of ‘Sound Inter-
vals’ (see softkey above) can result in high
traffic on the ALE channels.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off
4.4.5.14 Switching Passive Time Acquisition On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle the passive time

acquisition on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If passive time acquisition is switched on, a

station, which is not time server and detects
time synchronization calls over the air be-
tween other stations, uses the information in
this call to update its local time.
If passive time acquisition is switched to

on, the network load can be reduced, espe-
cially if GPS cannot be used as time
source.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Time Synchronization On or Off
4.4.5.15 Switching the Time Synchronization On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey ‘Time REQ’ to toggle time

synchronization on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Occupancy Detection On or Off
4.4.5.16 Switching the Occupancy Detection On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle Occupancy Detec-

tion on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
If occupancy detection is switched to on,

known waveforms will be detected and prohib-
its the link setup. If switched to off, no listen be-
fore transmit will be performed.
The ALE-3G is provided with a highly sophisti-

cated waveform detection system which is
called occupancy detection (OD) or listen be-
fore transmit (LBT). The feature could be used
in synchronous and asynchronous mode and
detects all waveforms which are shown in the
table below. If the feature was activated the
ALE-3G performs before every outgoing call a
listen before phase with a duration of 900ms.
If a known waveform on channel was detected
a message will be displayed in a way like
"channel occupied hf-modem".
In cases that a radio could not link in matter

of a local disturbance it is may be helpful to
deactivate the occupancy detection feature
to establish a link. Otherwise the operator
shall keep in mind that the transmitted or
received PDU (Protocol Data Unit) is cor-
rupted if the occupancy detection is deac-
tivated.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Occupancy Detection On or Off
Table 4.5 Waveform Message
Detected waveform Waveform message
SSB Voice
Voice Voice
S4539 HF modem
S4285 HF modem
S4529 HF modem
S4415 HF modem
MIL110-A HF modem
MIL110-F HF modem
ALE2G ALE
S4538-BW0 S4538
S4538-BW1 S4538
S4538-BW2 S4538
S4538-BW3 S4538
S4538-BW4 S4538
S4538-BW5 S4538

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Voice Priority over IP Data Function
4.4.5.17 Selecting the Voice Priority over IP Data Function
Listbox 1. Press 'VPoD' softkey.

The value is now effective.
Possible values:
• OFF
• ANALOG VOICE
• SEG DIG VOICE
• LAST DITCH VOICE
The call-address for a voice-link is selected

by the “next call address”, which is config-
urable by the user. When an IP-data link is
established, the “next call address” is
changed to the current link partner. After
termination of the IP-data link the previous
“next call address” is restored, except if it
was changed by the user while the IP-data
link is active.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Time Source
4.4.5.18 Selecting the Time Source
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle time source be-

tween GPS and RTC.
displayed. The new setting is effective immediately.
Possible values:
• GPS (global positioning system)

• RTC (real-time clock)
• UTC (coordinated universal time)
The ALE-3G network time depends on the

time source. Following table shows the differ-
ent time sources and the resulting behavior for
the ALE-3G network time.
Time Source Behavior
RTC Network time depends on ra-

dio internal clock. Network
time could be set by the user
or synchronized over the air.
GPS Network time depends on the

Global Positioning System
time.
UTC Network time depends on the

Global Positioning System
time or on a configured Net-
work Time Protocol server. If
GPS time and NTP time are
available, NTP time is used. If
UTC time depends on GPS
time, Leap seconds are added
to the GPS time.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Time Request Interval
4.4.5.19 Changing the Time Request Interval
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Time REQ INTV'.

2. Enter a new interval or change interval se-
In the central area the currently active value is lectively.
The value is now effective.
Possible values:
From 0 (single) up to 255 minutes within a step

width of 1 minute.
When the time quality of a station falls below a

certain threshold, the time acquisition protocol
is started automatically. Using this protocol the
station tries to improve its time quality. The in-
tervals between these attempts can be pro-
grammed via the function 'Time REQ INTV'.
The protocol runs until the time quality reaches
a sufficient value.
If the interval is set to '0', the time request

is switched to ‘single’, so that the operator
is able to make a single time request. If the
softkey ‘Time REQ’ (see
sect. 4.4.5.15 Switching the Time Synchro-
nization On or Off) was already enabled,
the user has to disable it and then enable it
again, in order to perform the single time
request.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the ALE-3G Linking Protection On or Off
4.4.5.20 Switching the ALE-3G Linking Protection On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle ALE-3G linking

protection on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
Generally, please check for time accuracy

within +/- 7 minutes for entire ALE-3G oper-
ation, with and without linking protection.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the ALE-3G ALM Enable On or Off
4.4.5.21 Switching the ALE-3G ALM Enable On or Off
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle ALE 3G Enable on/

off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Threshold for Voice/FF Links
4.4.5.22 Changing ALM Threshold for Voice/FF Links
Editor 1. Press softkey `Thresh Voice`.

2. Enter desired threshold .
3. Press ‚ENT’ to confirm.
Possible values:
• 0 to 20
For a Last Ditch Voice message this threshold

is not used.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Threshold for Data Links
4.4.5.23 Changing ALM Threshold for Data Links
Editor 1. Press softkey `Thresh Data`.

2. Enter desired threshold .
3. Press ‚ENT’ to confirm.
Possible values:
• -10 to 20

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Channel Usage
4.4.5.24 Changing ALM Channel Usage
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle ALM Channel Us-

age.
Possible values:
• best first (Relinking starts on best channel)

• current first (Relinking starts at current
channel)
• current only (Relinking is done on current
channel only)

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Interval for Voice Links
4.4.5.25 Changing ALM Interval for Voice Links
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Intvl Voice'.

2. Enter desired interval.
Possible values:
0 to 1440

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Execution Delay for Voice Links
4.4.5.26 Changing ALM Execution Delay for Voice Links
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Exec Delay'.

2. Enter desired delay.
Possible values:
0 to 3600

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Interval for LLE
4.4.5.27 Changing ALM Interval for LLE
Editor 1. Press softkey 'LLE Intvl'.

Possible values:
0 to 1440

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Interval for Data Links
4.4.5.28 Changing ALM Interval for Data Links
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Intvl Data'.

Possible values:
0 to 1440

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Interval for Link Quality Monitoring
4.4.5.29 Changing ALM Interval for Link Quality Monitoring
Editor 1. Press softkey 'LQMon Intvl'.

Possible values:
0 to 3600

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Relink Mode
4.4.5.30 Changing ALM Relink Mode
Toggle Press softkey to toggle ALM Relink Mode.
Possible values:
• automatic (relinking is done automatic)

• manual (the user has to start relinking)

M3SR Series 4100 Changing ALM Execution Mode
4.4.5.31 Changing ALM Execution Mode
Toggle Press softkey to toggle ALM Execution Mode.
Possible values:
• next chance (relinking is done after TX

and RX is finshed)
• immediately (Relinking is done after TX is
finished)

M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem
4.5 HF Modem
4.5.1 Basics of HF Modem
The Rohde & Schwarz HF modem option provides transparent shortwave, non-hopping data
communication capabilities, based on common STANAG (NATO Standardization Agree-
ment) and MIL-STD (US Military Standard) publications. They allow the user to perform data
transmission optimized for speed vs. robustness according to the present channel condition
and the wanted communication scenario. There are a couple of different legacy data mo-
dems which have been promulgated by NATO or the US Department of Defense to ensure
interoperability and performance issues.
The following communication waveforms are supported:
R&S M3TR R&S M3SR Series 4100
STANAG-4539 x x
STANAG-4285 x x
STANAG-4529 x x
STANAG-4415 *) x x
MIL-STD-188-110B, Section 5.3 x x

and App. C *)
MIL-STD-188-110B, App. F x
STANAG-4481 x
STANAG-5065 (RX only) x
*)
Those waveforms are not selectable directly, but they are interoperable with
STANAG-4539. Therefore one should adjust STANAG-4539 when communication with one
of the mentioned waveforms is planned.
With ALE-2G and ALE-3G only waveforms STANAG-4539 and STANAG-4285 are sup-
ported.
With R&S EK4100 Systems only reception is supported.

M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem Menu Tree
4.5.1.1 HF Modem Menu Tree
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for HF Modem operation and
configuration. The menu tree shows how to reach the HF Modem Operation, the Configura-
tion and the Service menu.
Figure 4.24 Menu Tree: HF Modem
HF Modem Home
1511
HFM OP 1/1
1521
HFM CFG 1/1
1551
GPS OP
ICN-4D-H-231063-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem Home Menu
4.5.2 HF Modem Home Menu
After selecting the HF Modem Preset Page, the user interface shows the HF Modem Home
menu. In the central area the current main HF Modem settings and status parameters are
displayed.
Figure 4.25 Home Menu: HF Modem (Rx Mode)
2 10
3
8
5 6 7
ICN-4D-G-231063-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Tx Frequency
2 Rx Frequency
3 Waveform
4 Rx Signal Level
5 S/N
6 Tx Data Rate
7 Rx Data Rate
8 Modem status:
RX IDLE (no modem signal detected)
RX HUNT (searching for modem signals)
RX DATA LOCK (modem data reception)
RX SYNC LOCK (synchronization preamble detected)
TX DATA (modem data transmission running)
TX CONFIG (configuration of Tx side of the modem)
9 Rx Interleaver
10 Tx Interleaver
When the radio is set to transmit mode, the central area bar graphs change, instead of re-
ceiver input level it shows the current output power and transmitter VSWR.

M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem Home Menu
Figure 4.26 Home Menu: HF Modem (Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231063-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1


M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem Operational Menu
4.5.3 HF Modem Operational Menu
The operational menu contains the HF Modem settings where changes during a mission are
most likely. So it allows
• to change the Rx and Tx frequency (sect. 3.7.2.15 Changing the Frequency) and to tune
the ATU (sect. 3.7.2.22 Starting ATU Tuning)
• to change the output power level (sect. 3.7.2.21 Selecting the Power Level)
• to set the modem data rates and interleaver lengths
• to terminate the data transmission.
The central area of the HF Modem Operational page shows the same information as in the
Home menu, providing an at-a-glance overview of the HF Modem status even during oper-
ational changes.
Figure 4.27 Menu 1511: HFM OP 1/1
ICN-4D-G-231063-R-D0894-00005-A-01-1
ICN-4D-H-231063-R-D0894-00005-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Rx and Tx Data Rate
4.5.3.1 Changing the Rx and Tx Data Rate
Listbox 1. Press ‘RX Data' or 'Tx Data' softkey.

2. Select desired data rate from listbox.
The data rate and coding should be chosen

according to actual HF channel conditions. For
degraded channels with the presence of high
noise and multipath fading it is advisable to se-
lect low data rates and longer interleaver
lengths. Such constellations will result in high
bit error rates or even totally failed communi-
cation.
For very poor channels and for most reliable

data transmission, try to operate with the most
robust 75 bps data rate and longer interleaver.
Data rates above 6400 bps are mainly used in

ground wave communication. The use of data
rates without forward error correction (FEC) is
not advisable.
Further, uncoded data rates may not be com-

patible with other modems due to a lack of pre-
cision in the standard.
The data rate shown here reflects the total

throughput of payload data which can be
achieved with the over the air data transmis-
sion.
For waveforms with autobaud capability like

STANAG 4539 and MIL-STD-188-110B App.
F the HF Modem is able to detect the appropri-
ate Rx data rate automatically with the pres-
ence of a reception signal. Therefore an
adjustment of Rx data rate is not possible for
autobaud waveforms.
For waveforms without autobaud capability

like STANAG 4285, STANAG 4529 and
STANAG 4481 FSK the data rate and coding
chosen for the transmitter need to match the
adjusted data rate at the receiver on the other
end of the link.
For the waveform S4481 PSK and for S5065

FSK/MSK, there is just one fixed data rate
defined, it is not possible to change this
setting.
For available data rates, please check the ta-

bles below.

Table 4.6 Data Rates and Interleaver Setting Dependencies on the Waveform
Waveform Data Rate Interleaver Length
Zero Ultra Very Short Medi- Long Very

short short um long
STANAG 4539 75 FEC x x
150 FEC x x
300 FEC x x
600 FEC x x
1200 FEC x x
2400 FEC x x
3200 FEC x x x x
4800 x
4800 FEC x x x x
6400 FEC x x x x
8000 FEC x x x x
9600 FEC x x x x
12800 x
150 FEC x x
300 FEC x x
600 FEC x x
1200 x
1200 FEC x x
2400 x
2400 FEC x x
3600 x
150 FEC x x
300 FEC x x
600 x
600 FEC x x
1200 x
1200 FEC x x
1800 x

Waveform Data Rate Interleaver Length
Zero Ultra Very Short Medi- Long Very

short short um long
MIL-STD-188-110B 9600 FEC x x x x

APPENDIX F
12800 FEC x x x x
16000 FEC x x x x
19200 FEC x x x x
STANAG 5065 FSK 75 FEC x
STANAG 5065 MSK 300 FEC x
STANAG 4481 FSK 50 no FEC x
75 no FEC x
150 no FEC x
300 no FEC x
600 no FEC x
STANAG 4481 PSK 300 FEC

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Rx and Tx Interleaver Length
4.5.3.2 Changing the Rx and Tx Interleaver Length
Listbox 1. Press 'Tx INTL' softkey.

2. Select desired interleaver length from list-
In the central area the currently active value is box.
Possible values:
• ultrashort
• very short
• short
• medium
• long
• very long
The interleaver rearranges the user data

blocks to allow the FEC correcting adjacent bit
errors due to short drop-outs caused by fast
fading or static discharges.
The extent of rearrangement is defined by the

interleaver length (from ultra short to very
long).
Longer interleaving usually performs better

due to the possibility to handle longer distur-
bances, although at the price of higher latency
in the data transmission.
For waveforms with autobaud capability like

STANAG 4539 the HF Modem is able to de-
tect the appropriate Rx interleaver length auto-
matically with the presence of a signal.
Therefore an adjustment of the Rx interleaver
length is not possible for autobaud waveforms.
For waveforms without autobaud capability

like STANAG 4285 the interleaver length cho-
sen for the transmitter needs to match the ad-
justed interleaver length at the receiver on the
other end of the link.
The use of interleaver length ZERO (no in-

terleaving) is not advisable.

M3SR Series 4100 Terminating the Data Transmission
4.5.3.3 Terminating the Data Transmission
1. Press softkey to terminate an active data

transmission immediately.
Already buffered data within the radio will be

discarded. An ongoing reception will be
stopped, thus the radio has to hunt for a new
synchronization sequence before restarting to
decode a waveform.

M3SR Series 4100 HF Modem Configuration Menu
4.5.4 HF Modem Configuration Menu
The HF Modem Configuration menu is used to make advanced settings, where changes dur-
ing a typical mission are less likely. Even so, in special situations it might be helpful to change
the modem waveform, see Figure 4.28.
Figure 4.28 Menu 1521: HFM CFG 1/1
ICN-4D-G-231063-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Modem Deacquire Limit
4.5.4.1 Changing the Modem Deacquire Limit
Listbox 1. Press 'Deacquire' softkey.

2. Select desired modem deacquire limit
from listbox.
3. Press 'ENT' to confirm. The new modem
deacquire limit is now effective.
Possible values:
• slow
• medium
• fast
This setting determines the time that the re-

ceiving HF modem will continue to attempt to
decode data after a loss of the signal, caused
by termination of the transmission or due to
significant fading.
Deacquire limit  approximate duration [s]
• Fast  1
• Medium  5
• Slow  20

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Modem Doppler Tracking Time
4.5.4.2 Changing the Modem Doppler Tracking Time
Toggle 1. Press the softkey to toggle modem Dop-

pler tracking time between slow and fast.
Possible values:
• slow
• fast
The HF modem implementation is able to track

the Doppler offset present in the signal at the
receiver.
Therefore the modem can handle such fre-

quency offsets automatically and ensure su-
perior performance over a wide range of
Doppler offsets.
Slow tracking can handle higher offsets, but

the signal acquisition takes longer.
Fast tracking limits the range of frequency off-

set which can be detected.

M3SR Series 4100 Enabling the Modem Synchronization on Data Function
4.5.4.3 Enabling the Modem Synchronization on Data Function
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle modem synchroni-

zation on data on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
It allows the operator to enable or disable the

modem late traffic entry function.
In case of a missed synchronization preamble

on the receiver, the modem is capable to syn-
chronize by the use of the known data probes
of the waveforms.
Switch the function on if you wish to synchro-

nize even when a preamble is missed, or off if
not.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Maximal Message Block Length
4.5.4.4 Changing the Maximal Message Block Length
Editor 1. Press 'MB Length' softkey.

2. Enter desired block length.
Possible values:
0 to 100
By means of the message block length setting,

the operator can change the maximum
amount of interleaver frames for transmission
and reception.
Once the receiver modem has decoded a sig-

nal with the maximum block length configured
here, the HF Modem returns to acquisition
mode.
To other way round, a transmission is termi-

nated after the transmitter modem has
reached the maximum message block length.
The value 0 reflects an infinite amount of inter-

leaver blocks. In this case the modem will nev-
er return to acquisition as long as a valid
modem signal is decoded.
For transmission this means, that the modem

will never terminate a transmission as long as
enough user data is available.
Operation with a specified number of input

data blocks may be used by an external ARQ
protocol where the size of the ARQ packet is
fixed, or occasionally changed to accommo-
date changing propagation conditions.
The user has to make sure identical mes-

sage block length settings exist within one
network. If changes are needed, the data
protocol above the HF modem has to take
care of this.
In connection with the use of a fixed maximum

message block length, a deactivated message
protocol (EOM) can be used to increase
throughput.
This parameter is adjustable for HF Modem

type STANAG 4539 only.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Modem Tx Level Control Blocks
4.5.4.5 Changing the Modem Tx Level Control Blocks
Editor 1. Press 'TLC Blocks' softkey.

2. Enter desired Tx modem level control
blocks.
Possible values:
for S4539: 1 to 7
By means of this function the operator can

change the number of modem Tx level control
blocks used at the beginning of a transmis-
sion. Those additional data probes in front of a
transmission enable the radio TLC (transmitter
level control) as well as the radio and modem
AGC (automatic gain control) to settle the sig-
nal level without disturbing payload data.
This parameter should be increased if the

used gain control attack time (e.g. from a third
party radio or modem supplier) is long. The
STANAG 4539 implementation in the Rohde
& Schwarz radio has been optimized, thus for
homogenous Rohde & Schwarz equipment a
value of 1 is recommended.


M3SR Series 4100 Switching the EOM Flag
4.5.4.6 Switching the EOM Flag
Toggle 1. Press softkey to toggle EOM sequence

on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
With this softkey, the transmission of an end of

message (EOM) flag can be enabled or dis-
abled.
The EOM sequence is used to signal the re-

ceiving HF Modem the end of the transmis-
sion.
By decoding EOM, the HF Modem will return

to acquisition immediately, to be ready for the
next transmission or reception.
The use of an EOM is recommended. Howev-

er in conjunction with the use of a fixed maxi-
mum message block length e.g. with an
external ARQ protocol, it can make sense to
deactivate EOM to increase the user data
throughput.

For STANAG 4285 and STANAG 4529 the
use of an EOM flag is mandatory and cannot
be disabled.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the HF Modem Waveform
4.5.4.7 Selecting the HF Modem Waveform
Listbox The following HF Modem waveforms are avail-

able in the listbox:
STANAG 4539
75 bps to12800 bps, AUTOBAUD capability,

best choice for external ARQ protocols, use
this setting for MIL-STD-188-110B, Section
5.3 and App. C and S4415 operation as well
MIL-STD-188-110B, App. F
9600 to 19200 bps, for High data rate ground-

wave links on clear channels, Independent
Sideband operation
STANAG 4285
75 to 3600 bps, best choice for BROADCAST

applications
STANAG 4529
Narrowband (1240 Hz) Maritime Shore-to-

Ship HF Traffic Waveform (75 bps to
1800 bps, best choice for bandwidth-limited
broadcast applications)
STANAG 5065
MSK, Rx only, 300 bps, for interoperation with

legacy equipment
STANAG 5065
FSK, Rx only, 75 bps, for interoperation with
legacy equipment
STANAG 4481 PSK
300 bps, for interoperation with legacy equip-

ment
STANAG 4481 FSK
50 bps to 600 bps, for interoperation with leg-

acy equipment
For modem operation in MIL-STD-188-110B

Section 5.3, App. C, S4415, please select
'4539' here and then the appropriate user data
rate in the HF Modem Operational menu.
For most severely degraded channels, the

'4539' waveform setting and a user data rate of
75 bps are the perfect choice.
*Those waveforms are not selectable directly,

but they are interoperable with
STANAG 4539. Therefore one should adjust
STANAG 4539 when communication with one
of these waveforms is intended.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the HF Modem Waveform
It is not possible to use the autobaud capa-

bility in combination with the synchronous
interface.
The waveforms according to STANAG 4529
and STANAG 4481 FSK allow to adjust the
subcarrier frequency for reception and trans-
mission within certain limits. Since the memory
for these settings is shared between several
waveforms, make sure to set the desired val-
ues in the operational menu before starting
communication with the STANAG 4529 or
STANAG 4481 FSK waveforms. All other
waveforms set the required frequencies auto-
matically.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Asynchronous Modem Operation Mode
4.5.4.8 Selecting the Asynchronous Modem Operation Mode
Listbox 1. Press 'Op Mode' softkey.

2. Select desired modem operation mode
from listbox.
3. Press 'ENT' to confirm. The new modem
operation mode is now effective.
Possible values:
• HiSp Async (high-speed asynchronous)

• standard asynchronous
By means of softkey Op Mode (Operation

Mode) the operator can adjust how the pay-
load will be formatted for the over the air trans-
mission.
The over-the-air payload data format is there-

fore not required to match the data format at
the asynchronous DTE (data terminal equip-
ment) interface. This sophisticated implemen-
tation enables the user to use asynchronous
DTE hardware like standard PCs and never-
theless increases the throughput by not trans-
mitting additional DTE start, stop or parity bits
over the air. Of course it is even possible to do
so for interoperability with legacy equipment.
There are two possible asynchronous opera-

tion modes, as follows:
Standard Asynchronous
The data format for the over the air payload

data is according to the adjusted data format
for the DTE interface (e.g. 8N1 = one start bit,
8 bit data, no parity, one stop bit).
This mode is useful for interoperability with

legacy modems, but reduces the total through-
put.
High-Speed Asynchronous
Additional start, parity and stop bits from the

DTE interface are stripped and not sent over
the air. Just the data bits from the DTE inter-
face are transmitted. This mode is more effi-
cient than Standard Asynchronous and is
interoperable with synchronously working leg-
acy modems.
This parameter is not adjustable when the

DTE interface is configured to work in syn-
chronous mode.

M3SR Series 4100 Link SW
4.6 Link SW
With Link SW option (LINK_SW) in modulation modes J2D+, J2D- and B7D, it is possible to
operate the radio in Link 11 and in Link Y mode.
To operate your radio in communication mode Link 11, proceed as follows:
1. Select a Fixed Frequency Preset Page (see sect. 3.3 Control and Monitoring of Radio
and Control Unit).
2. From Home menu navigate to Fixed Frequency Operational menu (see sect. 3.7.2 Fixed
Frequency Operational Menus).
3. Select modulation mode J2D+, J2D- or B7D according to your application (see
Figure 4.29).

M3SR Series 4100 Link SW
Figure 4.29 Menu FF OP 1/2 in Modulation Mode B7D and Link 11 (Option)
ICN-4D-G-231001-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
4. Press softkey 'DLM' (Data Link Mode).

5. Use the knob to select the Data Link Mode (DLM) according to your application in this
communication mode.
6. Press 'ENT' to confirm your selection. With this selection the receiver and transmitter fil-
ters and AGC / ALC settings are adjusted accordingly.
For J2D/ B7D operation without Link 11 and Link Y modems (if other external modems
are used), switch DLM mode off and use the 'Peak to Average' softkey in Fixed Fre-
quency Operational Page 2 to adjust the required transmitter automatic level control
(ALC) characteristic instead.

M3SR Series 4100 Secure Digital Voice
4.7 Secure Digital Voice
4.7.1 Basics of Secure Digital Voice
The Rohde & Schwarz Secure Digital Voice (SDV) communication mode allows encrypted
voice communication under highly degraded shortwave channel conditions.
Figure 4.30 Architecture of the SDV Communication Mode (Principle)
Fixed Frequency
Secure Digital Voice
MELPe
COMSEC
Internal Modem
ICN-4G-N-231003-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1
Figure 4.30 shows the priniciple of the architecture in SDV communication mode. The used
enhanced mixed excitation linear prediction voice encoder (MELPe) enables fair to good
speech quality by converting the human voice into a digital data stream. This data stream is
encrypted by the strong Rohde & Schwarz 256 bit COMSEC algorithm and transmitted by
the internal data modem with an optimized frame structure for SDV communication.
Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 - 01 4.145

M3SR Series 4100 Secure Digital Voice
The SDV communication mode was thoroughly designed to match nowadays user require-
ments as:
• Fair to Good Speech Quality

There are two possible vocoder modes (MELP2400 and MELP600) allowing fair to good
speech quality. The operator benefits from the possibility to choose the speech quality
according to actual channel conditions.
• Very Robust Real-time Voice Communication
Optimized data modem algorithms allow communication even in highly degraded HF
channels. The required cryptographic synchronization data for the COMSEC algorithm
is transmitted in a very robust manner. Therefore the risk of a false crypto synchroniza-
tion, often seen in legacy systems, is almost eliminated.
• Low Voice Delay
A sophisticated modem frame structure optimized for voice communication, together
with the built-in COMSEC mechanism, enables SDV to achieve unrivalled low voice de-
lays in the HF sector.
• Very Strong COMSEC Algorithm
SDV is secured by the very strong Rohde & Schwarz 256 bit build-in COMSEC algorithm
to protect information against interception.
• Automode Capability
It is not needed to know beforehand the current vocoder mode settings of the communi-
cation counterpart because it is self-identified during the transmission. The receiver au-
tomatically detects the mode and processes the voice data accordingly. The operator
benefits from less interaction.
• Fast Late Entry Capability
In cases where the beginning of the voice transmission was missed, e.g. due to wrong
frequency or very poor channel conditions, the SDV communication mode is able to syn-
chronize even to an ongoing transmission. Here again the optimized data modem frame
structure allows a fast modem and crypto synchronization.

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Menu Tree
4.7.2 SEC VOICE Menu Tree
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for SEC VOICE operation. The
Figure 4.31 Menu Tree: SEC VOICE
SEC VOICE Home
1611
Sec. Voice OP 1/1
1621
Sec. Voice Cfg 1/1
ICN-4D-G-231003-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Home Menu
4.7.3 SEC VOICE Home Menu
Figure 4.32 Home Menu: SEC VOICE (Rx Mode)
1 2
10
6 3
ICN-4D-G-231003-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Indication : “Ciphered Communication“

2 Smart Frequency Editor (SFE) active
3 Status
4 Signal to Noise Ratio of Received Signal
6 Selected Key
7 Display of Rx Vocoder Mode
8 Selected Tx Vocoder Mode

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Home Menu
Figure 4.33 Home Menu: SEC VOICE (Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231003-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1

From the home menu, the Rx and Tx frequencies can be changed by using the Smart Fre-
quency Editor (SFE) feature. When SFE is enabled (see Control Unit Maintenance), both fre-
quencies can be set using the knob. For further details see description of Smart Frequency
Editor.

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Operational Menu
4.7.4 SEC VOICE Operational Menu
Figure 4.34 Menu1611: Sec. Voice OP 1/1
ICN-4D-J-231003-R-D0894-00005-A-01-1
4.7.4.1 Changing the Frequency for SDV Communication
Rx and Tx frequencies can be changed either by using the knob, if the Smart Frequency Ed-
itor (SFE) is enabled, or by means of the softkey 'FREQ'.
These procedures are explained in

sect. 3.5 Control Unit Maintenance and
sect. 3.7.2.15 Changing the Frequency.
4.7.4.2 Changing the Power Level for SDV Communication
By means of softkey 'Power' the operator can change the output power level.
This procedure is described insect. 3.7.2.21 Selecting the Power Level.

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Operational Menu
4.7.4.3 Switching the VOX Signal Source for SDV Communication
By means of softkey 'VOX' the operator can switch the Voice-operated Transmission (VOX)
signal source.
This procedure is described insect. 3.7.2.16 Switching the VOX Signal Source.
4.7.4.4 Tuning the Antenna
By means of softkey 'ATU Tune' the operator can tune the antenna. After some seconds, the
current antenna impedance is matched to the radio frequency. The operator needs to repeat
this operation in case of changing the antenna, the antenna position or the frequency. The
tune result for this frequency is stored in the radio; it is not needed to retune when returning
to this frequency or after switching the radio on again.
This procedure is explained in sect. 3.7.2.22 Starting ATU Tuning.
The tune output power does not depend on the output power setting. For tuning the
antenna a fixed output power is used to measure the current antenna impedance and
after tuning, the output power is switched back to the value configured by the user.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the SDV Vocoder Mode
4.7.4.5 Changing the SDV Vocoder Mode
By means of softkey 'VOC TX' the operator can change the SDV communication mode for
transmission.
The receiver must not necessarily be adjusted to the same communication mode due
to automode capability of SDV.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'VOC TX' .

2. Select the Tx Vocoder type from listbox.
The selected vocoder type is displayed in the

softkey.
Possible values:
• MELP2400 (default)
Good Speech quality for good channel
conditions.
• MELP600
Fair Speech quality for highly degraded
channel conditions.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Active COMSEC Key for SDV Communication
4.7.4.6 Selecting the Active COMSEC Key for SDV Communication
By means of softkey 'Key' the operator can select the active COMSEC key, which shall be
used for SDV communication.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Key' .

2. Select the key to be used for SDV commu-
nication from listbox.
The selected key is displayed in the key.

M3SR Series 4100 SEC VOICE Configuration Menus
4.7.5 SEC VOICE Configuration Menus
Figure 4.35 Menu 1621: Sec. Voice Cfg 1/1
ICN-4D-J-231003-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1
4.7.5.1 Changing the VOX Sensitivity for SDV Communication
By means of softkey 'VOX SENS' the operator can change the VOX (Voice-Operated Trans-
mission) sensitivity.
This procedure is described insect. 3.7.3.11 Changing the VOX Sensitivity.
4.7.5.2 Changing the VOX Holdtime for SDV Communication
By means of softkey 'VOX HANG' the operator can change the VOX holdtime.
This procedure is described insect. 3.7.3.10 Changing the VOX Holdtime.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User-defined COMSEC Key for SDV Communication
4.7.5.3 Editing a User-defined COMSEC Key for SDV Communication
By turning the knob, a key can be selected in the key list. Pressing the softkey Edit will open
an editor to enter the key value. When the editor is open the softkey changes its text to give
a hint that the entry shall be in hexadecimal numbers. The numbers 0 to 9 can be entered
through the keypad or by turning the knob and confirming each entry by pressing the “.” key.
The numbers A to F can only be entered using the knob and confirming each entry by press-
ing the “.” key.
Please note that for security reasons the given key can not be displayed again, once
it has been entered. Furthermore the key has to be selected as active COMSEC key
(see sect. 4.7.4.6 Selecting the Active COMSEC Key for SDV Communication) before
it is used for the SDV communication.
Voice communication will not be possible in case of using different keys at transmitter
and receiver. Please note that there is no indication if the keys are different. The re-
ceived voice is not intelligible in this case.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User-defined COMSEC Key for SDV Communication
1. Select the key to be edited by turning the

knob
2. When the desired key is highlighted, press

the softkey 'Edit'.
Now the key editor is opened and the 'Edit'

softkey changes its text to show the key entry
format.
The selected key is displayed in the key.
3. Enter the key in hexadecimal format (0 to 9,

A to F) using the decimal keypad and/or the
knob.
At least 8 digits are required for a valid key.

The editor will show this by displaying charac-
ters greyed out until at least the required num-
ber has been entered.
4. Move to next digit by pressing the “.” key.
To correct an entry repeatedly press “.” key

until cursor is at desired position. Now enter
the correct number.
5. Confirm entry by pressing “ENT” key. For

security reasons the key cannot be seen any-
more from now on.

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H
4.8 SECOM-H
4.8.1 Basics of SECOM-H
A SECOM-H net is a system for voice and data communication in the HF range with protec-
tion by COMSEC (communication security) and TRANSEC (transmission security) proce-
dures. It is configurable in many parameters. The configuration and net management for a
SECOM-H communication system must be supported by a radio net management system
(R&S RNMS3000).
The features of the SECOM-H system are grouped as follows:
• Configuration features
• Security features
• Synchronization features
• Communication features
4.8.1.1 SECOM-H Net
A SECOM-H net is a logical structure for setting up a communication network. It consists of

a set of radios with assigned:
• Hopsets
• Net address and radio addresses
• Necessary radio / SECOM-H parameters
• Keys for TRANSEC and COMSEC
All radios operating in one SECOM-H net must have the same
• Time and date
• Hopset (frequencies for TRANSEC)
• Keyset (COMSEC and TRANSEC keys)
• Net address (unique address of each SECOM-H net)

4.8.1.2 COMSEC and TRANSEC
Communication security (COMSEC) for user and technical data is provided by ciphering be-
fore transmission and deciphering after reception:
• Ciphered voice/data transmission

• Digital voice with
- AMBE (Advanced Multi-Band Excitation) vocoder, at 2400 bit/s
- MELP (Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction) vocoder at 2400 and 600 bits/s
- MMBE (Modified Multi-Band Excitation) vocoder at 2400 and 1200 bits/s
A COMSEC key used for ciphering/deciphering the transmitted data is valid for a certain pe-
riod of time, e.g. one day.
Transmission security (TRANSEC) is provided by frequency hopping. The frequency range

is from 1.5 MHz to 29.999990 MHz. The hopping frequencies are stored in so-called
hopsets. The frequency to be used for a hop is selected pseudo-randomly by a crypto algo-
rithm, controlled by the TRANSEC key, the time, the link type and the addresses of the par-
ticipating units.
4.8.1.3 Time Synchronization
To ensure secure communication, all participating radios need to be adjusted to the same
time. This can be achieved by using GPS as time source or by manual synchronization to a
(Primary) Time Reference Unit ((P)TRU). The procedure for time synchronization of a radio
to the TRU is called Time Acquisition (TAQ). The time difference between a requesting unit
and the TRU must not be greater than five days for successful Time Acquisition. There must
not be more than one TRU in a net at any time. If the pre-configured TRU fails, any other
radio of the net can take over the TRU role when it is configured as TRU manually. Every net
uses its own net time. Time synchronization must be performed separately in every net.
R&S M3TR: If all radios in a SECOM-H net use GPS as time source, no TRU is required.
R&S EK4100 Systems can not be synchronized with the net by means of a TAQ call,
because it can not transmit the request.

For technical reasons, it is not possible to maintain synchronization forever. The R&S M3TR
Series provides functions for automatic re-synchronization:
• GPS as time source: Whenever synchronization is lost, the radio will re-synchronize to
the net by updating its time with the current GPS time. No further user interaction is re-
quired.
• Time Beacon (TB): The radio automatically takes care of new synchronization before
synchronization is lost. If the TB function is not active, it may be required to perform a
TAQ from time to time. This is indicated by the NSYN (not synchronized) message at the
display. The Time Beacon function does not replace the need for an initial TAQ. More-
over, when switching TB functionality OFF and ON again, a new TAQ has to be per-
formed, i.e. an initial TAQ is necessary every time TB functionality is enabled.
When the Time Beacon is active, the radio will transmit data automatically and without
user interaction. Turn off the Time Beacon to avoid this.
When the radio is turned off, net time can only be updated with reduced accuracy. Manual
TAQ may be necessary even if Time Beacon is active.
4.8.1.4 Linking
SECOM-H is a link-oriented communication system, using physical and logical links.
A physical link exists if at least two radios are able and prepared to receive one another. This
means the participating units must be synchronized. So in general a link setup is required to
establish a link. During this link setup SECOM-H provides for synchronization with the other
participating units and transmits address and service information.
A logical link exists if one participating unit is transmitting and one or more other participating
units are receiving this communication.
Simultaneous transmission and reception is not supported by SECOM-H.

SECOM-H supports two types of links:
• Point-to-Point link (PtP):

Exactly 2 radios can communicate. The Station (STN) setting determines the radio which
is called.
• Point-to-Multipoint link (PtM):
The Group (GRP) setting determines the group of radios which is called. The
BROADCAST_MP setting is a special group call, because it addresses all radios in a net.
During a broadcast call, LTE is enabled. LTE offers the chance to join a broadcast call
even if the initial link setup was missed or to re-connect to the link if the connection was
lost.
It is always possible to receive all link types. Therefore, the radio is temporarily
switched to the link type of the incoming call. It is necessary to select the destination
address manually if a specific net member shall be addressed.
4.8.1.5 Free Hopset Search
SECOM-H provides the Free Hopset Search (FHS) feature to improve communication qual-
ity for Point-to-Point links with difficult environmental conditions like fading channels or jam-
ming. Therefore, connection quality for all channels in a hopset (max. 20) is analyzed and
results in an Advanced Hopset (AHS) which contains only channels that provide suitable
quality for the selected communication mode. Further, the number of channels in an AHS can
be constrained (min/max) to guarantee TRANSEC. If FHS has found a sufficient number of
channels, the AHS is automatically enabled for subsequent communication. If no channel of
the hopset provides decent quality, only the best channel is picked for communication at the
cost of transmission security (reduced hopset). As soon as another destination address is
selected or a R&S RNMS3000 configurable time has expired, the AHS is deactivated.
R&S EK4100 Systems cannot improve communication quality by means of FHS.

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Menu Tree
4.8.2 SECOM-H Menu Tree
The menu tree gives an overview of all the menus available for SECOM-H operation. The

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Menu Tree
Figure 4.36 Menu Tree: SECOM-H
SECOM-H Home
1311
SECOMH OP 1/1
1321 1322
SECOMH CFG 1/2 SECOMH CFG 2/2
1341 1342
Msg Service 1/2 Msg Service 2/2
1351
GPS OP
1331 1332
IPoA CFG 1/2 IPoA CFG 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231072-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Home Menu
4.8.3 SECOM-H Home Menu
After selecting the SECOM-H operation mode the radio comes up with the SECOM-H Preset
Page. In the central area a current set of main SECOM-H settings and status parameters is
displayed.
Figure 4.37 Home Menu: SECOM-H (Rx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Current Net Name

2 Current Keyset
3 Current Hopset
4 Current Call To
5 Current Net
6 Current Call From
7 Call State
8 Current Receive Level

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Home Menu
Figure 4.38 Home Menu: SECOM-H (Tx Mode)
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1


M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Operational Menu
4.8.3.1 SECOM-H Operational Menu
The central area of the operational menus is the same as that in the Home menu.
Figure 4.39 Menu1311: SECOMH OP 1/1

M3SR Series 4100 Addressing Different Link Types
4.8.3.2 Addressing Different Link Types
The address system of SECOM-H supports two types of links:
• Station: Link to one particular station (Rohde & Schwarz device) of the network
• Group: Link to a group of radios (Rohde & Schwarz device) of the network
These different addressing possibilities are described below. Please note that for use within
a network all participating units, radios, groups and nets need to be configured by using the
R&S RNMS3000 (radio network management system) software.
Addressing a Station
By means of softkey 'Station Address' the operator can address a single radio.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Station Address' .

2. Select desired station address to call on
The currently selected station is displayed in from listbox.
the central area. 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
The station name is selected for addressing.
Addressing a Group
By means of softkey 'Group Address' the operator can address a group of radios.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Group Address' to open list-

box.
The currently selected group is displayed in 2. Select desired group address to call on.
the central area. 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
The listbox is closed. The group name is se-
lected for addressing.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Service Mode
4.8.3.3 Selecting the Service Mode
By means of softkey 'Service' the operator can select voice or data transmission.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Service'.

2. Select desired service from listbox.
The new service is now effective.
Possible values:
• INT_VOCODER (Internal Vocoder)
• DATA_TERM 1 (DT1, Data Terminal 1)
• IP_DATA
• IP_REBRO
• VOICE_O_DATA
• VOICE_O_IPD
The 'Service' function is used to select the

transmission mode (Voice or Data).
INT VOCODER
Transmission is started by initiating any PTT

key line.
DATA_TERM_1
The radio automatically changes to Tx mode

as soon as data to be transmitted is detected
at the RS232 interface.
IP_DATA
The radio automatically changes to Tx mode

as soon as IP data is detected at one of the IP
interfaces (Ethernet or PPP (point-to-point
protocol) via serial interface). With this mode it
is possible to connect two wired IP networks
via an air IP net.
IP_REBRO
This service is used only for relay and rebroad-

cast stations. This way, it is possible to con-
nect waveform nets using the Voice over IP
Data service. See sect. 5.3.2.2 Rebroadcast /
Relay Mode for more details.
VOICE_O_DATA
Voice transmission can be initiated by any

PTT key line. Data transmission is started
when data is detected at the RS232 interface
(X5, DATA socket) if no voice PTT is active.
If a PTT signal is activated during data trans-

mission, the data link is interrupted and a voice
link is established to the selected station(s).
Voice has priority over data. The called sta-
tion(s) automatically detects the service type
and reacts adequately.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Service Mode
VOICE_O_IPD
Voice transmission can be initiated by any

PTT key line. Data transmission is started
when IP data is detected at one of the IP inter-
faces (Ethernet or PPP via serial interface) if
no voice PTT is active.
If a PTT signal is activated during data trans-

mission, the data link is interrupted and a voice
link is established to the selected station(s).
Voice has priority over data. The called sta-
tion(s) automatically detects the service type
and reacts adequately.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a Free Hopset Search
4.8.3.4 Initiating a Free Hopset Search
By means of softkey 'FHS Start' the operator can initiate a Free Hopset Search if it is enabled
(see sect. 4.8.4.3 Switching the Free Hopset Search Mode On or Off) and a single station is
addressed.
Activate 1. Press softkey 'FHS Start'.
The call state displayed in the central area of

the display shows "FHS RUNNING".
Once running, a FHS can not be aborted.
If FHS has finished, the call state changes to

"FHS SUCCESS" and the AHS (see
sect. 4.8.3.5 Switching the Advanced Hopset
On or Off) is enabled
or
the call state changes to "FHS FAILED".

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Advanced Hopset On or Off
4.8.3.5 Switching the Advanced Hopset On or Off
By means of softkey 'AHS' (Advanced Hopset) the operator can switch the advanced hopset
function on and off if a previously FHS has succeeded.
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'AHS' to toggle ad-

vanced hopset function on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF
As long as the AHS is active, it is only pos-

sible to communicate with the respective
partner station that was addressed when
the FHS (see sect. 4.8.3.4 Initiating a Free
Hopset Search) was performed.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Search Pattern Time
4.8.3.6 Selecting the Search Pattern Time
By means of softkey 'SP' (search pattern) the operator can change the search pattern time.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'SP'.

2. Select desired search pattern time from
listbox.
Possible values:
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP6, SP48, SP192
Search Pattern 1 (SP1) reduces the time re-

quired for link setup so that the user can
start talking sooner or data transmission
can begin sooner. SP1 should be selected
if synchronization within the SECOM-H net
is good, i.e. if the last time acquisition took
place not too long ago.
Late Traffic Entry (LTE) is only supported up to
Search Pattern 3.
The greater the search pattern, i.e. the tolera-

ble deviation, the longer the time required for
link setup.
Net parameter
Table 4.7 Dependency of Tolerable Deviation on Selected Search Pattern
Search Pattern Tolerable Deviation
SP1 37 ms
SP2 93 ms
SP3 149 ms
SP6 318 ms
SP16 880 ms
SP48 2680 ms
SP192 10780 ms

M3SR Series 4100 Terminating a Link
4.8.3.7 Terminating a Link
By means of softkey 'Terminate Link' the operator can terminate the running link.
Activate 1. Press 'Terminate Link' softkey.
When the linked stations have finished com-

municating, it is necessary to terminate the link
so that the stations can return to availability.
The link can be terminated in two ways:
• Manually by pressing softkey 'Terminate

Link'.
• Automatically through a non-activity time-
out of approximately 10 seconds.
In a voice link the link is terminated automati-
cally and completely if the opposite communi-
cation (transmit direction) partner stops
transmission by releasing PTT. In a data link
the link is terminated automatically and com-
pletely if the data from the opposite communi-
cation (transmit direction) partner is
completely transferred.
The 'Terminate' softkey (while there is an ac-

tive link) terminates the link
• for a very short time in transmit direction -

a new LSU (link setup) is transmitted
• for approx. one minute in receive direction
- LTE (late traffic entry) is possible after
one minute.



systems:
10 mW - 10 W - 20 W - 50 W - 100 W - 150 W

systems:
10 mW - 20 W - 50 W – 100 W – 250 W –
500 W (when ordered with CE mark, limited to
250 W for f < 4 MHz)

systems:
10 mW – 50 W - 100 W – 250 W – 500 W –


which may extend the communication cover-
age.
The current output power during transmission

is shown in the RF Level bar graph in the cen-
tral area of the MMI.
10 mW denotes the output power of the

frontend. If an amplifier is connected to the
radio, there will be no RF power at the out-
put of this amplifier in the setting 10 mW.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating Time Acquisition
4.8.3.9 Initiating Time Acquisition
R&S EK4100 Systems can not be synchronized with the net by means of a TAQ call,
because the request can not be transmitted. Instead, it is required to adjust the SEC-
OM-H time of the receiver according to table 'Dependency of Tolerable Deviation on
Selected Search Pattern (see sect. 4.8.3.6 Selecting the Search Pattern Time)'. A suit-
able search pattern (usually SP192) has to be selected at the receiver and one
NETSYNC or time reference unit. When performing a link setup from that unit to the
receiver, it will be synchronized automatically. The search pattern can be set to a
smaller value after the synchronization was successful.
By means of softkey 'Time ACQ' (time acquisition) the operator can start net time synchro-
nization.
Activate 1. Press softkey 'Time ACQ Call' to initiate

the time acquisition.
Example of net time synchronization
Normally the net time will be adjusted auto-
Press softkey 'Time ACQ Call' to initiate time matically as soon as a communication is tak-
acquisition. ing place. Therefore manual net time
adjustment as described above will only have
to be performed in the case that communica-
tion was interrupted for quite a time.
When pressing PTT while the TRU (time

During acquisition the central area shows: reference unit) is answering, the entire ac-
quisition process is aborted.
If acquisition succeeded, the following mes-

sage is displayed:
If acquisition failed, the following message is

displayed:

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the VOX Signal Source
4.8.3.10 Switching the VOX Signal Source
Listbox 1. Press 'VOX' softkey.

Possible values:
OFF - LINE - VOICE
In VOX (voice-operated transmission), the ra-

the audio or line interface. VOX is only avail-
able in voice communication, i.e. in modulation
modes +/-J3E, A3E and F3E.
If VOX is set to VOICE, the operator can

switch to transmit mode by simply talking into
the microphone connected at the front panel,
and when he stops talking the radio automati-
cally returns to receive mode.
If VOX set to LINE, the transmit mode is acti-
vated as soon as a voice signal at the USB line
input on X26 is detected.
For VOX operation in SECOM-H a certain

reaction delay is to be observed. Wait with
transmission until a short sequence of
beeps is heard. Otherwise no communica-
tion will take place.

M3SR Series 4100 Starting ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset
4.8.3.11 Starting ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset
By means of softkey 'ATU Learn' the operator can start ATU learning for a SECOM-H hopset.
This function is only available with a connected antenna tuning unit.
Activate Starting ATU Learning
Start the ATU tuning process in the selected 1. Press 'ATU Learn' softkey to start the
frequency range. learning process.
The ATU starts learning on the currently se-

lected SECOM-H hopset.
During learning the following status is dis-
played:
The tuning process can be aborted any

time by pressing the 'ESC/CLR' button.
If learning was successful, the following status By using the 'ATU learn' function ATU settings
is displayed: are stored in a selectable memory bank. In the
learning procedure all SECOM-H channels of
the hopset are set. In each case the antenna
tuning unit will start tuning anew.
If learning is aborted, the following status is

displayed:

M3SR Series 4100 Starting ATU Learning for SECOM-H Hopset
If learning failed, the following status is dis-

played:
or

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting a Hopset
4.8.3.12 Selecting a Hopset
By means of softkey 'Hopset' the operator can select a hopset.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Hopset' .

2. Select desired hopset from listbox.
The currently used hopset is displayed in the 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
central area.
The new hopset is now effective.
In the hopset frequency ranges are defined for

frequency hopping.
Hopsets have to be configured using the R&S

RNMS3000. User Hopsets (see
sect. 4.8.4.12 Editing a User Hopset) are con-
figured using the MMI
The user hopsets are freely configurable by
the user of the radio (see also
sect. Defining a New Hopset).

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting a Keyset
4.8.3.13 Selecting a Keyset
By means of softkey 'Keyset' the operator can select a keyset.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Keyset'.

2. Select desired keyset from listbox.
The currently used keyset is displayed in the The new keyset is now effective.
central area.

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Configuration Menus
4.8.4 SECOM-H Configuration Menus
In the central area of the configuration menu 1/2 the currently set configuration parameters
are displayed.
Figure 4.40 Menu 1321: SECOMH CFG 1/2
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00009-A-01-1
1 Current Time Source, SECOM-H Time and Date

2 Current Selected Vocoder Type
3 Current Number of Channels in an Advanced Hopset
The configuration menu 1/2 offers various configuration possibilities.
In the central area of the configuration menu 2/2 you can select the User Hopset and User
Keyset folders. SECOM-H CFG 2/2 is a special editor to select/modify and delete user
hopsets and user keysets.

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Configuration Menus
Figure 4.41 Menu 1322: SECOMH CFG 2/2
1 2
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00006-A-01-1
1 Folder for User Hopset

2 Folder for User Keyset
The configuration menu 2/2 offers various configuration possibilities.
Please refer to sect. Editing a User Hopset Subband and

sect. 4.8.4.13 Editing a User Keyset for additional information.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Time Beacon Mode On or Off
4.8.4.1 Switching the Time Beacon Mode On or Off
If time beacon is enabled, the radio will go to Tx mode from time to time:
• Non-TRU radios automatically requests net synchronization from the TRU when neces-
sary.
• The TRU radio automatically transmits synchronization information when necessary or
requested.
If this is not desired, turn Time Beacon OFF.
Be sure to perform at least one TAQ manually after activation of time beacon function-
ality. Time beacon function will only work if it is enabled at least at the TRU. For opti-
mal performance, the TRU has to be operated in broadcast mode. Otherwise,
resynchronisation may be requested more often than actually necessary.
By means of softkey 'Time Beacon' the operator can switch the time beacon mode on and off.
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'Time Beacon' to toggle

time beacon mode on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF

M3SR Series 4100 Defining a Radio as a Time Reference Unit
4.8.4.2 Defining a Radio as a Time Reference Unit
By means of softkey 'TRU' (time reference unit) the operator can define the radio as time ref-
erence unit.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'TRU'.

2. Select 'None' or 'Primary' from listbox.
Possible values:
No, Primary
• As soon as time acquisition has been initi-

ated by radios, the radio defined as prima-
ry time reference unit (PTRU) provides the
other radios with the current net time.
• Only one radio is allowed to be primary
time reference unit.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Free Hopset Search Mode On or Off
4.8.4.3 Switching the Free Hopset Search Mode On or Off
If Free Hopset Search (FHS) is enabled, the radio offers FHS for PtP (Point-to-Point) links
and responds to a FHS when requested.
If FHS is successful, the resulting Advanced Hopset (AHS) is automatically enabled

for subsequent communication. This implies that communication on the default
hopset may only be possible after manually disabling the AHS.
By means of softkey 'FHS' the operator can switch the free hopset search mode on and off.
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'FHS' to toggle time bea-

con mode on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Number of Channels in an Advanced Hopset
4.8.4.4 Changing the Number of Channels in an Advanced Hopset
By means of softkeys 'Min. FHS Freq.' or 'Max. FHS Freq.' the operator can change the num-
ber of channels in an advanced hopset.
Editor 1. Press softkey 'Min. FHS Freq.' or 'Max.

FHS Freq.'.
In the central area the currently active value is 2. Change value.
Possible values:
1 to 20
• max. possible value is depending on the

selected hopset and the selected max.
number of frequencies in an AHS.
• min. possible value is depending on the
selected min. number of frequencies in an
AHS.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Waveform
4.8.4.5 Selecting the Waveform
By means of softkey 'WF' (waveform) the operator can change the waveform.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'waveform' .

2. Select desired waveform from listbox.
3. Press 'ENT 'to confirm.
Possible values:
WF1, WF2, WF3, WF5

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission
4.8.4.6 Selecting the Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission
By means of softkey 'Datarate' the operator can change the data rate for SECOM-H trans-
mission.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Datarate'.

2. Select desired data rate from listbox.
Possible values.
WF1: 75, 150, 300, 600 bps
WF2: 300, 600, 1200 bps
WF3: 1200 bps
WF5: 1200, 2400 bps
see also dependency Table 4.8

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Data Rate for SECOM-H Transmission
Table 4.8 Dependency of Waveform/Air Data Rates on Data Rates/Modes of Data Term 1
Transmission mode for Selected data rate for Possible waveforms Possible air data rates
RS232 (DT1) RS232 (DT1)
Synchronous 2400 bit/s WF5
Synchronous 1200 bit/s WF5 1200 bit/s (fix)
WF2 1200 bit/s (fix)
Asynchronous > 2400 bit/s WF5 2400 bit/s
1200 bit/s
WF3 1200 bit/s
WF2 1200 bit/s
600 bit/s
300 bit/s
WF1 600 bit/s
300 bit/s
150 bit/s
75 bit/s
Asynchronous 2400 bit/s WF5 1200 bit/s
WF3 1200 bit/s
WF2 1200 bit/s
600 bit/s
300 bit/s
WF1 600 bit/s
300 bit/s
150 bit/s
75 bit/s
Asynchronous 1200 bit/s WF2 600 bit/s
300 bit/s
WF1 600 bit/s
300 bit/s
150 bit/s
75 bit/s

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Interleaving Length
4.8.4.7 Selecting the Interleaving Length
By means of softkey 'INTLV' (interleaver) the operator can change the interleaver length.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'INTLV'.

2. Select desired interleaver length from list-
box.
Possible values:
NO, SHT (short), MDL, (middle) LNG (long)
Through the interleaver function, the data with-

in the data block are rearranged. The extent of
rearrangement is defined by the time factor
short, middle or long. Rearrangement im-
proves the error correction capability.

By means of softkey 'ATU Bypass' the operator can bypass the ATU. This results in a longer
life cycle of the ATU relays, but will degrade reception performance.
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'ATU Bypass' to toggle

bypass function on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF

M3SR Series 4100 Configuring the Vocoder
4.8.4.9 Configuring the Vocoder
By means of softkey 'VOC' (vocoder) the operator can select the mode for data transmission
with INT VOCODER being selected as port to be configured (see
sect. 4.8.3.3 Selecting the Service Mode).
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Internal Vocoder'.

2. Select desired vocoder from listbox.
The currently used vocoder is displayed in the 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
central area.
Possible values:
MELP 600
MMBE 1k2
MELP 2k4
MMBE 2k4
AMBE 2k4
Default value:
MMBE 1k2
• The MMBE (Mixed Multiband Excitation –

Linear Predictive Coding) vocoder with
FEC (Forward Error Correction) is used in
SECOM-H mode and provides a code rate
2400 bit/s.
• The MELP (Mixed Excitation Linear Pre-
diction) vocoder is used in SECOM-H
mode and provides code rates of 600 bit/s
and 2400 bit/s.
• The AMBE (Advanced Multiband Excita-
tion) vocoder is used in SECOM-H mode
and provides code rates of 2400 bit/s.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the SECOM-H Date and Time
4.8.4.10 Changing the SECOM-H Date and Time
By means of softkey 'Date Time' the operator can change the R&S SECOM-H net date and
time.
Example for entering date 2006.04.15 and 1. Press softkey 'Date Time' to open listbox.
time 12:30:00 2. Enter valid date and/or time.
Press 'Date Time' softkey.
Enter valid date either with numeric keypad or/

and with knob.
When time and date are correct, press 'ENT' to

confirm.
The currently set date and time are also dis-

played in the central area:
You can skip a value for entering by press-
ing .

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Time Source
4.8.4.11 Selecting the Time Source
By means of softkey 'Time Source' the operator can select the time source.
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'Time Source'.

2. Select desired Time Source from listbox.
The currently used time source is displayed in 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
the central area.
Possible values:
• RTC (real-time clock)

• GPS (global positioning system)

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User Hopset
4.8.4.12 Editing a User Hopset
SECOM-H Configuration menu 2/2 provides a folder User Hopset to configure user-defined
hopsets (see Figure 4.42):
Figure 4.42 Hopset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu
ICN-4D-F-231021-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1
A user hopset, which may consist of several subbands and single frequencies, can be edited
in several ways. Frequencies can be inserted, edited or deleted, or a completely new hopset
may be defined. The following applies to all procedures:

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User Hopset
When editing the currently active user hopset, the changes will take effect immediate-
ly. Otherwise the new settings will take effect only when the relevant user hopset is
selected.
The hopset range is from 1.5 MHz to 29.975 MHz. The frequency spacing in a hopset is con-
figurable via R&S RNMS3000, with a default value of 25 kHz and a minimum of 10 Hz. Via
the MMI the frequency spacing in a hopset is fixed to 5 kHz and if the operator tries to insert
a hopset subband with a total frequency spacing different from a multiple of 5 kHz, the radio
will adapt the higher frequency automatically.
This frequency band must not overlap already existing frequency bands. All radios in a
SECOM-H network must have equal user hopsets selected to communicate.
To display the current frequency bands of a user hopset, simply select the desired user
hopset name and press the 'Edit' softkey.
Example (see Figure 4.43):
Figure 4.43 Keyset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00012-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Defining a New Hopset
Defining a New Hopset
To define a new hopset, select the required hopset, delete any subbands and single frequen-
cies, which may be already be contained (see sect. Deleting a User Hopset Subband) and
enter the new frequencies (see sect. Inserting a User Hopset Subband).

M3SR Series 4100 Inserting a User Hopset Subband
Inserting a User Hopset Subband
By means of softkey 'Insert' the operator can insert a user hopset subband.
Example for adding a new hopset band with 1. Press softkey 'Insert' to open hopset fre-
the range of 2000 kHz up to 5000 kHz quency editor.
2. Edit desired lower hopset band frequency.
Start from band menu of the desired user 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
hopset. 4. Edit desired higher hopset band frequen-
cy.
6. To complete the insertion press the 'Save'
softkey.
The insertion is now complete.
The frequency spacing is 5 kHz (via MMI).
If the operator tries to insert a hopset sub-

band with a total frequency spacing differ-
ent from a multiple of 5 kHz, the radio will
adapt the higher frequency automatically
Press 'Insert' to change to frequency editor. after saving the changes.
The frequency editor for Low Frequency will

open.
Enter lower frequency of new subband.

Press 'ENT' after lower frequency is selected.
Enter upper frequency of new subband.
Press 'ENT' to confirm upper frequency. The

new hopset band is now defined.

To complete insertion of new user-defined

hopset press 'Save' softkey to store the en-
tered data.
If you leave the editor for example with the

'MENU HOME' button, you will be asked if
you would like to store the current chang-
es.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User Hopset Subband
Editing a User Hopset Subband
By means of the softkey 'Edit' the operator can modify a user hopset subband.
Example for modifying a current hopset band Select with the knob the hopset subband to be
with the range of 3000 kHz up to 6000 kHz edited.
Start from band menu of the desired user 1. Press softkey 'Edit' to open hopset fre-
hopset. quency editor.
2. Modify the lower hopset band frequency.
4. Modify the upper hopset band frequency.
6. To complete the insertion press the 'Save'
softkey.
The modification is now complete.
The frequency spacing is 5 kHz (via MMI).
If the operator tries to configure a hopset

subband with a total frequency spacing dif-
Press 'Edit' to change to frequency editor. ferent from a multiple of 5 kHz, the radio
will adapt the higher frequency automati-
The frequency editor for Low Frequency will cally after saving the changes.
open.
Enter new lower frequency of subband.

Press 'ENT' after lower frequency is selected.
Enter new upper frequency of subband.
Press 'ENT' to confirm upper frequency. The

modified hopset band is now defined.


hopset press 'Save' softkey to store the en-
tered data.

es.

M3SR Series 4100 Deleting a User Hopset Subband
Deleting a User Hopset Subband
By means of softkey 'Delete' the operator can delete a user hopset subband.
Example for deleting a hopset band in the 1. Press softkey 'Edit' to open hopset fre-
range of 12001 kHz up to 12046 kHz quency editor.
2. Select hopset to be deleted.
Select hopset band which should be deleted. 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm
4. To complete the delete operation press
the 'Delete' softkey.
Press 'Delete' to remove hopset from list.
The previously selected hopset is now re-

moved from the list.

M3SR Series 4100 Deleting a User Hopset Subband
To complete delete operation press 'Save'

softkey to store the modification.

es.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing a User Keyset
4.8.4.13 Editing a User Keyset
SECOM-H Configuration menu 2/2 provides a folder User Keyset to configure user-defined
keys (see Figure 4.44):
Figure 4.44 Keyset Folder Main Menu in CFG 2/2 Menu
ICN-4D-G-231021-R-D0894-00012-A-01-1
To display the current keysets (TRANSEC and COMSEC keys), simply select the desired
keyset name and press the softkey:
By means of the 'Edit' softkey the operator can modify the currently selected user keyset.

Example for entering the user keyset with the 1. Press softkey 'Edit' to open keyset editor.
new COMSEC key 1234ABCDEF and 2. Enter desired COMSEC key.
TRANSEC key 12345679A0B 3. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
4. Enter desired TRANSEC key .
Start from User Keyset folder. Select desired 5. Press 'ENT' to confirm.
user keyset to be edited. 6. To complete the insertion press the 'Save'
softkey.
The key must contain between 8 and 32

characters.
For the COMSEC and TRANSEC keys any al-

phanumerical characters are allowed.
• letters 'A' to 'Z' and 'a' to 'z'

Press 'Edit' to change to COMSEC/TRANSEC • numerals '1' to '0'
editor. • characters, for example: !, ", #, $, %
The COMSEC key editor will open.
Enter new COMSEC key.

Press 'ENT' after COMSEC key has been

completely entered.

knob.
Enter new TRANSEC key.
When editing the currently active user key-

set, the changes will take effect immediate-
ly. Otherwise the new settings will take
effect only when the relevant user keyset is
selected.

knob.
Press 'ENT' to confirm TRANSEC key. The

keyset is now defined.


keyset, press 'Save' softkey to store the en-
tered data.

es.

M3SR Series 4100 Further Settings are Relevant for SECOM-H Operation
4.8.5 Further Settings are Relevant for SECOM-H Operation
Further settings are relevant for SECOM-H operation:
Serial interface (DT1) settings:
• Data baud rate

• Data flow
• Data parameters
Refer to sect. 3.4.8 Menu Radio MTC 3/7 (3003)

M3SR Series 4100 Further Settings are Relevant for SECOM-H Operation

M3SR Series 4100 Services
5 Services
5.1 Introduction
This documentation gives information about the optional services provided by the optional
software:
• sect. 5.2 GPS Reporting

• sect. 5.3 IP over Air (IPoA)
• sect. 5.4 Message Service
• sect. 5.5 Voice over IP (VoIP)

M3SR Series 4100 GPS Reporting
5.2 GPS Reporting
5.2.1 Basics of GPS Reporting
GPS position information from mobile forces being equipped with either R&S M3TR Tactical
radios and / or R&S M3SR Series 4100 radios. The following figure shows an example of a
GPS reporting system using tactical radios (R&S MR300xH Manpack Transceivers) and
R&S XK4115A Transceivers.

Figure 5.1 GPS Reporting System
ICN-4G-N-231052-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1

1 R&S MR300xH_2 equipped with R&S HV3003 and R&S HV3004 acting as GPS provider
2 R&S MR300xH_3 equipped with R&S HV3003 and R&S HV3004 acting as GPS provider
3 SECOM-H network transmitting GPS data and control signals
4 R&S MR300xH_1 equipped with R&S HV3003 and R&S HV3004 acting as GPS controller
5 GPS data and control signals via REMOTE
6 GPS position display:
M3TR_MP1
M3TR_MP2
M3TR_MP3
M3SR_1
M3SR_2
7 R&S XK4115_1 acting as GPS provider
8 R&S XK4115_2 acting as GPS provider
In order to participate in GPS reporting, these radios must be equipped with a GPS hardware
receiver and dedicated over-the-air GPS transmission software. GPS transmission is sup-
ported by SECOM-H, SECOM-P and SECOM-V waveforms. In addition GPS transmission
is also supported by ALE-3G for Link Mode xDL. As a general requirement, a radio needs to
be synchronous with its waveform-specific network in order to be able to receive or transmit
GPS information.
SECOM-H x x
SECOM-P x
SECOM-V x
ALE-3G / xDL x x
The radio shall have clear satellite visibility in order to be able to retrieve its current GPS po-
sition and GPS timing information. If GPS reception is temporarily lost or satellite visibility is
limited, empty GPS positioning information is transmitted. Since the GPS time signal is re-
quired for synchronization of the system, scheduled transmissions (see sect. 5.2.1.2 Types
of GPS Transmission) are not supported if the GPS time signal has never been received (see
also sect. 5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Fea-
tures).
Participation in GPS reporting must furthermore be enabled in the network / mission config-
uration dialog of R&S RNMS3000. The functionality of R&S RNMS3000 is not in the scope
of this documentation (see the relevant R&S RNMS3000 Documentation).
GPS information and control is usually broadcast to all GPS participants (except when using
dedicated point-to-point addressing). Received GPS position information is stored within the
radio and can be accessed via its MMI (Man-Machine Interface) and REMOTE control inter-
faces. An external PC-based application may be used for accessing / displaying or further
processing the stored GPS information and to control / configure the GPS reporting system.
The functionality of this application is not in the scope of this documentation.

R&S MR3000P requires an external R&S HV3031 GPS Receiver for the GPS reporting sys-
tem to function. The R&S MR300xH/U and R&S M3SR Series 4100 radios have an internal
GPS receiver chipset to be connected to the R&S HV3003 antenna.
The features of the GPS reporting system on the radio are grouped as follows:
• sect. 5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting

• sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission
• sect. 5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions
• sect. 5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features
• sect. 5.2.1.5 SECOM-H Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)
• sect. 5.2.1.6 ALE-3G Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)

M3SR Series 4100 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting
5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting
The role of a radio participating in GPS (Global Positioning System) reporting can be pre-
selected via R&S RNMS3000 or dynamically selected via MMI (Man-Machine Interface) /
REMOTE interfaces.
Provider
A GPS provider is a radio providing GPS positioning data to other GPS participants. It does
so by
• manually or automatically pushing its current GPS position information onto the network,
• responding to GPS control / configuration requests being received over the air from an-
other, dedicated radio GPS participant called GPS controller.
Controller
A GPS controller is a dedicated radio GPS participant being able to
• request (pull) GPS positioning information from other participants and

• control / configure the automatic GPS transmission of other participants.
The controller commands other GPS participants over the air by using the radio dedicated
GPS control commands. The transmission of these commands can be initiated manually via
the MMI or via the radio REMOTE interface by an external application.
There can be one or multiple GPS controllers in a waveform specific network. It is an orga-
nizational challenge to ensure that control requests of multiple controllers do not conflict.
Controller Acting as Provider
In order to ensure that the GPS positioning information of a controller radio remains “hidden”,
by default a controller does not respond to pull and control / configuration messages received
from another controller. Also, it does by default not take part in automatic GPS reporting (see
sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission). If a controller shall exceptionally support the
above actions, the mode "Controller Reports Position (CRP)", needs to be enabled. The CRP
state (enabled or disabled) can be pre-selected via R&S RNMS3000 or dynamically enabled
/ disabled via the MMI / REMOTE interfaces. When CRP is enabled, a controller also auto-
matically transmits its own GPS positioning information when pulling or configuring other
GPS participants.

M3SR Series 4100 Types of GPS Transmission
5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission
Pull Request and Response
A GPS (Global Positioning System) pull request is issued by a GPS controller in order to re-
quest the transmission of current GPS positioning information from other GPS participants.
Addressed providers and other controllers with CRP (Controller Reports Position) enabled
having received the request do respond by transmitting their current GPS position (if avail-
able). If an addressed GPS participant has currently no GPS satellite visibility, it will respond
by transmitting empty GPS positioning information. If a participant has never received the
GPS signal (required for scheduled transmissions), it will not respond to a standard (sched-
uled) pull request since in this case it can only support unscheduled / immediate pull actions
(see sect. 5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Fea-
tures and ”Immediate (Unscheduled) Transmission” on p. 5.9).
Push
Manual Push
GPS participants can manually push their current GPS position onto the network. A manual
push can be initiated via an MMI (Man-Machine Interface) pushbutton or via the REMOTE
interface (for radios only).
If a GPS participant has currently only limited or no GPS satellite visibility, it will push empty
GPS positioning information onto the network. If a GPS participant has never received the
GPS signal (required for scheduled transmissions), it can only support immediate push ac-
tions (see sect. 5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting
Features).
Received pull and push data are internally stored by the receiving radios (participating in
GPS reporting) in a list and can be accessed in different formats via the MMI and REMOTE
interfaces.
Automatic Push
Tactical radio GPS participants can automatically push their current GPS position onto the
network.
Periodic (Timer Initiated) Transmission of GPS Information
An auto push time interval [in seconds] can be pre-configured statically via R&S RNMS3000
or dynamically by receiving an Auto Push Configuration Request (APR) from a GPS control-
ler.
Selected / addressed provider radios and controller radios with CRP enabled start to period-
ically transmit their current GPS position using the configured time interval. For this to func-
tion, network and GPS time synchronization must have been received. The time interval can
only be set an integer multiple of the scheduling round time (see ”Standard (Scheduled)
Transmission” on p. 5.8).

If a GPS participant has currently only limited or no GPS satellite visibility, it will automatically
push empty GPS positioning information onto the network. If a participant has never received
the GPS signal (required for scheduled transmissions), it cannot take part in periodic GPS
reporting.
GPS Configuration (Automatic Push Configuration Request)
A controller radio can send a GPS control / configuration command to radio GPS participants
in order to configure the auto push features of addressed participants.
Configure Periodic (Timer Initiated) Transmission of GPS Information
An auto push time interval [in seconds] of the addressed participants can be pre-configured
on-air by sending an Auto Push Configuration Request (APR) from a controller radio.
Selected / addressed provider radios and controller radios with CRP enabled start to period-
ically transmit their current GPS position (if available) using the configured time interval (as-
suming network and GPS time synchronization is given). The time interval can only be set
an integer multiple of the scheduling round time (see ”Standard (Scheduled) Transmission”
on p. 5.8).
If a controller has never received the GPS signal (required for scheduled transmissions), it
cannot transmit an auto push configuration request.
It should be noted that transmitting a dynamic Auto Push Configuration Request will override
the Auto Push Time settings as configured by R&S RNMS3000. Thus, if the Auto Push
(Time) operation has for example been disabled in the R&S RNMS3000 mission planning
and the radio receives a dynamic APR request from a controller, the dynamic setting will be
remembered by the radio. Thus, the radio may start an Auto Push Time operation according
to the last APR configuration request (even if the initial mission planning had disabled APT)
when the radio is switched to this preset page next time. Hence, it is the responsibility of the
controller's operator to ensure that an APR operation (of a temporary nature) is disabled (by
sending an APR/APT=0 request to all radios) if the resumption of automatic reporting is not
desired (when the radio is switched on next time).
Standard (Scheduled) Transmission
On the radio, a transmission scheduling scheme has been implemented in order to prevent
multiple GPS participants transmitting on the air channel at the same time (either accidental-
ly or incidentally). There is a potential for collisions between push, pull and auto push GPS
data being transmitted concurrently. Also, collision potential exists between GPS and other
services like voice / data and network service transmissions. Collisions of GPS data with oth-
er services cannot be avoided by the scheduling.
In order to prevent the problem of on-air collisions, a scheduling scheme is applied to stan-
dard (i.e. non-immediate) GPS transmissions. In SECOM-P and SECOM-V these GPS
transmissions occupy the air channel for less than one second. Hence, the scheduling round
time (for one scheduling cycle) is equal to the number of GPS participants configured by
R&S RNMS3000.

The maximum configurable number of GPS reporting participants has been limited in
R&S RNMS3000 to 32 participants. Thus, the network is occupied by GPS traffic for maxi-
mally 32 seconds, assuming all participants transmit their position information sequentially
scheduled (one after each other) in a scheduling round.
Based on a common GPS time reference, the scheduling scheme gives each participant an
exclusive slot access right once per scheduling round.
By binding the right to transmit GPS information to one exclusive scheduling slot, on-air col-
lisions between scheduled GPS data and control may be avoided. On the other hand, a GPS
participant has to wait until its assigned scheduling slot is due before it can transmit. In
SECOM-P and SECOM-V, the maximum number of GPS participants is limited to 32 partic-
ipants resulting in a worst case transmission delay (i.e. a “waiting time”) of 31 seconds.
In order to use the scheduling scheme, after entering a preset page supporting GPS report-
ing, any GPS participant must have received the GPS time signal at least once in order to
“synchronize” its scheduling algorithm with the other participants. If the GPS time signal re-
ception is temporarily limited or lost, a back-up clock will maintain the synchronism.
However, if the GPS time signal has never been received after entering the preset page, the
participant cannot support scheduled GPS transmissions (see sect. 5.2.1.4 General Re-
quirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features).
Immediate (Unscheduled) Transmission
Immediate GPS transmissions are sent immediately, i.e. without using the scheduling
scheme (see ”Standard (Scheduled) Transmission” on p. 5.8). Hence, there is some poten-
tial that any non-scheduled transmission conflicts on-air with other (scheduled or non-sched-
uled) GPS transmissions and cannot be received by other GPS participants.
On the other hand, an immediate GPS transmission is executed without any scheduling de-
lay and the GPS time signal reception is not required for synchronizing the scheduling trans-
missions with other GPS participants.
Therefore immediate GPS transmissions should be used in situations when a delay in trans-
mitting GPS data or control cannot be accepted or in case the GPS time signal (required for
scheduling) has never been received before (after entering the preset page).

M3SR Series 4100 Addressing of GPS Transmissions
5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions
Broadcast
In broadcast addressing mode, GPS (Global Positioning System) pull and configuration re-
quests are transmitted to all participants and all participants (within operational reach and be-
ing synchronized to the network and GPS system) respond by broadcasting their GPS
information (if available) to the network.
Also, all push data (see sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission) are transmitted as broad-
cast.
Point-to-Point
In Point-to Point (P2P) addressing mode, GPS pull and configuration requests are sent to a
single GPS participant and only this participant responds. The response, however, is sent as
broadcast to the whole network.
In order to avoid on-air collisions, Immediate Pull (IPL (R&S M3TR) or 'Immediate PULL'
(R&S M3SR Series 4100)) requests can only be used in connection with point-to-point ad-
dressing.
Participant Selection List
The selection list for the addressable GPS participants supports the selection of
• a single GPS participant (point-to-point)

• all GPS participants (broadcast)
when sending controller initiated command requests (IPL (Immediate PULL), PUL (Sched-
uled PULL) and APR (Auto Push List] commands)). After a command softkey is pressed, the
user is presented with a selection list of R&S RNMS3000 configured radios participating in
GPS reporting:
The list contains
• an entry for broadcast sending and

• the names of all configured GPS participants except for the own radio.

M3SR Series 4100 Addressing of GPS Transmissions
For immediate pull (IPL (R&S M3TR) or 'Immediate PULL' (R&S M3SR Series 4100)), the
broadcast entry is not displayed as this would result in an on-air collision of incoming GPS
reports (since all providers would try to respond at once / immediately).
GPS participant entries can be scrolled using the up and down arrow keys. Pressing ESC
will leave the editor, aborting the command request. Pressing ENT will continue the com-
mand with the selected GPS participant.

M3SR Series 4100 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features
5.2.1.4 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features
Table 5.1 shows which requirements must be fulfilled and which combinations of addressing
features are valid for the GPS reporting features to function:
Table 5.1 Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting
GPS signal reception / Broadcast

Network synch. P2P addressing
Feature satellite visibility re- addressing
required supported
quired supported
At least once, can be

Standard pull request lost temporarily lost; if
issued by controller Yes never received, stan- Yes Yes
radio dard pull requests can-
not be sent.
Not required, immediate

Immediate pull request
pull requests can be
issued by controller Yes No Yes
sent without current or
radio
former GPS reception.

lost temporarily; if never
Standard pull response
Yes received, standard pull Yes No
from radio participant(s)
responses cannot be
sent.

Immediate pull pull response with emp-
response from radio Yes ty data can be sent with- Yes No
participant(s) out current or former
GPS reception.
Standard push data At least once, can be

transmitted by radio lost temporarily; if never
Yes Yes No
participant(s) received, standard push
data cannot be sent.

Immediate push data
empty push data can be
transmitted by radio Yes Yes No
sent without current or
participant(s)
former GPS reception.

Auto Push Configura-
tion Request (APR)
Yes received, Auto Push Re- Yes Yes
issued by controller
quests (APR) cannot be
radio
sent.

received, auto push
Auto push data (re-
GPS data cannot be
sponse) transmitted by Yes Yes No
sent, if GPS reception is
radio participant(s)
given at a later point in
time, auto push opera-
tion starts automatically.

Auto push data (initiated
received, auto push
due to R&S RNMS3000
GPS data cannot be
mission planning) trans- Yes Yes No
sent, if GPS reception is
mitted by radio partici-
given at a later point in
pant(s)
time, auto push opera-
tion starts automatically.

M3SR Series 4100 General Requirements and Valid Combinations of GPS Reporting Features
The terms "at least once" and "never received" refer to the GPS satellite reception after the
preset page supporting GPS reporting has been selected.

M3SR Series 4100 SECOM-H Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)
5.2.1.5 SECOM-H Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)
See sect. 5.2 GPS Reporting.
GPS (Global Positioning System) reporting can be used under SECOM-H only in combina-
tion with the waveform services IP-Data, IP-Repro or Voice-over-IP Data.
As prerequisites,
• a net entry (requested from non-TRU stations from the timing reference unit (TRU) sta-
tion must have been executed successfully by all GPS participants,
• the service selection IP-Data, IP-Repro or Voice-over-IP Data must be chosen in
R&S RNMS3000
• a valid IPoA (IP over Air) net must be configured in R&S RNMS3000 (regarding IP-Air
addresses, the IPoA operation mode, routing tables)
for the exchange of GPS information to function.
If the SECOM-H on-air channel is currently occupied by transmitting voice, data or network
service information, no GPS information can be transmitted and vice versa.
Compared to other waveforms the timings for SECOM-H are extended. Depending on
the number of radios within the network and the used search pattern the minimum cy-
cle time is 4 s.

M3SR Series 4100 ALE-3G Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)
5.2.1.6 ALE-3G Specifics of GPS Reporting (Option)
Refer to sect. 5.2 GPS Reporting.
GPS (Global Positioning System) reporting can be used under ALE-3G only in combination
with Link Mode xDL.
As prerequisite IPoA must be configured in R&S RNMS3000.
In contrast to waveforms SECOM-V, SECOM-H and SECOM-P, in this case only PULL
requests are supported for GPS Reporting and controller role. For GPS Reporting pro-
vider neither PULL nor PUSH is supported.
For ALE-3G only Point-To-Point requests are supported.
GPS reporting under ALE-3G works independent of Time Source and LSU-Mode settings.

M3SR Series 4100 GPS Operational Menus
5.2.2 GPS Operational Menus
After selection of GPS menu, the current GPS position is displayed in the central area of the
screen. If the option key GPS Reporting is not enabled, the operator is only able to see the
current GPS information (in three different formats, see sect. 5.2.2.1 Display of the GPS Po-
sition).
Figure 5.2 Menu 1151: GPS OP (without GPS Reporting)
ICN-4D-H-231052-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 GPS Operational Menus
Figure 5.3 Menu 1351: GPS OP (GPS Reporting enabled)
ICN-4D-H-231052-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Display of the GPS Position
5.2.2.1 Display of the GPS Position
The radio own GPS (Global Position System) position can be displayed in three different for-
mats:
• Geographical (GEO) positioning information (based on WGS84 ellipsoid),

• Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) positioning information (based on WGS84 ellip-
soid),
• Military Grid System (MGRS) positioning information (based on WGS84 ellipsoid).
The selection of the display format is controlled via softkey 'GPS Fmt' (only with relevant soft-
ware option).
Listbox 1. Press ‘GPS Fmt’ softkey.

2. Select desired GPS format from the list-
box.
3. Press ‘ENT’ to confirm.
The new GPS format display is now effective.
Possible values:
• GEO (Geographical)
• UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator)
• MGRS (Military Grid System)
Availability of a GPS position is indicated on

the upper right part of the menu header as an
icon.
No GPS position available (2 or less

satellites)
2D GPS position fix (3 or 4 satellites)
3D GPS position fix (5 or more satel-

lites)

M3SR Series 4100 Display of the GPS Position
Figure 5.4 Own GPS Position
1 2
7
3
6
4
5
ICN-4D-H-231052-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Time
GPS time in HH-MM-SS.
2 Date
GPS date in CCYY-MM-DD.
3 Velocity
Current velocity in forward direction - Velocity in km/h.
4 Satellites
Current GPS reception quality - Number of satellites received (1 to 10) or ‘---’ for no satellites.
5 Alt. (Altitude)
In meter from sea level.
6 Zone
UTM zone indication.
7 Pos. (Position)
Latitude - In degrees and milliminutes plus north / south indication.
Longitude - In degrees and milliminutes plus east / west indication.

M3SR Series 4100 Display of the GPS Reporting Data
5.2.2.2 Display of the GPS Reporting Data
Provided the appropriate Service, e.g IP_DATA, additional information regarding GPS Re-
porting is displayed on the lower part of the screen.
Figure 5.5 GPS Reporting Data
1
10
9 2
8
3
7 4
6 5
ICN-4D-H-231052-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
1 Oth. Pos. List (Other Positions List)

List of received positions from other radios. The format X/Y indicates the X-th entry out of Y
list entries in total.
2. Date
GPS date in CCYY-MM-DD.
3. Vel. (Velocity)
Current velocity in forward direction - Velocity in km/h.
4. Sat. (Satellites)
Current GPS reception quality - Number of satellites received (1 to 10) or ‘---’ for no satellites.
5. Dist. (Distance)
Relative distance to the reported GPS position– Distance in m.
6. Bear. (Bearing)
Angle to the reported GPS position – Bearing in degrees.
7. Alt. (Altitude)
In meter from sea level.
8. Zone
UTM zone indication.
9. Pos. (Position)
Latitude - In degrees and milliminutes plus north / south indication.
Longitude - In degrees and milliminutes plus east / west indication.
10. Time
GPS time in HH-MM-SS.

M3SR Series 4100 Display of the GPS Reporting Data
If a GPS participant has currently only limited or no GPS satellite visibility, it will dis-
play the data items as empty ("---"). If the GPS time or date cannot be retrieved from
the satellites, the radio local time and date (maintained by real time clock) will be dis-
played instead.

M3SR Series 4100 Display the GPS Position Accuracy
5.2.2.3 Display the GPS Position Accuracy
By means of softkey 'Position Accuracy' the operator can display the GPS posotion accura-
cy.
1. Press 'Position Accuracy' softkey. Follow-

ing informations are displayed:
- Horizontal accuracy estimate in m.

- Vertical accuracy estimate in m.
- Speed accuracy estimate in km/h.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Role of a Participant
5.2.2.4 Selecting the Role of a Participant
By means of a softkey 'Role' the operator can select the role of a participant as being a GPS
provider (PRV see sect. 5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting) or a GPS con-
troller (CTR see sect. 5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting).
Toggle Repetitively pressing this key changes the role

of a participant.
Possible values:
• Provider
• Controller
The influence of the currently selected role is summarized in Table 5.2.
Table 5.2 Influence of the Currently Selected Role
Features supported ROL = PRV ROL = CTR

(provider) (controller)
Push own GPS data onto the network. Yes Yes
Pull GPS data from other GPS participants in the same network. No Yes
Send an Auto Push Configuration Request (APR) to other GPS participants

No Yes
operating in the same network.
Receive and list GPS data (due to push, pull or auto push actions) from other
Yes Yes
GPS participants operating in the same network.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Immediately)
5.2.2.5 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Immediately)
By means of softkey ‘Immediate PUSH’ the operator can immediately transmit (push) its cur-
rent GPS positioning information (see sect. 5.2.2.1 Display of the GPS Position) to other par-
ticipants operating in the same network.
Activate Press softkey ‘Immediate PUSH'.
During sending the request the button is

greyed-out.
Once running, a immediate PUSH can’t be in-

terrupted.
After sending the immediate push request the

button is enabled again.
GPS positioning information to the network. Also, immediate push actions can be executed
even if the GPS time signal (required for scheduling) has never been received.
Immediate GPS data are transmitted unscheduled (see sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Trans-
mission). Hence, there is some potential that any unscheduled transmission conflicts on-air
with other (scheduled or unscheduled) GPS transmissions and hence cannot be received by
other GPS participants.
On the other hand, an immediate transmission is executed without any scheduling delay.
Therefore immediate push transmissions should be used in situations when a delay in trans-
mitting the GPS push data cannot be accepted or in case the GPS time signal (required for
scheduling) has never been received yet.
The reception of the immediately pushed GPS position information by other GPS participants
is described in sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Scheduled)
5.2.2.6 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Scheduled)
By means of softkey 'Scheduled PUSH' the operator can transmit (push) its current GPS po-
sition to other participants using a scheduled transmission (see sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS
Transmission).
Activate Press softkey ‘Scheduled PUSH’.
During transmition this softkey is greyed-out.
Once running, a scheduled PUSH can not be

interrupted.
After sending the scheduled push request the

GPS positioning information to the network. However, standard push actions can be only ex-
ecuted after the GPS time signal (required for scheduling) has been received at least once.
This is due to the fact that standard push actions are scheduled transmissions in order to
avoid potential on-air collisions.
Thus, using the standard push mode is more reliable than the immediate push (see
sect. 5.2.2.5 Initiating a GPS Position Information Transmission (Push, Immediately)). On
the other hand, in case the GPS signal has never been received yet, the operator must use
an immediate push transmission (see sect. 5.2.2.5 Initiating a GPS Position Information
Transmission (Push, Immediately)) in order to transmit an empty GPS position record (indi-
cating the missing GPS reception to other participants).
The reception of the pushed GPS position information by other GPS participants is described
in sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Immediately, as Controller Feature)
5.2.2.7 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Immediately, as Controller Feature)
By means of softkey 'Immediate PULL' the operator of a controller radio can immediately re-
quest (pull) the GPS position from a single participant operating in the same network.
Listbox 1. Press softkey ‘Immediate PULL’.
2. Select targeted single participant (PTCP)

from the list box.
3. Press ‘ENT’ to confirm selection and trans-

mit and immediate pull request to the ad-
dressed participant.
After the request is sent, the ‘Immediate PULL’

Immediate GPS pull requests and responses are transmitted non-scheduled. Hence, there
is some potential that any unscheduled transmissions will conflict on-air with another (sched-
uled or unscheduled) GPS transmission and hence cannot be received by other GPS partic-
ipants.
In order to avoid collisions caused by multiple providers responding immediately, an imme-

diate pull request can only be addressed to a single (P2P) participant. The selection process
of the addressed participant is described in sect. 5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions.
On the other hand, immediate pull actions can be executed even if the GPS time signal (re-
quired for scheduling) has never been received yet. Also, immediate pull actions are execut-
ed without any scheduling delay. Thus, the addressed participant will also respond
immediately (if receiving the request).
Thus, immediate pull actions should be used in situations when a delay in requesting the
GPS data cannot be accepted or in case the GPS signal has never been received yet (by the
controller or by the addressed participant).
The reception of the immediate GPS pull response from the addressed provider is described
in sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Scheduled, as Controller Feature)
5.2.2.8 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Scheduled, as Controller Feature)
By means of softkey 'Scheduled PULL' the operator of a controller radio can request (pull)
the GPS position from all or from a single participant using a scheduled transmission (see
sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission).
Listbox 1. Press softkey ‘Scheduled PULL'.
2. Select all (BROADCAST) or a single partic-

ipant (PTCP) from the list box.
3. Press softkey ‘ENT’ to confirm selection and

transmit an scheduled pull request to all
(BROADCAST) or to a single participant.
After the request was sent, the ‘Scheduled

PULL’ button is enabled again.
Standard pull actions (be it request or response) can be executed only when the GPS time
signal (required for scheduling) has been received at least once. This is due to the fact that
standard pull transmissions are scheduled in order to avoid on-air collisions with other
(scheduled) GPS transmissions. Thus, using the standard pull mode is more reliable than
the immediate pull (see sect. 5.2.2.7 Initiating a GPS Information Request (Pull, Immediate-
ly, as Controller Feature)).
A standard pull request can be addressed to all participants (BROADCAST) or to a single

participant. The selection process of the addressed participant(s) is described in
sect. 5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions.
In case the GPS signal has never been received by an addressed participant, the participant
will not respond to the standard pull request. The participant then appears to be "absent" to
the controller, i.e. it does not appear in the list of received GPS positions (see
sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information). In this case, the operator of the
controller may use an immediate pull request (see sect. 5.2.2.7 Initiating a GPS Information
Request (Pull, Immediately, as Controller Feature)) in order to pull a particular participant not
responding. If an addressed GPS participant has currently only limited or no GPS satellite
visibility, it will still respond by transmitting empty GPS positioning information using a sched-
uled transmission.
The reception of the GPS position received from the addressed GPS participants is de-
scribed in sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating an Auto Push List Request Transmission (as Controller Feature)
5.2.2.9 Initiating an Auto Push List Request Transmission (as Controller Feature)
By means of softkey Auto Push List the operator of a controller radio can send an Auto Push
Configuration Request to all or to a single participant using a scheduled transmission (see
sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of GPS Transmission).
Listbox 1. Press softkey ‘Auto Push List'.
2. Select all (BROADCAST) or a single partic-

ipant (PTCP) from the list box.
3. Press ‘ENT’ to confirm selection.
Editor 1. Press the softkey ‘Configure Autopush’
2. Use the numerical keypad or the knob to en-

ter the Auto Push Time (APT) interval.
3. Press ‘ENT’ to send the request.
Auto Push request (APR) actions (be it request or response) can be executed only after the
GPS time signal (required for scheduling) has been received at least once. This is due to the
fact that APR transmissions are scheduled in order to avoid on-air collisions with other
(scheduled) GPS transmissions.
An APR request can be addressed to all participants (BROADCAST) or to a single partici-
pant. The selection process of the addressed participant(s) is described in
sect. 5.2.1.3 Addressing of GPS Transmissions.
The auto push time interval [in seconds] of the addressed participants is entered by using a
numerical editor. A default interval of 60 seconds is pre-configured but this can be adapted
to operational requirements. Due to the scheduling constraints (see sect. 5.2.1.2 Types of
GPS Transmission), the time interval can only be set as integer multiple of the scheduling
round time. Thus, the value entered will be adjusted automatically to match an integer mul-
tiple of the scheduling round time. Selecting a time interval of zero disables a previously con-
figured (via APR on-air command or R&S RNMS3000 config) auto push time interval.

M3SR Series 4100 Initiating an Auto Push List Request Transmission (as Controller Feature)
It is the responsibility of the controller's operator to ensure that an APR operation (being only
of a temporary nature) is disabled (by sending for example an APR/APT=0 request to all ra-
dios) if the resumption of automatic reporting is not desired (when the radio is switched on
next time).
Selected / addressed radio providers and radio controllers with CRP (Controller Report Po-
sition) enabled will start to periodically transmit their current GPS position (if available) using
the configured time interval (assuming network and GPS synchronization is given).
In case the GPS signal has never been received by addressed participant(s), the participant
will not respond to the APR command. If the participant(s) receives the GPS signal later, it
joins the other participants already executing the auto push time operation.
The reception of the automatically pushed GPS position received from the addressed GPS
participants is described in sect. 5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information.

M3SR Series 4100 List of Received GPS Position Information
5.2.2.10 List of Received GPS Position Information
Selecting One of the Received GPS Position Information
A list of GPS position information being received from other participants (due to push, pull or
auto push actions) is displayed on the lower half of the screen.
Listbox In order to navigate to a certain participant the

softkey ‘Other Pos. List (OPL)’ is used. Upon
selection of the softkey a list of participants to
chose from is displayed. Use the knob to
choose a participant from the listbox.
The received GPS position information about

the selected participant is displayed.
In the example above just a single participant

named ‘M3SR_2’ is listed.
Clearing the List
By means of the softkey 'Clear OPL' (Clear other position list) the operator can clear all re-
ceived GPS positioning information and the count will be reset to zero.
If the preset page is changed or the radio is shut-down, all received GPS positioning infor-
mation will be automatically cleared.
Activate Press button ‘Clear OPL’ to delete all entries

within the other position list.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Controller Reports Position as Controller Feature On or Off
5.2.2.11 Switching the Controller Reports Position as Controller Feature On or Off
By means of softkey 'CRP' the operator can enable / disable the controller feature CRP (Con-
troller Reports Position) and permit a controller also to act as provider (see also
sect. 5.2.1.1 Roles of Radios Supporting GPS Reporting).
Activate Repetitively pressing this key toggles the fea-

ture on and off.
The new setting is immediately effective.
The influence of the currently selected CRP status is summarized in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 Influence of the Currently Selected CRP Status
Expected Action CRP is off (disabled) CRP is on (enabled)
Controller responds to immediate No, controller disregards immedi- Yes, controller responds immedi-
pull request being received from ate pull requests. ately (even if GPS time signal has
another controller. not been received yet).
Controller responds to standard No, controller disregards standard Yes, controller responds using
pull request being received from pull requests. scheduled transmission (assuming
another controller. the GPS time signal has been re-
ceived at least once).
Controller responds to Auto Push No, controller disregards APR re- Yes, controller starts to execute
Config Request (APR) being request. auto push operation using sched-
ceived from another controller. uled transmission (assuming the
GPS time signal has been received
at least once).
Controller starts to execute RNMS No, controller disregards RNMS Yes, controller starts to execute
(Radio Network Management Sys- auto push configuration. auto push operation using sched-
tem) based auto push configura- uled transmission (assuming the
tion. GPS time signal has been received
at least once).
Controller transmits its own GPS No, controller does not transmit its Yes, controller does transmit its
(Global Position System) position- own GPS position. own GPS position (if available).
ing information when pulling or con-
figuring other GPS participants.
The terms "at least once" and "never received" refer to the GPS satellite reception after the
preset page supporting GPS reporting has been selected.

M3SR Series 4100 IP over Air (IPoA)
5.3 IP over Air (IPoA)
5.3.1 Basics of IP over Air (IPoA)
The IPoA protocol provides radio-embedded Internet protocol (IP) functionality (open sys-
tems interconnection (OSI) layer 3), enabling a customer system for IP communication over
the air by integrating radios into the network infrastructure (Figure 5.6).

Figure 5.6 Network Infrastructure
ICN-4G-L-231051-R-D0894-00001-A-02-1

From an IP layer point of view, the radios act as routers between the wired networks and the
air network (e.g. SECOM-H).
The IPoA protocol is available with these waveforms:
SECOM-V x
SECOM-H x x
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Di- x

vision Multiplex)
ALE-3G / xDL (Low Data Rate Link x x

Protocol (LDL), High Data Rate
Link Protocol (HDL))
A radio-enhanced network provides complete IP transparency, meaning that any OSI layer
4 (and higher) protocol can be transported over IP. Of course, timing and error constraints
imposed by the radio channel cannot be hidden from the higher OSI layers like TCP (Trans-
mission Control Protocol) and under some circumstances can severely degrade end-to-end
performance.
A radio channel will always provide lower data rates (down to 2.4 kbit/s), will have a higher
delay or higher delay variations and will be more erroneous compared to a wired network.
Therefore it is recommended to use UDP (User Datagram Protocol) as transport protocol.
Please refer to ”Recommendations for the Transport Layer” on p. 5.36 for recommendations
about the usage and/or configuration of upper layer protocols (OSI layers 4 to 7).
Since UDP is a connection-less protocol (no acknowledgments, no flow control), it is up to

an upper layer protocol / application to provide a secured connection and to provide any sort
of flow control. Without flow control, data rates exceeding the air network capacity may lead
quickly to data loss. The radio offers only a limited amount of memory to queue incoming da-
ta, and there is no mechanism to inform an application when data is being dropped, no matter
what reasons caused the packet loss.
For each network (Ethernet, air, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)) the radio provides an IP in-
terface specifying the respective network settings (IP address, netmask, Figure 5.7).

Figure 5.7 Radio IP Interfaces
4
2
1 5
ICN-4G-L-231051-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
1 IP/Ethernet Network
2 Ethernet IP Interface
3 PPP IP Interface
4 Air IP Interface
5 IP/Air Network
6 Router (Radio)
• The Ethernet IP interface specifies the interface to the wired network connecting Ether-
net-based devices (computers, routers) with the radio.
• The air IP interface specifies the interface to the air network.
• The PPP IP interface defines the PPP settings that allow a computer to set up a point-
to-point connection to the radio.
The above described IP interfaces allow the radio to route/forward IP packets between the
different IP networks.

5.3.1.1 General Constraints
• All radios belonging to the same air network must have the same settings in the under-
lying waveform, i.e. SECOM-H settings like data rate, search pattern etc.
• The same applies to connection and operation mode, these settings must be identical
on all radios belonging to the same network.
• Such radios must also belong to the same air IP network.
• IP addresses belonging to the same IP network, be it Ethernet, air or PPP, must be
unique.
• Ethernet, air and PPP IP networks shall not overlap.
• Several settings are in the form of an IP address or netmask.
• If not stated otherwise, all parameter changes (concerning radio settings or IP settings
described below) have immediate effect, i.e. no reboot of the radio is necessary.
5.3.1.2 Recommendations for the Transport Layer
As mentioned above, the radio channel has different characteristics when compared to an
Ethernet network:
• Very slow data rate

• Very high round-trip-time (RTT)
• Very high delay variation
• High bit error rate
These characteristics can have serious effects on the upper layer protocols like TCP.
Drawbacks Using TCP-Based Applications over Radio Channels
The TCP protocol itself is designed to adapt to the characteristics of the transmission chan-
nel or error situations that might occur. Typically it is used in wired LAN (Local Area Network)
environments built up with packet switching routers, dial-up connections, etc.
TCP measures the Round-Trip Time (RTT) that its packets need to be transmitted from the
client to the server and back. Based on that RTT timing, it adapts its internal protocol timers,
e.g. the retransmit timers. With the help of this mechanism it is possible to use TCP over a
wide bandwidth range (very slow dial-up connections or high speed LANs).
The error case which occurs most often in packet-switched networks is congestion. This hap-
pens if more packets arrive at a router than the router can forward e.g. over a slow link. If the
router discards some packets which could not be sent because of this, TCP will recognize
the packet loss. As a result it will retransmit the unacknowledged packet(s) when the retrans-
mission timer exceeds the preset time. At the same time it will reduce its local transmission
rate to help the congestion situation to be resolved. The TCP’s transmission window (the
amount of yet unacknowledged data that is allowed to be sent) will be reduced abruptly and

the retransmission timer for that packet will be increased by a certain factor (TCP back-off).
The transmission window will be opened very slowly after the reduction to avoid another con-
gestion.
This behaviour can cause some negative effects if TCP/IP connections are transmitted via
radio links. If packets are lost because of a brief jamming or an interrupted link (shadow ef-
fects) and (shortly) after that the link is error- free again, TCP will accidentally assume a con-
gestion and will react with the mechanisms described above. Also, if the link is available
again, no data will be sent because TCP is in back-off and/or has reduced its transmission
window (Comment: How the transmission window is used and whether the data transmission
is completely blocked by e.g. the only pending TCP packet which waits to be retransmitted
depends strongly on the application protocol which is used over TCP/IP!).
The disadvantages using TCP/IP over erroneous/slow radio channels arise from these ef-
fects and it is recommended to use UDP as transport protocol.
All above mentioned drawbacks cause a massive performance degradation when multiple
TCP connections are running over the air network. In the worst case, it is even possible that
some TCP connections time out. IPoA provides a solution called FastLink in order to handle
multiple TCP connections (or other IP protocol based connections) efficiently. Please refer
to sect. 5.3.2 FastLink Mode (FLM) for information regarding FastLink.
Recommended Adjustments for TCP
If TCP is the only available means to be used as transport protocol, some settings on the
host-side can positively influence the behaviour of TCP over the radio channel.
The following settings are recommended in order to enhance TCP performance:
• Enabling Selective Acknowledgments (SACK)

If SACK is activated, only lost packets must be retransmitted, and not those which were
sent afterwards.
• Enabling timestamps
Adding a timestamp in the TCP options field helps to calculate the RTT more accurately
which in turn results in precise timeouts and thus optimizes retransmission handling.
• Disable window scaling
Make sure the window scaling option is disabled, some operating systems like Windows
Vista have this option enabled per default.
• Non-delayed ACKs
The TCP implementation of Microsoft Windows delays per default all ACKs by 200 ms
in order to minimize overhead (possibility to acknowledge more than one packet at once
if packets arrive within 200 ms). However, for radio links it is better to avoid an ACK delay
in order to keep the RTT as low as possible.
• Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) of 512 bytes
A smaller MTU reduces the risk of packet corruption due to fluctuating radio channel
quality and optimizes throughput for concurrent connections.

• Reduced receive window size

A reduced receive window discourages the sender from sending huge packet bursts
congesting the network. Recommended values are between 4 to 16 x MSS (Maximum
Segment Size), typically 8 x MSS = 3766.
All hosts (endpoints terminating the transport protocol) involved need their settings
to be adapted.
5.3.1.3 Special IP Services
The IPoA protocol provides support for several predefined IP services running on the radio,
such as
• Text Message Service

• Alarm Service
• GPS Service and
• GPS Immediate Service.
Each of these services can be enabled / disabled in the mission configuration using
R&S RNMS3000 (Radio Network Management System) and has a send priority and an IP
mapping (protocol / port) assigned as listed in Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 Priority, IP Mapping (Protocol / Port) and ARQ
Service Send prior- Protocol Port Enabled ARQ FastLink

ity order assigned
FastLink Control 1st UDP 35008 no off off
Text Message 4th UDP 35002 no off off

nd
Alarm Message 2 UDP 35000 no off off
GPS 5th UDP 35004 no off off

rd
GPS Immediate 3 UDP 35006 no off off
Transparent IP 6th ANY ANY yes off off

th
User1 6 TCP ANY yes on off
User2 7th ANY 35010 no off on

th
User3 8 UDP 35012 no off off
User4 8th UDP 35014 no off off
The send priority order defines the priority among the services, i.e. alarm messages are al-
ways sent before all other services. IP data passed to the IPoA protocol for transmission is
mapped to the services according to their IP mapping configuration, e.g. a UDP packet with

destination port 35002 is mapped to the Text Message Services and treated with its respec-
tive priority. Therefore, the above listed UDP ports cannot be used by customer-specific ap-
plications and pose a restriction to the complete IP transparency of IPoA as described in
”Basics of IP over Air (IPoA)” on p. 5.32 (of course the restriction only applies when the be-
fore-mentioned services are configured). IP data not mapping to any of the configured ser-
vices (default IP data) is sent with lowest priority. This results in noticeable performance
degradation (data rate/ delay) for default IP data, when many of the mentioned (higher prior-
ity) IP services are enabled.
IPoA provides additional user services (User2 to 4) that can be enabled and configured in
R&S RNMS3000 to match the specific needs of a given network topology and customer ap-
plications. If your applications do not allow a data mapping based on protocol and port, IPoA
provides the possibility to map the data according to the TOS (Type Of Service) byte in the
IP header as an alternative. Please contact the Rohde & Schwarz Customer Support for fur-
ther information.
Feedback Messages
In order to allow a flow control for user data sent over the radio network, the IPoA protocol
generates ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) source quench messages when its
send buffer reaches a specific use level (upper threshold). Also when a packet is dropped
due to an exhausted send buffer, a source quench message is generated. As long as the use
level does not fall below a 2nd specific use level (lower threshold), each obtained packet is
answered with an ICMP source quench message destined to the originator. The ICMP
source quench implementation complies with RFC792 (request for commands). The origina-
tor of the IP data shall use the source quench messages to implement a flow control mech-
anism that is to reduce its data rate upon reception of source quench messages, and
eventually slowly increase the data rate later. Such a behaviour greatly reduces the risk of
packet drop due to full send queues inside the IPoA protocol.
Table 5.5 provides an overview of the internally allocated buffer space available for transmis-
sion and the upper and lower thresholds for the source quench messages.
Table 5.5 Send Buffer and Thresholds
Waveform Send buffer [Kbyte] Upper threshold [%] Lower threshold [%]
SECOM-V 315 70 50
(only R&S M3TR)
SECOM-H 39.4 70 50
OFDM 630 70 50
(only R&S M3TR)
ALE-3G / xDL 129 70 50
The send buffer size varies among the waveforms due to their maximum data rates support-
ed, thus a fast waveform like OFDM (only R&S M3TR) possesses a larger send buffer when
compared to a slow waveform like SECOM-H.

The available send buffer is clustered in data chunks of different sizes from 64 bytes
to 1524 bytes. When sending mainly large (e.g. 1500 bytes) or mainly small (e.g.
64 bytes) data chunks, not all of the above mentioned send buffer may be available. If,
for example, SECOM-V (only R&S M3TR) is the waveform used and only 1500 byte
packets are sent, source quench will not become active at a use level of 70 % of
315 kB (220.5 Kbyte), but already when the 1500 byte clusters are used up to 70 %,
which will be already at a use level of 155.6 Kbyte.
Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ)
ALE-3G / xDL and IPoA protocol for SECOM-V (only R&S M3TR), SECOM-H and OFDM
(only R&S M3TR) uses different data link layer protocols for channel access. This different
mechanism will be described in the following:
IPoA protocol ARQ
The data link layer (layer 2) of the IPoA protocol stack contains an ARQ (Automatic Repeat
Request) algorithm. The type of the ARQ algorithm is "Selective Repeat". Per default all
TCP/IP data, which is not mapped to any of the configured services are transmitted with ARQ
protection. Other protocols like UDP and ICMP are not transmitted with ARQ protection.
ARQ can be enabled or disabled for each service by means of R&S RNMS3000.
ARQ Functionality
Each IP data packet, which is sent to air by the transmitter, is acknowledged by the receiver
(ACK packet without payload).
The transmitter retransmits packets which are not acknowledged in time. Due to this, packets
that have not been acknowledged yet, remain in the transmission queue until an acknowl-
edgment was received, the maximum retransmission count is reached or the maximum
packet life time (TTL) is exceeded. In the case of maximum retransmission count or TTL, the
packet is not retransmitted anymore and is dropped.
ARQ contains a flow control mechanism called "Sliding Window". This prevents a packet
flooding of the receiver (if many packet losses occur).
The benefit of using ARQ with "Selective Repeat" in the data link layer is:
• Minimizing of data packet losses

• Selective Repeat: Only lost packets are retransmitted (in contrast to the ARQ algorithm
"Go Back N").
• The handling of ARQ in the data link layer reduces the retransmissions of data packets
in higher protocol layers (for example TCP) that have an own implementation of ARQ
and increases the data transmission performance.

ALE-3G / xDL ARQ Functionality
Instead of the Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA) mechanism of

the IPoA protocol, the ALE-3G uses its own ALE algorithm to establish logical links between
stations of an ALE-3G network. This automatic link establishment algorithm chooses the best
communication channel to the destination based on channel quality analysis (LQA). After the
establishment of a logical link between two stations, the initiator of the link has the first op-
portunity to transfer an IP packet with one of the xDL protocols over the channel to the des-
tination. HDL (High Data Rate Link Protocol) and LDL (Low Data Rate Link Protocol) always
guarantee the error-free transfer of the packet by using an ARQ mechanism.
Since the ALE-3G channel access differs from the IPoA protocol, the following features of
the IPoA protocol are not needed or supported:
Note
FastLink Mode (FLM) Not needed. ALE-3G establishes logical links by itself.
IPoA Rebro Not supported.
Message Service Alert messages Not supported. xDL only supports Point-to-Point links.
IPoA operational mode Not supported.
IPoA connection mode Not supported.
Change of IP Air address Not supported. ALE-3G uses a static look-up table for
conversion of IP to ALE-3G address. This can only be
changed via configuration.
Multicast Routing Not supported. xDL only supports Point-to-Point links.

M3SR Series 4100 FastLink Mode (FLM)
5.3.2 FastLink Mode (FLM)
The main purpose of the FastLink Mode (FLM) feature is to allow an application to establish
exclusive point-to-point connections and thus to avoid concurrent connections on the radio
network. IPoA itself provides appropriate mechanisms on the link layer to reduce the collision
probability for concurrent connections, the efficiency will suffer with increasing amount of
parallel connections.
Especially multiple long-lasting TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) connections will benefit
from FLM, since the TCP protocol does not scale well with increasing amount of concurrent
connections over a slow radio link (see sect. 5.3 IP over Air (IPoA)).
If the typical use case consists of many (e.g. more than 5) concurrent and long-lasting con-
nections, FLM will greatly improve performance and reliability of such data transfers. Al-
though the FLM feature uses some lower layer (link layer) services, there is no influence of
these layers by FLM. FLM can be seen as a stand-alone state machine on application level
that sits on top of the transport and link layer. It is the responsibility of the application to use
FLM appropriately, e.g. to send only FLM assigned data when an FLM connection is estab-
lished if exclusive channel access (only one connection at a time) shall be guaranteed net-
work-wide.

Figure 5.8 FLM Connection
2 6
1 2
4
6 2 2 7
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00010-A-02-1

1 CONNECTED (Tx)
2 Ethernet
3 Application data (e-mail)
4 SECOM-H net
5 Established FLM connection
6 BUSY
7 CONNECTED (RX)
If an application establishes an FLM connection, all other applications are not allowed to es-
tablish an FLM connection themselves, i.e. the FLM state of their gateway radio is "Busy" as
shown in the above picture. After an FLM connection has been established successfully, the
involved applications can exchange data like e-mail. The applications should do this as quick
as possible, since other applications may be waiting for FLM access. The application that ini-
tiated the FLM connection should terminate the connection as soon as the data transfer is
finished.
Data transferred over an FLM connection is mapped by IPoA to a specific service (as done
with any other, non-FLM data). This service must have the FastLink flag configured (see
sect. 5.3 IP over Air (IPoA)).
First, this is required by IPoA (IP over Air) since each service gets a priority assigned in which
data is transmitted, thus also FLM data must be mapped to a specific priority. This allows
IPoA to send non-FLM data in at higher priority (than FLM data) from any station even if an
FLM connection is active.
 FLM influences only data mapped to a service with enabled FastLink.
Second, if an FLM connection is active and data is mapped to a service with fastlink on (FLM
assigned data), the data is tagged on the link layer. This allows all other radios in the network
to detect an ongoing FLM data transfer even if the FLM connection establishment was
missed due to a temporary out-of-range situation.
Third, all radios in a network survey an ongoing FLM connection with a timer. As long as FLM
assigned data is transmitted over the radio network, the timer will be reset. If no FLM as-
signed data is seen on the radio network, the timer will elapse and cause the FLM connection
to be terminated automatically (see ”FLM Relative Idle Timeout” on p. 5.49).
FLM does not force the user/an application to establish an FLM connection prior to
transmission of FLM assigned data, i.e. there is no check whether an FLM connection
is active at the time of sending FLM assigned data. It is up to the application to ensure
that an FLM connection was established before sending FLM assigned data. However,
if no FLM connection is active, the FLM controlled data is not tagged (on link layer) as
such and other radios in the network will remain in the IDLE state and will allow other
applications to establish an FLM connection.

5.3.2.1 FLM Control
An application can access the FLM functionality by means of remote commands. These
commands allow the application to obtain the current state of FLM, initiate and terminate an
FLM connection and get additional information about configuration and for efficient FLM use.
The offered commands are as follows:
FLM Connect Request <destination IP>
Tries to establish an FLM connection to the provided destination. The current FLM state must
be IDLE, otherwise the request is not accepted. The connect request may fail for several rea-
sons:
• Destination is not reachable (no route, out of range).

• Another radio issued a connect request and won the competition for the unique FLM con-
nection.
FLM Disconnect Request
Causes an established FLM connection to be terminated. Only the radio that established the
FLM connection is allowed to issue a disconnect request.
FLM State
Returns the current state of the FLM module in the radio. The possible states are shown in
Table 5.6:
Table 5.6 FLM States
Idle No FLM connection active in the radio network.
Connecting The radio tries to establish an FLM connection.
ConnectedTx The radio that issued the connect request established an FLM connection suc-
cessfully.
ConnectedRx The radio that received a connect request established an FLM connection suc-
cessfully.
Busy An FLM connection is established, but the radio is not involved (neither the
source nor the destination of the FLM connection).
Disconnecting An application issued a disconnect request and the radio initiated termination
of an active FLM connection.
Rebro-Connecting Equal to connecting, but indicates that the connect request was forwarded to
another radio network (rebroadcast). The application must expect a longer
connection setup.
Rebro-Busy Indicates that a remote network has already an active FLM connection.
It is strongly recommended to use the trap feature for this command since some state tran-
sitions may occur in a very quick sequence. A polling mechanism might miss some state
transitions, especially care should be taken for the immediate state transition from 'Rebro-
Busy' to 'Idle'.
Figure 5.9 shows the state transitions in a graphic representation.

Table 5.7 FLM Activities
ActiveTx The radio that initiated an FLM connection.
ActiveRx The remote radio involved in an FLM connection (peer of active Tx radio).
Passive The radio is not involved in an active FLM connection.
Idle No FLM activity in the radio network.

Figure 5.9 State Transitions (Graphic Representation)
Active RX Passive
Connected Busy
RX
11 8
10
Idle 9
Idle
105
12 1 3 6 4
103
Rebro
Busy
7
104
101
Rebro 100 Connecting

Connecting
102
Connected 5 Disconnecting
TX
Active TX
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1

Table 5.8 shows the state transitions and the events causing the state transition:
Table 5.8 State Transitions (Events)
No. Old State New State Event
1 Idle Connecting Connection establishment pending.
2 Connecting ConnectedTx Connection established.
3 Connecting Idle Connection request failed, e.g. destination not reachable.
4 Connecting Busy Other station won competition for connection (other station
tries to set up a connection to a 2nd other station).
5 ConnectedTx Disconnecting Connection termination initiated by user.
6 Disconnecting Idle Connection termination finished.
7 ConnectedTx Idle Idle timeout.
8 Idle Busy • External connection established.

• External FastLink data transmission detected.
9 Busy Idle • External connection termination.

• Idle timeout.
10 Idle ConnectedRx Connection established.
11 ConnectedRx Idle • Connection termination (initiated by active Tx station).

• Idle timeout.
12 Connecting ConnectedRx Other station won competition for connection (other station
tries to set up a connection to this radio).
Table 5.9 State Transitions (Rebroadcast)
No. Old State New State Event
100 Connecting Rebro-Connecting Connection establishment over rebroadcast pend-

ing .
101 Rebro-Connecting Rebro-Busy A remote network in rebroadcast scenario is busy.
102 Rebro-Connecting ConnectedTx Connection over rebroadcast established.
103 Rebro-Connecting Idle Connection request failed, e.g. destination not

reachable.
104 Connecting Rebro-Busy Remote network in rebroadcast scenario is busy.
The Rebro-Busy state indicates that the connection

request failed due to a busy remote network (and not
due to a non-reachable station).
This transition is followed immediately by the next

transition (105).
105 Rebro-Busy Idle Remote network in rebroadcast scenario is busy.

FLM Re-Connect Delay
In case a connect request failed, the application must wait for the specified time (in seconds)
before issuing another connect request. This is required in order to avoid/greatly reduce the
risk of concurrent connect requests from several radios at the same time. It is recommended
to use the trap feature for this command in order to get instantly updated about changes to
this parameter.
FLM Message Size Threshold
Since FLM imposes some overhead (control messages), it does not make sense to use FLM
for short data transfers. Only longer transfers will benefit from the enhanced efficiency pro-
vided by FLM. The returned value (in bytes) shall provide a reference for making the decision
whether to use FLM or not for a data transfer of a specific length.
FLM Relative Idle Timeout
Returns a time in seconds that defines for how long an established FLM connection may re-
main unused until the FLM connection gets terminated automatically. An FLM connection is
considered as unused if no FLM assigned data is transferred or received. Data transfer or
reception of other data is not taken into account. It is recommended to use the trap feature
for this command in order to get instantly updated about changes to this parameter.
FastLink over Rebroadcast
The FLM feature can be used transparently in case of rebroadcast, i.e. there is no major dif-
ference in the use of FLM between a single network and a rebroadcast network topology. Of
course, the application will notice the difference in terms of longer FLM connection establish-
ment and data transmission times.
Special FLM connection states notify the application that an FLM connection is used over
Rebroadcast. The state transition from 'Connecting' to 'Rebro-Connecting' indicates FLM
connection establishment over more than one network.
The state transition into 'Rebro Busy' is followed immediately by a transition to the state 'Idle'
and indicates that a remote network (meaning not the local network in case of rebroadcast)
already has an active FLM connection and thus the connect request was denied.
During FLM connection establishment over rebroadcast, the Relative Idle Timeout (RIT) val-
ue will be updated for each remote network traversed towards the final destination. The ap-
plication should use a trap on the remote RIT command in order to get updated instantly
about changes. Also the Re-Connect Delay (RCD) value may be updated in case of Re-
broadcast und should be watched with a trap. The picture below shows an attempt of an FLM
connection establishment in a network topology with three networks A, B and C where re-
broadcast applies.

Figure 5.10 FastLink over Rebroadcast
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00012-A-02-1
6 6
CtoB
C1
C2
5
13
4
BtoC
4 4
10 12
B1
B2
BtoA
2
4
R1
R2
11 12
10
AtoB
A1
A2
4 7 8 9 4

1 Network A
2 Network B
3 Network C
4 IDLE
5 BUSY
6 CONNECTED
7 Connecting
8 Rebro-connecting
9 Rebro-busy
10 Connect request
11 Request pending
12 Rebro-busy
13 Remote Network C: State is busy
Network C has an active FLM connection.
Now, an application on PC A2 wants to establish an FLM connection to an application run-

ning on PC C2 and issues a 'Connect Request' (CR) command. The state changes from 'Idle'
to 'Connecting'. The CR is answered by the Radio AtoB in Network A with a 'Request Pend-
ing'. When the 'Request Pending' arrives at radio R2, the state changes to 'Rebro-Connect-
ing' and the 'Relative Idle Timeout' value gets updated. In the meanwhile the forwarded CR
traverses Network B and arrives at the Rebroadcast Radio BtoC. This radio knows the cur-
rent state in Network C and answers the CR with 'Rebro-Busy'. When this messages arrives
at the initiating radio R2 in Network A, the state changes from 'Rebro-Connecting' to 'Rebro-
Busy', followed immediately by a state change to 'Idle'.

M3SR Series 4100 Rebroadcast / Relay Mode
5.3.2.2 Rebroadcast / Relay Mode
Service Setup
To set up a relay or rebroadcast station two radios must be connected "back-to-back" over
their local Ethernet. The relay/rebroadcast radios have to be set to service IP_REBRO. All
other participating radios must use the service VOICE_O_IPD (Voice Priority Over IP Data).
Only R&S M3TR: To remind a user that service IP_REBRO is selected (and the special IP
address is valid), the pattern "RE" is shown on the MMI display.
Special ports: The rebroadcast/relay mode functionality uses two UDP ports. These
ports must not be used by any other application. These are port 38642 for rebroadcast/
relay voice service and port 38643 for broadcast forwarding.
Figure 5.11 Configuration/Indication Service IP_REBRO on MMI
R&S M3TR
R&S M3SR Series 4100
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00013-A-02-1

Local IP Subnet - Relay/Rebroadcast IP Address
As mentioned above, both relay/rebroadcast radios are connected via their local Ethernet
and therefore need an own IP subnet to communicate. The "standard" IP addresses of the
radios' Ethernet interfaces would normally not fit that purpose. So only for relay/rebroadcast
a further unique IP address for each relay/rebroadcast radio has to be configured, which is
only valid for the time service IP_REBRO is selected. This can be done using the Routing
Wizard of R&S RNMS3000, MMI or remote control (GB2PP).
For all other services the standard Ethernet IP is valid. If using the remote control
(GB2PP) access, the user must be aware that after switching to or from mode
IP_REBRO the remote connection will be closed. The connection has to be estab-
lished again, using the from now on valid IP address.

Figure 5.12 Configuration of IP Address for Relay/Rebroadcast Mode on MMI
R&S M3TR
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00014-A-02-1

Digital Voice Transfer
A relay/rebroadcast station transfers voice as digitally vocoded data stream. Both relay/re-
broadcast radios have to use the same vocoder type and data rate to ensure that there is no
loss of voice data and quality.
Further specific configurations and issues concerning the modes are discussed below.
Rebroadcast Mode
The Rebroadcast Mode is used to connect two IP subnets/waveform nets and transfer
both voice and IP data or just IP data over it. The two radios need only a "back-to-back" con-
nection over their local Ethernet. The subnets may use the same waveform on both sides or
different waveforms. If voice has to be transferred over a Rebroadcast Station, both radios
must use the same vocoder type and data rate (e.g. AMBE2k4 or MELP2k4).

Figure 5.13 Rebroadcast Scenario
PC1 PC3
1 3
9
5 8
7
6
10
2 4
PC2 PC4
11
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00015-A-02-1

1 IP subnet (e.g. 10.0.1.0)

2 IP subnet (e.g. 10.0.2.0)
3 IP subnet (e.g. 10.0.3.0)
4 IP subnet (e.g. 10.0.4.0)
5 IP subnet 1 (e.g. 10.1.1.0)
6 IP subnet (e.g. 10.2.0.0)
7 IP subnet 2 (e.g. 10.1.2.0)
8 Waveform net 1 (e.g. SECOM-H)
9 Waveform net 2 (e.g. SECOM-H)
10 Rebroadcast station
11 Example for data/voice path
Propagation and Routing

The digitally vocoded voice data is propagated according to the configuration of the wave-
form net. To transfer digitally vocoded data from one rebroadcast radio to the other, the data
is packed into IP packets and transferred as standard IP packets via Ethernet. The counter-
part radio unpacks the IP packets containing the digitally vocoded voice and propagates it
into its associated waveform net as digitally vocoded voice data again.
For transferring IP data from e.g. PC2 to PC3 a standard IP routing takes place. This means
that all involved nodes and radios need to have appropriate routing tables. This routing infor-
mation can be prepared automatically with the help of the Routing Wizard of
R&S RNMS3000. Alternatively, the routing tables may be set manually by using the MMI or
remote control.
If only IP data is transferred via a Rebroadcast Station, the data rates of the two asso-
ciated waveform nets may differ. Though the radios have large data buffers for inter-
mediate data storage, it may happen that data is lost when the second net is much
slower than the first net or the second net is "busy" and a lot of traffic is sent via the
Rebroadcast Station.

Local Voice Participation
Figure 5.14 Local Voice for Rebroadcast Mode
6
1
2 5
3 4
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00019-A-02-1
1 Net 1
2 Rebro/relay radio 1
3 Handset 1
4 Handset 2
5 Rebro/relay radio 2
6 Net 2
A user located at a rebroadcast station can speak and listen to the local waveform net by
using an analog device, e.g., a handset. This functionality can be enabled/disabled by
R&S RNMS3000 configuration, MMI or remote control (GB2PP). Disabling this functionality
may be desired in order to prevent monitoring of the voice traffic, e.g. at an unguarded sta-
tion. Local voice participation is only possible within the local waveform net the rebroadcast
radio belongs to. It is not possible to speak/listen to the waveform net of the partner rebroad-
cast radio. E.g. handset 1 is not able to monitor voice traffic from Net 2 and vice versa.
Local voice activity has the highest priority - so if PTT is pushed locally, all other voice
data to be forwarded by means of rebroadcast is dropped.

Figure 5.15 Local Voice Selection on MMI
R&S M3TR
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00017-A-02-1

Local Voice Forwarding
Due to the fact that voice is routed by means of the waveform settings and IP data should be
used in combination with a broadcast configuration on the waveform layer, voice would be
spread out over all nets which are connected to rebroadcast stations. To avoid this probably
unwanted effect, there is the possibility to disable forwarding of any incoming voice data over
the rebroadcast station. Nonetheless, it is possible to use the local handset or similar equip-
ment to participate in voice traffic of the local waveform net. The feature can be enabled/dis-
abled by R&S RNMS3000 configuration, MMI or remote control (GB2PP).
This functionality has to be set at the receiving-from-air radio. If disabled, all voice
data will be dropped instantly after reception from air. With this feature a rebroadcast
station may be configured to allow bidirectional, unidirectional or no voice forwarding
at all.

Figure 5.16 Voice Forwarding Selection on MMI
R&S M3TR
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00018-A-02-1

Relay Mode
The Relay Mode is mainly used to extend the operating range of radios within one IP subnet/
waveform net. A typical scenario could be if the radios are located around a hill, so that some
radios cannot catch the radio signals from the others. The Relay Station, placed at the top of
the hill, can be "seen" and reached by all radios around. A Relay Station consists of two ra-
dios which are connected "back-to-back" over their local Ethernet using a Rohde & Schwarz
accessory cable (ord. no. R&S GK3022 6148.6595.02).
In order to realize a relay scenario it is also necessary to configure the waveform net accord-
ingly.

Figure 5.17 Relay Scenario
PC1 PC3
1 1
PtM
1 2
5
PtP 4
PtM
1 1
PC2 PC4
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00020-A-02-1

1 IP subnet (e.g. 10.1.1.0)

2 Waveform net (e.g. SECOM-H)
3 IP subnet (e.g. 10.2.0.0)
4 Rx radio
5 Tx radio
6 Example of data/voice path
PtP Point-to-Point
PtM Point-to-Multipoint
Propagation
In case of a relay station the relay radios take over different roles, according to the IP subnet
and waveform configuration. Only one radio receives the data coming from the user radios
(Rx radio). For that purpose every user radio has a waveform point-to-point connection to the
Rx radio. The data is collected into IP packets and sent via local Ethernet to its partner radio.
The second radio only transmits the data coming from the Rx radio using a waveform point-
to-multipoint mode.
This configuration ensures a minimum impact on the particular radio channels, coming either
from the user radios or the relay Tx radio.
IP Routing
Concerning IP traffic, the PCs and the radios need specific IP routes. As mentioned before,
the two relay radios are also members of the same IP subnet as all other radios.
Configuration of PCs and user radios:
• The relay Rx radio must be set as gateway for all destinations.

Configuration of the relay radios:
• The relay radios need particular routing tables, too. The Rx radio has only one routing
table entry with default gateway Tx radio. The Tx radio needs routing table entries for all
PCs behind the radios.
With the Routing Wizard of R&S RNMS3000 these routes can be set automatically for the
user radios and also for the relay station's radios.

Figure 5.18 Relay IP Broadcast Selection on MMI
R&S M3TR
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00021-A-02-1

Relay IP Broadcast Forwarding
All radios in a relay scenario belong to the same subnet. Therefore, an IP broadcast of one
radio (e.g. an alert message or a GPS tracking report) would be consumed by the relay Rx
radio, but would not be propagated to all other radios. To provide also a forwarding of such
broadcast messages to the other radios, a "Relay IP Broadcast Forwarding" can be enabled.
The feature can be enabled/disabled by R&S RNMS3000 configuration, MMI or remote con-
trol (GB2PP).
This functionality is only intended for use in relay scenarios. Do not enable in case of
a rebroadcast scenario (not conform to RFC 791 and RFC 2644).
Local Voice Participation
A user located at a relay station can listen to the local waveform net by using an analog
equipment at the Rx radio and speak at the Tx radio's handset. This functionality can be en-
abled/disabled by R&S RNMS3000 configuration, MMI or remote control (GB2PP).
Disabling this functionality may be desired in order to prevent monitoring the voice traffic, e.g.
at an unguarded station.

Figure 5.19 Local Voice Selection on MMI
R&S M3TR
ICN-4G-M-231051-R-D0894-00018-A-02-1

Local Voice Forwarding
See ”Local Voice Forwarding” on p. 5.60

M3SR Series 4100 IPoA Configuration Menus
5.3.3 IPoA Configuration Menus
IPoA in R&S M3SR Series 4100 is available for the SECOM-H services IP_DATA,
VOICE_O_IPD and for ALE 3G link mode xDL with data source IPoA.
Figure 5.20 Menu 1331: IPoA CFG 1/2
ICN-4D-G-231051-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 IPoA Configuration Menus
Figure 5.21 Menu 1332: IPoA CFG 2/2
ICN-4D-G-231051-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Radio Air Interface IP Address
5.3.3.1 Changing the Radio Air Interface IP Address
Editor 1. Press softkey to open the editor for the air

IP address.
2. Use the knob or the numeric keypad to
edit each of the four numbers separately.
3. To select the next number press the ‘point’
key.
A message box appears: 'Please reboot the
radio to make this change take effect.'
The air IP address specifies the IP address of

the air IP interface. By this address the radio is
addressed within the air IP network on IP layer
level.
Combined with the air IP netmask, the air IP

network is defined.
It is required that all radios forming an air net-

work reside in the same air IP network in order
to allow proper IP routing.
This parameter needs a restart in order to

take effect.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Radio Air Interface Netmask
5.3.3.2 Changing the Radio Air Interface Netmask
Editor 1. Press softkey to open the editor for the air

interface netmask.
edit each of the four numbers of the net-
mask separately.
key.

Due to internal limitations of the air network,

the air interface netmask is restricted to the
range of
• 255.255.128.0 to 255.255.255.255 in the

network modes ROB and PRF and
• 255.255.255.128 to 255.255.255.255 in
RS-IRP mode.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the PPP IP Interface Address
5.3.3.3 Changing the PPP IP Interface Address
Editor 1. Press softkey to open the editor for the

PPP IP address.
edit each of the four numbers of the ad-
dress separately.
key.

Changing the PPP IP Interface Address
Apart from the Ethernet and air IP interface the

radio offers a third IP interface, the PPP IP in-
terface (point-to-point protocol). It allows a se-
rial connection from a computer to the radio by
means of the point-to-point protocol (PPP).
The PPP IP interface has a fixed network
mask of 255.255.255.0, but its IP address can
be configured here. A computer establishing a
PPP connection receives its IP address from
the radio, which is always "PPP IP address of
Radio" + 1.
The radio must have PPP enabled in its IP port

configuration, and the following settings apply
for the remote endpoint:
• The baudrate must be set to the same val-

ue as configured in the radio. Possible set-
tings are: 2400 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/
s and 115200 bit/s.
• No hardware flow control
• IP header compression may be enabled
• Supported authentication protocols are
PAP and CHAP
• User name/password: vxPPPClient/vxPP-
PClient

M3SR Series 4100 Remote Control via PPP
Remote Control via PPP
For starting a remote control session via PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) the radio must be con-
nected via serial cable to a remote station (i.e. PC). To establish the PPP session the above
mentioned settings (see Changing the PPP IP Interface Address) have to be adjusted on the
remote station and finally the PPP connection has to be started.
An additional routing entry (host route) needs to be set on the remote station to reach the
remote control server:
• Dest IP: IP of local Ethernet interface (main IP interface of the radio)

• Netmask: 255.255.255.255 ( host route)
• Gateway IP: remote connection IP of PPP session (provided by radio) = “PPP IP address
of Radio+1”
On a PC this could be the following command line:
route add 192.168.100.2 mask 255.255.255.255 192.168.0.2
with
radio’s local Ethernet IP = 192.168.100.2 and PC’s local PPP address = 192.168.0.2
Additionally, a gateway address must be configured, even if there is no gateway. The gate-
way address, which is by default 0.0.0.0, has to be changed to any unicast address within
the IP subnet of the radio’s Ethernet interface, except .0 and .255 and the radio IP address
itself.
Then remote control can be started by addressing the IP of the radio’s local Ethernet inter-
face.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Rebroadcast IP Address
5.3.3.4 Changing the Rebroadcast IP Address
Editor 1. Press softkey to open the editor for the

Rebroadcast IP address.
edit each of the four numbers of the ad-
dress separately.
key.
For further details see

sect. 5.3.2.2 Rebroadcast / Relay Mode.

M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Voice Forward Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off
5.3.3.5 Switching the Voice Forward Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'ReBro VFw' to toggle

rebroadcast voice mode on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF


M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Local Voice Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off
5.3.3.6 Switching the Local Voice Mode for Rebroadcast On or Off
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'ReBro Voice' to toggle

local voice mode for rebroadcast on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF


M3SR Series 4100 Switching the Relay IP Mode for Broadcast On or Off
5.3.3.7 Switching the Relay IP Mode for Broadcast On or Off
Toggle 1. Press the softkey 'Bro Fwd' to toggle IP re-

lay mode for broadcast on/off.
Possible values:
• ON
• OFF


M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Operation Mode
5.3.3.8 Changing the Operation Mode
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'OpMode'.

2. Select 'Robust'’ or 'RS_IRP' from listbox.
For transceivers this softkey is always en- There are two operation modes that can be
abled. configured:
• Robust mode – provides higher reliability

at the expense of throughput. This mode
synchronizes the radios on the air network
with each sending of data.
• RS-IRP mode (RS_IRP) – similar to the
performance mode, but ensures compati-
bility with the RS-IRP protocol at the ex-
pense of performance.
Restrictions:
The RS_IRP mode cannot be selected/de-se-
lected via MMI, i.e. the RS_IRP mode must be
defined in the mission configuration with the
help of R&S RNMS3000.
The radio being the time reference unit (TRU)

in the network must be "visible" (radio commu-
nication possible) to all other radios belonging
to the network. Please refer to the relevant
documentation on how to configure a radio as
TRU in an air network.

M3SR Series 4100 Changing the Connection Mode
5.3.3.9 Changing the Connection Mode
Listbox 1. Press softkey 'ConMode'.

2. Select 'P to P' or 'Net' from listbox.
The connection mode setting depends on the

network topology the radio is used in. For sin-
gle point-to-point connections, i.e. when only
two radios form a network, the point-to-point
connection mode (P to P) shall be used for
best performance. Nevertheless, network con-
nection mode (Network) can be used in a net-
work consisting of only 2 radios. Due to a
different access scheme on the air channel, a
degraded performance must be taken into ac-
count compared to P- to-P mode.
In networks consisting of more than 2 radios,

the Network mode must be selected. Proper
functioning in P-to-P mode is highly improba-
ble in such a network.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing the Routing Table
5.3.3.10 Editing the Routing Table
Unicast Routing Basics
The entries in the routing table define where to forward incoming IP data to. Basically, a rout-
ing entry consists of a network (specified by IP address and netmask) and a gateway. When
the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the network of a routing entry, it
is forwarded to the specified gateway. The radio chooses automatically the proper outgoing
IP interface, i.e. if the gateway is in the range of the air IP network, the air IP interface is used
as output IP interface.
Therefore, the IP address of the gateway must be reachable directly by the radio and thus
should reside in the range of the Ethernet, air or PPP (point-to-point protocol) IP interface.
Radio1 Air IP: 192.168.200.1
Routing Table IP Address Netmask Gateway
192.168.150.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.200.2
Radio2 Air IP: 192.168.200.2
Routing Table IP Address Netmask Gateway
192.168.140.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.200.1
• Radio1 needs a route to forward packets destined to PC2 (192.168.150.2). The gateway
for this route is Radio2 (192.168.200.2) which is reachable by Radio1 over the air IP in-
terface.
• Radio2 needs a route to forward packets destined to PC1 (192.168.140.2). The gateway
for this route is Radio1 (192.168.200.1) which is reachable by radio Radio2 over its air
IP interface.
• There are no explicit routes necessary to route packets from one IP interface to another,
e.g. Radio2 can forward packets for PC2 automatically from the Air IP interface to the
Ethernet IP interface.
The necessary routing configuration of PC1 and PC2 is omitted.

Changing the Unicast Routing Table
Figure 5.22 IPoA Unicast Routing Menu
ICN-4D-G-231051-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
The blue bar 'Unicast Routing' shows the index of the currently visible entry (n) and the total
number of entries (m) in the form n/m. One entry consists of the parameters
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway Addr.
If 'Insert Address' or 'Edit Address' is pressed, an editor will appear.
Enter or alter first parameter (IP Addr). Use the keypad or knob to set the first octet. Then
press the ‘point’ key to enter the next octet (if you made a mistake you can press the ‘point’
key several times until you are at the entry which has to be corrected). If the IP address is
complete, press 'ENT'. The editor for the subnet mask opens; proceed the same way as with
the IP address. After pressing 'ENT' the editor for the gateway address opens. After the gate-
way address was entered, press 'ENT' again. The entry is now in the routing table.

Softkey Description
Navigate to the IPoA CFG 1 page.
Enter the unicast routing entries; if the softkey is pressed, a gray bar on the right-hand side of
the unicast routing entries appears. To navigate through the entries use the knob.
Enter the multicast routing entries (see sect. 5.3.3.11 Editing the Multicast Routing Table).
Add a new routing.
Delete the routing entry currently visible (all three parameters).
Edit the routing entry currently visible (all three parameters).
A maximum of 15 entries is allowed per Preset Page and a total maximum of 200 en-
tries is allowed for the radio.

M3SR Series 4100 Editing the Multicast Routing Table
5.3.3.11 Editing the Multicast Routing Table
Multicast Routing Basics
In a multicast-enabled environment, the radio can act as a multicast router in order to forward
multicast IP (internet protocol) packets from the source towards the destination. The radio is
not intended for sending or receiving multicast packets itself. The multicast (MC) routing ta-
ble allows a static definition of the forwarding rules for multicast packets. Dynamic population
of the table with the help of a multicast routing protocol like IGMP (internet group manage-
ment protocol) is not supported.
The multicast routing table is completely independent of the unicast routing table.
Multicast IP packets are destined to a group of receivers (1 to n relationship), specified by

the group IP address.
According to RFC 1112 (request for commands), the multicast group IP address has a range
of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
RFC 3171 (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) Guidelines for IPv4 Multicast Ad-
dress Assignments) lists the current assignment practice of multicast group addresses. The
block from 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 is reserved for multicast routing protocols. Like most
router implementations, the R&S radio does not route packets within this block. Therefore
the possible configuration range is limited to 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
It is advised to follow the guidelines of RFC 3171 and to use only the block 239.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.255, which is defined as an administratively scoped block, i.e. for local usage.
A multicast routing table entry consists of the sender IP address, group IP address, routing
direction and the time-to-live (TTL) threshold.
The sender IP address defines the source / sender of multicast packets that shall be routed.
The group IP address defines the multicast group that wants to receive multicast data from
the multicast sender.
The routing direction specifies the incoming and outgoing IP interface of a route, i.e. ETH
(Ethernet)  AIR defines the Ethernet IP interface as incoming and the air IP interface as
outgoing interface.
It is possible to configure more than one multicasting route with the same sender and group
IP but different routing directions, creating a 1-to-n relationship between incoming and out-
going interfaces, e.g. to configure direction AIR  ETH and AIR  PPP (point-to-point pro-
tocol). In this case, multicast packets coming from the air IP interface will be forwarded to the
Ethernet IP interface and to the PPP IP interface.
On the other side it makes no sense to configure two routes with the same sender and group
IP, but opposite directions, like AIR  ETH and ETH  AIR.
The AIR -> AIR routing direction is used only in multi-hop scenarios.

When two radios are out of reach, an intermediate radio must forward incoming multicast
packets (coming over the radio channel) to the radio channel, thus AIR  AIR. Directions
involving the PPP interface are only active if PPP is enabled in the SRC setting of the IP port.
The TTL threshold defines the TTL value that incoming multicast packets must exceed in or-
der to be routed. Packets with a TTL equal to or smaller than the configured threshold will be
dropped.
Radio1 Air IP: 192.168.200.1
MC Routing Table Sender IP Group IP Direction TTL
192.168.101.2 224.0.5.1 ETH  AIR 2
Radio2 Air IP: 192.168.200.2
192.168.101.2 224.0.5.1 AIR  ETH 1
Radio3 Air IP: 192.168.200.3
192.168.101.2 224.0.5.1 AIR  ETH 1
Radio4 Air IP: 192.168.200.4
192.168.101.2 224.0.5.1 AIR  PPP 1
• PC1 with IP 192.168.101.2 sends a multicast packet to the group 224.0.5.1. Radio1 re-
ceives the packet on the Eth IP interface. A lookup in the MC routing table finds an entry
with matching sender and group IP address. According to the routing direction the packet
is passed to the air IP interface for transmission. The packet is transmitted over the air
network and is received by Radio2 to 4 on its air IP interfaces. Radio2 finds a matching
entry in its multicast routing table (sender 192.168.101.2, group 224.0.5.1). The routing
direction defines the Eth IP interface as outgoing interface and the packet is transmitted
on the LAN (local area network).
• According to its multicast routing table, Radio4 forwards the received packet to the PPP
IP interface. PC4 receives the packet over the established PPP link.
• Usefulness of the TTL threshold:
Each IP packet (and so multicast packets) contains a TTL field. The initial value set by
the sender is decremented by each router (hop) the packet passes. If the packet's TTL
reaches the value 1, the packet is not forwarded anymore by the router, i.e. the packet
will be dropped.

The TTL threshold of a multicast routing table entry defines the minimum TTL that incom-
ing packets must exceed in order to be forwarded.
In our example the initial value of the packet's TTL must be 3 in order to pass the first
hop (Radio1), since its matching multicast routing table entry has a configured TTL
threshold of 2. This value ensures that the packet has a large enough TTL to pass the
second hops (Radio2, 3, 4) on the way to its destinations.
There is nothing wrong in leaving the default TTL threshold of 1 unchanged, especially
when the entire network topology is unknown (like number of hops from source to desti-
nation).
A proper TTL threshold configuration can avoid an unnecessary forwarding of packets
whose (too small) TTL will cause next hop routers to drop them.
The necessary configuration for PC 1 to 4 is omitted.
Changing the Multicast Routing Table
Figure 5.23 IPoA Multicast Routing Menu
ICN-4D-G-231051-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1

The blue bar 'Multicast Routing' shows the index of the currently visible entry (n) and the total
number of entries (m) in the form n/m. One entry consists of the parameters
• Sender IP Address
• Group IP Address
• Direction
• TTL
If 'Insert Address' or 'Edit Address' is pressed, an editor will appear.
Enter or alter the first parameter (Sender IP Addr). Use the keypad or knob to set the first
octet. Then press the ‘point’ key at the keypad to enter the next octet (if you made a mistake
you can press the ‘point’ key several times until you are at the entry which has to be correct-
ed). If the IP address is complete, press 'ENT'. The editor for the group IP address opens;
proceed the same way as with the Sender IP Addr. After pressing 'ENT' the editor for the
direction opens. After pressing 'ENT' the editor for TTL opens. After the TTL was entered,
press 'ENT' again. The entry is now in the routing table.
The direction has to be set by entering a number:
0 ETH -> AIR (Ethernet to Air)
1 AIR -> ETH (Air to Ethernet)
2 PPP -> AIR (Point-to-Point Protocol to Air)
3 AIR -> PPP (Air to Point-to-Point Protocol)
4 AIR -> AIR (Air to Air)
The routing direction for multicast packets is from input to output interface.

Softkey Description
Navigate to the IPoA CFG 1 page.
Enter the unicast routing entries (see sect. 5.3.3.10 Editing the Routing Table).
Enter the multicast routing entries, if the softkey is pressed, a gray bar on the right-hand side of
the unicast routing entries appears. To navigate through the entries use the knob.
Add a new routing.
Delete the routing entry currently visible (all three parameters).
Edit the routing entry currently visible (all three parameters).
A maximum of 15 entries is allowed per Preset Page and a total maximum of 200 en-
tries is allowed for the radio.

M3SR Series 4100 Message Service
5.4 Message Service
5.4.1 Basics of Message Service
The Message Service functionality is used for the exchange of short data messages (SDM)
between radios in the same network.
Message Service is available with these waveforms in combination with waveform services
IP-Data and Voice-over-IP Data:
SECOM-V x
SECOM-H x x
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Di- x

vision Multiplex)
ALE 3G x x
Received messages can be accessed via the man-machine interface (MMI) and remote con-
trol interfaces. An external PC-based application may be used for accessing / displaying or
further processing of stored messages.
5.4.1.1 Storage Strategy
Incoming alert and SDM messages are stored persistently on the radio. The receive buffer
depends on the currently selected Preset Page. The radio can support individual receive
buffers for up to ten IPoA Preset Pages. If the receive buffer is full, any new incoming mes-
sage will subsequently replace the receive buffer's oldest message. The oldest message will
be deleted in the process.
5.4.1.2 Message Size
An SDM message with standard encoding may hold up to 200 characters.

5.4.1.3 Prerequisites
In order to transmit and receive messages over Message Service, the following requirements
must be met:
• A Message Service type (alert messages and/or SDM messages) must be activated via
R&S RNMS3000 (radio network management system) and
• IP_DATA or VOICE_O_IPD must be selected as active Service Group (in ALE 3G (au-
tomatic link establishment 3rd generation) the Link Mode xDL (ARQ protocols, x = H or
L) and the xDL Port IP must be selected) and
• the radio needs to be synchronous with its waveform specific network and
• a valid IPoA net must be configured in R&S RNMS3000 (regarding IPoA addresses,
IPoA (IP over air) operation mode, routing tables plus an appropriate waveform data
rate).
5.4.1.4 IP-Based Interface for External Applications
The Message Service provides an IP-based interface for external applications to receive and
transmit messages.
5.4.1.5 Message Addressing
The predefined alert messages are broadcast to all stations in the network.
It is possible to send SDM messages
• to a single message recipient within the current radio network (unicast addressing).
• to every radio within the current network (broadcast addressing).
5.4.1.6 Participant Selection List (R&S M3TR only)
The alert messages can only be broadcast. Due to this, the description below is related to
SDM messages. The selection list for the addressable participants supports the selection of
• a single GPS participant (point-to-point)

• all GPS participants (broadcast).
After a command softkey is pressed, the user is presented with a selection list of
R&S RNMS3000 configured radios participating in GPS reporting:

The list contains
• an entry for broadcast and

• the RGA (Radio Global Address) names of all configured participants except for the own
radio and
• predefined nicknames.
5.4.1.7 Indication of a New SDM in the Waveform- Specific Operational Menu

(R&S M3TR only)
On arrival of a new SDM message, a NEW SDM message will be indicated in the main win-
dow of the operational menu. This message is only visible in idle state. The indication is
maintained until all messages in the received SDM messages list have been read.

M3SR Series 4100 Menu Structure
5.4.2 Menu Structure
On the left-hand side of the Message menu you can find the softkeys for the inbox.
On the right-hand side of the Message menu you can find the softkeys for the drafts.
On the bottom side of the Message menu you can find the softkeys which are used for both.
Figure 5.24 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, SDM Message Inbox
5 3
ICN-4D-G-231053-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1
1 Selected folder
2 Number of messages in the box
3 Status of the outgoing messages
S is the number of SDM messages which are in the in the outgoing queue,
A the number of messages in the alert queue
4 SDM message content
5 Date and time when the message was sent
6 Sender of the message

M3SR Series 4100 Inbox
5.4.2.1 Inbox
The Inbox shows all SDM messages received by the radio.
The messages are sorted in the order they are received with the latest one at the top (no. 1).
The softkey and the blue bar at the top show the total number of received messages and the
index of the message which is currently shown.
Below the sender of the message is shown. If the RGA name is known, it will be shown. If
the RGA name is unknown, the nickname will be shown. If neither of them is known, the IP
address of the sender will be shown.
Below the date and time when the message was sent is shown. This is dependent on the
date and time the sender has configured on its radio.
RGA and nicknames can only be configured in R&S RNMS3000.
Softkey Description
Navigate to Home Menu.
The numbers n / m show the total number (m) of received messages and the
index of the message which is currently shown (n).
Reply to the incoming message, the editor opens where text can be edited and
sent (pre-editing is possible).
Copy the message into the Drafts folder. If 'Pre- Editing' is on, the text can be
altered in the editor before saving.
Delete the message.

M3SR Series 4100 Inbox
Softkey Description
Create a new message.
On: A message which is supposed to be sent or stored, can be edited in ad-

vance.
Off: If a message is to be stored or sent, it cannot be edited in advance
Move the curser to the beginning or the end in the text editor.
Navigate within the Drafts.
Navigate to the Alarm Message page.

M3SR Series 4100 Drafts Folder
5.4.2.2 Drafts Folder
The Drafts folder contains all predefined SDM messages.
The navigation is similar to the inbox.
Softkey Description
Delete the draft message.
Create a new message.
On: A message which is supposed to be sent or stored, can be edited in ad-

vance.
Off: If a message is to be stored or sent, it cannot be edited in advance.
Move the cursor to the beginning or the end in the text editor.
Send the current draft message (pre-editing is possible).
Edit draft message.
New draft message (pre-editing is possible).

M3SR Series 4100 Text Editor
5.4.2.3 Text Editor
Figure 5.25 Menu 1341 Msg Service 1/2, Text Editor
ICN-4D-G-231053-R-D0894-00002-A-01-1
To edit a message you can use the softkeys on the left-hand and right-hand side or the nu-
meric keypad of R&S GB 4000C.
The number in the first line of the softkey label refers to the corresponding number on the
numeric keypad.
To write a 'b' you can either press the softkey '2' twice, or you press the key '2' on the keypad
twice.
To write an uppercase letter use the 'Caps Lock' softkey to switch this function on. All letters
you enter will be written in uppercase letters until you switch 'Caps Lock' off.
The 'Delete' softkey deletes the letter preceding the curser if 'Mode' is set to 'Move'.
If a part of the text is selected, this selection will be deleted.
To move the cursor use the rotating knob on R&S GB 4000C.
To select one or more letters set 'Mode' to 'Select', and use the rotating knob to mark the
letters. The selected letters will be underlined in blue.
Depending on whether you entered the editor menu from the Drafts or Send folder, the top
right button shows 'SAVE' or 'SEND' to store the message or to send it immediately.

M3SR Series 4100 Text Editor
Softkey Description
Close the editor; if the message was altered, the user is asked if he wants to save the message.
By pressing the softkey (or '1' on the numeric keypad) you can toggle between the different
characters.
<SP> means space.
On: The characters will be in UPPERCASE letters.
Off: The characters will be in lowercase letters.
Delete the marked text. If no text is marked it deletes the letter preceding the cursor.
Move: If the cursor is moved, it will mark the letters from the current position.
Select: The cursor is moved to a certain position.
By pressing the softkey (or '0' on the numeric keypad) you can toggle between the different
characters.
<NL> means new line.
If the 'SAVE' softkey appears at the top right, the message can be saved.
If the 'SEND' softkey appears at the top right, the message can be sent immediately.

M3SR Series 4100 Alert Messages
5.4.2.4 Alert Messages
Figure 5.26 Alert Messages
ICN-4D-G-231053-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
Alert messages can only be viewed or sent. They must be configured in RNMS (where they
are called Alarms).
A new incoming message is signalled with a pop-up which has to be confirmed by pressing
'ENT'. The message will also pop up in other SECOM-H IPoA menus. An alert tone can be
set to inform acoustically about an incoming alert message.
The acoustic signal is only audible if the sound is not turned off.
It does not overwrite the sound settings!

Alert Inbox
Figure 5.27 Menu 1342 Msg Service 2/2, Alert Inbox
ICN-4D-G-231053-R-D0894-00004-A-01-1
1 Code Number
2 Meaning of the Code
Incoming messages are in the inbox, they can only be viewed and deleted.
To navigate through the inbox, use the rotating knob.

Softkey Description
Navigate to the previous (SDM) page.
Navigate to the alert inbox, the softkey shows the total number of alert messages and the index
of the message which is currently shown.
Delete the currently shown message in the inbox.
On: An alert tone is audible when a new alert message arrives.
Off: No acoustic alert
Alert Sending
To send an alert message, choose the appropriate message and press 'Send'. An alert mes-
sage is always a broadcast message sent to all network stations.
Softkey Description
Send the chosen alert message to all stations within the network.
A list of pre-defined codes which can be sent.
On: An alert tone is audible when a new alert message arrives.
Off: No acoustic alert

M3SR Series 4100 Voice over IP (VoIP)
5.5 Voice over IP (VoIP)
5.5.1 Basics of Voice over IP (VoIP)
The VoIP service functionality enables a radio to perform voice communication with an ex-
ternal VoIP user over an IP network. The external VoIP user is an IP-capable device such as
a VoIP telephone or the R&S GB4000V.
Remote operation is a typical use case of the VoIP service, where besides the voice over IP,
the remote control of the radio is also performed via IP.
The Figure 5.28 shows an IP-based remote operation application.
Figure 5.28 IP-Based Remote Operation Application
1 2 3
ICN-4G-N-231054-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1
1 Radio
2 IP network
3 Remote controller
4 VoIP user
The VoIP service can be used for a voice communication between an external VoIP user and
a radio network. For this purpose, one radio in the radio network acts as VoIP gateway. The
VoIP gateway radio is connected via Ethernet to an IP network and handles calls originated
from or coming towards the radio network. Any radio in the network can act in the role of VoIP
gateway. This role is configured via R&S RNMS3000.

For ALE-3G, the phone service has some limitations regarding call signalling (see
”Call Initiation” on p. 5.111).
5.5.1.1 Configuration Scenarios
Connecting a Single Radio Cell with a VoIP Network

Figure 5.29 illustrates the architecture of a single radio cell connected to a VoIP network us-
ing a Gateway Radio (GWR) to connect with the IP network.
Figure 5.29 Connecting a Radio Network to a VoIP Network
4
2 5
3
7
8
ICN-4G-Q-231054-R-D0894-00010-A-01-1
1. CNR station name BRAVO

2. IPoA network (SECOM-V or ALE-3G)
3. GWR station name ALPHA
IP-host name "gwr_alpha"
4. Inbound dials
RGA_BROADCAST@gwr_alpha
BRAVO@gwr_alpha
5. VoIP network
6. VoIP-PBX "v-server"
7. Outbound dials
0015192345656@v-server
8. CNR station CHRIS

The radios “ALPHA”, “BRAVO” and “CHRIS” are connected with ALE-3G or SECOM-V. AL-
PHA is configured as a GWR and connected to the VoIP private branch exchange (VoIP-
PBX) “v-server” using ETHERNET. The PBX must support the IETF RFC 3261 SIP standard
and the RFC 3550 realtime transport protocol standard.
It is not a mandatory requirement to connect the GWR to a PBX – it is also possible to con-
nect just one phone peer to peer to the GWR. A PBX has the advantage to offer voice
prompts to inform caller or callee about a radio call and how to proceed with PTT on the
phone. This makes the system more user friendly. Additionally a PBX can be used as a gate-
way into a public network or could be used to transfer calls to other radio cells. Combinations
of two GWR over ETHERNET could be used to connect two radio nets over VoIP.
The communication between GWR and the other radios of the group is implemented using
a proprietary protocol, therefore the SIP settings in the CNRs must not be configured. Only
the GWR implements the SIP gateway to the PBX.
Inbound Calls
Inbound calls into the radio network allow the connection to one of the other radios of the
group or to the whole group using a broadcast target URI.
If the external caller wishes to be connected to a particular radio e.g. “BRAVO”, the PBX
sends SIP invites e.g. to BRAVO@gwr_alpha (the hostname of GWR “ALPHA”). The voice
stream from the PBX in direction to “BRAVO” can be received only on this particular radio.
Receiving the voice stream at “CHRIS” is not possible. If the caller wishes to broadcast his
message to all members of a radio cell, the PBX sends the SIP invite to
RGA_BROADCAST@gwr_alpha. The GWR will be set to broadcast mode and the voice
stream from the caller can be received on all radios of the cell.
Because any one voice session is possible at a time, the GWR will reject any further calls.
Outbound Calls
The system behavior in case of outbound calls relies strongly on the configuration of the ra-
dios. In case of broadcast mode all radios of a cell are able to listen to the voice stream from
the particular radio to the PBX.
In difference to the first case nobody else can listen to the voice stream towards the GWR if
the operator of the radio has chosen a point-to-point station connection to the GWR radio.
There is no outgoing call towards the SIP network possible if the operator chooses a point-
to-point connection to a radio other than the GWR.
CNR Removal into another Radio Cell

There are scenarios where many GWR radios are installed along a line (e.g. border control).
The radios of the group are installed on vehicles moving between different locations and
changing from one radio cell to the next.
The operator needs to change to another preset page to connect to the GWR of the new ra-
dio cell. The preparation of those scenarios is possible using the RNMS Mission Planner soft-
ware.

The radio registers itself at the GWR after the preset page has been changed. The GWR
sends a SIP registration for this CNR to the PBX. This allows the PBX to route calls to this
CNR using the correct and current GWR address.
This scenario requires SIP clients to register with the SIP PBX.

Figure 5.30 CNR - Change of the Radio Cell
9 3 4
11
9 5
8 7
10
ICN-4G-Q-231054-R-D0894-00011-A-01-1

1 Group member 1 (CHRIS)

2 Proprietary protocol (IP over air)
3 GWR station name BETHA
IP host name "gwr_betha"
4 Inbound dial
CHRIS@gwr_betha
5 VoIP network
6 SIP PBX
7 Inbound dial
CHRIS@gwr_alpha
8 GWR station name ALPHA
IP host name "gwr_alpha"
9 IPoA network (SECOM-V or ALE-3G)
10 Group member 2 (BRAVO)
11 Group member moves with a vehicle into the next network cell and connects manually to the
new GWR.
The IP address of the hosting GWR changes and a REGISTER has to be sent to the SIP
PBX.
SIP Domain Connect Over Air

Figure 5.31 shows the configuration:

Figure 5.31 SIP Domain Connect Over Air
230
231 6
2
10 7
3 4
001519898
100
120 8
ICN-4G-Q-231054-R-D0894-00012-A-01-1

1 GWR station name BETHA

IP host name "gwr_betha"
2 Proprietary protocol (IP over air)
3 GWR station name ALPHA
IP host name "gwr_alpha"
4 Inbound dial
100@gwr_alpha
5 Public telephone network (PSTN)
6 SIP PBX 2 with PSTN connection
7 VoIP network
8 SIP PBX 1, e.g. on a vessel
9 Inbound dial
10 IPoA network (SECOM-V or ALE-3G)
The configuration can be used e.g. to connect a local VoIP network on a vessel with a local
VoIP network on land with a PBX connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN). This would allow calls from extensions of the vessel to private extensions at the
headquarter on land or destinations in the public telephone network and vice versa. The only
limitation is that only one call is possible at time.
Both GWRs must be in one air network and be connected peer to peer over IPoA. This
means that on GWR ‘BETHA” the following parameters of GWR “ALPHA” have to be config-
ured:
• VoIP service “on”

• Signaling mode “Gateway”
• SIP settings
• BOA (broadcast on air) Gateway address of the remote radio
The same has to be done on “ALPHA” using the values of “BETHA”.
In the dial plan of PBX 1 a prefix must be configured which routes calls to the GWR gw_beta.
GW_beta forwards the request to gw_alpha using the proprietary protocol. GW_alpha sends
an SIP invite to the PBX which decides based on dial prefixes if the call has to be forwarded
to the PSTN or if one of the local extensions has to be called.
Calls from land to sea are going the same way, the only difference is being, that only exten-
sions are available (no routing to other networks).

Scenario “Remote Phone Handle”

This configuration can be used to connect a single radio of a cell to a VoIP network to par-
ticipate in the conversation inside the radio cell using the VoIP connection.
No broadcast or directed connection establishment to particular other radios is possible, it is

just an “over IP extension” of the handle.
• SIP mode on the radio must be “on”

• Signalling mode “off”
• SIP settings have to be provided
The invite from the VoIP network sends URIs with a user “LOCAL” e.g. “INVITE LO-
CAL@192.168.1.100”, or empty user part 192.168.1.100.
5.5.1.2 General Constraints
• All radios belonging to the same radio network must have the same settings in the un-
derlying waveform (ALE-3G, SECOM-V), data rates, Voice-over-IP Data, etc.
• Since this service requires the IPoA service to be enabled, all the constraints defined to
the IPoA service must be met.
• VoIP gateway radio is able to handle one SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) call session
at a time.
• Service configuration, as the definition of the VoIP gateway radio and the activation of
the phone service should be performed via R&S RNMS3000.
• PBX or VoIP phone must not offer more than one CODEC. The preferred CODEC is
G.711 A-law.
5.5.1.3 Call Session
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used to transport packets over the IP network. The
RTP packets are encoded with G.711 A-law. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is used to ini-
tiate, modify and terminate the RTP call session and makes use of the Session Description
Protocol (SDP) for defining session parameters.
Only one call session at a time is supported by the VoIP gateway radio. If an external VoIP
user requests a second call session, it will get a busy signal. If a radio requests a call while
another is already being established, the second request will be ignored.
Voice Stream Conversion between Radio and VoIP Network
Once a SIP call session has been established, the VoIP gateway radio is responsible for the
conversion between voice stream (radio network side) and RTP stream (IP network side) as
well as for the transcoding. On IP network side, voice is sent in RTP packets encoded with
G.711. On the radio network side, voice communication occurs using the respective wave-
form and vocoder adopted in this radio network.

After the VoIP gateway radio has transcoded the incoming message from the IP network, it
is then able to send the voice stream to all radios in this radio network. Three mechanisms
are supported for the activation of the VoIP gateway transmission:
• PTT bit in the RTP header extension

PTT bit indication in the RTP header extension is supported as defined by EUROCAE
137-1. Only if the PTT bit in the RTP header extension is set, will VoIP gateway radio
transmission be activated, i.e., voice stream will be broadcast to the radios in the radio
network.
• Use of phone keys
The use of phone keys indicating the activation and the deactivation of the VoIP gateway
radio transmission is also supported, for e.g. phone keys '1' and '2'. These keys can be
configured via R&S RNMS3000 and it is also possible to have the same phone key for
activation and deactivation. The transmission of the DTMF tones is done as RTP event
according to RFC2833.
• VOX
VOX functionality at the VoIP gateway radio is as well supported for the activation of the
VoIP gateway radio transmission.
Voice Communication inside the Radio Network during a Session
During an active VoIP connection the external VoIP user having a session with the VoIP
gateway radio is able to listen to any communication taking place inside the radio network,
which is also addressed to the VoIP gateway radio.
Only R&S M3TR: For the configuration of the Squelch Line see 'Switching the Squelch Line
On or Off'.
5.5.1.4 Phone Service
Phone book
Each radio in the radio network has a phone book, with preconfigured phone entries. Up to
20 phone book entries can be defined, each consisting of a name, a number and an address.
Phone book entries are selectable from the MMI (Man-Machine Interface) and by remote
command (GB2PP). Only the name of the phone book entry is displayed on the MMI.
Only R&S M3TR: The phone book is also used for a speed dial in the phone patch
mode for fixed frequency (see ’Basics of Phone Patch Mode’). In this case, the dialled
numbers are converted into DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) tones locally and sent
over the air. For the VoIP Service, the dialled number is sent over the air to the VoIP
gateway radio, which adapts this message into a SIP invite request.

Call Initiation
An operator at any radio in the radio network is able to initiate a call. A phone book entry can
be chosen remotely (GB2PP) or from the MMI. It is also possible to dial the SIP phone num-
ber of the desired called party from the MMI. This request is sent to the VoIP gateway radio,
which tries to initiate a call session with the desired called party through SIP.
When an external VoIP user wants to call the radio network, it calls the VoIP gateway radio.
To address a particula radio in the radio nework, the Name of the Radio (RGA, ALE-3G) in
the network is called. The VoIP gateway radio is able to accept an incoming call automati-
cally after a period of time defined by means of the automatic call accept delay parameter
configured for the VoIP gateway radio via the R&S RNMS3000 (the default value is 10 s).
However, in case the automatic response is not desired, this parameter should be set to
65535 s to deactivate it. This ensures that the incoming call can only be answered by an op-
erator of a radio in the radio network.
For SECOM-V, if the radio network is called, the VoIP gateway radio broadcasts a signalling
message announcing the incoming call to the endpoint radios. Operators are able to accept
this call before the timeout defined by the automatic call accept delay. Calls can be accepted
on any radio. Since ALE-3G uses the standard xDL for IPoA services which does not support
broadcast, only the remote radio can accept an incoming call (either automatically or manu-
ally).
Call Termination
Any radio operator in the radio network is able to terminate incoming or outgoing calls to or
from his radio if the phone service is enabled. The call session can also be terminated by the
external VoIP user.
The limitation of the phone service for ALE-3G affects only the broadcast of signalling
messages from the VoIP gateway to the endpoint radios. Therefore the announcement
of an incoming call to the endpoint radios in broadcast mode is not supported. The
initiation and termination of a call from an endpoint radio is, nevertheless, not affected
by this limitation.
5.5.1.5 Scenario: Call Session between a Radio Network and a VoIP Telephone
This scenario describes a VoIP communication over an IP network between a radio network
and a VoIP telephone.

Figure 5.32 Connection between a Radio Network and a VoIP Telephone
2 3 4
ICN-4G-N-231054-R-D0894-00003-A-01-1
1 Radio 1
2 Radio Network
3 VoIP Gateway Radio
4 IP Network
5 VoIP Telephone
6 Radio 2
With the phone service enabled, if the operator of radio 1 wants to call a VoIP telephone con-
nected to an IP network, the operator can select the phone book entry corresponding to the
desired called party or dial its number from the MMI. This is will be sent over the air to the
VoIP gateway radio, which will translate it into a SIP signalling message. The gateway radio
invites the VoIP telephone for a call session over the IP network.
If the telephone wants to call the radio network, it will call the VoIP gateway radio. The in-
coming call can either be answered by the VoIP gateway radio (automatically or manually)
or by an operator at an endpoint radio, depending on the waveform used inside the radio net-
work and on the definition of the automatic call accept delay parameter via R&S RNMS3000
(see ”Call Initiation” on p. 5.111). In case of a broadcast call all radios can accept or deny the
incoming call.
The call setup procedure starts with the exchange of SIP signalling between the VoIP gate-
way radio and the VoIP telephone, and the exchange of proprietary signalling between the
VoIP gateway radio and the radios if the phone service is enabled. Once the call session is
established, the VoIP telephone is able to communicate with the radio network. Any radio
which was addressed by this call is able to communicate with the VoIP telephone. Moreover,
the VoIP telephone will listen to any communication occurring inside the radio network which
is addressed to the VoIP gateway radio.

If the phone service is enabled, local acoustic signals are played at the radio operator’s side,
and messages are displayed on the MMI. Messages will be sent to announce an incoming
call, to inform when the call session has been established, when the called party is ringing
or when the call session has ended.

M3SR Series 4100 PHONE Menu
5.5.2 PHONE Menu
The PHONE menu is accessible through the softkey ‘Phone’ on the bottom of the second
Home menu (see sect. 4.4.2 ALE-3G Menu Tree).
Figure 5.33 Menu 1255: PHONE
ICN-4D-G-231054-R-D0894-00001-A-01-1
1 Call State: idle, dialing, connected

2 Information about the other calling party: name, number and address.
3 Information about the phone book entry: name, number and address.
4 Phone Book entries, entry n from the total of m entries (n/m).

M3SR Series 4100 Entering the Phone Number for a Manual Dial
5.5.2.1 Entering the Phone Number for a Manual Dial
Editor Press the softkey 'Call Number' to give the

number of the desired called party. This can
be a phone number or a SIP URI and may con-
sist of up to 46 characters (2 lines of the
screen).
Press ‘ENT’ afterwards.
The radio tries to call the desired party and the

current call state is displayed in the central
area of the screen.

M3SR Series 4100 Selecting the Phone Number for a Speed Dial (Using the Phone Book)
5.5.2.2 Selecting the Phone Number for a Speed Dial (Using the Phone Book)
Activate Select with the knob the desired phone book

entry.
Press the softkey 'Call from Phonebook' to di-

rectly call the selected phone book entry.
The radio tries to call the desired party and the

current call state is displayed in the central
area of the screen.

M3SR Series 4100 Accept an Incoming Call
5.5.2.3 Accept an Incoming Call
Activate When an incoming call arrives, an acoustic

signal announces it and the message ‘incom-
ing’ is displayed in central area of the screen
(Call State)
The operator can accept the incoming call by

pressing the ‘Accept’ softkey.
An operator is able to accept an incoming

call only before the time defined by the Au-
tomatic Call Accept Delay parameter ex-
pires.
If the Automatic Call Accept Delay parameter

configured for the VoIP gateway radio via the
R&S RNMS3000 is enabled, after the time de-
fined by this parameter, the incoming call is
accepted automatically by the VoIP gateway
radio (see sect. 5.5 Voice over IP (VoIP):
Phone Service – Call Initiation)

M3SR Series 4100 Terminating an Active Call Session
5.5.2.4 Terminating an Active Call Session
Activate Press the ‘Disconnect’ softkey to terminate the

current call.

M3SR Series 4100 SIP – Useful Information for System Integration
5.5.3 SIP – Useful Information for System Integration
The VoIP service uses the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) for the establishment and termi-
nation of a call session. Therefore more information about the use of SIP and the call initia-
tion and termination procedures can be useful when setting up the system.
The session endpoints supporting SIP are called the SIP user agents. In case of the radio
network, the VoIP gateway radio operates as the SIP user agent. Since it is able to generate
session requests and also to respond session requests from another SIP user, the VoIP
gateway radio is able to operate both as User Agent Client (UAC) and as User Agent Server
(UAS).
SIP Proxy and SIP Registrar
The VoIP gateway radio supports a connection to a SIP Proxy and a SIP Registrar. These
SIP entities are useful for the routing of requests when an end-to-end connection is not fea-
sible. The proxy server is an intermediary entity that acts as both a server and a client for the
purpose of making requests on behalf of other clients. It ensures that a request is sent to an-
other entity closer to the destination. The SIP registrar is a server that accepts SIP register
requests and stores information about the sender into the location service for the domain it
handles. A SIP registrar for a domain is often co-located with the SIP proxy for that domain.
5.5.3.1 Session Signalling
There are two types of signalling in the proceeding of a session initiation and termination.
Between the VoIP gateway radio and the external VoIP user, SIP signalling is supported in
accordance with the SIP standard. For the signalling between the VoIP gateway radio and
all the radio units inside the radio network, a proprietary signalling is used.
For the examples below, it is considered to have the waveform SECOM-V being used inside
the radio network.
In case of ALE-3G, the proprietary signalling from the VoIP gateway radio to the end-
point radios is not supported in broadcast mode, since ALE-3G makes use of the stan-
dard xDL for IPoA services, which does not allow broadcast.

Figure 5.34 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (DIAL)
SIP Proxy Gateway Radio Endpoint Radios
DIAL
INVITE
100 Trying
180 Ringi TRYING
ng
RINGING
200 OK
CONNEC
ACK TED
both way Broadcast

RTP media
BYE
RELEASE
200 OK D
SIP Signalling Proprietary Signalling
ICN-4G-N-231054-R-D0894-00007-A-01-1
Figure 5.34: A radio dials an external SIP destination, the call session is successfully estab-
lished and, eventually, the external VoIP user terminates the call session.

Figure 5.35 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (ACCEPT, Gateway Radio)

INVITE
g INCOMIN
100 Tryin G
ng
180 Ringi Accept Delay
CONNEC
200 OK TED
ACK
both way Broadcast

RTP media
P
HANG U
BYE RELEASE
D
200 OK
ICN-4G-N-231054-R-D0894-00008-A-01-1
Figure 5.35: An external VoIP user calls the radio network; the VoIP gateway radio accepts
the incoming call (automatic call accept delay timer expires) and, eventually, the call session
is successfully established and, at last, a radio terminates the call session.

Figure 5.36 SIP and Proprietary Signalling (ACCEPT, Endpoint Radio)

INVITE
g INCOMIN
100 Tryin G
ng
180 Ringi
ACCEPT
200 OK CONNEC
TED
ACK
both way Broadcast

RTP media
P
HANG U
BYE RELEASE
D
200 OK
ICN-4G-N-231054-R-D0894-00009-A-01-1
Figure 5.36: An external VoIP user calls the radio network; a radio accepts the incoming call
(automatic call accept delay timer is interrupted), the call session is successfully established
and, eventually, a radio terminates the call session.
5.5.3.2 SIP Signalling
As a SIP user agent, the VoIP gateway radio supports the exchange of SIP messages with
another SIP user agent over the IP network. Since it can act as a UAC and a UAS, the VoIP
gateway radio can send request or return responses.
VoIP Gateway Radio Invites an External VoIP User to a SIP Session
In Figure 5.36 the transaction of a SIP session establishment, which has been started from
the VoIP gateway radio, is shown.
If the VoIP gateway radio wants to establish a SIP session with an external VoIP user, it acts
as a UAC and sends an “INVITE” request to the target VoIP user. Afterwards, the VoIP gate-
way radio waits for a SIP response “200 OK“ with session description. This is not necessarily
the destination VoIP user, it may be another SIP identity in the IP Network, e.g. a proxy serv-
er, which should send the “100 Trying” response as soon as it has received the “INVITE” re-
quest. This is a provisional response intended to avoid that the VoIP gateway radio resends
an “INVITE” before the first has been completely processed at the target VoIP user.

The VoIP gateway radio may receive a “100 Trying“ and a “180 Ringing” response, sent by
the next user agent. If the call is accepted, the VoIP gateway radio receives a “200 OK” re-
sponse and then sends an “ACK” message back to the next user agent. A two-way RTP ses-
sion has now been established between the VoIP gateway radio and the target VoIP user.
VoIP Gateway Radio Receives a Call from an External VoIP User
In Figure 5.35 and Figure 5.36 the transactions of a SIP session establishment addressed to
the VoIP gateway radio are shown. In Figure 5.35, the VoIP gateway radio answers the in-
coming call and in Figure 5.36 a radio answers the incoming call.
If the VoIP gateway radio receives an “INVITE” request over the IP network from an external
VoIP user, it acts as a UAS and may automatically respond to the request with a
“100 Trying” response. An automatic call accept delay parameter (auto-answer) is imple-
mented in the radios to define how long the radio should wait to answer an incoming call au-
tomatically. This parameter is useful for endpoint radios in a group. A value of "0" means that
there will be no call accept delay and the radio auto-answers immediately. A large value e.g.
"65535" basically avoids the auto-answer of a radio.
Since the VoIP gateway radio is considered to work unattended as gateway for a group, the
activation of the auto-answer is not recommended here. The gateway radio will behave as
follows if despite this consideration the parameter is set to zero or to a very short time:
The gateway radio accepts the call immediately and sends a “200 OK” response directly after
the “100 Trying” (and no “180 Ringing” needs to be sent).
If the automatic call accept delay is greater than zero, the VoIP gateway radio sends a
“180 Ringing” after the “100 Trying” and waits for the period of time defined by this parameter
for a radio to accept the incoming call. If a radio accepts the call before this time has expired,
the VoIP gateway radio sends a “200 OK”, interrupting the automatic call accept delay count-
down (see Figure 5.36). Otherwise, if no radio has accepted the call during this time, the
VoIP gateway radio is able to accept the call automatically by sending a “200 OK” (see
Figure 5.35).
5.5.3.3 Proprietary Signalling Inside the Radio Network
Session signalling between the VoIP gateway radio and the radios inside the radio network
is performed by proprietary signals. These signals are divided in two types: event signalling
and state signalling.
An event signal is sent from a radio in the radio network to the VoIP gateway radio. It signal-
izes an action performed by this radio regarding a call session, i.e., when a radio calls out of
the radio network (“Dialling”), answers an incoming call to the radio network (“Accept”) or ter-
minates an existing call session (“Hang Up”).
On the other hand, the state signals are sent from the VoIP gateway radio to all addressed
units in the radio network with the purpose of signalling the current state of the session es-
tablishment or termination. To signalize that there is an incoming call to the radio network,
the VoIP gateway radio sends an “INCOMING” message. The SIP provisional messages
“100 Trying” and “180 Ringing” have the corresponding proprietary state signalling “TRYING”

and “RINGING”. If a SIP session has been successfully established or terminated, the VoIP
gateway radio signalizes to the radio network with the proprietary messages “CONNECTED”
or “RELEASED”, respectively.
When receiving state signalling from the VoIP gateway radio, radio units in the radio network
locally generate acoustic signals and do not send acknowledgments back to the VoIP gate-
way radio to avoid collisions.
Radio Network Receives a Call
When the VoIP gateway radio receives an “INVITE” request, it sends an “INCOMING” mes-
sage to the radio network. If the automatic call accept delay is defined as zero or expires be-
fore an endpoint answers the incoming call, the VoIP gateway radio signalizes to the radio
network that it has accepted the call by sending a “CONNECTED” message to the affected
radios (see Figure 5.35).
If a radio answers the incoming call before the automatic call accept delay has expired, this
radio sends an “ACCEPT” event message to the VoIP gateway radio. Once the VoIP gate-
way radio has received the “ACCEPT” message, the VoIP gateway radio signalizes to the
radio network that the incoming call has been accepted by sending a “CONNECTED” mes-
sage (see Figure 5.36).
Call Initiated from Radio Network
When a radio wants to call out of the radio network to a VoIP user on the IP network side, it
sends a “DIAL” message to the VoIP gateway radio, giving information about the called party.
Once the VoIP gateway radio has received the “100 Trying” and “180 Ringing” responses
from the IP network side, it sends the respective proprietary signals “TRYING” and “RING-
ING” to the radio network.
When the VoIP gateway radio receives a “200 OK” response from the external VoIP user, it
broadcasts the proprietary signal “CONNECTED” to the radio network.
Terminating the Session
When a radio wants to terminate the call session, it sends a “HANG UP” request to the VoIP
gateway radio (see Figure 5.35). The external VoIP user can also terminate the call session
with the VoIP gateway radio by sending a “BYE” request (see ). In either case, the VoIP gate-
way radio has to signalize to the radio network that the session has ended by sending a
“RELEASED” message to all affected units inside the radio network.

M3SR Series 4100 Malfunction
6 Malfunction
6.1 Visual Inspection
If a connector shows any discoloration caused by heat, its mating connector is also
defective and must also be replaced.
Check the following:
1. Check the external wiring between the radio with or without the control unit and the ex-
ternal equipment.
2. Check if all connectors are plugged in firmly.
3. Check the power supply cable and the RF coaxial cables at the rear for mechanical dam-
age.
4. Check fuses at the rear and replace (see sect. 6.1.1 Fuses F1 / F2 - Change), if defec-
tive.
If necessary, replace cables by new ones one by one until the defective connection has been
found.
Obvious damage of minor importance can be corrected at once, assuming that the appropri-
ate equipment is available. In case of severe damage, the transceiver must be sent to the
nearest repair facility.

M3SR Series 4100 Fuses F1 / F2 - Change
6.1.1 Fuses F1 / F2 - Change

Figure 6.1 Replacing the Fuses F1 / F2
3
ICN-4D-E-231000-R-D0894-00059-A-01-1
1 Screw driver (size 2)

2 Fuse holder
3 Fuse (T2.5H, Rohde & Schwarz ident.-no.: 0020.7575.00)
1. Removing the fuses F1 / F2.
When replacing the fuse, always disconnect the radio from the AC power supply. Do
not touch any live parts when performing service and maintenance on the radio while
the radio is switched on (by qualified service personnel only).
a. Pull fuse holder (1, Figure 6.1) out by using a screw driver (2).
b. Replace both fuses (F1 and F2, 3).
2. Installing the fuses F1 / F2:
Push the fuse holder back in.

M3SR Series 4100 Troubleshooting
6.2 Troubleshooting
6.2.1 Radio Built-In Test
The radio is equipped with a built-In test equipment (BITE), performing various selftests of
different depths. There are three different kinds of built-in tests implemented in the radio:
• Power-on built-in test (PBIT)

• Continuous built-in test (CBIT)
• Initiated built-in test (IBIT)
The power-on built-in test (PBIT) starts immediately and automatically when the radio is pow-
ered up, a continuous built-in test continuously monitors essential parameters during opera-
tion, and the initiated built-in test is started by the operator. Each of these built-in tests
generates error messages for failure diagnosis and entries in the error log (see Figure 6.5).
In addition, the built-in test covers external devices such as power amplifiers.
The BIT results are made available to the operator in different ways:
• By indication on the display of a connected control unit (message box) immediately after
the error has been detected.
• By means of GO LED (1) on the radio front panel and GO LED (2) on a connected control
unit (see Figure 6.2), which are both switched off in case of a FAULT status of the radio.
• By means of an error list in the control unit menu 'Radio Error List' (see sect. 3.4 Radio
Maintenance and Figure 6.5). The error list holding the last 256 events (start-ups, warn-
ings and errors) with description and time of occurrence to be looked up in menu 'Radio
Error Details' (see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance).

Figure 6.2 GO LED on Radio Front Panel and GO LED on Control Panel Switched Off in Case of Error
(Example)
2 1
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00147-A-01-1
1 Radio Front Panel LED GO

For operation of the radio two failure classes are defined, associated with the following types
of messages:
Warnings
• Operation goes on even if warning messages are displayed.

• The radio should be checked as soon as possible by the operator whether
- ambient temperature is not too high
- antenna installation is correct
- system cabling is ok
- collocation conditions are ok
• Warning messages disappear automatically after 5 s.
• All warnings are logged in the failure archive.

Errors
Error messages occur in case of a hardware failure.
• The radio is no longer in proper working order.

• As soon as an error is detected, the GO LED (1) on the radio front panel and the GO LED
(2) on a connected control unit are switched off (see Figure 6.2). The LEDs remain
switched off until the fault is eliminated.
• Error messages will be logged in the failure archive.
• Error messages do not disappear automatically. Press 'ENT' to acknowledge the mes-
sage.
6.2.2 Power-On Built-In Test (PBIT)
After switching on the radio (see sect. 2.6 Switching the Radio On), the power-on built-In test
(PBIT) is started automatically. PBIT is performed in a few seconds during start-up. It allows
a short analysis of main functions like receive and transmit mode with acceptable test depth
and test time. This keeps the delay from power-on to the first possible user action on the ra-
dio reasonably short. The detection of installed modules and options as well as their versions
is considered a part of PBIT.
If during PBIT no error is detected, the GO LED on the radio front panel and the GO LED on
a connected control unit will light up.
If during PBIT an error is detected, the GO LED on the radio front panel and the GO LED on
a connected control unit will stay switched off. In this case the BIT Status displayed in menu
Radio MTC 1/7 (see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance) will also show 'Error' (see Figure 6.3).

Figure 6.3 Menu Radio MTC 1/7 Indicating an Error (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00047-A-01-1
If the GO LED on the radio front panel or the GO LED on a connected control unit does not
light up an ERROR has been detected. The radio is not operative and must be transferred
to a service depot.
To get more details about the detected error(s), check the status of the installed modules
(see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance and Figure 6.4) and the radio error list (see
sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance and Figure 6.5).

Figure 6.4 Menu Radio Inventory Indicating a Defective Module (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00019-A-01-1
Figure 6.5 Menu Radio Error List (Example)
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00020-A-01-1

Not all functions can be tested within the PBIT. If the user needs to know more details
about the status of the radio, the next step may be to initiate the IBIT (see ”Initiated
Built-in Test (IBIT)” on p. 6.9).
6.2.3 Continuous Built-In Test (CBIT)
The continuous built-in test (CBIT) is the least profound test, but it is running continuously in
the background. It is not influencing normal operation of the equipment and will not change
any settings of the radio while in progress. In practice, the CBIT is running with an update
rate of about one update per second.
If CBIT detects an error, a message box comes up on the control unit indicating an error
or a warning.
If an error is detected, the GO LED on the radio front panel and the GO LED on a connected
control unit will be switched off.
To get more details about the detected error or warning, check the radio error list (see
sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance and Figure 6.5).

6.2.4 Initiated Built-in Test (IBIT)
The Initiated Built-in Test (IBIT) is the most profound of the built-in tests, running without any
additional equipment like special loop cables etc. IBIT should be completed within five sec-
onds.
To start the IBIT navigate to menu Radio MTC 1/7 (see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance and
Figure 6.3) and press the softkey 'Start IBIT'.
A message box comes up indicating the start of the IBIT and after finishing another message
box comes up indicating the end of the IBIT.
If the IBIT detects an error, another message box comes up indicating the error. In this case
the BIT Status displayed in menu Radio MTC 1/7 (see sect. 3.4 Radio Maintenance) will also
show 'Error' (see Figure 6.3) and the GO LED on the radio front panel and the GO LED on a
connected control unit will be switched off.
To get more details about the detected error, check the radio error list (see sect. 3.4 Radio
Maintenance and Figure 6.5).
The IBIT can be started only from Preset Page 0. Once started, the IBIT cannot be in-
terrupted and during IBIT no other operation is possible.

M3SR Series 4100 Control Unit Built-In Test
6.2.5 Control Unit Built-In Test
There are three different kinds of built-in tests implemented in the radio:
• Power-on built-in test (PBIT)

• Continuous built-in test (CBIT)
• Initiated built-in test (IBIT)
The power-on built-in test (PBIT) starts immediately and automatically when the control unit
is powered up, a continuous built-in test continuously monitors essential parameters during
operation, and the initiated built-in test is started by the operator. Each of these built-in tests
generates error messages for failure diagnosis and entries in the error log.
Another test implemented in the control unit is the keyboard test which can be made by the
user to test proper operation of all the keys of the control unit and the knob.

M3SR Series 4100 Maintenance
7 Maintenance
Only qualified personal may carry out any maintenance work.

M3SR Series 4100 Scheduled Maintenance
7.1 Scheduled Maintenance

It is mandatory to readjust the oscillators (temperature-compensated crystal oscillators
and oven-controlled crystal oscillator, part of synthesizer) one year after the radio was
first put into operation. Only this can guarantee that the specification is met. How to do
this is described in the relevant Service Manual.
The backup battery (part of motherboard) needs to be replaced once every five years
after installation. How to do this is described in the relevant Service Manual. The date of
battery replacement must be noted on the label (1, Figure 7.1) provided for this purpose
(use e.g. waterproof pen).
Figure 7.1 Label, e.g. XK 4115: Date of Battery Installation
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00091-A-01-1
1 Label

M3SR Series 4100 Scheduled Maintenance
• The dust protection filter mats must be cleaned or replaced (Ident. no.: 6102.6092.00) in
certain intervals. The time interval depends on the environmental conditions in which the
radio is used. To remove the filter mat proceed as follows:
a. Undo the two screws (1, Figure 7.2) fixing the cover to the front panel.
Figure 7.2 Fixing the Cover to the Front Panel
1 2 3 1
ICN-4D-C-231000-R-D0894-00137-A-01-1
1 Screw
2 Protective Cap (not shown)
3 Protective Cap
b. Remove the protective caps 2, Figure 7.2 and 3.

c. Carefully remove the cover.
d. Remove the filter mat from the ventilating duct.
e. Clean the filter mat by using compressed air or water.
f. Re-insert the cleaned and dried filter mat into the ventilating duct.
g. Perform steps 1 and 3 in the reverse order.
• Otherwise the radio is free from scheduled maintenance.

M3SR Series 4100 Synthesizer Calibration
7.1.1 Synthesizer Calibration
To maintain the specification of the radio the oscillator (part of the module synthesizer) needs
to be calibrated. The time interval for calibration of the reference oscillator is once every five
years (together with battery exchange).
The procedure should be performed at room temperature to ensure correct calibration.
The calibration function of the radio allows to use every possible Rx frequency of the radio.
Rohde & Schwarz recommends to perform the calibration with a frequency of 5 MHz,
10 MHz or 20 MHz. The output power of the frequency standard must be in the range of -
5 dBm to 0 dBm.
7.1.1.1 Required Test Equipment
Item Test equipment, required data
1 Frequency standard
1.5 MHz to 29.999999 MHz
f 1 ppm / level = -5 dBm to 0 dBm
2 RF cable
7.1.1.2 Calibration Procedure
1. Switch on test equipment and wait for clock to stabilize.

2. Establish the test setup as follows:
Connect the frequency standard to the antenna connector X2111 (RX) or X2112 (RX/
TX).
The correct antenna must be chosen in the Radio Maintenance menu. To use X2111 the function RX ANT
must be ON, otherwise X2112 will be used.
3. Switch to a fixed-frequency preset page (e.g. preset page 0).

4. Set the Rx frequency to the output frequency of the frequency standard (for example
10 MHz).
5. Go to the Radio Maintenance menu by pressing Radio Maintenance in the Home menu
(see Figure 7.3).

Figure 7.3 Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration not Allowed
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00047-A-01-1
6. Activate Tx inhibit by pressing TX IHBT to enable the synthesizer calibration (see

Figure 7.4).

Figure 7.4 Radio Maintenance Menu, Calibration Possible
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00130-A-01-1
7. Start the calibration by pressing 'Start SYN CAL' in the Radio Maintenance menu.
During an ongoing calibration do not switch off the radio or disconnect the antenna. The process takes
1 to 2 minutes, indicated by message 'Calibration running' (see Figure 7.5).

Figure 7.5 Calibration Running
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00131-A-01-1
8. The calibration process finishes with the message 'Calibration successful' (see
Figure 7.7) or "Calibration failed" (see Figure 7.6).
After some seconds the message window will disappear.

Figure 7.6 Calibration Failed
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00132-A-01-1
9. When calibration has finished without errors, the test setup can be disconnected.

Figure 7.7 Calibration Successful
ICN-4D-G-231000-R-D0894-00133-A-01-1
10. After every calibration process the radio must be restarted to make sure the correct cal-
ibration values are used.

7.1.1.3 Possible Errors during Calibration
To get the specific error of a faulty calibration process it is necessary to enter the error list of
the radio.
The following 3 errors are related to the calibration process.
LOW RXREF LEVEL:
This error message indicates that the output power of the frequency standard is too low.
Please increase the output power of the frequency standard or use a frequency standard that
meets the required specification.
WRONG REF FREQ:
This error message indicates that it was not possible to perform a calibration with the fre-
quency form of the frequency standard. It should be checked if the output frequency of the
frequency standard is set as Rx frequency at the radio. Please retry the calibration; if the er-
ror appears again, the radio or the frequency standard is defective. Under this condition
please contact the service.
REFTUNE LIMIT:
This error message indicates that the limit of the tuning range was reached and it was not
possible to find valid calibration values. Provided that the output frequency of the frequency
standard is set as Rx frequency at the radio and the frequency standard meets the required
specification, the radio may be defective. In this case please contact the service.

M3SR Series 4100 Care, Cleaning
7.2 Care, Cleaning
7.2.1 Care
Such measures involve cleaning and touching up slight blemishes to the varnish of the sys-
tem. The materials indicated on the list of materials (see Table 7.1) are required:
Table 7.1 List of Materials
Item Description
1 Soft brush
2 Duster
3 Cleaning compounds, e.g. household detergent
4 Varnish front panel: RAL 7947
Telegray chassis: KB90 gray (RAL 7001)
7.2.2 Cleaning
Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes if you are working with compressed air.
Ensure that the compressed air is free of condensed water by first blowing the com-
pressed air towards the ground.
Keep a minimum distance of 20 cm between compressed air and the system.
Do for cleaning not use solvents (thinners etc.), petroleum ether or alcohol.
Such substances will irreversibly damage the varnish coat.
1. First clean the surface of the system with compressed air.

2. Continue cleaning with a soft brush or a duster.
3. Clean heavily contaminated surfaces, especially grease stains, with a soft, lint-free cloth
moistened with detergent.

M3SR Series 4100 Retouching the Paint Work
7.3 Retouching the Paint Work

Touch up the paint work of the unit as follows:
1. Remove any loose paint particles from the area of repair.

2. Clean the areas which have to be retouched with a soft, lint-free cloth and a cleaning de-
tergent.
3. Wait until the unit is dry again.
4. Retouch the unit carefully and afterwards ensure that the paint has dried completely.

M3SR Series 4100 Technical Information
8 Technical Information
8.1 Technical Data

For more information refer to sect. 9 Drawings: Data Sheet.

M3SR Series 4100 External Interfaces
8.2 External Interfaces

For more information refer to sect. 9 Drawings: Interface Description.

M3SR Series 4100 Remote Control
8.3 Remote Control

Detailed information is provided in the
• GB2 PP M3TR/SERIE 4100D (order no.: 6118.8725.80 SB) or

• GB2 PP SERIE 4100A (order no.: 6118.8748.80 SB),
available on demand from Rohde & Schwarz.

M3SR Series 4100 Remote Control

M3SR Series 4100 Drawings
9 Drawings

R&S M3SR Series 4100 Drawings
Figure 9.1 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S BV4190
10
2 4
1
11
7 8
ICN-4D-E-231000-R-D0894-00081-A-02-1

6120.5607.xx (xx: 10 = 1.0 m, 35 = 3.5 m, 50 = 50 m)
2 DC Cable (receiver / exciter X31 – power amplifier X24), R&S GK4104, 6120.5907.xx (05 =
0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)
R&S GK4105 6120.3604.03 (03 = 3 m)
R&S GK4106 6120.3656.03 (03 = 30 m)
R&S GK4107 6120.3704.03 (03 = 3 m)
R&S FK4190M / R&S FK2900M: R&S GK2903M 6117.9757.xx
R&S FK4150U: R&S GK2903 6117.9505.xx
(xx = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 = 80 m, 99 = 100 m)
9 Mains Connection
11 AC Cable (transformer X42 – power supply X31)
R&S GK4108 6120.3756.03 (03 = 3m)

Figure 9.2 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S FK4190M
10
2 4
1
11
ICN-4D-E-231000-R-D0894-00082-A-02-1

6120.5607.xx (xx: 10 = 1.0 m, 35 = 3.5 m, 50 = 50 m)
2 DC Cable (receiver / exciter X31 – power amplifier X24), R&S GK4104, 6120.5907.xx (05 =
0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)
R&S GK4105 6120.3604.03 (03 = 3 m)
R&S GK4106 6120.3656.03 (03 = 30 m)
R&S GK4107 6120.3704.03 (03 = 3 m)
7 R&S FK4190M Connection (Control)
R&S GK2903M 6117.9757.xx
(xx = 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 = 80 m, 99 = 100 m)
8 Antenna Connection
9 Mains Connection
11 R&S FK4190M Connection (RF), Type N

Figure 9.3 Cabling between R&S GX4100A/D, R&S VK4190; R&S IN4190 and R&S FK4190X
11
12
5
10
2 4
1
7
13 8
ICN-4D-E-231000-R-D0894-00098-A-02-1

6120.5607.xx (xx: 10 = 1.0 m, 35 = 3.5 m, 50 = 50 m)
2 DC Cable (receiver / exciter X31 – power amplifier X24), R&S GK4104, 6120.5907.xx
(05 = 0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)
R&S GK4105 6120.3604.03 (03 = 3 m)
R&S GK4106 6120.3656.03 (03 = 30 m)
R&S GK4107 6120.3704.03 (03 = 3 m)
7 Control Cable / Fiber Optic (HF post selection X23 - power amplifier X32), RS GK4101,
6120.5620.xx (10 = 1 m, 35 = 3.5 m, 50 = 50 m)
8 RF Cable (HF post selection X28 - power amplifier X25), R&S GK3013,
6123.3005.xx (02 = 6 m, 03 = 3 m, 05 = 5 m, 12 = 12 m, 20 = 20 m, 25 = 25 m, 50 = 50 m)
9 Mains Connection
11 DC supply adapter (power amplifier X24)
12 DC Cable (HF post selection X121 - DC supply adapter),
R&S GK4104, 6120.5907.xx (05 = 0.5 m, 10 = 1.0 m, 25 = 2.5 m)
13 Antenna Connection

Figure 9.4 Control and Display Elements
Softkeys: Display: Numerical keypad: LED on:

Selecting menu-dependent • Display of menus Input of BATT
functions • Display of menu-dependent softkey • Numerical values Battery operation
functions • Decimal point AC/DC
Key+/- AC/DCoperation
•Incrementing or decrementing selection
LED on: Tuning knob: INT EXT key: Keys:

ON • Tuning values Selecting internal/ ON OFF
Control unit is on • Selecting menus external loudspeaker Switching transceiver
CU (togglefunction) on or off (toggle function)
Control unit ok ERASE
G Press erase key for 1 s to
Squelch guard receiver active clear all settings except
Keys: GO Keys: Loudspeaker/headphone LED on: the default setting on
ON/OFF Radio ok ENT volume control: TX preset page 0 (fixed fre-
• ON: switching radio ON • Confirming entries Low volume Radio is transmitting quencyoperation)
• OFF: switching only control unit off • Initiating processes Control turned fully counter-clockwise GO
MENUHOME ESC CLR Full volume Radio ok
Switching to start menu HOME • Deleting entries Control turned fully clockwise RX
• Aborting processes Squelch receiver active
ICN-4D-E-231000-R-D0894-00096-A-02-1

Order Form for Series 4100 SW Option Keys
• 6175.1661.02
Interface Description
• R&S Series 4100 System Docu

6118.8519.01 SB
6118.8525.01 SB
Circuit Diagram
• R&S MR4100E Receiver (Basic)

6118.9609.01 S
• R&S MR4100G Receiver / Exciter (Basic)
6118.9750.01 S
• R&S MR4100X HF Transceiver (Basic)
6119.7251.01 S
• R&S MR4100G-B PMU (Basic)
6119.6255.01 S
Data Sheet
• PD 5213.9557.22
Menu Structure
System Cabling (PMU)


Operating Manual S4100 6175472502 01 00 Man 3 en

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Operating Manual S4100 6175472502 01 00 Man 3 en

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

R&S®M3SR Series 4100

Software Defined Radios

R&S® MR4100E — 6118.9609.xx — SW Rel. 09.0x (x = 0 to 9)

xx = see explanation of models

©05/2013 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich, Germany

Phone: +49 89 4129 0

Fax: +49 89 4129 12164

Trade names are trademarks of the owners.

The following abbreveations are used througout this manual:

R&S® xxxxx is abbreviated as R&S xxxxx

A1A Morse telegraphy

A2G automatic link establishment 2nd generation

A3E amplitude modulation

ACS automatic channel selection

AGC automatic gain control

AHS advanced hopset

AL-x protection level, x = 0 to 2

ALC automatic level control

ALE automatic link establishment

ALE 2G automatic link establishment 2nd generation

ALE 2G LP automatic link establishment 2nd generation with linking protection

ALE 3G automatic link establishment 3rd generation

AMBE advanced multi-band excitation

AMD automatic message display

AME single sideband, full carrier

ARQ automatic repeat request

ATU antenna tuning unit

B7D two independent sidebands for external modems

B8E two independent sidebands for voice

BER bit error rate

BFO beat frequency oscillator

Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01 i

BIT built-in test

BITE built-in test equipment

CBIT continuous built-in test

CCT call channel type

CHAP challenge handshake authentication protocol

chnPs channels per second

CCIR Comité Cosultatif International de Radiocommunication

CLARIF clarifier frequency

COMSEC communication security

ConMode connection mode

DDS direct digital synthesizer

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung

DLM data link mode

DSC digital selective calling

DSP digital signal processing/processor

DTE data terminal equipment

ECCM electronic counter counter measures

ii Operating Manual 6175.4760.02 – 01

EOM end of message

EPM electronic protection measures

ESSI enhanced serial synchronous interface

EXL LQA exchange

F1D frequency shift keying

F3E frequency modulation

FEC forward error correction

FED-STD Federal Standard

FHS free hopset search

FLM fast link mode

FLSU fast link setup

FSK frequency shift keying